terminal building automation system
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
SECTION 25 20 00 – TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Intent
A.
The intent of this Section is to define the requirements for a terminal Building Automation
System (BAS). BAS is the total integrated system of fully operational and functional
elements, including, but not limited to, equipment, software, programming, and associated
materials.
B.
LAWA has designated the BAS for its Central Utilities Plant (Johnson Controls Metasis
BACnet BAS with Wonderware Graphical User Interface) as the Facility Management
Control System (FMCS) for LAX.
C.
LAWA has designated an FMCS Systems Administrator (FMCS SA) to coordinate BACnet
tie-in with all Terminal BAS Contractors and to perform all final termination and
programming.
1.2 Summary
A.
All work of this Section shall be coordinated and provided by a single BAS Contractor who
shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider
for the work.
B.
The work of this Section shall be scheduled, coordinated and interfaced with the
associated work of other trades.
C.
If the BAS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, s/he shall promptly request, in writing, clarification and instruction from LAWA.
In all cases, where conflicts in bid documents exist, the more extensive and costly
alternative shall prevail with LAWA retaining the right to request a deduct change order to
provide the lower cost alternative. Regardless, a fully functional BAS system shall be
provided.
D.
The BAS Contractor is responsible for integration of the BAS and FMCS systems. The
BAS Contractor shall provide Point of Connection (POC) of the BAS and the FMCS. The
BAS Contractor shall provide minimum of 80 hours of labor for the BAS/FMCS integration.
E.
Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such
regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BAS Contractor where
filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to LAWA.
1.3 Quality Requirements
A.
General Requirements
1.
The BAS Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer-owned branch office that
is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and long term
maintenance and service of total integrated building automation systems, of a
recognized national manufacturer of building automation systems for no less than
15 years.
2.
The BAS Contractor shall have experience providing BAS services for a large
campus environment comparable to LAX and for clients / organizations with
similar complexity and diversity of facilities.
3.
The BAS Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 50-mile radius of the
LAX site.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-1
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
4.
As evidence and assurance of the BAS Contractor’s ability to support LAWA’s
system with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the BAS
business for at least the last fifteen (15) years and have successfully completed
total projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in each of the
preceding five years within a 100 mile radius of the LAX site.
5.
The BAS architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the production of building automation systems, and shall be the
manufacturer’s latest standard of design at the time of bid.
B. Safety Requirements
1.
Provide a safety program in compliance with Sections 00 73 19, 01 35 23, and 01
66 00 of the Design and Construction Handbook.
C. Quality Management Program
1.
Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BAS Project
Management. The designated Project Manager shall be empowered to make
technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the BAS Contractor. At
minimum, the Project Manager shall:
a)
Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials,
labor and other resources are available as needed.
b)
Manage the financial aspects of the BAS Contract.
c)
Coordinate as necessary with other trades.
d)
Be responsible for the work and actions of the BAS workforce on site.
D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
All work shall meet the requirements of local codes, ordinances, except where more strict
requirements are specified. Codes and Standards which govern BAS work are as follows:
1.
National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.
2.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.
3.
UL 916 Energy Management
4.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
5.
NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And Ventilating
Systems.
6.
Factory Mutual (FM).
7.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
8.
National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
9.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
10.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
11.
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
12.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
13.
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).
14.
Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
15.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
16.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-2
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
17.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency
Devices.
18.
Americans Disability Act (ADA)
19.
ASHRAE Standard 135 (BACnet)
20.
LAWA Design & Construction Handbook
1.4 Definitions
Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a
defined range of limiting values.
Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and
an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.
Control Sequence: A BAS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation,
target values and limits as required attaining the defined operational control objectives.
Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the BAS
software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled
variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and integral control algorithms together with
target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing
considerations and the like.
BAS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BAS digital
processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and associated
elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and
integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.
Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BAS network.
BAS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BAS
work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances
so as to provide a single coherent BAS as required by this Section.
Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean to furnish, install
in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the associated
required services ready for operation.
Furnish: The term “Furnish” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean supply at the
BAS Contractor’s cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BAS
Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BAS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and
document.
Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean provide the BAS
wiring and terminations.
Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean receive at the
jobsite and mount.
Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean a defined set
of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BAS network nodes.
Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Section shall mean all of
programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital
process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the
BAS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BAS configurations.
The use of words in the singular in this Section shall not be considered as limiting when other
indications in this Section denote that more than one such item is being referenced.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-3
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic
interpretation aids included in this Section are for general information only and are to assist in the
reading and interpretation of this Section.
The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Section:
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
AHU
Air Handling Unit
AI
Analog Input
AN
Application Node
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AO
Analog Output
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
AWG
American Wire Gauge
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube
CUP
Central Utility Plant
DAC
Digital to Analog Converter
DDC
Direct Digital Control
DI
Digital Input
DO
Digital Output
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
MPOE
Main Point of Entry
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
FAS
Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System
FMCS
Facility Management Control System (located at CUP)
FMCS SA
Facility Management Controls System Administrator
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HOA
Hand-Off-Auto
ID
Identification
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O
Input/output
IT
Information Technology
LAWA FMCS SA
LAWA FMCS System Administrator
LAN
Local Area Network
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MCC
Motor Control Center
NAE
Network Automation Engine (supervisory level device)
NC
Normally Closed
NO
Normally Open
OWS
Operator Workstation
OAT
Outdoor Air Temperature
PC
Personal Computer
RAM
Random Access Memory
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
Radio Frequency Interference
RH
Relative Humidity
ROM
Read Only Memory
RTD
Resistance Temperature Device
SPDT
Single Pole Double Throw
SPST
Single Pole Single Throw
XVGA
Extended Video Graphics Adapter
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-4
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
TBA
TCP/IP
-
TTD
UC
UPS
VAC
VAV
VDC
WAN
-
To Be Advised
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol
Thermistor Temperature Device
Unitary Controller
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Volts, Alternating Current
Variable Air Volume
Volts, Direct Current
Wide Area Network
1.5 BAS Description
A.
The BAS shall be a complete BACnet system designed for connection to dedicated BAS IT
network at LAX. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. BAS Contractor
shall be responsible for coordination with LAWA’s engineering staff and LAWA FMCS SA to
ensure that the BAS will perform in the LAX environment without disruption to any of the
other activities taking place on that LAN.
B.
All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any
special software from the BAS manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal.
C.
Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, servers shall be used
for the purpose of providing a location for extensive archiving of system configuration data,
and historical data such as trend data and operator transactions. All data stored will be
through the use of a standard data base platform: Microsoft SQL Server.
D.
The work of the single BAS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all
Sections of this Specification together with the associated Point Schedules and Drawings
and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.
E.
The BAS work shall include, but not be limited to, the provision of all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries,
interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation,
samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses,
transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance,
performance bonding, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties,
services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these
documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned BAS.
F.
Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. System shall be installed by
original equipment manufacturer (OEM) of the BAS products, by direct employees of the
OEM, who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment,
software, standards and configurations to be provided.
G.
Manage and coordinate the BAS work in a timely manner in accordance with LAWAapproved schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not
impede or delay the work of associated trades.
H.
The BAS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features,
functions and services:
1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions;
2. Enterprise-level information and control access back to the FMCS;
3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and
reporting functions;
4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BAS functions;
5. Offsite monitoring and management access;
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-5
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
6. Energy management; and
7. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems.
1.6
Work by Others
A. General Contractor is responsible for the demarcation of work and responsibilities between the
BAS Contractor and other related trades and for ensuring delivery of fully functional and
integrated BAS.
1.7 Submittals
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00 of the Design and
Construction Handbook.
B.
In addition, provide the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
1.8
FMCS Integration Coordination Plan (detailing the timing in the project schedule above
that the LAWA FMCS SA will be able to integrate the BAS into the FMCS and the
employee of the BAS that will be made available to coordinate this critical integration).
BAS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.
Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.
Points schedule for each point in the BAS, including: Point Type, Object Name,
Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.
Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus.
Detailed bill of materials list for each system or application, identifying quantities, part
numbers, descriptions, and optional features.
Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this
section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail
Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve
CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.
Room Schedule including a separate line for each VAV box and/or terminal unit indicating
location and address
Details of all BAS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.
Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and
description for all products including software.
Sample thermostat (temperature sensor).
Record Documentation
A.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 of the
Design and Construction Handbook.
B.
In addition, provide the following:
1)
2)
3)
C.
Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.
BAS network diagrams, including integration to the FMCS.
Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all
necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized
table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets.
Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-6
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
D.
1.9
After completion of all tests and adjustments the BAS Contractor shall provide a copy of
all as-built information and product data to be installed on a LAWA-designated computer
workstation or server.
Warranties
A.
Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00 of the Design and Construction
Handbook.
B.
In addition, provide the following:
1. Provide a five-year labor and material warranty on the BAS.
2. If within sixty (60) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice
from LAWA, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall
be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BAS Contractor at the cost of the
BAS Contractor.
3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 50 miles of LAX such that replacement of
key parts and labor support, including programming.
4. Warranty work shall be done during hours designated by LAWA.
PART 2 – GENERAL
2.
Part 2 – Products
2.1 General Description
A.
The BAS shall use BACnet open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment.
To accomplish this effectively, the BAS shall support open communication protocol
standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications.
B.
The BAS shall consist of the following:
1. Field Controller(s)
2. Terminal Controllers
3. Input/Output Module(s)
4. Portable Operator's Terminal(s)
5. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment
6. Other components required for a complete and working BAS
C.
The BAS shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices,
while re-using existing controls equipment as approved in writing by LAWA.
D.
System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm
reporting and control execution.
E.
1.
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the
execution of control strategies at other operational devices.
2.
The BAS shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Johnson Controls
2. Siemens
3. Honeywell
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-7
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
2.2
BAS Architecture
A.
Primary BAS Network
1. The primary BAS network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet
TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products
available through normal PC vendor channels.
2. The BAS shall network multiple User Interface clients, automation engines, system
controllers and application-specific controllers. Provide application and data server(s)
as required for systems operation.
3. The primary BAS network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks.
Where indicated, the primary BAS network shall be connected to the enterprise
network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and
practices.
B. Secondary BAS Network
1. Secondary BAS networks shall provide either “Peer-to-Peer,” or Primary-Secondary
communications, and shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 9600 baud.
2. DDC Controllers shall reside on the either primary or on the secondary BAS network.
All controllers shall be tied into the system so that they can be accessed via the LAN
network.
3. Secondary BAS network communication protocol shall be BACnet Standard MS/TP
Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135.
4. The main equipment controllers shall reside only on the primary BAS network.
C. Integration
1. Hardwired
a) Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another via
hardwired connections.
b) There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to be
integrated between the systems.
2. BACnet Protocol Integration - BACnet
a) The neutral protocol used between systems will be BACnet over Ethernet and comply
with the ASHRAE BACnet standard 135A complete Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be provided for all BACnet system devices.
b) The ability to command, share point object data, changes of state (COS) data and
schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.
2.3 User Interface
A.
Dedicated User Interface.
1. Where indicated on plans the BAS Contractor shall provide and install a personal
computer for command entry, information management, network alarm management,
and database management functions. All real-time control functions, including
scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the BAS to facilitate
greater fault tolerance and reliability.
2. Dedicated User Interface Architecture – The architecture of the computer shall be
implemented to conform to industry standards, so that it can accommodate
applications provided by the BAS Contractor and by other third party applications
suppliers, including but not limited to Microsoft Office Applications. Specifically it must
be implemented to conform to the following interface standards:
a) Microsoft Office Professional for creation, modification and maintenance of
reports, sequences other necessary building management functions
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-8
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
b)
c)
Microsoft Outlook or other e-mail program for supplemental alarm functionality
and communication of system events, and reports
Required network operating system for exchange of data and network functions
such as printing of reports, trends and specific system summaries
3. PC Hardware – One (1) desktop and two (2) latest laptop personal computers by major
computer manufacturer (Hewlett Packard, Dell Corporation and Toshiba) shall be
configured as follows:
a) Memory – 4 GB Minimum,
b) CPU– 2.8 GHz Clock Speed minimum
c) Hard Drive – 500GB free hard drive space minimum
d) Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW or network backup software
provided by IT department
e) CD ROM Drive
f)
Modem: Auto-dial telephone, 56,000 baud.
g) Ports – (1) Serial, (2) USB ports
h) Keyboard – Desktop PC 101 Keyboard and 3 Button Mouse
i)
Monitor configuration
I. Each Display – 22” Flat Panel Monitor
II. 32 bit or higher color resolution
III. Display card with multiple monitor support
j)
LAN communications – Ethernet communications board
k) Built-in wireless 802.11 b/g/n LAN
l)
Mouse: two-button optical type wireless.
4. Operating System Software
a) Windows 7 (32 bit)
b) Provide complete operator workstation software package, including any
hardware or software keys. Include the original installation disks and licenses for
all included software, device drivers, and peripherals.
c) Provide software registration cards to LAWA for all included software
d) The software shall run on the Microsoft Internet Explorer (7.0 or higher) browser
supporting the following functions:
I. Configuration
II. Commissioning
III. Data Archiving
IV. Monitoring
V. Commanding
VI. System Diagnostics
5. Peripheral Hardware
a) Reports printer:
I. Printer Make – Hewlett Packard DeskJet or equal
II. Print Speed – Black 32 ppm, Color 20 ppm
III. Print Resolution – Black 600 dpi, Color 300 dpi
IV. Buffer – 64 K Input Print Buffer
V. Color Printing – Include Color Kit
B.
Distributed Web Based User Interface
All features and functions of the dedicated User Interface previously defined in this Section
shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or virtual private
network (WAN/VPN) to the primary BAS network and conforming to the following Minimum
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-9
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
hardware requirements and compliance with LAWA IMTG Standards, Policies and
Procedures:
a)
4GB RAM
b)
2.8 GHz Clock Speed Pentium 4 Microprocessor
c)
100 GB Hard Drive.
d)
1024x768 minimum resolution display with 64K colors and 32 bit color
C.
Site Management User Interface Application Components
1. Operator Interface
a) All Inputs, Outputs, Set points, and all other parameters as defined within
Part 3 of this Section, or shown on the design drawings, or required as part
of the system software, shall be displayed for operator viewing and
modification from the operator interface software.
b) The User Interface software shall provide help menus and instructions for
each operation and/or application.
c) The system shall support customization of the UI configuration and a home
page display for each operator.
d) The system shall support user preferences in the following screen
presentations:
I.
Alarm
II.
Trend
III.
Display
IV.
Applications
e) All controller software operating parameters shall be displayed for the
operator to view/modify from the User Interface. These include: set points,
alarm limits, time delays, PID tuning constants, run-times, point statistics,
schedules, and so forth.
f) The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
I. User access for selective information retrieval and control command
execution
II. Monitoring and reporting
III. Alarm, non-normal, and return to normal condition annunciation
IV. Selective operator override and other control actions
V. Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting
VI. BAS internal performance supervision and diagnostics
VII. On-line access to user Help menus
VIII. On-line access to current BAS as-built records and documentation
IX. Means for the controlled re-programming, re-configuration of BAS
operation and for the manipulation of BAS database information in
compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for
individual BAS applications
g) The system shall support a list of application programs configured by the
users that are called up by the following means:
I. The Tools Menu
II. Hyperlinks within the graphics displays
III. Key sequences
h) The operation of the control system shall be independent of the User
Interface, which shall be used for operator communications only. Systems
that rely on an operator workstation to provide supervisory control over
controller execution of the sequences of operations or system
communications shall not be acceptable.
2. Alarms
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-10
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a)
b)
c)
d)
Alarms shall be routed directly from controllers to PCs and servers. It shall be
possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and
servers. The alarm management portion of the User Interface shall, at the
minimum, provide the following functions:
I.
Log date and time of alarm occurrence.
II.
Generate a “Pop-Up” window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an
alarm has been received.
III.
Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge,
temporarily silence, or discard an alarm.
IV.
Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user
acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall
include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and
a time/date stamp.
V.
Provide select alarms to an e-mail address or alphanumeric pager. This
must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above.
Systems that use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of
annunciating alarms are not acceptable.
The BAS shall annunciate diagnostic alarms indicating system failures and nonnormal operating conditions.
The BAS shall allow a minimum of 4 categories of alarm sounds customizable
through user defined wav.files.
The BAS shall annunciate application alarms at minimum, as required by Part 3
of this Section.
3. Reports and Summaries
a)
Reports and Summaries shall be generated and directed to the User Interface
displays, with subsequent assignment to printers, or disk. As a minimum, the
system shall provide the following reports:
I.
All points in the BAS
II.
All points in each BAS application
III.
All points in a specific controller
IV.
All points in a user-defined group of points
V.
All points currently in alarm
VI.
All points locked out
VII.
All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the
like.
b)
Summaries and Reports shall be accessible via standard UI functions and not
dependent upon custom programming or user defined HTML pages.
c)
Selection of a single menu item, tool bar item, or tool bar button shall print any
displayed report or summary on the system printer for use as a building
management and diagnostics tool.
d)
Provide a focused set of reports that includes essential information required for
effective management of energy resources within the facility. Energy reports shall
be configurable from a LAWA-selected and approved predefined, preconfigured
templates. Requirements include, but shall not be limited to:
I.
Energy Overview
II.
Load Profile
III.
Simple Energy Cost
IV.
Consumption
V.
Equipment Runtime
VI.
Electrical Energy
VII.
Energy Production
VIII.
Reports shall be selectable by date, time, area and device. Each report
shall include a color visual summary of essential energy information.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-11
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
4. Schedules
a) A graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of building
operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be
provided:
I.
Weekly schedules
II.
Exception Schedules
III.
Monthly calendars
b) Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific
time use schedule.
c) It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule
including references to calendars.
d) Monthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays
and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and special
days shall be user-selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall
automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the
exception schedules.
e) Schedules and Calendars shall comply with ASHRAE SP135/ BACnet Standard.
f) Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall print any displayed
schedule on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics
tool.
g) The Controllers shall have capability to configure and implement optimal start and
stop programming based on existing indoor and outdoor environmental conditions
as well as equipment operating history
5. Password
a) Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the
user/manager to User Interface control, display, and database manipulation
capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.
b) Each user shall have the following: a user name (accept 24 characters minimum),
a password (accept 12 characters minimum), and access levels.
c) The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will.
d) When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual
characters for display on the monitor.
e) A minimum of six levels of access shall be supported individually or in any
combination as follows:
I.
Level 1 = View Data
II.
Level 2 = Command
III.
Level 3 = Operator Overrides
IV.
Level 4 = Database Modification
V.
Level 5 = Database Configuration
VI.
Level 6 = All privileges, including Password Add/Modify
f)
A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported.
g) Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their
respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those
items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.
h) Operators shall be further limited to only access, command, and modify those
buildings, systems, and subsystems for which they have responsibility.
i)
The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system
activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or
configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of
point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the
alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms.
6. Screen Manager
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-12
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a)
The User Interface shall be provided with screen management capabilities that
allow the user to activate, close, and simultaneously manipulate a minimum of 4
active display windows plus a network or user defined navigation tree.
7. Dynamic Color Graphics
a) The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User
Interface. Browser or Workstation applications that rely only upon HTML pages shall
not be acceptable.
b) The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime function.
The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics documents
(graphic definition files) to be generated and executed.
c) The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time data
that is acquired, derived, or entered.
d) Graphics runtime functions – A maximum of 16 graphic applications shall be able to
execute at any one time on a User Interface or workstation with 4 visible to the user.
Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions:
I. All graphics shall be fully scalable
II. The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio.
III. Multiple fonts shall be supported.
IV. Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis.
V. The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate the status of the
object attribute.
VI. Graphics that represent buildings or systems shall allow natural links and
transitions between related detailed tabular views of data that complement the
graphic.
e) Operation from graphics – It shall be possible to change values (set points) and
states in system controlled equipment directly from the graphic.
f) Floor Plan graphics – The User Interface shall provide graphic applications that
summarize conditions on a floor. Floor plan graphics shall indicate thermal comfort
using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature deviations from zone set
point(s). Floor plan graphics shall display overall metrics for each zone in the floor.
8. Historical trending and data collection
a) Each Controller shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital
inputs and outputs, as follows:
I.Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Two methods of
collection shall be allowed:
i.
Defined time interval
ii.
Upon a change of value
II.Each Controller shall have the capability to store multiple samples for each physical
point and software variable based upon available memory, including an individual
sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with
different collection parameters.
b) Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the engine and uploaded to a
dedicated trend database or exported in a selectable data format via a provided data
export utility. Uploads to a dedicated database shall occur based upon one of the
following: user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers are full.
Exports shall be as requested by the user or on a time scheduled basis.
c) The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the collection of
historical data. Data can be stored in SQL database format.
9. Trend data viewing and analysis
a) Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-13
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
b) It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and
reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name.
c) The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to
include multiple trends
d) Displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display
characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style.
e) Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time
without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. The Display shall support
the user’s ability to change colors, sample sizes, and types of markers.
10. Database Management
a) Where a separate SQL database is utilized for information storage the System shall
provide a Database Manager that separates the database monitoring and managing
functions by supporting two separate windows.
b) Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication
including the ability to access data for use outside of the Building Automation
application.
c) The database managing function shall include summarized information on trend,
alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:
I. Backup
II. Purge
III. Restore
d) The Database management function shall support four tabs:
I. Statistics – shall display Database Server information and Trend, Alarm (Event),
and Audit information on the BAS Databases.
II. Maintenance – shall provide an easy method of purging records from the BAS
Server trend, alarm (event), and audit databases by supporting separate screens
for creating a backup prior to purging, selecting the database, and allowing for
the retention of a selected number of day’s data.
III. Backup – Shall provide the means to create a database backup file and select a
storage location.
IV. Restore – shall provide a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring
the user to log into an Expert Mode in order to view the Restore screen.
e) The database monitoring functions shall be accessed through Microsoft Windows
and shall continuously read database information once the user has logged in.
f) The System shall provide user notification via taskbar icons and e-mail messages
when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.
g) The Monitoring Settings window shall have the following sections:
I. General – Shall allow the user to set and review scan intervals and start times.
II. Email – Shall allow the user to create and review e-mail and phone text
messages to be delivered when a Warning or Alarm is generated.
III. Warning – shall allow the user to define the Warning limit parameters, set the
Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message
IV. Alarm – shall allow the user to define the Alarm limit parameters, set the
Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message.
V. Database login – Shall protect the system from unauthorized database
manipulation by creating a Read Access and a Write Access for each of the
Trend, Alarm (Event) and Audit databases as well as an Expert Mode required to
restore a database.
h) The System shall provide user notification via Taskbar icons and e-mail messages
when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.
11. Demand Limiting and Load Rolling
a) The BAS shall:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-14
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
i. Provide a Demand Limiting and Load Rolling program for the purpose of limiting
peak energy usage and reducing overall energy consumption.
ii. Support both Sliding Window and Fixed Window methods of predicting demand.
iii. Support three levels of sensitivity in the Sliding Window demand calculations for
fine tuning the system.
1. Low Setting – Sheds loads later and over the shortest amount of time.
Maximizes the time the equipment is on.
2. Medium Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than
the Low Setting. Increases the time the equipment is on and decreases
the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target over the Low Setting.
3. High Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the
Medium Setting to minimize the probability of exceeding the Tariff
Target.
iv. Have both a Shed Mode and a Monitor Only Mode of operation.
1. When the Shed Mode is engaged, the BAS shall actively control the
Demand.
2. When the Monitor Mode is engaged, the BAS will simulate the shedding
action but will not take any action.
v. Support a Maximum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The
BAS shall restore the load before the Maximum Shed time has expired.
vi. Support a Minimum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The
BAS shall not restore the load sooner than the Minimum Shed Time has expired.
vii. Support a Minimum Release Time for each load as determined by the user. The
BAS shall not shed the load until it has been off for the Minimum Release time.
viii. Support three user defined options if the meter goes unreliable.
1. Shedding – The currently shed loads will be released as their Maximum
shed times expire.
2. Maintain the Current Shed Rate – The BAS will use the Demand Limiting
shed rate that was present when the meter went unreliable.
3. Use Unreliable Meter Shed Rate – the BAS will control to a user defined
Unreliable Shed Rate target.
b) The Demand Limiting program shall:
i. Monitor the energy consumption rate and compare it to a user defined Tariff
Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively
shedding loads based upon a user defined strategy.
ii. Be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load
shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.
iii. Be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the
maximum allowed average power during the current interval.
c) The Load Rolling program shall:
i. Sum the loads currently shed and compare it to a user defined Load Rolling
Target. The BAS shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively
shedding loads based upon a user defined Load Priority.
ii. Be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load
shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.
iii. Be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the
amount of power by which the demand must be reduced.
d) Provide the user with a Load Tab that displays all of the Demand Limiting and Load
Rolling parameters for any selected load.
e) Provide the user with a Load Summary that displays all of the loads associated with
the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling programs. Status Icons for each load shall
indicate:
i. Load is Offline
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-15
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
ii. Load is Disabled
iii. Load is Shed
iv. Load is Locked
v. Load is in Comfort Override
f) The Load Summary shall include a Load Summary Runtime view listing the following
load conditions:
i. Load Priority
ii. Shed Strategy
iii. Load Rating
iv. Present Value
v. Ineligibility Status
vi. Active Timer
vii. Time Remaining
viii. Last Shed Time
12. Other Utilities Software
a) The BAS shall be capable of supporting any other LAWA-approved utilities software,
including, but not limited to Energy Star and Maximo.
2.4
DDC System Controllers
A.
1.
Unitary Controller (UC)
General
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
The facility BAS shall include BTL-listed, microprocessor-based, direct digital
control UCs.
UCs shall provide control of HVAC and other integrated controllable functions.
Each controller shall have its own control programs and shall continue to operate
in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated DDCP.
UCs shall be provided for variable air volume (VAV) boxes and fan coil units as
required to satisfy the sequences of operation.
VAV box UCs shall be provided with 120/24 Volt transformers (or as
required/coordinated with mechanical specifications for operation) to the VAV
box manufacturers for factory mounting.
UCs shall be programmable from either the FMCS workstations or by the
Portable Terminal Unit connected locally. The necessary hardware and software
required for communication with the UC, from either the FMCS (Servers) or via a
Portable Operator Terminal Unit, shall be provided including licensing
requirements.
The BACnet Protocol Implementation Statement shall be submitted for each type
of the UC.
Components
a.
b.
c.
Memory: Control programs shall be stored in battery backed-up RAM and
EPROM. Each system controller shall have a minimum of 64 MB of user RAM
memory and 64 MB of EPROM.
Communication Ports: UCs shall provide a communication port to the field bus.
In addition, a port shall be provided for connection of a portable service tool to
support local commissioning and parameter changes with or without the DDCP
online. It shall be possible from a service port on any UC to view, enable
/disable, and modify values of any point or program on any controller on the local
field bus, any DDCP or any UC on a different field bus.
I/O: Each UC shall support the addition of the following types of inputs and
outputs:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-16
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
I. Digital inputs for status and alarm contacts;
II. Counter inputs for summing pulses from meters;
III. Thermistor inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts, and
thermo wells;
IV. Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements;
V. Digital outputs for on and off equipment control; and
VI. Analog outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity
control of primary equipment.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
B.
Expandability: Input and output capacity shall be expandable through the use of
plug-in modules. A minimum of two modules shall be added to the base UC
before additional power is required.
Networking: Each UC shall be able to exchange information on a peer-to-peer
basis with other Stand-alone Digital Control Units during each field bus scan.
Each UC shall be capable of storing and referencing global variables (on the
LAN) with or without any FMCS workstations online. Each UC shall be able to
have its program viewed and/or enabled/disabled either locally through a BAS
Portable Operator’s Terminal or through a FMCS workstation.
Indicator Lamps: UCs shall have an optional, LED indication of CPU status, and
field bus status.
Real-Time Clock. A UC shall have a real-time clock in either hardware or
software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The real-time clock
shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of
week. Each UC shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the
DDCP that synchronizes all UC real-time clocks.
Automatic Restart after Power Failure: Upon restoration of power, the UC shall
automatically and without human intervention, update all monitored functions;
resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status; and
implement special startup strategies as required.
Battery Back-Up: Each UC shall have at least three (3) years of battery backup
to maintain all volatile memory. System shall be interfaced with the building UPS
System.
Alarm Management.
I. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high and low
limits or conditional expressions. All alarms shall be tested each scan of
the UC and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or
reports.
II. Up to eight (8) alarms can be configured for each point in the controller,
enabling the escalation of the alarm priority (urgency) based upon which
alarm(s) is/are triggered.
III. Alarms shall be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255
priority levels shall be provided.
IV. If communication with the DDCP is temporarily interrupted, the alarm
shall be buffered in the UC. When communications return, the alarm
shall be transmitted to the DDCP if the point is still in the alarm condition.
System Software
1. General
a.
All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
b. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the
DDC controller and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
2. Control Software Description:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-17
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a.
Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC controllers shall have the ability to perform the
following pre-tested control algorithms:
I. Two Position Control
II. Proportional Control
III. Proportional plus Integral Control
IV. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
V. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
b.
3.
4.
5.
Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the
number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
c. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand
situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between
successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
d. Power fail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall
analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation. (i.e. Restart of equipment following the return to normal condition after equipment shutdown by
the Fire Alarm System).
e. Sequential Start: Provide sequential start for all equipment. After a power failure, and after
restoration of normal power, equipment shall start per a predetermined sequence as
programmed via the BAS.
Energy Management Applications: DDC controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines:
a.
Time-of-Day Scheduling
b.
Calendar Based Scheduling
c.
Holiday Scheduling
d.
Temporary Schedule Overrides
e.
Optimal Start/Optimal Stop
f.
Night Setback Control
g.
Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer)
h.
Peak Demand Limiting
i.
Energy Usage & Demand
j.
Fan Speed/CFM Control
k.
Heating/Cooling Interlock
l.
Supply Air Reset
m.
Chilled Water Reset
n.
Condenser Water Reset
o.
Hot Water Reset
p.
Chiller Sequencing
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall
be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to building
equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.
Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC controllers shall be able to execute custom, jobspecific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special
control routines.
a.
Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process:
I.
Any system-measured point data or status
II.
Any calculated data
III.
Any results from other processes
IV.
User-Defined Constants
V.
Arithmetic functions (+,-,*, /, square root, exponential, etc.)
VI.
Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-18
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
VII.
On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
b.
6.
Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
I.
Time interval
II.
Time of day
III.
Date
IV.
Other processes
V.
Time programming
VI.
Events (e.g., point alarms)
VII.
Restart of equipment following the return to normal condition after equipment
shutdown by the Fire Alarm System (FAS)
Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data
from any and all other DDC controllers on the local area network. In addition, a single process
shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area
network.
7.
Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and
advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up
connection to a remote device such as a printer.
8.
Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be selfdocumenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical
flowcharts and English language descriptors.
9.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC controller shall perform distributed
independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical
alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC's
ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O
device, or communications with other panels on the network. Each analog input shall have
associated alarm and pre-alarm (warning) levels that are software adjustable. Provide a
minimum of one high alarm, one high warning alarm, one low alarm and one low warning alarm
level per analog input.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point's English language description and the time and date of occurrence.
Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each
DDC shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown
and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each
point as well as be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a
later date.
Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list
of operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall
also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to
be off-line.
Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user
shall be able to print, display or store a minimum 65-character alarm message to more
fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Each standalone DDC
shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages which are assignable
to any number of points in the panel.
Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a
call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-19
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
10.
time-stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or
until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
f.
Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically
logged to disk in Personal Computer industry standard database format. Operator
commands initiated from Direct-connected workstations, dial-up workstations, and local
DDC panel Network Terminal devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data
shall be available at the Operator Interface Workstation (OIW). Facility shall be provided
to allow the user to search the transaction file using standard database query techniques,
including searching by dates, operator name, data point name, etc. In addition, this
transaction file shall be accessible with standard third party database and spreadsheet
packages.
Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways:
a.
11.
Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC’s shall store Point History Files for all
analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and
automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all
points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze
equipment performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History
Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous
record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.
b.
Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC’s shall also provide high resolution
sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
c.
Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall
also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operatorspecified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute
to 2 hours shall be provided. Each standalone DDC shall have a dedicated buffer for
trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
d.
Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC’s, and
uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon
either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All
trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party personal
computer applications.
Runtime Tantalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
a.
b.
12.
The Tantalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Tantalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
Analog/Pulse Tantalization: Standalone DDC’s shall automatically sample, calculate and store
consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary pulse
input-type points.
a.
13.
Tantalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9
units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
b.
The Tantalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
c.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event Totalization shall be
performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
a.
The Event Tantalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-20
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
b.
C.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
VAV TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER (VAV - UC)
1. General: Ship VAV UC Controllers to terminal box manufacturer’s factory for controller mounting prior
to shipping to site. Coordinate with Box manufacturer.
2. The VAV UC shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressureindependent, variable air volume terminal units.
3. The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of stroking 90 degrees
in 30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed commissioning and troubleshooting tasks.
4. The VAV UC shall be a configurable digital controller with an integral differential pressure transducer.
It shall be compatible with 3 wire (incremental) and proportional damper actuators.
5. The VAV UC shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral deadended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance-free and shall not
require air filters.
6. Each VAV UC shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate pressure
transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects.
7. The VAV UC shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space temperature
control loops.
8. Each VAV UC shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve control and
controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning reduces
commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-tuning loops to
compensate for seasonal or other load changes.
9. The VAV UC shall provide the ability to download and upload UC configuration files, both locally and
via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded individually or as a group
using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller parameters.
10. UC control set point changes initiated over the network shall be written to UC non-volatile memory to
prevent loss of set point changes and to provide consistent operation in the event of communication
failure.
11. The VAV UC firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus to minimize
costs of feature enhancements.
12. The VAV UC shall provide fail-soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by automatically
reverting to a pressure-dependent control mode.
13. The VAV UC shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic recalculation of box flow pickup
gain (“K” factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to the box minimum and
maximum airflow set points.
14. The VAV UC shall be capable of direct electronic connection to a balancing hood. Connection shall
be through a port located on the room sensor, or directly at the controller. As an alternative, software
balancing tools shall be provided that will run in a hand-held Palm Pilot type PC (such as the 3COM
Palm Pilot or IBM Workpad). The balancing tools shall allow adjustment of airflow set points and
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-21
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
parameters, and provide permanent upload of the values entered to the UC. The Palm Pilot shall
connect to the terminal unit through the room sensor port.
15. The VAV UC performance shall be self-documenting via on-board diagnostics. These diagnostics
shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each control loop’s sample
interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and document system performance. The UC
shall calculate exponentially weighted moving averages (EWMA) for each of the following. These
metrics shall be available to the end user for efficient management of the VAV terminals.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Absolute temperature loop error.
Signed temperature loop error.
Absolute airflow loop error.
Signed airflow loop error.
Average damper actuator duty cycle.
16. The VAV UC shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones. The error
conditions shall consist of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Unreliable space temperature sensor.
Unreliable differential pressure sensor.
Starved box.
Insufficient cooling.
Insufficient heating.
17. The VAV UC shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air quality),
and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow based on the percent of outdoor air in the
primary air stream.
18. The VAV UC shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing
simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow while in
reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the airflow in the heating
sequence.
19. The VAV UC shall be compatible with the U.S. EPA Energy Star Buildings recommendations for fan
energy reduction via demand-based static pressure reset down to 2/3 of duct static pressure set
point, “VSD 2/3 Reset.”
20. Inputs:
a. Analog inputs shall monitor the following analog signals, without the addition of equipment
outside the terminal controller cabinet:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
0-10 VDC Sensors
4-20 mA Sensors
1000ohm RTDs
NTC Thermistors
b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate false
signals resulting from input “bouncing.”
c. For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and
output circuits.
21. Outputs
a. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-22
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
i. 0-10 VDC
ii. 4-20 mA
b. Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC.
c. For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and
other output circuits.
2.5
A.
Field Devices
Input/Output Module (IOM)
1.
The Input/Output Module (IOM) provides additional inputs and outputs for use in the UC.
2.
The IOM shall communicate with the UC over the Bus.
3.
The IOM shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135,
Clause 9 on the controller network.
The IOM shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
The IOM shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (BASC).
A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the
UCorFC .
The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
The IOM shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to
UL94-5VB.
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.
5.
The IOM shall have a minimum of 4 points to a maximum of 17 points.
6.
The IOM shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:
a) Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:
I.
Analog Input, Voltage Mode
II.
Analog Input, Current Mode
III.
Analog Input, Resistive Mode
IV.
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode
V.
Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
b) Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:
I.
Dry Contact Maintained Mode
II.
Pulse Counter Mode
c) Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following
I.
Analog Output, Voltage Mode
II.
Analog Output, current Mode
d) Binary Outputs - shall output the following:
I.
24 VAC Triac
e) Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:
I.
Analog Output, Voltage Mode
II.
Binary Output Mode
7.
The IOM shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:
a) Power On
b) Power Off
c) Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation
d) No Faults
e) Device Fault
f) Normal Data Transmission
g) No Data Transmission
h) No Communication
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-23
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
B.
Terminal Controller (TC)
1.
The TC shall be capable of controlling two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters or
other similar equipment, pressure dependent Variable Air Volume System or other similar
zoning type systems employing reheat including local hydraulic reheat valves, two pipe fan
coil, cabinet unit heater or other similar equipment with single-speed fan control.
2.
The TC shall communicate over the Field Controller Bus using BACnet Standard MS/TP
Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9.
3.
The TC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
a) The TC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
b) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the TC.
c) The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
4.
The TC shall support remote read/write and parameter adjustment from the web based
User Interface through a Network Automation Engine.
5.
The TC shall include an intuitive User Interface providing plain text messages.
a) Two line, 8 character backlit display
6. The TC shall provide the flexibility to support any one of the following inputs:
a) Integral Indoor Air Temperature Sensor
b) Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
c) Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED Indicator
d) Two configurable binary inputs
7. Provide the flexibility to support any one of the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
8.
Three Speed Fan Control
Two On/Off
Two Floating
Two Proportional (0 to 10V)
The TC shall provide a minimum of six (6) levels of keypad lockout.
9.
The TC shall provide the flexibility to adjust the following parameters:
a) Adjustable Temporary Occupancy from 0 to 24 hours
b) Adjustable heating/cooling deadband from 2º F to 5º F
c) Adjustable heating/cooling cycles per hour from 4 to 8
10.
Where required by application and indicated on plans or room schedules provide the TEC
with an integral Passive Infra-Red (PIR) occupancy sensor.
11.
The TC shall employ nonvolatile electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM) for all adjustable parameters.
12.
The VMA shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressureindependent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct
applications.
13.
The VMA shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
a)
The VMA shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller
(B-ASC).
b)
A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for
the VMA.
c)
The Conformance Statement shall be submitted. The VMA shall communicate
over the FC Bus using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-24
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
14.
The VMA shall have internal electrical isolation for AC power, DC inputs, and MS/TP
communications. An externally mounted isolation transformer shall not be acceptable.
15.
The VMA shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure
transducer.. All components shall be connected and mounted as a single assembly that
can be removed as one piece.
16.
The VMA shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to
UL94-5VB.
17.
The controller shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral
dead-ended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance-free
and shall not require air filters.
18.
Each controller shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate
pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects.
19.
The controller shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space
temperature control loops.
20.
Each controller shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve
control and controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning
reduces commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-tuning
loops to compensate for seasonal or other load changes.
21.
The controller shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA configuration files,
both locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded
individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller
parameters.
22.
Control set point changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA non-volatile
memory to prevent loss of set point changes and to provide consistent operation in the
event of communication failure.
23.
The controller firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus
to minimize costs of feature enhancements.
24.
The controller shall provide fail-soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by
automatically reverting to a pressure-dependent control mode.
25.
The controller shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic recalculation of box
flow pickup gain (“K” factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to
the box minimum and maximum airflow set points.
26.
Controller performance shall be self-documenting via on-board diagnostics. These
diagnostics shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each
control loop’s sample interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and document
system performance. The VMA shall calculate exponentially weighted moving averages
(EWMA) for each of the following. These metrics shall be available to the end user for
efficient management of the VAV terminals.
a)
Absolute temperature loop error
b)
Signed temperature loop error
c)
Absolute airflow loop error
d)
Signed airflow loop error
e)
Average damper actuator duty cycle
The controller shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones.
The error conditions shall consist of:
a)
Unreliable space temperature sensor
b)
Unreliable differential pressure sensor
c)
Starved box
d)
Actuator stall
e)
Insufficient cooling
27.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-25
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
f)
Insufficient heating
The controller shall provide a flow test function to view damper position vs. flow in a
graphical format. The information would alert the user to check damper position. The
VMA would also provide a method to calculate actuator duty cycle as an indicator of
damper actuator runtime.
The controller shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor
air quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow Based on the
percent of outdoor air in the primary air stream.
19.
20.
21.
The controller shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing
simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow
while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the
airflow in the heating sequence.
22.
Inputs:
Analog inputs with user defined ranges shall monitor the following analog signals, without
the addition of equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet:
I.
0-10 VDC Sensors
II.
1000ohm RTDs
III.
NTC Thermistors
Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate
false signals resulting from input “bouncing.”
For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications,
and output circuits.
Provide side loop application for humidity control.
Outputs
Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
1.
0-10 VDC
2.
4-20 mA.
Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC.
For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications,
and other output circuits.
Application Configuration
The VMA shall be configured with a software tool that provides a simple Question/Answer
format for developing applications and downloading.
Sensor Support
The VMA shall communicate over the Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) with a Network
Sensor.
The VMA shall support an LCD display room sensor.
The VMA shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog input
requirements.
The VMA shall support humidity sensors defined by the AI side loop.
a)
b)
c)
d)
23.
a)
b)
c)
24.
a)
25.
a)
b)
c)
d)
C.
2.6
Installation, testing, and calibration of all devices shall be provided to meet the system
requirements.
Input Devices
A.
General Requirements:
1. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and
sequence of operations.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-26
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
2. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000 ohm
nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.
3. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy
values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion:
Point Type
Accuracy
Chilled Water
+ .5°F.
Room Temp
+ .5°F.
Duct Temperature
+ .5°F.
All Others
+ .75°F.
B.
Room Temperature Sensors
1. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.
2. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:
a)
Set point reset slide switch providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range.
b)
Individual heating/cooling set point slide switches.
c)
A momentary override request push button for activation of after-hours operation.
d)
Analog thermometer.
C.
Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display
1. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.
2. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and four button keypad with the following
capabilities:
a)
Display room and outside air temperatures.
b)
Display and adjust room comfort set point.
c)
Display and adjust fan operation status.
d)
Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of after-hours
operation.
e)
Display controller mode.
f)
Password selectable adjustment of set point and override modes.
D.
Thermo Wells
1. When thermo wells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly,
including wellhead and Greenfield fitting.
2. Thermo wells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working
pressure.
3. Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2” NFT saddle and allow easy
access to the sensor for repair or replacement.
4. Thermo wells shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.
E.
Outside Air Sensors
1. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will
be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.
2. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that
surrounds the sensor element.
3. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.
F.
Duct Mount Sensors
1. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct, and be positioned
so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-27
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
2. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly, including lock nut
and mounting plate.
3. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and
gasket shall be used.
G.
Averaging Sensors
1. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification
exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used.
2. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors
mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The
averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing points per 12-foot long segment
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra. Johnson Controls, Siemens
H.
Humidity Sensors
1. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The
sensor element shall resist service contamination.
2. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2wire isolated loop powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output.
3. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead loss and Analog
to Digital conversion. 3% between 20% and 80% RH @ 77 Deg F unless specified elsewhere.
4. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. The
transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel
bushings.
5. A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters
shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated.
6. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be equipped with
a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries, and Mamac.
I.
Differential Pressure Transmitters
1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:
a)
Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range
without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40%
over-range input.
b)
Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output
signal.
c)
Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow
sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and
low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Mechanical Contractor and LAWA
permanent, easy-to-use connection.
d)
A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall
be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
2. Low Differential Water Pressure Applications (0” - 20” W.C.)
a)
The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4
to 20 mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water
pressure sensing points.
b)
The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span
adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following
performance specifications:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-28
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
I. .01-20” W.C. input differential pressure range.
II. 4-20 mA output.
III. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown.
IV. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
c)
Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra and Mamac.
3. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” W.C.)
a.
The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications
with the following exceptions:
I. Differential pressure range 10” W.C. to 300 PSI.
II. Reference Accuracy: +1% of full span (includes non-linearity, hysteresis,
and repeatability).
b.
Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel.
The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in
the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves,
and compression fittings shall be provided.
c.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra, Mamac Rosemount .
4. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” W.C.)
a.
The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4
to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing
points.
b.
The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span
adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following
performance specifications:
I. -1.00 to +1.00 W.C. input differential pressure ranges. (Select range
appropriate for system application)
II. 4-20 mA output.
III. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown.
IV. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
c.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Siemens and Setra.
5. Low Differential Air Pressure Applications (0” to 5” W.C.)
a.
The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4
to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing
points.
b.
The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span
adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following
performance specifications:
I. (0.00 - 1.00” to 5.00”) W.C. input differential pressure ranges. (Select
range appropriate for system application.)
II. 4-20 mA output.
III. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown.
IV. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
c.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls , Siemens and Setra.
6. Indoor Air Quality (CO2) Sensors- Wall and Duct Mounted
a. Provide indoor air quality sensors to monitor Carbon Dioxide (CO2). The sensors shall be
of microprocessor-based photo-acoustic type with heated stannic dioxide semiconductor.
b. The CO2 sensors shall have no more than 1% drift during the first year of operation and
minimal drift thereafter so that no calibration will be required.
c. The units shall be wall or duct mounted type as indicated on plans and in the sequence of
operation.
d. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with white plastic cover, without LED indicators.
e. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with LED indicators in a dust proof plastic
housing with transparent cover.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-29
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
f.
The sensor shall meet the following requirements:
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
Operating voltage: 24 VAC +/- 20%
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: max. 6 VA
CO2 measuring range:0 – 2000 ppm
Tolerance: +/- 100 ppm
Output: 0 – 10 VAC
Calibration: none required
Permissible air velocity in duct: <26.2 Ft/s.
The sensors shall be model: Siemens QPA63 Series, Johnson Controls,
Honeywell or approved equal
7. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Transmitter
a. Sensor assemblies to be rated general purpose and suitable for N.E.C. installation.
(NEMA 1 enclosure).
b. Carbon monoxide analyzer shall be capable of measurement in the range of 0-500 parts
per million with 4-20 mA output. (7000 to 9000 square feet per sensor).
c. Operating temperature: -15 deg C to 40 deg C
d. Stability: ±1%
e. Repeatability: less than ±2% full scale
f. Manufacturer: Sensor shall be Brasch gas detector or as approved by the Engineer
8.
Medium Differential Air Pressure Applications (5” to 21” W.C.)
a.
The pressure transmitter shall be similar to the Low Air Pressure Transmitter, except that
the performance specifications are not as severe. Differential pressures transmitters shall
be provided that meet the following performance requirements:
I. Zero & span: (c/o F.S./Deg. F): .04% including linearity, hysteresis and
repeatability.
II. Accuracy: 1% F.S. (best straight line) Static Pressure Effect: 0.5% F.S.
(to 100 PSIG.
III. Thermal Effects: <+.033 F.S./Deg. F. over 40°F. to 100°F. (calibrated at
70°F.).
b.
Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel.
The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in
the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves,
and compression fittings shall be provided.
c.
Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Siemens and Setra.
J.
Flow Monitoring
1. Air Flow Monitoring
a. AHU Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. At the inlet of each fan and near the exit of the inlet sound trap, airflow sensors
which continuously monitor the fan air volumes and system velocity pressure shall
be provided. The AHU air flow measuring stations and the transmitters are to be
provided and installed by the AHU manufacturer.
2. Each sensor shall be surface mount type. Unit shall be capable of monitoring and
reporting the airflow and temperature at each fan inlet location through two or four
sensing circuits. If a static pressure manifold is used, it shall incorporate dual offset
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-30
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
static tops on the opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to
flow-angle variations of as much as + 20° in the approaching air stream.
3. Devices creating fan performance degradation, resulting in additional energy
consumption, caused from pressure drop associated with probes or mounting
apparatus in the center of the fan inlet are not allowed. The device shall not induce
a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified
by its singular or multiple presence in the air stream. Sensor circuit casings shall be
constructed of U.L. 94 flame rated high impact ABS and include a stainless steel
thermistor cap that maintains the precise calibrated flow over the heated and
ambient measurement points. Each sensor circuit shall consist of two ceramic base,
glass encapsulated, thermistors for measuring ambient temperature and velocity.
Circuit shall be designed for operation in a wide range of environments, including
high humidity and rapid thermal cycling.
4. Acceptable manufacturers are: Johnson Controls, Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air
Systems, Inc., or Dietrich Standard.
b. Single Probe Air Flow Measuring Sensor
1. The single probe airflow-measuring sensor shall be duct mounted with an adjustable
sensor insertion length of up to eight inches. The transmitter shall produce a 4-20
mA or 0-10 VDC signal linear to air velocity. The sensor shall be a hot wire
anemometer and utilize two temperature sensors and a heater element
temperature. The other sensor shall measure the downstream air temperature. The
temperature differential shall be directly related to airflow velocity.
c. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. Furnish and install, at locations shown on plans or as in accordance with schedules,
an equalized air measuring probe system piped to a high performance pressure
transducer or an electronic type airflow temperature measuring station.
2. Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results in
accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the ASHRAE
Handbook of fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation Handbook.
3. Assembly shall be AMCA tested and capable of measuring a range from 70 to 5,000
FPM (22 to 2224 MPM).
1. Equalized air measuring assembly shall measure to ±3% average and consist of
6063T5 extruded aluminum step sensing blade(s) with anodized finish, plenumrated polyethylene pressure tubing, brass barbed fittings, mounting hardware and a
glass-on-silicone capacitance sensor pressure transducer capable of measuring up
to six field-selectable pressure ranges up to 1 in. W.C.
2. The transducer shall be accurate to ±1% of full scale and be contained in a National
Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 4 (IP-65) enclosure. Transducer shall
be factory mounted and piped to high and low pressure ports through fittings made
of brass.
3. All sensor tubing shall terminate in solid brass barbed fittings.
4. Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for connection
to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each unit casing, listing
model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity.
5. Air straightener shall be provided for sizes over 17 square feet (1.6 sq meters).
6. Airflow measuring station assemblies shall be fabricated of galvanized steel or
aluminum casing of appropriate thickness for slip fits or with 90 Deg. connecting
flanges in configuration and size equal to that of the duct into which it is mounted.
Each station shall be complete with an air direction analyzer and parallel cell profile
suppressor (3/4” maximum cell) across the entering air stream and mechanically
fastened to the casing in such a way to withstand velocities up to 6000 feet per
minute. This air direction analyzer and parallel cell honeycomb suppressor shall
provide 98% free area, equalize the velocity profile, and eliminate turbulent and
rotational flow from the air stream prior to the measuring point.
7. Electronic air measuring station shall be capable of monitoring and reporting the
airflow and temperature at each measuring location through one or more measuring
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-31
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
probes containing multiple sensor points and a control transmitter that
communicates with the BAS.
Probe(s) shall be constructed of an airfoil shaped aluminum extrusion containing the
sensor circuit(s).
Each sensor circuit shall consist of coated thermistors, for temperature and velocity,
mounted to a Printed Circuit Board (PCB).
Probe multiplexer circuit(s) shall include a microprocessor that collects data from
each PCB and digitally communicates the average airflow and temperature of each
probe to a microprocessor based control transmitter.
Multiplexer board shall be encased to prevent moisture damage.
Shielded CAT5e communications cable shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
(UL) plenum-rated with RJ45 terminal connectors. Dust boot covers and gold-plated
contacts shall link probes to electronic controller.
Control transmitter shall be capable of processing independent sensing points and
shall operate on a fused 24 VAC supply.
Control transmitter shall feature a 16 x 2 character alphanumeric LCD screen, digital
offset/gain adjustment, continuous performing sensor/transmitter diagnostics, and a
visual alarm to detect malfunctions.
All electronic components of the assembly shall be Restriction of Hazardous
Substances (RoHS) Directive compliant.
Installation Considerations
i. The maximum allowable pressure loss through the Flow and Static Pressure
elements shall not exceed .065” W.C. at 1000 feet per minute, or .23” W.C. at
2000 feet per minute. Each unit shall measure the airflow rate within an accuracy
of plus 2% as determined by U.S. – GSA certification tests, and shall contain a
minimum of one total pressure sensor per 36 square inches of unit measuring
area.
ii. Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the
station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct. Station
flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.
iii. Where control dampers are shown as part of the airflow measuring station,
parallel blade precision controlled volume dampers integral to the station and
complete with actuator, and linkage shall be provided.
iv. Stations shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published
requirements, and in accordance with ASME Guidelines affecting non-standard
approach conditions.
17.
All air measuring devices shall be tested according to AMCA Standard 610
18.
Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air, and
Dietrich Standard.
d. Static Pressure Traverse Probe
I.
Duct static probes shall be provided where required to monitor duct static
pressure. Acceptable manufacturers: Cleveland Controls
2. Water Flow Monitoring
a. Water flow meters shall be electromagnetic type with integral microprocessor-based
electronics. The meter shall have an accuracy of 0.25%.
b. Acceptable manufacturers: Onicon
K.
Power Monitoring Devices
1. Current Measurement (Amps)
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-32
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current
transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the
monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC
compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System.
b. Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor
amps.
I.
Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz.
II.
Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL.
III.
UL recognized.
IV.
Five amps secondary.
V.
Select current ration as appropriate for application.
VI.
Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries
c. Current Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided.
The current transducer shall include:
I.
6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps.
II.
Manufactured to UL 1244.
III.
Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%.
IV.
Minimum load resistance 30kOhm.
V.
Input 0-20 Amps.
VI.
Output 4-20 mA.
VII.
Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC
+5%).
VIII.
Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries
L.
Refrigerant Leak Detectors
1. The refrigerant leak detector shall be a standalone device and shall provide a SPDT output to
directly energize the refrigeration room exhaust ventilation fans. The detector shall include a
sensor or sensors connected to a control panel. Two relay contacts at the control panel shall
provide trouble and alarm indication to the Facility Management System. The alarm relay contact
shall also directly energize the exhaust fans.
2. The refrigerant leak detector shall sense the type of refrigerant used in the specified chillers.
Multiple sensors shall be required to detect different refrigerants and/or provide proper sensing
coverage for the area of the refrigeration room.
3. Acceptable manufacturers, MSA Instruments
M.
Status and Safety Switches
1. General Requirements
a)
Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate
alarms at the BAS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be
provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective
equipment.
2. Current Sensing Switches
a)
The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry
contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing
circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on
or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It
shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range.
b)
Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other
miscellaneous motor loads.
c)
Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the
motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall
indicate a negative run status.
d)
Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-33
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
3. Air Filter Status Switches
a)
Differential pressure switches used to monitor air filter status shall be of the automatic
reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120VAC.
b)
A complete installation kit shall be provided, including: static pressure tops, tubing,
fittings, and air filters.
c)
Provide appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
d)
Acceptable manufacturers: Cleveland Controls
8.
4. Air Flow Switches
a) Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated mercury switches or
snap acting micro-switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment
for intended service.
b) Acceptable manufacturers: Cleveland Controls
5. Air Pressure Safety Switches
a) Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with SPDT contacts
rated for 2 amps at 120VAC.
b) Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential
adjustment for intended service.
c) Acceptable manufacturers, Cleveland Controls
6. Water Flow Switches
a) Water flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74.
7. Low Temperature Limit Switches
a) The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double
Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC.
b) The sensing element shall be a minimum of 22 feet in length and shall react to the
coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in
accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
c) For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the
air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection
of the air stream.
d) The low temperature limit switch shall be Johnson Controls A70, Honeywell, and
Siemens.
BTU Monitoring Devices
a)
BTU Meter: (Chilled water and Hot Water Applications): Provide an ONICON
System-10 BTU Meter. The BTU meter shall provide the following information via
both an integral LCD and via serial network communications (protocol
conforming to BACnet): Energy Total, Energy Rate, Flow Total, Flow Rate,
Supply Temperature and Return Temperature. Each BTU meter shall be factory
programmed for its specific application, and shall be re-programmable using the
front panel keypad (no special interface device or computer required). Provide
the following with each BTU meter application:
b)
Temperature sensors: Temperature sensors shall be loop-powered current
based (mA) sensors and shall be bath-calibrated and matched (NIST* traceable)
for the specific temperature range for each application. The calculated differential
temperature used in the energy calculation shall be accurate to within +0.150F
(including the error from individual temperature sensors, sensor matching, input
offsets, and calculations).
Ultrasonic Flow Meter: The flow meter shall be a clamp-on, dual channel or dual
path transit-time precluding the requirement of penetrating into the pipe. The
c)
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-34
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
2.7
A.
dual channel operating mode shall be capable of acting as two independent
meters with the ability to perform math functions between the two channels (add
or subtract). The dual path operating mode will eliminate the effects of flow profile
distortion, cross flow or swirl errors caused by upstream interference or pumping
irregularities. The flow meter shall be completely microprocessor based utilizing
the transit-time flow measurement technique. The flow meter shall employ the
phase detection multiple pulse transmit principle in conjunction with multiple
frequency axial beam transducer technology to insure operation on liquids with
solids and/or bubbles. In addition, the flow meter shall incorporate an alternate
Doppler method measurement mode for highly aerated or heavy solid bearing
liquids.
The flow meter shall provide automatic transducer spacing utilizing a Universal
Mounting Frame or mounting track. The meter shall also provide automatic
Reynolds Number and liquid sonic velocity variation compensation and live zero
flow as well as the ability to zero flow automatically at programmed intervals. The
flow meter shall have the ability to indicate flow rate, flow velocity, total flow,
signal strength, liquid sonic velocity, Reynolds Number and liquid aeration level
for both channels and paths. The flow meter shall also have the ability to be
programmed to compensate for specific upstream profile disturbances. The flow
meter shall be equipped with an integral front panel keypad and multifunction 240
x 128 pixel LCD display with the ability of displaying both channels and paths
simultaneously. In addition, the flow meter shall provide self and application
diagnostics to isolate any fault conditions to either equipment failure or abnormal
process conditions. The flow meter shall have full HELP menu routines
corresponding to all levels of programming and operation.
The flow meter electronics shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure and
powered by 115 VAC, 60 Hz. One (1) isolated 4 to 20 ma DC and one (1) 0 to
5,000 Hz. pulse output proportional to flow shall be provided for each channel or
the average of both paths. In addition, the unit shall provide one (1) 0 to 10 volt
output and four (4) SPDT alarm relays assignable to flow velocity, liquid sonic
velocity, signal strength or liquid aeration. An internal 250 KB data logger shall be
provided to allow storage of all measured and calculated variables and alarms. A
bi-directional RS-232 connection shall be provided to allow remote programming
and interrogation.
The flow meter shall have an accuracy of ±1% of flow over a ±40 fps flow range.
Repeatability shall be 0.1% of flow with a flow sensitivity of 0.001 fps at any flow
rate including no flow conditions.
Flow meters that employ amplitude detection/correlation routines or use a single
frequency transducer design will not be acceptable. Shear mode flow meters or
meters utilizing wetted transducers or electrodes, or flow-measuring techniques
other than previously described will not be acceptable.
By use of either transit-time or Doppler modes of operation, the flow meter shall
be capable of measuring all liquids in full sonically conductive pipes. Flow meters
that simply offer standalone transit-time or Doppler measurement modes are not
acceptable.
The furnished flow meter shall be Controlotron, Model 1010DN, Panametrics or
as approved by the Engineer.
Output Devices
Actuators
1.
General Requirements
a) Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified.
2.
Electronic Damper Actuators
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-35
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a) Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.
b) Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of
operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator manufacturer’s
recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The actuator
mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally
closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be
furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the sequences of
operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either
direction, or a gear release to allow manual positioning.
c) Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than
22 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the
actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal
shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and
provide true position indication. The feedback signal of one damper actuator for each
separately controlled damper assembly shall be wired back to the BAS Controller.
d) Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be
UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in the sequence
of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed
position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two-position actuators, as
specified in sequences of operations as “quick acting,” shall move full stroke within 20
seconds.
e) Acceptable manufacturers: Belimo, Mamac.
3.
Electronic Valve Actuators
a) Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer.
b) Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent
damage to the actuator.
c) Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of
operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve closeoff against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be
sized based on the valve manufacturer’s recommendations for flow and pressure
differential. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless specified with mechanical
spring return in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit
normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft
mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either
direction.
d) Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL
listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall provide a
clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of
the input signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position
indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator (except terminal valves) shall be
wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.
e) Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be
UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence of operations,
shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be
hard wired to start/stop the associated pump or chiller.
f) Acceptable manufacturers: Belimo
B.
Control Relays
1.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Control Pilot Relays
Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips.
Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount.
DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application.
Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC.
Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-36
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
f)
2.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
C.
D.
Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Honeywell, ASCO or Lectro
Lighting Control Relays
Lighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts.
Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC.
The coil shall be a split low-voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact armature to
the ON or OFF latched position.
Lighting control relays shall be controlled by:
I.
Pulsed Tri-state Output – Preferred method.
II.
Pulsed Paired Binary Outputs.
III.
A Binary Input to the BAS shall monitor integral status contacts on the lighting
control relay. Relay status contacts shall be of the “dry-contact” type.
The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change-of-state, and
so that multiple same state commands will simply maintain the commanded state.
Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF
position.
Control Valves (PICV)
1.
All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat
transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in
their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required
by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the BAS contractor,
and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control
valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential
pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or
flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Section.
2.
Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as required by
the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer’s
recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving
variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual
coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 PSI. Valves (3-way) serving constant flow air
handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal
to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way)
serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 5 PSI.
Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 2 PSIG pressure drop, but no more
than a 5 PSI drop.
3.
Ball valves shall be used for hot and chilled water applications, water terminal reheat
coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units
except those described hereinafter.
4.
Modulating plug water valves of the single-seat type with equal percentage flow
characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated on the valve
schedule. Valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.
5.
Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than
modulating plug valves, and for all two-position, open/close applications. In-line and/or
three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to
the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless
steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees
of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the
closed position shall be bubble-tight.
6.
Acceptable manufacturers: Belimo
Electronic/Pneumatic Transducers
Pneumatic transducers shall provide:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-37
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
E.
Output: 3-Div 22 PSIG.
Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC.
Manual output adjustment.
Pressure gauge.
External replaceable supply air filter.
Acceptable manufacturers: Mamac
Local Control Panels
1.
All control panels shall be constructed by a UL certified panel manufacturer, incorporating
the BAS manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL
inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control
panels shall be fully enclosed, with sub-panel, hinged door, and lock.
2.
In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controllers and I/O devices—such
as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the
control panel due to function.
3.
All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw
terminals.
4.
Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring
shall be UL listed 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.
5.
All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.
6.
A 120 volt convenience outlet, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers shall
be provided in each enclosure.
Power Supplies
F.
G.
1.
Required AC or DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total
rated load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.
2.
Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.
3.
Output: 24 VAC or VDC as required.
4.
An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the
power supply.
5.
A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.
Thermostats
1.
Electric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided by Mechanical
Contractor for unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All
these items shall be provided with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all roomtype instruments shall match and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be
manufacturer’s standard finish.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1.
A.
BAS Specific Requirements
Programming
1. All programming shall be by a LAWA approved contractor listed below.
a) Johnson Controls:
Main Office 562.594.3200
b) Siemens Industry:
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-38
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
Main Office 714.761.2200
c) Honeywell
Main Office 714.562.3048
2. The technician shall be experienced in programming the system and have certificates
demonstrating that they have completed the required training courses
B.
Provision of Supervisory Controllers
1. When installing new control devices and points ensure that the Controller serving the area
has sufficient capacity. If Controller utilization is over 80% provide and install a new any
required point expansion modules.
C.
Tenant Sub Metering
1. Each service in a tenant space shall be metered and BACnet connection of pulsed output
from the meter shall be tied into the BAS for tenant billing purposes. Metered services shall
include:
a) Heating Hot Water – Onicon electromagnetic BTU Meter with BACnet connection
b) Chilled Water – Onicon electromagnetic BTU Meter with BACnet connection
c) Gas – Meter shall be provided by the Section 22000 plumbing contractor with a BACnet
connection or pulsed output.
d) Electricity – Meter shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor with a BACnet
connection.
D.
Graphic Displays
1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as
indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be from a standard design
library.
2. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or
menu selection.
E.
Actuation / Control Type
1. Primary Equipment
a) Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein.
b) Each damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
2. Air Handling Equipment
a) Each air handers shall be controlled with dedicated HVAC-DDC Controller
b) The AHU BAS controls shall be factory installed.
c) All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
3. Terminal Equipment:
a) Each terminal Units (VAV, UV, etc.) shall be controlled with dedicated electric damper
and valve actuation.
b) All Terminal Units shall be controlled with HVAC-DDC Controller)
c) Terminal unit BAS controls shall be factory installed.
F. The BAS system shall monitor common alarm, common trouble and common supervisory condition
from the Fire Life Control System.
3.2.
A.
Installation Practices
BAS Wiring
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-39
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
B.
C.
D.
1.
All low voltage conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the
installation of the Building Automation System, as herein specified, shall be provided by
the BAS Contractor. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of
Design and Construction Handbook Electrical Section and all local and national electric
codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.
2.
All BAS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BAS manufacturer
recommendations.
3.
The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the
design responsibility of the BAS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the
incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BAS Contractor,
the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected
components.
4.
Class 2 Wiring
a)
All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduits. The VAV shall be
supplied with 24VAC power.
5.
Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring
120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.
6.
Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables,
panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and
conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.
7.
Notify LAWA FMCS SA within 72 hours of when BAS is acknowledging that the BAS data
is available to be integrated into the FMCS. BAS BACnet system shall be fully capable of
auto-discovery by the FMCS BACnet system.
BAS Line Voltage Power Source
1.
120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Automation System shall be taken from panel
boards and circuit breakers provided by Electrical Contractor.
2.
Circuits used for the BAS shall be dedicated to the BAS and shall not be used for any
other purposes.
3.
DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.
BAS Conduits
1.
All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. . Minimum control wiring conduit size
3/4”.
2.
Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway
(Wiremold) may be used as approved by LAWA in writing.
3.
All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building
lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.
4.
Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 6 feet in
length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used
within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.
Penetrations
BAS Contractor shall:
1.
Provide fire stopping for all conduits and raceways penetrations through fire-rated walls
and/floors
2.
All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using approved
fire resistive sealant.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-40
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
E.
3.
All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed
raceway.
4.
Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true,
and square.
BAS Identification Standards
1.
2.
F.
Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the
enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. Cable types specified in Item A
shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting. BAS Contractor shall
submit color coding legend to LAWA for approval prior to installation.
The conduits shall be painted in 50 feet intervals with Navy Blue paint. The junction box
covers shall be painted with Navy Blue paint.
BAS Panel Installation
1.
The BAS controls components such as communication modules, hubs, servers,
controllers, network connections, etc. shall be mounted in cabinets. Cabinets shall have
hinged doors. Cabinets in the indoor dry location shall confirm to NEMA 1 standards.
Cabinets in the damp locations (pump rooms) shall be a steel construction with baked
enamel coating and shall confirm to NEMA 3R standards. Cabinets in the outdoor
location shall be of a stainless steel construction and shall confirm to NEMA 3R
standards.
2.
G.
H.
The BAS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other
trades and Electrical and Mechanical Contractors and LAWA.
3.
The BAS panel shall be equipped with the minimum 500 VA UPS.
Input Devices
1.
All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation
2.
Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
HVAC Input Devices – General
1.
All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation
2.
Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels unless otherwise
approved in writing by LAWA.
3.
The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells,
pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.
4.
Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME
guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
5.
Outside Air Sensors
a) Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or
located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.
If access to the North wall is limited, the sensor may be installed in the AHU outside
intake air duct when approved in writing by LAWA.
b) Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover.
6.
Water Differential Pressure Sensors
a) Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flowsensing device.
b) Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off valves in
the high and low sensing pick-up lines.
c) The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location unless otherwise approved in
writing by LAWA.
7.
Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” W.C.):
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-41
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
I.
a) Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.
Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” W.C.):
a) Transmitter’s exterior sensing tip shall be installed with a shielded static air probe to
reduce pressure fluctuations caused by wind.
b) The interior tip shall be inconspicuous and located as shown on the drawings.
Air Flow Measuring Stations:
a) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall
be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct.
b) Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.
Duct Temperature Sensors:
a) Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and be
positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.
b) The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including
lock nut and mounting plate.
c) For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature
stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.
d) The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element
holders.
Space Sensors, Room Thermostats:
a) Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.
b) Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the
plans.
Low Temperature Limit Switches:
a) Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream.
b) Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern for large duct areas where
the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, provide additional
switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream.
Air Differential Pressure Status Switches:
a) Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.
Water Differential Pressure Status Switches:
b) Install with shut off valves for isolation.
HVAC Output Devices
3.3
A.
1.
All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves,
dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.
2.
Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the
maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth
fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced
with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper
sequencing.
3.
Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow.
Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.
4.
Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve
plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The
maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.
Training
Provide training in accordance with Sections 01 79 00 of the Design and Construction Handbook.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-42
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
B.
In addition, the BAS contractor shall provide the following training services:
1.
Operator Training (provide 40 hours): Operator training shall include the detailed review
of the control installation drawings, points list, and equipment list. The instructor shall
then walk through the building identifying the location of the control devices installed. For
each type of systems, the instructor shall demonstrate how the system accomplishes the
sequence of operation.
a.
b.
2.
Factory training for a minimum of six (6) LAWA representatives for 40 hours (minimum) in
a factory training lab. This training shall be performed by a factory-certified professional
trainer and, at a minimum, shall consist of:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
3.4
Two days (16 hours) basic system operation.
One day (16 hours) system reporting and alarm management.
One day (16 hours) scheduling and point trending
The LAWA shall be issued Continuing Education Credits (C.E.U.s) for the factory training.
Third Party Interface Training: BAS contractor shall provide a minimum of 24 hours detail
training for systems such as lighting control, VFD, emergency generator, electrical
switchgear and any other system or equipment that will interface with the BAS.
Commissioning and Testing.
A.
1.
From the workstation, the operator shall demonstrate the software features of the
system. As a minimum, the operator demonstrate and explain logging on, setting
passwords, setting up a schedule, trend, point history, alarm, and archiving the
database.
One day (8 hours) of the 40 hours will be devoted to on-site orientation by a field
engineer who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the
project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project asbuilt drawings, the control system software layout and naming conventions, and a
walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.
Provide commissioning in accordance with Sections 01 19 00 of the Design and
Construction Handbook.
General
a.
2.
Commissioning the Building Automation System is a mandatory documented
performance requirement of the selected BAS Contractor for all control systems
detailed in this Specification and sequence of operations. Commissioning shall
include verification of proper installation practices by the BAS Contractor and
subcontractors under the BAS Contractor, point verification and calibration,
system/sequence of operation verification with respect to specified operation, and
network/workstation verification. Documentation shall be presented upon
completion of each commissioning step and final completion to ensure proper
operation of the Building Automation System.
b.
BAS commissioning and testing documentation is to be provided separately to
LAWA.
Testing Requirements
a.
b.
Intent: Demonstrate to satisfaction of authorized representative that BAS is
performing in accordance with requirements of this Section.
Logs of Tests: Complete logs of tests retained by Contractor for inspection and
review of authorized representative at any time after testing started. Upon final
completion of system tests log records submitted.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-43
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
c.
3.
Witness of Tests: At time directed by authorized representative complete
functional, operational test shall be performed by contractor. Test witnessed by
personnel directed by authorized representative. Tests continue until functions of
points, of alarms and command functions are proven to satisfaction of authorized
representative.
d.
Performance of Field Tests: Complete tests required at different and distinct times
for various phases of construction as designated by authorized representative.
Testing Procedure
a.
4.
Upon completion of the installation, the BAS Contractor shall start-up the system
and performs all necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper
operation. The BAS Contractor shall be responsible for generating all software
and entering all database information necessary to perform existing control
sequences.
Testing Documentation
a.
5.
Prior to acceptance testing, BAS Contractor shall create, on an individual system
basis, trend logs of input and output points, or have an automatic Point History
feature for documentation purposes.
Field Points Testing
a.
6.
7.
This step shall verify that all of the installed points receive or transmit the correct
information prior to loading/activating the system software.
b.
ON/OFF commands from the workstation shall be performed in order to verify
each binary output point.
c.
All binary input points are to be tested by observing a change of state upon
command at PC workstation or locally in the field.
d.
All analog output points shall be tested using a command from the PC
workstation to modulate the output device from minimum calibrated signal to
maximum calibrated output.
e.
All analog input points are to be tested by comparing the reading obtained
through the workstations to the value of an independent testing meter
f.
All two-way communication interfaces (Modbus, Bacnet, etc.) tested and
monitored values and commanded verified at the BAS workstation and in the
field.
Verify that activation of site related alarms specifically identifies and notifies LAWA remote
monitoring sites and selected personnel.
VAV box performance verification and documentation: (Perform testing if required).
a.
b.
As part of the commissioning of the terminal unit control (UC) and air distribution
system, the Contractor shall initiate an automated test where the dampers in one
half of a group of boxes are stepped towards full open while the other half are
stepped towards full closed. At each step, after a settling time, box airflow and
damper positions will be sampled. Following the cycle, a pass/fail report
indicating results shall be produced. Possible results are Pass, No change in flow
between full open and full close, Reverse operation, or Maximum flow not
achieved. The report shall be submitted as documentation of the installation.
The controls contractor shall issue a report based on a sampling of the UC
calculated loop performance metrics. The report shall indicate performance
criteria, include the count of conforming and non-conforming boxes, list the nonconforming boxes along with their performance data, and shall also include
graphical representations of performance. The sampling shall take place after
completion of Test and Balance, when design cooling and heating media have
been available and occupied conditions approximated for five consecutive days.
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-44
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
Los Angeles World Airports
c.
8.
Verify that new graphics are complete and contain dynamic (real-time)
information that can be viewed at both workstation locations.
Non-compliant Items
a.
The Contractor shall remove and replace, at its expense, all items that are not in
compliance with the requirements of this section or other portions of LAWA’s
Design and Construction Handbook.
3.5
A.
Sequences of operation and control diagrams
Control points and sequences
1.
All equipment shall be user-definable as to which piece of equipment is the lead unit, the lag unit or
the spare (standby) unit. The unit arrangements called out for initial start-up conditions only.
2.
All set points shall be user-definable; set points called out are for initial start-up conditions only.
3.
See plans for control details and Sequences of Operation.
3.6
Point Lists
The BAS Contractor shall provide the system’s point list. The sample is show below:
Sample Point List
Systems
AHU 1,2,3,4
Point
Description
Type Units
DA-P
Discharge Static Pressure
AI
in WC
X
DA-T
Discharge Air Temperature
AI
Deg F
X
PH-T
Preheat Temperature
AI
Deg F
X
SF-S
Supply Fan Status
BI
Off On
X
PH-O
Preheat Output
AO
%
X
RH-O
Reheat Output
AO
%
X
CLG-O
Cooling Output
AO
%
X
SF-O
Supply Fan Output
AO
%
X
SF-C
Supply Fan Command
BO
Off On
X
PH-LCKO
Preheat Lockout Command
BO
Off On
X
CLG-LCKO Cooling Lockout Command
BO
Off On
X
RH-LCKO
Reheat Lockout Command
BO
Off On
X
DAT-SP
Discharge Temperature Set point
AO
Deg F
X
PHT-SP
Preheat Temperature Set point
AO
Deg F
X
DAP-SP
Discharge Static Pressure Set point AO
in WC
X
Trend
Alarm
X
Totalize
X
End of Section
TERMINAL BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
25 20 00-45
Integrated Automation
11/14/12
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 02 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section supplements all sections of this Division and shall apply to all phases of
work hereinafter specified, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical
systems for the Project. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete
electrical system that includes all documents that are a part of the Contract.
1.
Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision
necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and
adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein.
B.
Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit
continuity in accordance with the Specifications, whether or not each piece of conductor,
conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment or fixtures, and
the point of circuit origin.
C.
Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical Work includes the
installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished under other
sections. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be
furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed.
NOTE: Provide conduit for all controls and other devices both line and low
voltage. Install all control housings and back bone boxes required for
installing conduit and wire to the controls.
1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed
by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed. Custom made equipment
must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety.
B.
Codes and Regulations:
1.
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and
materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform
to the latest publications or standard rules of the following:
a.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Designers - IEEE
b.
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA
c.
California Fire Code - CFC
d.
California Building Code - CBC
e.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
American Standard Association - ASA
National Electrical Code - NEC, as modified by the city of Los Angeles
Insulated Power Cable Designers Association - IPCEA
California Code of Regulations, Title 24
International Electrical Testing Association - NETA
C.
The term "Code", when used within the specifications.
D.
Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment:
1.
All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a
manner that all portions, elements, sub assemblies and/or parts of said equipment
and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal
load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times the following
factors:
Horizontal
Vertical
Type of equipment
cp
cp
Rigid and rigidly supported piping or equipment
such as boilers, chillers, pumps, motors,
transformers, unit substations and control panels.
Flexible and flexibly supported equipment such as
air-handling units, piping and other equipment so
supported that the fundamental period of vibration
of the equipment and its supporting system is
greater than 0.05 seconds. Communication
equipment and emergency stand-by equipment
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
0.50
0.33
1.00
0.6
Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction
horizontally.
Design stresses shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of the
American Institute of Steel Construction. Anchorage, support and/or attachment
of said prefabricated equipment to the structure should be in accordance with the
details found in the plans and specifications.
Seismic restraints shall be designed for a 1.5 importance factor, and stamped
structural calculations, signed by a California Registered Structural Engineer,
will be provided as support.
It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify the design of equipment
so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment
exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting
structure.
If the state of California requires that certain electrical equipment and
components have a special seismic certification, the contractor and vendor shall
provide such certification.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
E.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1.
Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum
requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where provisions differ
in regard to code application, size, quality, quantity or type of equipment,
Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most costly provision either
denoted in the specifications or on the drawings. This provision shall apply as an
amendment to the California Public Contracts Code.
a.
b.
F.
Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code.
Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the
Work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless
otherwise specified.
Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies
serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for
proper coordination of the Work.
Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Shop drawings shall be submitted on, but not limited to, the following:
Equipment Wiring Connections
Medium Voltage Cables
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
Identification for Electrical Systems
Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
Web Based Power Monitoring Communications System
Lighting Control Devices
Network Lighting Control Systems
Medium Voltage Transformers
Metal Clad Switchgear (VacClad) B Medium Voltage
34.5 kV Metering Switchgear
Low Voltage Transformers
Switchboards
Panelboards
Motor Control Centers
Enclosed Bus Assemblies
Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Transfer Switches
Enclosed Controllers
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
Engine Generators
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
G.
Cutting and Patching:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Obtain written permission from LAWA before core drilling or cutting any
structural members. Exact method and location of conduit penetrations and/or
openings in concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by LAWA.
Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing the waterproofing has
been set in place, seal openings and make absolutely watertight.
Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular wall floor or ceiling.
Miscellaneous:
1.
2.
1.3
Resistive Load Banks
Emergency Generators and Distribution Switchgear
Battery Equipment (Inverter)
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Emergency Circuit Conductors and Cable.
Metal Clad Drawout Switchgear B Low Voltage
Transient Voltage Suppression for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
Interior Lighting
Exterior lighting
Fire Detection and Alarm
3@ scale drawings of outdoor 34.5 kV switchgear yard, indoor 34.5 kV electrical
vaults, all low voltage electrical rooms comply with all applicable LADWP,
CEC and LA City requirements for equipment layout and installation. Also
include associated grounding system grid drawings and details.
1/8@ drawings for underground duct bank installation for normal and emergency
feeders from main electrical rooms to sub electrical rooms with necessary
conduit bank cross section details and equipment terminations.
LED control lights shall be used in all switchgear, switchboards, motor control
centers and similar equipment.
Outdoor equipment enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel,
or better.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
B.
The contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions.
Electrical circuits affecting work shall be de energized while working on or near
them.
Arrange the work so that electrical power is available to all electrical equipment
within existing facility at all times. Schedule all interruptions at the convenience
of LAWA, including exact time and duration, in accordance with LAWA’s
power shut down procedures. Provide temporary power during all periods of
interruption, which are deemed excessive by LAWA.
Protection:
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such precautions as
necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material,
equipment and installations from damage of any kind. LAWA may reject any
particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or equipment scratched, dented
or otherwise damaged.
Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make watertight and
insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary
plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress.
Provide weather protection, with heaters, for equipment stored outdoors.
POWER SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
A.
The contractor’s construction schedule shall indicate dates of proposed electrical power
shutdowns required to perform the installation. The contractor shall notify LAWA a
minimum of thirty (30) days prior to each shutdown. All shutdown coordination meetings
shall be arranged by the contractor for each shutdown.
B.
Power shutdowns shall occur between the hours of 12:00 am and 4:00 am.
C.
Only one switchboard shall be shutdown at any one time. Shutdowns shall be scheduled a
minimum of three (3) days apart.
D.
No interruptions to airport operations shall be allowed during periods deemed by LAWA
as Holiday Construction Restriction Periods. These periods are typically from the Friday
before the week of the Thanksgiving Holiday to the following Monday after the
Thanksgiving Holiday (~9 calendar days), and the Friday before the week of the
Christmas Holiday to the Monday following New Years Day (~16 calendar days).
Contractor shall verify the Holiday Construction Restriction Periods with LAWA prior to
preparing the construction schedule.
NOTE: Refer to the LAWA Utility Shutdown Procedures for additional
information.
1.5
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall provide all testing as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles and all other electrical
equipment. Replace all faulty devices and equipment discovered during testing
with new devices and equipment at no additional cost, and that part of the system
(or devices or equipment) shall then be retested.
Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity test between main
ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived neutral point.
Ground Fault System Test: Measure system neutral insulation resistances to
ensure no shunt ground paths exist.
All grounding resistance and ground fault test procedures shall be performed by
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 5
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
an independent testing firm.
1.6
MAINTENANCE, SERVICING AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, AND WIRING
DIAGRAMS
A.
Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit 4 copies of operating and
maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as an equal number of copies of
complete wiring diagrams all neatly bound in hard cover 3 ring binders with table of
contents and tabs for the following items or equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
1.7
Lighting Control Devices System
Medium Voltage Transformers
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Medium Voltage Metering Switchgear
Low Voltage Transformers
Switchboards
Panelboards
Motor Control Centers
Enclosed Bus Assemblies
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Transfer Switches
Enclosed Controllers
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
Engine Generators
Resistive Load Banks
Emergency Generators and Distribution Switchgear
Battery Equipment (Inverter)
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Transient Voltage Suppression for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Fire Detection and Alarm
Web Based Power Monitoring System
B.
All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system indicating zones, wiring,
and components added to the system.
C.
Include Product and calculations data with maintenance and Operations manuals. Include
all testing reports with Maintenance and Operation manuals.
FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings have been fully
completed, representatives of LAWA will inspect the Work. The Contractor shall
provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to the
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 6
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor shall provide 8 hours of minimum
scheduled operation and maintenance training to staff to be trained on each system
indicated above. See specific sections for additional training/operation hours required.
1.8
B.
Provide manuals for attendees.
C.
Final acceptance of the work will be made by LAWA after receipt of approval and
recommendation of acceptance from each representative.
D.
The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment of retention.
WARRANTIES
A.
Guarantee all materials, equipments, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective
material and faulty workmanship for period of one year unless extended guarantee
periods are specified in individual sections.
B.
Special Warranties:
1.
C.
All 34.5kV Electrical Equipment, Switchgear and Accessories for 3 years (parts
and labor).
During the period between Substantial Completion and Partial Acceptance (Final
Acceptance of a defined area of the work), the Contractor shall provide the necessary
services to Operate and Maintain the equipment in proper working order including, but
not limited to:
1.
Operation and Maintenance Response:
a.
Provide twenty (24) hour emergency service during this period
consisting of:
(1)
(2)
(3)
b.
Critical Issue: A prompt response (within 15 minutes) to
emergency request by telephone or otherwise from LAWA or
designated representative. Onsite within 30 minutes of
notification to triage and assess the situation.
Non Critical Issues: A prompt response (within 15 minutes) to
request by telephone or otherwise from LAWA or designated
representative. Onsite within one (1) hour after receiving notice
from LAWA representative or having knowledge of a need to
service the system. If event occurs after business hours,
weekends or holidays, response shall be within one (1) hour of
commencement of next business day.
Scheduled Operational Needs: 24 hour notice of scheduled
operational need. Failure to respond to scheduled operational
need render need as a Critical Issue.
For Critical issues, on site response shall be within 30 minutes of
notification. Repair or service of respective components and/or system
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 7
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
c.
2.
Maintenance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Inspection of completed installation and periodic testing to maintain
equipment in completely operable, like new condition.
Perform any necessary regulatory testing to ensure system(s) are
compliant with applicable code, all to the satisfaction of the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
Periodic lubrication of parts, filter changes and equipment components as
per OEM’s recommendation. Documentation to be provided for each
piece of equipment when services are provided.
Spare Parts: The Contractor shall maintain adequate supply of spare
parts during this period. Any spare parts utilized during this period that
are part of the contractually obligated inventory of spare parts for Final
Acceptance shall be replenished prior to Final Acceptance.
Operation:
a.
4.
shall be commenced immediately upon arrival on site. This requirement
shall include after business hours, weekends, and holidays. Critical
issues are defined as complete system failure, failure of controls,
entrapments, and/or potential injury to persons, or other item that LAWA
deems a critical operational need.
For Noncritical issues, on site response shall be within one (1) hour of
notification. If event occurs after business hours, weekends, or holidays,
response shall be within one (1) hour of commencement of next business
day. Repair or service of respective components and/or system shall be
commenced within (4) hours of the arrival on site.
All necessary work to operate/maintain the equipment in proper working
order.
Perform daily maintenance and system health checks as applicable, and
any necessary system backups, failover/failback testing.
Routinely monitoring equipment and systems for anomalies and respond
or report to system maintenance team to respond and resolve.
Perform configuration changes as needed to support project, airport,
tenant operations, etc.
Maintain logs of configuration changes.
Perform work without removing equipment from service during peak traffic
periods (unless emergency and/or unless specifically authorized by LAWA) and
those peak periods have been determined by LAWA as 7:00 a.m. to 12:00 a.m.
(midnight) daily.
Unlimited regular time callbacks are included with the applicable response time.
Regular time will be Monday through Friday, 8:00am to 4:30pm, exclusive of
holidays. Overtime\Premium time call backs originating from an operational
error related to the performance requirements of the equipment shall be borne by
the Contractor.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 8
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
END OF SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 9
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 02 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section supplements all sections of this Division and shall apply to all phases of
work hereinafter specified, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical
systems for the Project. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete
electrical system that includes all documents that are a part of the Contract.
1.
Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision
necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and
adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein.
B.
Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit
continuity in accordance with the Specifications, whether or not each piece of conductor,
conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment or fixtures, and
the point of circuit origin.
C.
Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical Work includes the
installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished under other
sections. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be
furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed.
NOTE: Provide conduit for all controls and other devices both line and low
voltage. Install all control housings and back bone boxes required for
installing conduit and wire to the controls.
1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed
by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed. Custom made equipment
must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety.
B.
Codes and Regulations:
1.
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and
materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform
to the latest publications or standard rules of the following:
a.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Designers - IEEE
b.
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA
c.
California Fire Code - CFC
d.
California Building Code - CBC
e.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
American Standard Association - ASA
National Electrical Code - NEC, as modified by the city of Los Angeles
Insulated Power Cable Designers Association - IPCEA
California Code of Regulations, Title 24
International Electrical Testing Association - NETA
C.
The term "Code", when used within the specifications.
D.
Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment:
1.
All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a
manner that all portions, elements, sub assemblies and/or parts of said equipment
and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal
load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times the following
factors:
Type of equipment
Horizontal
Vertical
cp
cp
Rigid and rigidly supported piping or equipment
such as boilers, chillers, pumps, motors,
transformers, unit substations and control panels.
Flexible and flexibly supported equipment such as
air-handling units, piping and other equipment so
supported that the fundamental period of vibration
of the equipment and its supporting system is
greater than 0.05 seconds. Communication
equipment and emergency stand-by equipment
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
0.50
0.33
1.00
0.6
Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction
horizontally.
Design stresses shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of the
American Institute of Steel Construction. Anchorage, support and/or attachment
of said prefabricated equipment to the structure should be in accordance with the
details found in the plans and specifications.
Seismic restraints shall be designed for a 1.5 importance factor, and stamped
structural calculations, signed by a California Registered Structural Engineer,
will be provided as support.
It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify the design of equipment
so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment
exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting
structure.
If the state of California requires that certain electrical equipment and
components have a special seismic certification, the contractor and vendor shall
provide such certification.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
E.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1.
Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum
requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where provisions differ
in regard to code application, size, quality, quantity or type of equipment,
Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most costly provision either
denoted in the specifications or on the drawings. This provision shall apply as an
amendment to the California Public Contracts Code.
a.
b.
F.
Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code.
Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the
Work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless
otherwise specified.
Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies
serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for
proper coordination of the Work.
Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Shop drawings shall be submitted on, but not limited to, the following:
Equipment Wiring Connections
Medium Voltage Cables
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
Identification for Electrical Systems
Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
Web Based Power Monitoring Communications System
Lighting Control Devices
Network Lighting Control Systems
Medium Voltage Transformers
Metal Clad Switchgear (VacClad) B Medium Voltage
34.5 kV Metering Switchgear
Low Voltage Transformers
Switchboards
Panelboards
Motor Control Centers
Enclosed Bus Assemblies
Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Transfer Switches
Enclosed Controllers
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
Engine Generators
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
G.
Cutting and Patching:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Obtain written permission from LAWA before core drilling or cutting any
structural members. Exact method and location of conduit penetrations and/or
openings in concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by LAWA.
Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing the waterproofing has
been set in place, seal openings and make absolutely watertight.
Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular wall floor or ceiling.
Miscellaneous:
1.
2.
2.3.
1.3
Resistive Load Banks
Emergency Generators and Distribution Switchgear
Battery Equipment (Inverter)
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Emergency Circuit Conductors and Cable.
Metal Clad Drawout Switchgear B Low Voltage
Transient Voltage Suppression for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
Interior Lighting
Exterior lighting
Fire Detection and Alarm
3@ scale drawings of outdoor 34.5 kV switchgear yard, indoor 34.5 kV electrical
vaults, all low voltage electrical rooms comply with all applicable LADWP,
CEC and LA City requirements for equipment layout and installation. Also
include associated grounding system grid drawings and details.
1/8@ drawings for underground duct bank installation for normal and emergency
feeders from main electrical rooms to sub electrical rooms with necessary
conduit bank cross section details and equipment terminations.
LED control lights shall be used in all switchgear, switchboards, motor control
centers and similar equipment.
Outdoor equipment enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel,
or better.
All floor mounted equipment shall be installed on a concrete housekeeping pad.
Refer to Hangers and Supports for Electrical Equipment (26 05 30) Part 3.5 for
requirements. (Added August 2013).
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
The contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions.
Electrical circuits affecting work shall be de energized while working on or near
them.
Arrange the work so that electrical power is available to all electrical equipment
within existing facility at all times. Schedule all interruptions at the convenience
of LAWA, including exact time and duration, in accordance with LAWA’s
power shut down procedures. Provide temporary power during all periods of
interruption, which are deemed excessive by LAWA.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Protection:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such precautions as
necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material,
equipment and installations from damage of any kind. LAWA may reject any
particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or equipment scratched, dented
or otherwise damaged.
Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make watertight and
insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary
plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress.
Provide weather protection, with heaters, for equipment stored outdoors.
POWER SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
A.
The contractor’s construction schedule shall indicate dates of proposed electrical power
shutdowns required to perform the installation. The contractor shall notify LAWA a
minimum of thirty (30) days prior to each shutdown. All shutdown coordination meetings
shall be arranged by the contractor for each shutdown.
B.
Power shutdowns shall occur between the hours of 12:00 am and 4:00 am.
C.
Only one switchboard shall be shutdown at any one time. Shutdowns shall be scheduled a
minimum of three (3) days apart.
D.
No interruptions to airport operations shall be allowed during periods deemed by LAWA
as Holiday Construction Restriction Periods. These periods are typically from the Friday
before the week of the Thanksgiving Holiday to the following Monday after the
Thanksgiving Holiday (~9 calendar days), and the Friday before the week of the
Christmas Holiday to the Monday following New Years Day (~16 calendar days).
Contractor shall verify the Holiday Construction Restriction Periods with LAWA prior to
preparing the construction schedule.
NOTE: Refer to the LAWA Utility Shutdown Procedures for additional
information.
1.5
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall provide all testing as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles and all other electrical
equipment. Replace all faulty devices and equipment discovered during testing
with new devices and equipment at no additional cost, and that part of the system
(or devices or equipment) shall then be retested.
Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity test between main
ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived neutral point.
Ground Fault System Test: Measure system neutral insulation resistances to
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
4.
1.6
MAINTENANCE, SERVICING AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, AND WIRING
DIAGRAMS
A.
Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit 4 copies of operating and
maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as an equal number of copies of
complete wiring diagrams all neatly bound in hard cover 3 ring binders with table of
contents and tabs for the following items or equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
1.7
ensure no shunt ground paths exist.
All grounding resistance and ground fault test procedures shall be performed by
an independent testing firm.
Lighting Control Devices System
Medium Voltage Transformers
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Medium Voltage Metering Switchgear
Low Voltage Transformers
Switchboards
Panelboards
Motor Control Centers
Enclosed Bus Assemblies
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Transfer Switches
Enclosed Controllers
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
Engine Generators
Resistive Load Banks
Emergency Generators and Distribution Switchgear
Battery Equipment (Inverter)
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Transient Voltage Suppression for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Fire Detection and Alarm
Web Based Power Monitoring System
B.
All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system indicating zones, wiring,
and components added to the system.
C.
Include Product and calculations data with maintenance and Operations manuals. Include
all testing reports with Maintenance and Operation manuals.
FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings have been fully
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
completed, representatives of LAWA will inspect the Work. The Contractor shall
provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to the
full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor shall provide 8 hours of minimum
scheduled operation and maintenance training to staff to be trained on each system
indicated above. See specific sections for additional training/operation hours required.
1.8
B.
Provide manuals for attendees.
C.
Final acceptance of the work will be made by LAWA after receipt of approval and
recommendation of acceptance from each representative.
D.
The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment of retention.
WARRANTIES
A.
Guarantee all materials, equipments, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective
material and faulty workmanship for period of one year unless extended guarantee
periods are specified in individual sections.
B.
Special Warranties:
1.
C.
All 34.5kV Electrical Equipment, Switchgear and Accessories for 3 years (parts
and labor).
During the period between Substantial Completion and Partial Acceptance (Final
Acceptance of a defined area of the work), the Contractor shall provide the necessary
services to Operate and Maintain the equipment in proper working order including, but
not limited to:
1.
Operation and Maintenance Response:
a.
Provide twenty (24) hour emergency service during this period
consisting of:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Critical Issue: A prompt response (within 15 minutes) to
emergency request by telephone or otherwise from LAWA or
designated representative. Onsite within 30 minutes of
notification to triage and assess the situation.
Non Critical Issues: A prompt response (within 15 minutes) to
request by telephone or otherwise from LAWA or designated
representative. Onsite within one (1) hour after receiving notice
from LAWA representative or having knowledge of a need to
service the system. If event occurs after business hours,
weekends or holidays, response shall be within one (1) hour of
commencement of next business day.
Scheduled Operational Needs: 24 hour notice of scheduled
operational need. Failure to respond to scheduled operational
need render need as a Critical Issue.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
b.
c.
2.
Maintenance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Inspection of completed installation and periodic testing to maintain
equipment in completely operable, like new condition.
Perform any necessary regulatory testing to ensure system(s) are
compliant with applicable code, all to the satisfaction of the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
Periodic lubrication of parts, filter changes and equipment components as
per OEM’s recommendation. Documentation to be provided for each
piece of equipment when services are provided.
Spare Parts: The Contractor shall maintain adequate supply of spare
parts during this period. Any spare parts utilized during this period that
are part of the contractually obligated inventory of spare parts for Final
Acceptance shall be replenished prior to Final Acceptance.
Operation:
a.
4.
For Critical issues, on site response shall be within 30 minutes of
notification. Repair or service of respective components and/or system
shall be commenced immediately upon arrival on site. This requirement
shall include after business hours, weekends, and holidays. Critical
issues are defined as complete system failure, failure of controls,
entrapments, and/or potential injury to persons, or other item that LAWA
deems a critical operational need.
For Noncritical issues, on site response shall be within one (1) hour of
notification. If event occurs after business hours, weekends, or holidays,
response shall be within one (1) hour of commencement of next business
day. Repair or service of respective components and/or system shall be
commenced within (4) hours of the arrival on site.
All necessary work to operate/maintain the equipment in proper working
order.
Perform daily maintenance and system health checks as applicable, and
any necessary system backups, failover/failback testing.
Routinely monitoring equipment and systems for anomalies and respond
or report to system maintenance team to respond and resolve.
Perform configuration changes as needed to support project, airport,
tenant operations, etc.
Maintain logs of configuration changes.
Perform work without removing equipment from service during peak traffic
periods (unless emergency and/or unless specifically authorized by LAWA) and
those peak periods have been determined by LAWA as 7:00 a.m. to 12:00 a.m.
(midnight) daily.
Unlimited regular time callbacks are included with the applicable response time.
Regular time will be Monday through Friday, 8:00am to 4:30pm, exclusive of
holidays. Overtime\Premium time call backs originating from an operational
error related to the performance requirements of the equipment shall be borne by
the Contractor.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 8
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
END OF SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 02 - 9
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 03-EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
1.3
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions,
configurations, and construction.
B.
1.4
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment
connections.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
B.
Determine connection locations and requirements.
C.
Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CORD AND PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
26 05 03 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
B.
Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
C.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for
equipment.
NOTE: Specify cord type SJO for normal use and type SO for heavy duty use.
D. Cord Construction: Type SO or SJO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment
grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
E.
Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.
3.2
EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections
above accessible ceiling finishes.
3.3
B.
Disconnect abandoned utilization equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove
abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank
cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed.
C.
Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified.
INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections.
B.
Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible
conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C.
Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
26 05 03 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
D. nstall receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E.
Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.
F.
Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I.
3.4
Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
ADJUSTING
A. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout
and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide
personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and
configurations.
END OF SECTION 26 05 03
EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
26 05 03 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 13 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
B.
2.
C.
IEEE 48 – Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating Current
Cable Terminations 2.5 kV thru 765 kV
IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1.
2.
3.
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
1.
1.3
Medium voltage cable.
Cable terminations.
Fireproofing tape.
Underground cable markers.
Bedding and cover materials.
NEMA WC 70 – Non-shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the
Distribution of Electrical Energy
NEMA WC 71 – Non-shielded Power Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for the
Distribution of Electric Energy
NEMA WC 74 – 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and
Distribution of Electric Energy
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit for cable, terminations, and accessories.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate results of cable test in tabular form and in plots of current versus
voltage for incremental voltage steps, and current versus time at 30 second intervals at
maximum voltage.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
26 05 13 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.5
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes and locations of cables.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for testing and cleaning cable and
accessories.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years of experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of
Project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cable ends from entrance of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
The Okonite Company
General Cable
Southwire
B.
Voltage: 5kV, 8kV, 15kV, 35kV.
C.
Insulation Level: 133 percent of operating voltage.
D.
Cable Continuous Operating Temperature Rating: MV-105.
E.
Configuration: Single conductor.
F.
Conductor: Copper, compact stranded
G.
Conductor Shield: Metal tape insulation shielding
H.
Insulation: Ethylene Propylene Rubber EPR
I.
Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC or Chlorosulfonated polyethylene, CPE.
CABLE TERMINATIONS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
3M Electrical Products Division.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
26 05 13 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.
3.
2.3
B.
Location: Indoor or Outdoor
C.
Conductor Quantity: Single core
D.
Type: Dual extrusion thick wall heat shrink
FIREPROOFING TAPE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.4
3M Electrical Products Division
Plymouth Rubber Co.
B.
Product Description: Flexible, conformable fabric, coated on one side with flame
retardant, flexible polymeric or chlorinated elastomer. Non-corrosive to and compatible
with cable sheaths jackets. It does not support combustion.
C.
Width: Approximately 3 inches
D.
Thickness: Not less than 0.03 inch
E.
Weight: Not less than 2.5 pounds per square yard
UNDERGROUND CABLE MARKERS
A.
2.5
Raychem.
Thomas & Betts.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, red colored plastic covering, imprinted with
"Medium Voltage Cable" in large letters.
CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Colored Conductor Tape for Phases: Yellow colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less
than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide. 1 stripe for the A phase conductor, 2 stripes for the B
phase conductor, 3 stripes for the C phase conductor. Tape shall be located at all
terminations, splices and pull boxes.
B.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with 1/4 inch embossed legend, punched for use with self-locking
nylon tie fastener. Tags shall be located at all terminations, splices and pull boxes.
Legend shall include the feeder circuit breaker identifier and phase.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
26 05 13 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.2
A.
Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
B.
Verify conduit, duct, trench, and manholes are ready to receive cable.
C.
Verify routing and termination locations of cable prior to rough-in.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Use swab to clean conduits and ducts before pulling cables.
EXISTING WORK
A.
Remove abandoned medium-voltage cable.
B.
Maintain access to existing medium-voltage cable and other installations remaining
active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C.
Extend existing medium-voltage cable installations using materials and methods as
specified.
D.
Clean and repair existing medium-voltage cable to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A.
Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.
B.
Use suitable manufacturer approved lubricants and pulling equipment.
C.
Sustain cable pulling tensions and bending radii below manufacturer’s recommended
limits.
D.
Ground cable shield at each termination and splice.
E.
Install cables in manholes along wall providing longest route.
F.
Arrange cable in manholes to avoid interference with duct entrances.
FIREPROOFING
A.
Apply fireproofing tape to cables when installed in manholes, cable rooms, pull boxes, or
other enclosures.
B.
Smooth out irregularities, at splices or other locations, with insulation putty before
applying fireproofing tape.
C.
Apply fireproofing tape tightly around cables spirally in half-lapped wrapping or in butt
jointed wrapping with second wrapping covering joints first.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
26 05 13 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.6
3.7
D.
Extend fireproofing 1 inch into conduit or duct.
E.
Install tape with coated side toward cable.
F.
Install random wrappings of plastic tape around fireproofing tape to prevent unraveling.
G.
Install fireproofing to withstand a 200 Ampere arc for 30 seconds.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
B.
Inspect cable for proper connections.
C.
Inspect shield grounding, cable supports, and terminations for proper installation.
D.
Tests as per applicable NETA standards.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Protect installed cables from entrance of moisture.
END OF SECTION 26 05 13
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
26 05 13 - 5
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 16 – EMERGENCY CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices and
terminations for emergency or critical circuits rated 600 V and less.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Draka USA
AEI Cables.
Pyrotenax.
CONDUCTORS SPLICES
1.
2.
3.
3M Company-Interam E-5 Series Mat with Metal Pull Boxes.
O-Z/Gedny; EGS Electrical Products Division.
Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type
and class for application required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 16 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.1
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Fire Pump and Emergency Smoke Control System Conductors: 600V RHH Power Cable
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
3.3
Cables must be Ul Classified Circuit Protective System with a 2-Hour fire rating
when installed in the conduit.
Conduit supports shall be spaced no further than every 5' on center.
The cable shall utilize silicone ceramification technology in order to Maintain
circuit integrity.
Cables shall be tested to Ul Standard 2196 - Fire Resistive Cables.
Cables shall comply to Ul Subject #44 for Rubber Insulated Type RHH.
Cables shall meet the requirements of Article 700 of the NEC-Emergency
Systems.
Cables shall comply to the International Building Code and "protect against
exposure to temperatures in excess of 10000 F (5380 C) for a period of not less
than 15 minutes.
INSTALLATION
A.
Run smoke control system evacuation cable/conduit in accordance with applicable
sections of these specifications. Install fire pump conduits.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound
used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and side wall pressure valves.
C.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable rope and basket-weave wire/cable grips,
that will not damage cable of raceway.
D.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support cables according to the applicable UL Listing for each product type being
installed.
F.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements.
G.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables.
H.
Comply with UL electrical circuit protective system FHIT #25.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 16 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform the following field-quality control testing:
1.
2.
B.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance and requirements.
Perform electrical and visual and mechanical inspection. Certify compliance with
test parameters.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with the construction documents.
Test results that do not comply with the construction documents and corrective
action taken to achieve contract compliance.
END OF SECTION 26 05 16
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 16 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
NOTE: This section pertains to 600v class power conductors and cabling.
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable;
service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and
connections.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
2.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables
for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1.
1.3
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with
Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 12 AWG.
Stranded conductors for control circuits.
Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent.
Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Other Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,
average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m)
when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Cable Co.
Southwire Co.
Rome Cable Co.
B.
Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C.
Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.2
E.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.
F.
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
ARMORED CABLE
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Cable.
Southwire Cable.
Rome Cable.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.3
TERMINATIONS
A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper.
B.
Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating
sealing collars.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
B.
Identify and color code wire and cable as described herein. Identify each conductor with its
circuit number or other designation indicated.
C.
Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway:
1.
2.
Pull conductors into raceway at same time.
Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.
D. Special Techniques - Cable:
1.
2.
E.
Special Techniques - Wiring Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal plastic cable
ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on
ceiling panels.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of
insulation rating of conductor.
Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices
and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
Install solid conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Do not place bare stranded
conductors directly under screws.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
G. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device,
such as circuit breakers.
H. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install
2-hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars.
I.
3.3
For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or
when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for
dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit.
WIRE COLOR
A. General: All power and branch circuit conductors shall be provided with color-coded
insulation or color-coded self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide. Vinyl tape shall be used in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes and handholes.
Identify the source and circuit number of each set of conductors with write-on tags.
B.
3.4
Colors: Color coding shall be as follows:
Phase
208Y/120V
480Y/277V
A
Black
Brown
B
Red
Orange
C
Blue
Yellow
Neutral
White
White with Black Stripe
Ground
Green
Green
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
NOTE: This section pertains to 600v class power conductors and cabling.
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable;
service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and
connections.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
2.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables
for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1.
1.3
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with
Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 12 AWG.
Stranded conductors for control circuits.
Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent.
Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Other Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,
average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m)
when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Cable Co.
Southwire Co.
The Okonite Company.
B.
Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C.
Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.2
E.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.
F.
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
ARMORED CABLE
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Cable.
Southwire Co.
The Okonite Company.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.3
TERMINATIONS
A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper.
B.
Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating
sealing collars.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
B.
Identify and color code wire and cable as described herein. Identify each conductor with its
circuit number or other designation indicated.
C.
Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway:
1.
2.
Pull conductors into raceway at same time.
Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.
D. Special Techniques - Cable:
1.
2.
E.
Special Techniques - Wiring Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal plastic cable
ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on
ceiling panels.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of
insulation rating of conductor.
Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices
and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
Install solid conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Do not place bare stranded
conductors directly under screws.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
G. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device,
such as circuit breakers.
H. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install
2-hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars.
I.
3.3
For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or
when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for
dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit.
WIRE COLOR
A. General: All power and branch circuit conductors shall be provided with color-coded
insulation or color-coded self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide. Vinyl tape shall be used in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes and handholes.
Identify the source and circuit number of each set of conductors with write-on tags.
B.
3.4
Colors: Color coding shall be as follows:
Phase
208Y/120V
480Y/277V
A
Black
Brown
B
Red
Orange
C
Blue
Yellow
Neutral
White
White with Black Stripe
Ground
Green
Green
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 27 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Designers:
1.
2.
B.
C.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial
Power Systems.
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic
Equipment.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
Rod electrodes.
Wire.
Grounding well components.
Mechanical connectors.
Exothermic connections.
Metal underground water pipe.
Metal building frame.
Concrete-encased electrode.
Rod electrode.
Plate electrode.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 27 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
1.9
1.10
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding
electrodes.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
B.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original packaging.
C.
Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and
multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 27 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.1
ROD ELECTRODES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Material: Copper-clad steel.
Diameter: 3/4 inch
Length: 10 feet
Connector: Connector for exothermic welded connection.
WIRE
A.
Material: Stranded copper.
B.
Foundation Electrodes: 5 AWG.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
D.
Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS
A.
Well Pipe: 8 inches NPS (DN200) by 24 inches long fiberglass pipe with belled end.
B.
Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.5
Erico, Inc.
O-Z Gedney Co.
Thomas & Betts.
Erico, Inc.
ILSCO Corporation
O-Z Gedney Co.
Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in
configurations required for particular installation.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A.
Manufacturers:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 27 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
B.
Copperweld, Inc.
ILSCO Corporation
O-Z Gedney Co.
Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and
making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install rod electrodes as required. Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified
resistance to ground.
B.
Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
C.
Install grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top flush
with finished grade.
D.
Install 4/0 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing.
E.
Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation
footing.
F.
Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
G.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder
and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
H.
Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as
grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground
by means of driven rods or buried electrodes.
I.
Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including
service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter
enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current
carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
J.
Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 27 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal
enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on
terminations at panelboards with installed number 12 conductor to grounding bus.
K.
Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
L.
The Ufer ground grounding electrode shall consist of a 50-foot length of bare #4/0 copper
wire extended its full length below ground level and embedded along the bottom of the
concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the foundation earth and
supported in such a manner that it cannot be less than 3 inches from the bottom or side of
the concrete when the foundation concrete is poured.
A loop at the approximate center of this grounding electrode shall be brought out at the
top of the foundation and a #4/0 copper ground conductor shall connect the ground
electrode to the main ground electrode bus in the equipment room. The conductor shall
be connected to the ground electrode by exothermic welding.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.13.
C.
Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
D.
Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.
E.
Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
F.
When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and
correct.
G.
Perform retest.
END OF SECTION 26 05 27
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 27 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 30 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Conduit supports.
Formed steel channel.
Spring steel clips.
Sleeves.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Firestopping relating to electrical work.
Firestopping accessories.
Equipment bases and supports.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
FM Global:
1.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved
By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire
Stops.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
1.6
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or
assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest
movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
WH - Certification Listings.
Firestopping Materials: Achieve fire ratings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1
hour fire rating.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable code FM, UL, and WH for fire resistance ratings
and surface burning characteristics.
B.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load
capacity.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria.
C.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating
items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance
rating of adjacent assembly.
D.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and
supports.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
2.
F.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814
with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve
fire F-Ratings and temperature T¬Ratings, but not less than 1-hour.
1.
2.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings, but not less than 1-hour.
Floor and roof penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings , but not
less than 1-hour.
a.
B.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies:
Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1.
2.
1.8
1.9
Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating
items connecting maximum of three stories.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for
penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
C.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or
UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating for assembly in which joint is installed.
D.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10
inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant
rating for floor assembly.
E.
Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
G.
Comply with CBC Seismic and Gravity Design Criteria.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
B.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient
air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after
installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
B.
Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running
threads.
C.
Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or
hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D.
Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single
bolt to tighten.
E.
Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
F.
Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self
locking.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Powerstrut.
Unistrut.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Unistrut Corp.
Powerstrut.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
SLEEVES
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B.
Sleeves for conduits through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized
steel.
C.
Sleeves for conduits through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially
Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18gage thick galvanized steel.
D.
Sleeves for conduits through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing:
1.
E.
2.4
Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
2.5
Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
NMP Corporation.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve,
connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand
when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Dow Corning Corp.
Hilti Corp.
3M fire Protection Products
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are
acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance
requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone
elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated
compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing
insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with
incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
6.
7.
C.
2.6
jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on
exposure to surface heat gain.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
Color: Dark gray
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces
and suitable for required fire ratings.
B.
Dam Material: Permanent:
1.
2.
3.
Mineral fiberboard.
Mineral fiber matting.
Sheet metal.
C.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and
other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D.
General:
1.
2.
E.
Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
2.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or
ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.3
B.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D.
Obtain permission from Designer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
F.
Obtain permission from Designer before drilling or cutting structural members.
INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts systems, expansion
anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts.
Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps with spring steel clips, steel
ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners.
Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and
hollow wall fasteners.
Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts.
Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.
Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
Inserts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
C.
Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.
D.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E.
Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F.
Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install
spring lock washers under nuts.
Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
4.
3.4
panelboards 1 inch off wall.
Support vertical conduit at every floor.
INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING
A.
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and
substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke
rating, to uniform density and texture.
D.
Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
E.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and
spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F.
Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
G.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. Dam material to remain.
H.
Fire Rated Surface:
1.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Where cable tray and conduits penetrate fire rated surface, install firestopping
product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
a.
3.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) on both sides of building element.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve
and building element.
Pack void with backing material.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to
meet fire rating of structure penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling, and roof opening as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) on both sides of building element.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve
and building element.
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
4.
5.
3.5
3.6
3.7
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 12 inches
beyond supported equipment.
B.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
C.
Construct supports of steel members or formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with
flanges bolted to structure.
INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A.
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B.
Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C.
Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E.
Extend sleeves through floors 1inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F.
Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between
conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide
close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
G.
Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.8
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
CLEANING
A.
3.9
Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates
non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with
finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.
Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to
size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 26 05 30
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 10
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 30 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Conduit supports.
Formed steel channel.
Spring steel clips.
Sleeves.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Firestopping relating to electrical work.
Firestopping accessories.
Equipment bases and supports.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
FM Global:
1.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved
By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire
Stops.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
1.6
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or
assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest
movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
WH - Certification Listings.
Firestopping Materials: Achieve fire ratings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1
hour fire rating.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable code FM, UL, and WH for fire resistance ratings
and surface burning characteristics.
B.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load
capacity.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria.
C.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating
items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance
rating of adjacent assembly.
D.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and
supports.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
2.
F.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814
with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve
fire F-Ratings and temperature T¬Ratings, but not less than 1-hour.
1.
2.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings, but not less than 1-hour.
Floor and roof penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings , but not
less than 1-hour.
a.
B.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies:
Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1.
2.
1.8
1.9
Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating
items connecting maximum of three stories.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for
penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
C.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or
UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating for assembly in which joint is installed.
D.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10
inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant
rating for floor assembly.
E.
Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
G.
Comply with CBC Seismic and Gravity Design Criteria.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
B.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient
air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after
installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Powerstrut.
Unistrut.
B.
Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running
threads.
C.
Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or
hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D.
Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single
bolt to tighten.
E.
Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted
conduits.
F.
Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self
locking.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Unistrut Corp.
Powerstrut.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.3
SLEEVES
A.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B.
Sleeves for conduits through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized
steel.
C.
Sleeves for conduits through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially
Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18gage thick galvanized steel.
D.
Sleeves for conduits through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing:
1.
E.
2.4
Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
2.5
Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
NMP Corporation.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve,
connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand
when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Dow Corning Corp.
Hilti Corp.
3M fire Protection Products
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are
acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance
requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone
elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated
compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing
insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.6
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with
incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel
jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on
exposure to surface heat gain.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
Color: Dark gray
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces
and suitable for required fire ratings.
B.
Dam Material: Permanent:
1.
2.
3.
Mineral fiberboard.
Mineral fiber matting.
Sheet metal.
C.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and
other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D.
General:
1.
2.
E.
Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
2.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or
ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
PREPARATION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.3
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D.
Obtain permission from Designer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
F.
Obtain permission from Designer before drilling or cutting structural members.
INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts systems, expansion
anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts.
Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps with spring steel clips, steel
ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners.
Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts
and hollow wall fasteners.
Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts.
Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.
Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
Inserts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
C.
Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.
D.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E.
Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F.
Supports:
1.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
3.4
spring lock washers under nuts.
Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and
panelboards 1 inch off wall.
Support vertical conduit at every floor.
INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING
A.
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and
substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke
rating, to uniform density and texture.
D.
Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
E.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and
spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F.
Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
G.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. Dam material to remain.
H.
Fire Rated Surface:
1.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Where cable tray and conduits penetrate fire rated surface, install firestopping
product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
a.
3.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) on both sides of building element.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve
and building element.
Pack void with backing material.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to
meet fire rating of structure penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling, and roof opening as
follows:
a.
b.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) on both sides of building element.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 8
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
c.
4.
5.
3.5
3.6
3.7
and building element.
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates
non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with
finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.
Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to
size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
Construct concreteProvide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches above the
finished floorthick and not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than theextending
12 inches beyond supported equipment. Use 3000 psi, 28-day compressive-strength
concrete. Pads shall be reinforced with #4 steel reinforcing rods.
B.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
C.
Construct supports of steel members or formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with
flanges bolted to structure.
INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A.
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B.
Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C.
Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E.
Extend sleeves through floors 1inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F.
Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between
conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide
close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
G.
Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 9
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.8
CLEANING
A.
3.9
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 26 05 30
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 30 - 10
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 33-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and
junction boxes, and handholes.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes at locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in
approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B.
Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide concrete encased PVC
Schedule 40 conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic pullboxes.
NOTE: All permanent underground conduits shall be concrete encased.
C.
Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit, plastic coated
conduit or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, plastic coated conduit or thickwall
nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.
E.
Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Electrical metallic
tubing may be used in areas 10’ above finished grade. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic
outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
NOTE: For conduit at all tug drives, provide rigid galvanized steel with galvanized
supports. EMT conduit is not allowed at tug drives.
F.
In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, electrical metallic tubing and thickwall
nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast sheet metal nonmetallic boxes.
G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Provide cast metal or
nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished
areas.
H. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Electrical metallic tubing may
be used 10’ above finished grade. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet
box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
I.
Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes.
Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull
boxes.
NOTE: EMT conduit is restricted to interior use only. PVC conduit is restricted to
underground use and shall be concrete encased.
1.4
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data - Submit for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Nonmetallic conduit.
Raceway fittings.
Conduit bodies.
Surface raceway.
Wireway.
Pull and junction boxes.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of
Product.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Wheatland Tube.
Thomas & Betts.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.2
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Ocal-Blue.
Permacote.
Plastibond.
B.
Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil
thick.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match
conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
AFC Cable.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Thomas & Betts.
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
AFC Cable.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
2.5
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Thomas & Betts.
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Allied Tube Corp.
Wheatland Tube.
Thomas & Betts.
B.
Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
PW Eagle.
Carlon Electrical Products.
Raco.
B.
Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Walker Systems Inc.
The Wiremold Co.
B.
Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal
raceway.
C.
Finish: Gray or Buff enamel. Stainless steel.
D. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match
finish on raceway.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.8
WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Hubbell.
Walker Systems Inc.
The Wiremold Co.
B.
Product Description: General purpose, Oiltight and dust-tight, Raintight type wireway.
C.
Cover: Hinged or Screw cover.
D. Connector: Slip-in or Flanged.
2.9
E.
Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws drip shield.
F.
Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1.
2.
C.
Raco.
Appleton.
Steel City.
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;
furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
D. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Raco.
Appleton.
Steel City.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. NEMA 4 for exterior.
C.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
3.2
EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B.
Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway
is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring
access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.3
E.
Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F.
Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes.
B.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes.
C.
Identify raceway and boxes.
D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
NOTE: All conduit shall be concealed from public view unless approved by LAWA.
3.4
INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete
wiring system.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C.
Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;
provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
E.
Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
F.
Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel.
H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
NOTE: Conduit routed at 45 degree angles is not allowed at any time.
I.
Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
K. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
L.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
M. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
N. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
O. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
P.
Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
Q. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies
to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to
fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
R.
Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
S.
Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic,
control and expansion joints.
T.
Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
V. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to
surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to
outlets and corner fittings.
W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
NOTE: All conduit shall be routed above any mechanical ductwork not below.
3.5
INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in
section for outlet device.
B.
Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E.
In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches
separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
I.
Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
J.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.6
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
C.
Locate outlet boxes within 6’ of luminaires.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.7
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B.
3.8
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
NOTE: Refer to Identification for Electrical Systems for information pertaining to
conduit labeling.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 33-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and
junction boxes, and handholes.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes at locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in
approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B.
Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide concrete encased PVC
Schedule 40 conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic pull boxes.
NOTE: All permanent underground conduits shall be concrete encased.
C.
Underground within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit, plastic coated
conduit or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab, on Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, plastic coated conduit or thickwall
nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
E.
In Slab, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, electrical metallic tubing or thickwall
nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
F.
Wet Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Provide cast metal or
nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished
areas.
G. Damp Locations: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic
outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. These
locations include, but are not limited to, areas underneath buildings open to the outdoor
environment.
H. Dry Locations, Exposed and Concealed: Provide electrical metallic tubing conduit. Rigid
galvanized steel conduit shall be used in areas subject to physical damage. Provide sheetmetal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
I.
1.4
PVC conduit is restricted to underground use and shall be concrete encased.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data - Submit for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Nonmetallic conduit.
Raceway fittings.
Conduit bodies.
Surface raceway.
Wireway.
Pull and junction boxes.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of
Product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
Republic Conduit.
Wheatland Tube.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
1.
2.2
Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
b. O-Z/Gedney.
c. Thomas & Betts.
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Ocal-Blue.
Permacote.
Plastibond.
B.
Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil
thick.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match
conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
1.
2.4
AFC Cable.
Electri-Flex.
Southwire Co.
Manufacturers:
a. AFC Cable.
b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
c. Thomas & Betts.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable.
2. Electri-Flex.
3. Southwire Co.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
1.
2.5
Manufacturers:
a. AFC Cable.
b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
c. Thomas & Betts.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.
1.
2.6
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Republic Conduit.
Wheatland Tube.
Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
b. O-Z/Gedney.
c. Thomas & Betts.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cantex.
JW Eagle.
B.
Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Walker Systems Inc.
The Wiremold Co.
Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal
raceway.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
C.
Finish: Gray or Buff enamel. Stainless steel.
D. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match
finish on raceway.
2.8
WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cooper B-Line.
Hubbell.
Walker Systems Inc.
B.
Product Description: General purpose, Oiltight and dust-tight, Raintight type wireway.
C.
Cover: Hinged or Screw cover.
D. Connector: Slip-in or Flanged.
2.9
E.
Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws drip shield.
F.
Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1.
2.
C.
Appleton.
Raco.
Steel City.
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;
furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
D. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Appleton.
Raco.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.
Steel City.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. NEMA 4 for exterior.
C.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
3.2
EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B.
Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway
is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring
access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.3
E.
Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F.
Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes.
B.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes.
C.
Identify raceway and boxes.
D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
NOTE: All conduit shall be concealed from public view unless approved by LAWA.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.4
INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete
wiring system.
B.
Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C.
Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;
provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
E.
Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
F.
Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel.
H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
NOTE: Conduit routed at 45 degree angles is not allowed at any time.
I.
Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
K. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
L.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
M. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
N. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
O. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
P.
Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
Q. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies
to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to
fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
R.
Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
S.
Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic,
control and expansion joints.
T.
Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
V. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to
surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to
outlets and corner fittings.
W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
NOTE: All conduit shall be routed above any mechanical ductwork not below.
3.5
INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in
section for outlet device.
B.
Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E.
In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches
separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
I.
Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
J.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 8
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.6
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
C.
Locate outlet boxes within 6’ of luminaires.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.7
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B.
3.8
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
NOTE: Refer to Identification for Electrical Systems for information pertaining to
conduit labeling.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 9
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 34-FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes floor boxes; floor box service fittings; and access floor boxes.
NOTE: Verify the existing floor assembly construction and its ability to
accommodate any additional floor penetrations without compromising structural
integrity and any required fire rating.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
1.3
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for floor boxes service fittings.
B.
1.4
Samples: Submit two of each service fitting illustrating size, material, configuration, and
finish.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each floor box and poke-through
fitting.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 34 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOTE: Pedestal type and poke thru type boxes are not allowed without written
LAWA approval.
2.1
FLOOR BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Wiremold Co.
Walker, Inc.
Hubbell.
B.
Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Adjustability: Fully adjustable or semi-adjustable.
D. Material: Cast metal or Formed steel.
2.2
FLUSH-COVER-TYPE COMBINATION FITTING
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Walker, Inc.
Wiremold Co.
Material: Brass or Aluminum.
NOTE: The specified material for the floor box cover shall be aesthetically
compatible with the adjacent floor finish and be approved by LAWA.
2.3
FLUSH-COVER-SERVICE FITTING ACCESSORIES
A. Protective Ring: Brass or Aluminum finish.
2.4
B.
Split Nozzle: Brass or Aluminum finish.
C.
Carpet Ring: Brass or Aluminum finish.
ACCESS FLOOR BOX
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Wiremold, Inc.
Tate.
Thomas & Betts Steel City.
FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 34 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: Sheet metal box suitable for mounting in access floor system.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
NOTE: In order to avoid severing any existing structural reinforcement, use
ground penetrating radar to survey the existing concrete slab before cutting or
drilling any new floor penetrations.
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices, and work areas prior to rough-in.
B.
3.2
Verify openings in access floor are in proper locations.
EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect abandoned service fitting devices and remove service fittings. Fill in hole for
abandoned floor boxes. Remove abandoned boxes, fill in hole and restore to adjacent finished
area.
B.
Maintain access to existing floor boxes remaining active and requiring access. Modify
installation or provide access panel.
C.
Extend existing service fitting installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing electrical installations, or as specified.
D. Clean and repair existing service fittings to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Floor Box Requirements: Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel
boxes are acceptable for other installations.
B.
Set floor boxes aligned with adjacent floor finish.
NOTE: When aligning floor boxes note that most of the existing floor within the
terminals are not level. Align all new floor boxes totally flush with the adjacent floor
finish on all sides.
C.
Install boxes and fittings to preserve fire resistance rating of slabs and other elements, using
materials and methods.
FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 34 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
3.5
CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
END OF SECTION 26 05 34
FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 34 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 44 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
1.3
Ducts in concrete-encased duct banks.
Handholds and hand hole accessories.
Manholes and manhole accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C2
B.
NFPA 70
C.
City of Los Angeles Electrical Code (LAEC)
D.
ASTM 478
E.
UL 651
F.
NEMA TC-2, TC-3
G.
ASTM 615
H.
ASTM C990
I.
AASHTO HS20
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Manhole and hand hole hardware.
Conduit and ducts, including elbows, bell ends, bends, fittings, and solvent
cement.
Duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.
Warning tape. Detectable type.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for underground ducts and
utility structures and include the following:
1.
For manholes:
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
For precast manholes and hand holes, Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed
by a qualified Professional Engineer, and shall show the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
1.5
Duct sizes and locations of duct entries.
Reinforcement details.
Manholes cover design and engraving.
Step details.
Grounding details.
Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in irons, and sumps.
Construction of individual segments.
Joint details.
Design calculations.
C.
Coordination Detailing Activity Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with
other utilities and underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale,
and show all bends and location of expansion fittings.
D.
Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in underground precast manholes,
according to ASTM C 858.
E.
Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manholes with ASTM C 857 and ASTM
C 858, based on factory inspection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the LAWA’s Representative,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with ANSI C2.
C.
Comply with California Electric Code (NFPA 70) and City of Los Angeles Electrical
Code (LAEC).
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B.
Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
physical damage.
C.
Arrange so identification markings are visible.
D.
Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied facilities unless permitted
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
1.7
1.8
Comply with LAWA power shut-down procedures.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without LAWA’s Representative
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final
arrangement of other utilities and site grading, as determined in the field.
B.
Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes
with final profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and
underground obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as
required to suit field conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes,
and as approved by the LAWA Representative.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
B.
Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities
equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Jensen Precast.
Utility Vault Co.
Brooks
Frames and Covers:
a.
Alhambra Foundry
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
b.
c.
3.
Nonmetallic Ducts and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching
fittings by the same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL
514B.
HAND HOLES
A.
Cast-Metal Boxes: Cast aluminum, with outside flanges and recessed, gasketed cover
for flush mounting and with nonskid finish and legend on cover. Unit, when buried,
shall be designed to support AASHTO H10 loading for sidewalk and landscaped areas
and HS20 for roadways, parking lots and loading docks.
B.
Precast Handholes: Reinforced concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom, with
steel frame and access door assembly as the top of hand hole. Duct entrances and
windows shall be located near corners to facilitate racking. Pulling-in irons and other
built-in items shall be installed before pouring concrete. Cover shall have nonskid finish
and legend. Unit, when buried, shall be designed to support AASHTO H10 loading for
sidewalk and landscaped areas and HS20 for roadways, parking lots and loading docks.
Cover Legend: All underground pullbox covers shall have the following cast-in or bead
welded and galvanized identification label permanently affixed to the exterior:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Carlon Electrical Products.
Cantex, Inc.
Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
DUCTS
A.
2.3
Campbell Foundry Co.
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
“ELEC-LV” for electrical power circuits 600 volts or less.
“ELEC-HV” for electrical power circuits over circuits over 600 volts.
“COMM” for communications circuits. A custom 3-digit number shall be added
to the cover.
Contact the LAWA Engineer for number assignment. The minimum letter height
shall be one (1) inch.
PRECAST MANHOLES
A.
Precast Units: Interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and
features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve
for ground rod.
B.
Entry way diameter: 36 inches minimum.
C.
Design and fabricate structure according to ASTM C 858.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.5
D.
Structural Design Loading: ASTM C 857, Class A-16 (AASHTO HS20).
E.
Base section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
F.
Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide required depth.
G.
Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Custom configuration for
eccentric manhole locations to align with corridors.
H.
Steps: ASTM A 615, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D
4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to
prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch
intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than
36 inches. Adjust to custom manhole locations.
I.
Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of
manhole frame and cover.
J.
Joint Sealant:
K.
Protective Coating: Plant-applied, coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15-mil minimum
thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces.
L.
Source Quality Control: Inspect structures according to ASTM C 1037.
M.
Provide custom top section for offset manhole location for alignment with corridor for
below building installation.
N.
Access Ladder: Provide permanent metal access ladder.
ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Duct Spacers: Rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected to provide minimum duct
spacings and cover depths indicated while supporting ducts during concreting and
backfilling; produced by the same manufacturer as the ducts.
B.
Manhole Frames and Covers: Comply with AASHTO loading specified for manhole;
Ferrous frame 36 inch clear ID by 6 inch minimum riser with 4-inch-minimum width
flange and 38 -inch-diameter cover.
1.
All manhole and underground pullbox covers shall have the following cast-in or
bead welded and galvanized identification label permanently affixed to the
exterior:
a.
b.
“ELEC-LV” for electrical power circuits 600 volts or less.
“ELEC-HV” for electrical power circuits over circuits over 600 volts.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
c.
d.
2.
3.
“COMM” for communications circuits.
A custom 3-digit number shall be added to the cover. Contact the LAWA
Engineer for number assignment. The minimum letter height shall be one
(1) inch.
Cast iron with cast-in legend as indicated above subsection 1. Milled
cover-to-frame bearing surfaces.
Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 48; Class 30B gray iron, 36-inch size,
machine-finished with flat bearing surfaces.
C.
Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48, Class 30B gray cast iron.
D.
Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert 2-inch- diameter
eye and 1-by-4¬inch bolt.
1.
E.
Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8-inch- diameter, hot-dip-galvanized, bent steel
rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular
opening.
1.
F.
Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch, 4000-psi Concrete: 13,000-lbf minimum
tension.
Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf shear and 60,000-lbf tension.
Bolting Inserts for Cable Stanchions: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive,
chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch ID by 2-3/4 inches
deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches minimum at base.
1.
Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf minimum.
G.
Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated,
carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch bolt, 5300-lbf
rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf rated shear strength.
H.
Cable Stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dip-galvanized, T-section steel; 2-1/4-inch size;
punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch centers for cable-arm attachment.
I.
Cable Arms: 3/16-inch- thick, hot-rolled, hot-dip-galvanized, steel sheet pressed to
channel shape; 12 inches wide by 14 inches long and arranged for secure mounting in
horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions.
J.
Cable-Support Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on
cable arms.
K.
Duct-Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for contact with human skin, not
deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F.
Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F without slump and of adhering to
clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry,
lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
L.
2.6
Warning Tape: Provide underground-line warning tape specified under section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A.
Seal manhole section joints with sealing compound recommended by the manhole
manufacturer.
B.
Damp proofing: Comply with "Bituminous Damp proofing."
C.
Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft.
where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.
D.
Brick for Manhole Chimney: Sewer and manhole brick, ASTM C 32, Grade MS.
E.
Concrete: Use 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength and 1-inch maximum
aggregate size.
F.
Provide red dye added to concrete during batching.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Underground Ducts for Electrical Cables Higher than 600 V: Type EPC-40-PVC,
concrete-encased duct bank.
B.
Manholes: Underground precast concrete utility structures.
C.
Manholes: Cast-in-place concrete.
EARTHWORK
A.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Soil compaction at all locations shall be as specified by civil
and structural specifications.
B.
Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding,
sodding, sprigging, and mulching.
C.
Restore disturbed pavement.
CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Exercise care in excavating, trenching, and working near existing utilities. Locate any
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
existing buried utilities before excavating.
B.
Duct bank trench shall be shored, framed and braced for installing ducts. Frames, forms,
and braces shall be either wood or steel. Variations in outside dimensions of the installed
duct bank shall not exceed 2 inches on the vertical or the horizontal from the design.
Remove forms and bracing after 24 hours and before backfilling.
C.
Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and
away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two
manholes to drain in both directions. Duct banks shall be laid to a minimum grade slope
of 4 inches per 100 feet. This slope may be from one manhole to the next or both ways
from a high point between manholes, depending upon the contour of the finished grade.
D.
Duct banks shall be installed so that the top of the concrete encasement shall be no less
than 36 inches below grade or pavement for primary power. As a general rule, depths
shall be a minimum of three feet, but not more than six feet.
E.
Curves and Bends: Use manufactured 48 inches minimum elbows for stub-ups at
equipment, and enclosures, and at building entrances. Use manufactured long sweep
bends with a minimum radius of 4 feet minimum, both horizontally and vertically, at
other locations. Manufactured long radius bends may be used in runs of 100 feet or less
on approval from the LAWA’s representative. Vertical feeder sweep into buildings shall
be coated steel. Multiple conduit sweeps shall be concentric and maintain spacing
throughout. Medium-voltage conduit sweeps shall be 12’ minimum radius sweeps.
F.
Use solvent-cement joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not
lie in the same plane.
G.
Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 10 inches
o.c. for 5-inch ducts and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. Change from regular
spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and
without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into manhole walls from both sides to
provide watertight entrances. Where connection to bulkhead of duct bank is made to
vaults or existing duct banks, the concrete encasement shall be doweled with on No. 4
reinforcement rod 36 inches long per conduit to the existing encasement.
H.
Building Entrances: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit 5
feet outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for this purpose. Follow the
appropriate installation instructions below:
1.
2.
Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcement in duct banks passing through
disturbed earth near buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with
structural design to support duct bank at wall without reducing structural or
watertight integrity of building wall. Expand duct bank at building entry to
provide 6” spacing between sealing system sleeves. Coordinate sleeve placement
with structural reinforcement bar placement.
Provide methane penetration EYS sealing fitting at each conduit penetration into
building – both vertical and horizontal. Arrange so that sealant parts remain
accessible.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.
Waterproofed Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install a watertight entrance-sealing
device with sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry
construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing
to the device to make permanently watertight. Seals shall be Link Seal
Assembly with precast ‘CS” model – non-metallic sleeve by Link Seal or equal.
NOTE: All permanent underground ducts are to be concrete encased as described
herein.
I.
Concrete-Encased, Nonmetallic Ducts: Support ducts on duct spacers, spaced as
recommended by manufacturer and coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor
temperature. Install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Separator Installation: Space separators 6’-0” O.C. to prevent sagging and
deforming of ducts and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating
during concreting. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie
entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing
steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
Duct joints in concrete may be placed side by side horizontally, but shall be
staggered at least 6 inches vertically. Joints shall be made in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling
selected. In the absence of specific recommendations, plastic duct connections
shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on the inside of a plastic
coupling fitting and on the outside of duct’s ends. The duct and fitting shall then
be slipped together with a quick one-quarter turn to set the joint.
Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy
mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down
sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of
bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use
power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank
application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations
in one continuous operation. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each
pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18
inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. At
connection to manholes, dowel concrete encasement with on No. 4 reinforcing
bar 36 inches long per duct.
Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and
where indicated.
Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is
self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions;
otherwise, use forms.
Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior
envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between
power and signal ducts.
Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in no
traffic areas and at least 30 inches below finished grade in vehicular traffic areas,
unless otherwise indicated.
NOTE: Direct-Buried Ducts are for temporary construction only as determined
UNDERGROUNDbyDUCTS
LAWA.AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
J.
Direct-Buried Ducts: Support ducts on duct spacers, spaced as recommended by
manufacturer and coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.
Install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Separator Installation: Space separators not more than 4 feet center-to-center
along entire length of duct bank including top pipes.
Install expansion fittings as required.
Trench Bottom: Continuous, firm, and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare
trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
Backfill: Install backfill. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and
compact. Repeat backfilling after placing each tier. After placing last tier,
hand-place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill
around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only.
After placing controlled backfill over final tier, complete backfilling normally.
Do not place backfill for a period of at least 24 hours after pouring of concrete.
Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts for like services
and 6 inches between power and signal ducts.
Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
K.
Warning Tape: Bury metal backed warning tape approximately 12 inches above all
concrete-encased duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline
of duct bank.
L.
Stub-ups: Use rigid steel conduit for stub-ups to equipment. For equipment mounted
on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5 feet from edge of base.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts
with adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
Galvanized steel conduits installed below grade shall be painted with two coats of
Koppers Bitumastic paint before installing in ground.
M.
Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig
hydrostatic pressure.
N.
Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in all ducts, including spares. Identify
opposite terminal points of duct.
MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
Elevation: Install manholes with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. Install
handholes with depth as required. Cast hand hole cover frame directly into roof of hand
hole and set roof surface 1 inch above grade. Place and align precast manholes to provide
horizontal tolerance of 2 inches in any direction and vertical alignment with not greater
than 1/8 inch maximum tolerance for 6 foot of depth. Completed manhole shall be rigid,
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 10
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
true to dimensions and alignment, and shall be watertight.
B.
Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Coordinate with drainage
provisions indicated. Sumps shall be knocked out at time of installation.
C.
Access: Install cast-iron frame and cover.
1.
2.
Install precast collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover
with roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof
grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.
Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade. Set other
frames 1 inch above finished grade.
D.
Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has
cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before
backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars.
Waterproof exterior of manhole and hand hole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at
least three days. Seal manhole section joints with sealing compound recommended by the
manhole manufacturer. Penetration into manholes and/or boxes shall be sealed. Provide
conduit duct plugs for unused terminator openings of spare conduits in manhole. Do not
water seal top removable cover until cable pulling has been completed.
E.
Damp proofing: Apply damp proofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has
cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before
backfilling, damp proof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Damp
proof exterior of manhole and hand hole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least
three days.
F.
Interior walls and ceiling shall be primed and painted with two coats flat white paint.
G.
Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and
as indicated.
H.
Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for anchor bolts
installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.
I.
Grounding: Install ground rod through floor in each structure with top protruding 6
inches above floor.
1.
J.
Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof nonshrink grout.
Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare-copper ground
conductors. Train conductors neatly around corners. Use cable clamps secured
with expansion anchors to attach ground conductors.
Precast Concrete Manhole Installation:
1.
comply with ASTM C 891.
Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper
entrances.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 11
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
3.5
3.6
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a 12” level bed of crushed stone or
gravel, graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as
adjacent undisturbed earth. Provide a minimum 6-inch level base of ¾ inch
crushed rock under manhole to ensure uniform distribution of soil pressure on
floor.
Manholes below building floor shall have all earth work compacted to match
compaction required by structural specifications.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of
installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
B.
Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance .
C.
Duct Integrity: Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity
and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of the duct. If
obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
D.
Correct installations if possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective products and retest.
CLEANING
A.
Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of
ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading
lubricant throughout ducts.
B.
Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
C.
After the duct line has been completed, a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through
each duct to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the
line. (Mandrels not less than 12 inches long, having a diameter approximately 1/4 inch
less than inside diameter of the duct, shall be pulled through each duct). Leave a
3/8”-inch minimum polypropylene pull rope in each duct for future use.
END OF SECTION 26 05 44
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 12
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 44 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
1.3
Ducts in concrete-encased duct banks.
Handholds and hand hole accessories.
Manholes and manhole accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C2
B.
NFPA 70
C.
City of Los Angeles Electrical Code (LAEC)
D.
ASTM 478
E.
UL 651
F.
NEMA TC-2, TC-3
G.
ASTM 615
H.
ASTM C990
I.
AASHTO HS20
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Manhole and hand hole hardware.
Conduit and ducts, including elbows, bell ends, bends, fittings, and solvent
cement.
Duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.
Warning tape. Detectable type.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for underground ducts and
utility structures and include the following:
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.
For manholes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
For precast manholes and hand holes, Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed
by a qualified Professional Engineer, and shall show the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
1.5
Duct sizes and locations of duct entries.
Reinforcement details.
Manholes cover design and engraving.
Step details.
Grounding details.
Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in irons, and sumps.
Construction of individual segments.
Joint details.
Design calculations.
C.
Coordination Detailing Activity Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with
other utilities and underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale, and
show all bends and location of expansion fittings.
D.
Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in underground precast manholes,
according to ASTM C 858.
E.
Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manholes with ASTM C 857 and ASTM C
858, based on factory inspection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the LAWA’s Representative,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with ANSI C2.
C.
Comply with California Electric Code (NFPA 70) and City of Los Angeles Electrical
Code (LAEC).
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B.
Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
physical damage.
C.
Arrange so identification markings are visible.
D.
Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied facilities unless permitted
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
1.7
1.8
Comply with LAWA power shut-down procedures.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without LAWA’s Representative
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final
arrangement of other utilities and site grading, as determined in the field.
B.
Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes
with final profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and
underground obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as
required to suit field conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes,
and as approved by the LAWA Representative.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
B.
Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities
equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Jensen Precast.
Utility Vault Co.
Brooks
Frames and Covers:
a.
Alhambra Foundry
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
b.
c.
3.
Nonmetallic Ducts and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching
fittings by the same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL
514B.
HAND HOLES
A.
Cast-Metal Boxes: Cast aluminum, with outside flanges and recessed, gasketed cover for
flush mounting and with nonskid finish and legend on cover. Unit, when buried, shall be
designed to support AASHTO H10 loading for sidewalk and landscaped areas and HS20
for roadways, parking lots and loading docks.
B.
Precast Handholes: Reinforced concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom, with
steel frame and access door assembly as the top of hand hole. Duct entrances and
windows shall be located near corners to facilitate racking. Pulling-in irons and other
built-in items shall be installed before pouring concrete. Cover shall have nonskid finish
and legend. Unit, when buried, shall be designed to support AASHTO H10 loading for
sidewalk and landscaped areas and HS20 for roadways, parking lots and loading docks.
Cover Legend: All underground pull box covers shall have the following cast-in or bead
welded and galvanized identification label permanently affixed to the exterior:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Carlon Electrical Products.
Cantex, Inc.
Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
DUCTS
A.
2.3
Campbell Foundry Co.
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
“ELEC-LV” for electrical power circuits 600 volts or less.
“ELEC-HV” for electrical power circuits over circuits over 600 volts.
“COMM” for communications circuits. A custom 3-digit number shall be added
to the cover.
A custom 3-digit number shall be added to the cover. Contact the LAWA
Engineer for number assignment. The minimum letter height shall be one (1)
inch.
PRECAST MANHOLES
A.
Precast Units: Interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and
features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve
for ground rod.
B.
Entry way diameter: 36 inches minimum.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.5
C.
Design and fabricate structure according to ASTM C 858.
D.
Structural Design Loading: ASTM C 857, Class A-16 (AASHTO HS20).
E.
Base section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
F.
Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide required depth.
G.
Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Custom configuration for
eccentric manhole locations to align with corridors.
H.
Steps: ASTM A 615, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D
4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to
prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch
intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than
36 inches. Adjust to custom manhole locations.
I.
Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover.
J.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
K.
Protective Coating: Plant-applied, coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15-mil minimum
thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces.
L.
Source Quality Control: Inspect structures according to ASTM C 1037.
M.
Provide custom top section for offset manhole location for alignment with corridor for
below building installation.
N.
Access Ladder: Provide permanent metal access ladder.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Duct Spacers: Rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected to provide minimum duct
spacings and cover depths indicated while supporting ducts during concreting and
backfilling; produced by the same manufacturer as the ducts.
B.
Manhole Frames and Covers: Comply with AASHTO loading specified for manhole;
Ferrous frame 36 inch clear ID by 6 inch minimum riser with 4-inch-minimum width
flange and 38 -inch-diameter cover.
1.
All manhole and underground pullbox covers shall have the following cast-in or
bead welded and galvanized identification label permanently affixed to the
exterior:
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
“ELEC-LV” for electrical power circuits 600 volts or less.
“ELEC-HV” for electrical power circuits over circuits over 600 volts.
“COMM” for communications circuits.
A custom 3-digit number shall be added to the cover. Contact the LAWA
Engineer for number assignment. The minimum letter height shall be one
(1) inch.
Cast iron with cast-in legend as indicated above subsection 1. Milled cover-toframe bearing surfaces.
Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 48; Class 30B gray iron, 36-inch size,
machine-finished with flat bearing surfaces.
C.
Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48, Class 30B gray cast iron.
D.
Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert 2-inch- diameter eye
and 1-by-4¬inch bolt.
1.
E.
Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8-inch- diameter, hot-dip-galvanized, bent steel rod;
stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular
opening.
1.
F.
Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch, 4000-psi Concrete: 13,000-lbf minimum
tension.
Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf shear and 60,000-lbf tension.
Bolting Inserts for Cable Stanchions: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive,
chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch ID by 2-3/4 inches
deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches minimum at base.
1.
Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf minimum.
G.
Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steelwedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch bolt, 5300-lbf rated pullout
strength, and minimum 6800-lbf rated shear strength.
H.
Cable Stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dip-galvanized, T-section steel; 2-1/4-inch size;
punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch centers for cable-arm attachment.
I.
Cable Arms: 3/16-inch- thick, hot-rolled, hot-dip-galvanized, steel sheet pressed to
channel shape; 12 inches wide by 14 inches long and arranged for secure mounting in
horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions.
J.
Cable-Support Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on
cable arms.
K.
Duct-Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for contact with human skin, not
deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F.
Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F without slump and of adhering to
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry,
lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.
L.
2.6
Warning Tape: Provide underground-line warning tape specified under section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A.
Seal manhole section joints with sealing compound recommended by the manhole
manufacturer.
B.
Damp proofing: Comply with "Bituminous Damp proofing."
C.
Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft.
where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.
D.
Brick for Manhole Chimney: Sewer and manhole brick, ASTM C 32, Grade MS.
E.
Concrete: Use 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength and 1-inch maximum
aggregate size.
F.
Provide red dye added to concrete during batching.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Underground Ducts for Electrical Cables Higher than 600 V: Type EPC-40-PVC,
concrete-encased duct bank.
B.
Manholes: Underground precast concrete utility structures.
C.
Manholes: Cast-in-place concrete.
EARTHWORK
A.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Soil compaction at all locations shall be as specified by civil
and structural specifications.
B.
Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding,
sodding, sprigging, and mulching.
C.
Restore disturbed pavement.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.3
CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Exercise care in excavating, trenching, and working near existing utilities. Locate any
existing buried utilities before excavating.
B.
Duct bank trench shall be shored, framed and braced for installing ducts. Frames, forms,
and braces shall be either wood or steel. Variations in outside dimensions of the installed
duct bank shall not exceed 2 inches on the vertical or the horizontal from the design.
Remove forms and bracing after 24 hours and before backfilling.
C.
Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and
away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two
manholes to drain in both directions. Duct banks shall be laid to a minimum grade slope
of 4 inches per 100 feet. This slope may be from one manhole to the next or both ways
from a high point between manholes, depending upon the contour of the finished grade.
D.
Duct banks shall be installed so that the top of the concrete encasement shall be no less
than 36 inches below grade or pavement for primary power. As a general rule, depths
shall be a minimum of three feet, but not more than six feet.
E.
Curves and Bends: Use manufactured 48 inches minimum elbows for stub-ups at
equipment, and enclosures, and at building entrances. Use manufactured long sweep
bends with a minimum radius of 4 feet minimum, both horizontally and vertically, at
other locations. Manufactured long radius bends may be used in runs of 100 feet or less
on approval from the LAWA’s representative. Vertical feeder sweep into buildings shall
be coated steel. Multiple conduit sweeps shall be concentric and maintain spacing
throughout. Medium-voltage conduit sweeps shall be 12’ minimum radius sweeps.
F.
Use solvent-cement joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not
lie in the same plane.
G.
Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 10 inches
o.c. for 5-inch ducts and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. Change from regular
spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope
and without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into manhole walls from both
sides to provide watertight entrances. Where connection to bulkhead of duct bank is
made to vaults or existing duct banks, the concrete encasement shall be doweled with on
No. 4 reinforcement rod 36 inches long per conduit to the existing encasement.
H.
Building Entrances: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit 5
feet outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for this purpose. Follow the
appropriate installation instructions below:
1.
Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcement in duct banks passing through
disturbed earth near buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with
structural design to support duct bank at wall without reducing structural or
watertight integrity of building wall. Expand duct bank at building entry to
provide 6” spacing between sealing system sleeves. Coordinate sleeve placement
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 8
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.
3.
with structural reinforcement bar placement.
Provide methane penetration EYS sealing fitting at each conduit penetration into
building – both vertical and horizontal. Arrange so that sealant parts remain
accessible.
Waterproofed Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install a watertight entrance-sealing
device with sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry
construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing
to the device to make permanently watertight. Seals shall be Link Seal
Assembly with precast ‘CS” model – non-metallic sleeve by Link Seal or equal.
NOTE: All permanent underground ducts are to be concrete encased as described
herein.
I.
Concrete-Encased, Nonmetallic Ducts: Support ducts on duct spacers, spaced as
recommended by manufacturer and coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor
temperature. Install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Separator Installation: Space separators 6’-0” O.C. to prevent sagging and
deforming of ducts and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating
during concreting. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie
entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing
steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
Duct joints in concrete may be placed side by side horizontally, but shall be
staggered at least 6 inches vertically. Joints shall be made in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling
selected. In the absence of specific recommendations, plastic duct connections
shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on the inside of a plastic
coupling fitting and on the outside of duct’s ends. The duct and fitting shall then
be slipped together with a quick one-quarter turn to set the joint.
Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy
mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down
sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of
bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use powerdriven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank
application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations
in one continuous operation. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each
pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18
inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. At
connection to manholes, dowel concrete encasement with on No. 4 reinforcing
bar 36 inches long per duct.
Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and
where indicated.
Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is selfsupporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions;
otherwise, use forms.
Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior
envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 9
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
7.
power and signal ducts.
Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in no
traffic areas and at least 30 inches below finished grade in vehicular traffic areas,
unless otherwise indicated.
NOTE: Direct-Buried Ducts are for temporary construction only as determined
by LAWA.
J.
Direct-Buried Ducts: Support ducts on duct spacers, spaced as recommended by
manufacturer and coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.
Install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Separator Installation: Space separators not more than 4 feet center-to-center
along entire length of duct bank including top pipes.
Install expansion fittings as required.
Trench Bottom: Continuous, firm, and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare
trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
Backfill: Install backfill. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and
compact. Repeat backfilling after placing each tier. After placing last tier, handplace backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around
ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After
placing controlled backfill over final tier, complete backfilling normally. Do not
place backfill for a period of at least 24 hours after pouring of concrete.
Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts for like services
and 6 inches between power and signal ducts.
Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
K.
Warning Tape: Bury metal backed warning tape approximately 12 inches above all
concrete-encased duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline
of duct bank.
L.
Stub-ups: Use rigid steel conduit for stub-ups to equipment. For equipment mounted on
outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5 feet from edge of base.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts with
adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
Galvanized steel conduits installed below grade shall be painted with two coats of
Koppers Bitumastic paint before installing in ground.
M.
Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15psig hydrostatic pressure.
N.
Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in all ducts, including spares. Identify
opposite terminal points of duct.
MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE INSTALLATION
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 10
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
A.
Elevation: Install manholes with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. Install
handholes with depth as required. Cast hand hole cover frame directly into roof of hand
hole and set roof surface 1 inch above grade. Place and align precast manholes to provide
horizontal tolerance of 2 inches in any direction and vertical alignment with not greater
than 1/8 inch maximum tolerance for 6 foot of depth. Completed manhole shall be rigid,
true to dimensions and alignment, and shall be watertight.
B.
Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Coordinate with drainage
provisions indicated. Sumps shall be knocked out at time of installation.
C.
Access: Install cast-iron frame and cover.
1.
2.
Install precast collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover
with roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof
grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.
Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade. Set other
frames 1 inch above finished grade.
D.
Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has
cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before
backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars.
Waterproof exterior of manhole and hand hole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at
least three days. Seal manhole section joints with sealing compound recommended by
the manhole manufacturer. Penetration into manholes and/or boxes shall be sealed.
Provide conduit duct plugs for unused terminator openings of spare conduits in manhole.
Do not water seal top removable cover until cable pulling has been completed.
E.
Damp proofing: Apply damp proofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has
cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before
backfilling, damp proof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Damp
proof exterior of manhole and hand hole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least
three days.
F.
Interior walls and ceiling shall be primed and painted with two coats flat white paint.
G.
Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors
and as indicated.
H.
Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for anchor bolts
installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.
I.
Grounding: Install ground rod through floor in each structure with top protruding 6
inches above floor.
1.
Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof nonshrink grout.
Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare-copper ground
conductors. Train conductors neatly around corners. Use cable clamps secured
with expansion anchors to attach ground conductors.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 11
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
J.
Precast Concrete Manhole Installation: comply with ASTM C 891.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
3.6
Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper
entrances.
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a 12” level bed of crushed stone or
gravel, graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density
as adjacent undisturbed earth. Provide a minimum 6-inch level base of ¾ inch
crushed rock under manhole to ensure uniform distribution of soil pressure on
floor.
Manholes below building floor shall have all earth work compacted to match
compaction required by structural specifications.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of
installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
B.
Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance .
C.
Duct Integrity: Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity
and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of the duct. If
obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
D.
Correct installations if possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective products and retest.
CLEANING
A.
Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of
ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading
lubricant throughout ducts.
B.
Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
C.
After the duct line has been completed, a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through
each duct to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the
line. (Mandrels not less than 12 inches long, having a diameter approximately 1/4 inch
less than inside diameter of the duct, shall be pulled through each duct). Leave a 3/8”inch minimum polypropylene pull rope in each duct for future use.
END OF SECTION 26 05 44
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 44 - 12
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 49 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
This Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake-damage-reduction measures
for electrical components. It complements optional seismic construction requirements
in the various electrical component Sections.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A325, A570, A36, A576
B.
CBC
C.
IC80
D.
MSS SP-69
DEFINITIONS
A.
CBC: California Building Code. (sections 1704 through 1708), IBC: International
Building Code.
B.
Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening
assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and
horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake.
C.
Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor
structure, roof structure, or wall that may move independent of other mobile structural
elements during an earthquake.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening
provisions, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used.
1.
B.
Anchor Bolts and Studs: Tabulate types and sizes, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by ICBO Evaluation
Service.
Shop Drawings: Provide for anchorage and bracing not defined by details and charts.
Indicate materials, and show designs and calculations signed and sealed by a professional
Engineer.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachment of restraints to
both structural and restrained items. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacing, identifying components and listing their strengths. Indicate direction
and value of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By ICBO Evaluation Service, or
an agency approved by LAWA’s Representative, showing maximum ratings of
restraints and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C.
Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic
bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment, including other
seismic restraints, in the vicinity.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of seismic restraints certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results of seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic restraint requirements in California Building Code/Code of
Regulations, unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional Engineer who is legally qualified
to practice in California and who is experienced in providing seismic engineering
services, including the design of seismic restraints.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to LAWA
with minimum of 5 years experience.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in CBC: Zone 4, Zone Factor 0.40.
B.
Occupancy Category as Defined in CBC: I=1.5 critical occupancy.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and
Architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building
features in the vicinity.
B.
Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Use the following materials for restraints:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Caldyn
Powerstrut.
Unistrut Corporation.
Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable
to LAWA’s Representative.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall
be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
B.
Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.
C.
Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
D.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
E.
Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F.
Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not
acceptable.
G.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor
bolts and studs used.
H.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and
matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.4
SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A.
Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inchthick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and flange
edges turned toward web.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33.
Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or ASTM
A 36.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and
designed for use with that product.
Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and
phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel
brackets and bolts.
C.
Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable
attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.
1.
2.
D.
Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the
structure at the other end.
Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with
a minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be
resisted.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved
by the LAWA’s Representative, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS
A.
Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to
spread structural loads and reduce stresses in accordance with the structural Engineer of
record approval.
B.
Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion
anchors.
C.
Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.
D.
Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
reinforcing bars.
3.3
E.
Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors.
F.
Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with
expansion anchors.
G.
Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of
bar joists.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE
A.
Anchor rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete base that is
structurally tied to a single mobile structural element.
B.
Anchor panel boards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear,
transformers, unit substations, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways,
battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units,
communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and
distribution units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
3.5
Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters
from the edge of the concrete base.
Concrete Bases for Floor-Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors
and install studs and nuts after equipment is positioned.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient
media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete.
Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow
for resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment
manufacturer.
SEISMIC BRACING INSTALLATION
A.
Install bracing according to spacing and strengths indicated by approved analysis.
B.
Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced
components.
C.
Cable Braces: Install with maximum cable slack recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the
structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
3.6
Make flexible connections in raceways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross expansion and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at
electrical equipment anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one
supporting them.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field
quality-control testing:
B.
Testing: Test pull-out resistance of seismic anchorage devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide necessary test equipment required for reliable testing.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to LAWA’s Representative.
Schedule test with the LAWA Representative before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Structural Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to the
structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected
by LAWA’s Representative.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
If a device fails the test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
Record test results.
END OF SECTION 26 05 49
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 49 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 54 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
1.5
Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter
size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special
procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Nameplates.
Labels.
Wire markers.
Conduit markers.
Stencils.
Underground Warning Tape.
Lockout Devices.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag
numbers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
identification, including product density and thickness.
C.
1.6
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions
for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES ON EQUIPMENT
A.
Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs:
1.
Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
Engraved legend with white letters on black face for normal power, white letters on red
face for emergency power.
a. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
b. Text is at 1/2-inch (13 mm) high lettering
B.
Nameplates shall adequately describe the function of the particular equipment involved.
Where nameplates are detailed on the drawings, inscription and size of letters shall be as
shown and shop drawing submitted for approval. Nameplates for panelboards and
switchboards shall include the panel designation, voltage, phase and wire. The next item
shall be either LAWA, Concessions, or Airline panel, depending on loads served. In
addition, describe where the panel is fed from.
For example,
PANEL 1LA, 120/208V, 3PH, 4W
LAWA PANEL
FED FROM MS
C.
Nameplates shall be secured to equipment front using stainless steel screws or rivets.
D.
Custom metal master nameplates shall be furnished and installed by the manufacturer on
each distribution section, switchboard section, and motor control center indicating the
manufacturer’s name, ampere rating, short-circuit rating (bus bracing) and date. Paper
stickers are not acceptable.
For example,
ABC SWITCHBOARD CO.
AMPERE RATING: 5000A
SHORT CIRCUIT RATING: 100KAIC
DATE: 01/01/2011
A.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.2
PERMANENT MARKINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
LABELS
A.
2.4
All conduits, busways, cable trays and pullboxes shall be identified with permanent
stenciled black letters and numbers which indicate the source panel (feeder supply
source), circuit numbers and designated panel or load. For example,“PA-1, 3, 5 TO
MG.” For conduits, the letter height shall be one-third (1/3) the conduit size with ¼ inch
minimum height. For pullboxes and busways, the letter height shall be ½ inch minimum
height and not larger than ¾ inch in height.
The identifications for conduits, busways and cable trays shall be placed at every 50 feet
intervals and within 10 feet of wall and floor penetrations, pullboxes, panels,
distribution boards, switchboards and electrical equipment.
Spare conduits, pullboxes, busways, and abandoned raceways (that are to remain) shall
be identified as described above (A,B).
The permanent marking identifications on the raceways and pullboxes shall be visible
after the installations are made.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on white background for
normal power;
white letters on red background for emergency power.
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
B.
Legend:
1.
2.
2.5
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number.
Control Circuits: Control wire number.
CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A.
Description: Permanent, detectable, red colored, continuous printed, polyethylene tape
with suitable warning legend describing burial electrical lines. Taps shall be minimum 6
inches wide by 4 mils thick.
B.
Color:
1.
2.
C.
( Normal Power) : Black lettering on white background;
(Emergency Power): White lettering on red background.
Legend:
1.
2.
3.
Medium Voltage System: 5k, 15kV or 35kV as applicable.
480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS.
208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.6
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.
2.7
Description: 6 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning
legend describing buried electrical lines.
LOCKOUT DEVICES
A.
Lockout Hasps:
1.
2.8
Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3
inches.
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
A.
Panelboard directories shall be typewritten or computer generated, arranged in numerical
order, and shall list each circuit load and room number in which each load is located.
Directories shall be mounted in a 6 by 8 inch metal frame under transparent plastic inside
each panelboard door.
B.
Changes to existing panelboard directories shall be made with a P-Touch or other label
machine.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B.
Nameplate Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure
with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located
outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, or rivets.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished
locations.
Install nameplates for the following:
a.
Switchgear.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
7.
C.
Install nameplate to maintain NEMA rating of enclosure.
Label Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install label parallel to equipment lines.
Install label for identification of individual control device stations.
Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
Wire Marker Installation:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Switchboards.
Panelboards.
Transformers.
Disconnect Switches
Motor Control Centers.
Pushbutton Stations,
Terminal Cabinets.
Control Panels.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Generators.
Transfer Switches.
Enclosed Controllers.
Variable-Frequency Controllers.
Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes,
outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.
Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible
locations along the cable run.
Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation.
Underground Warning Tape Installation:
1.
Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit,
raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried
conduit, raceway, or cable.
END OF SECTION 26 05 54
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 5
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 54 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
1.5
Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols,
letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special
procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Nameplates.
Labels.
Wire markers.
Conduit markers.
Stencils.
Underground Warning Tape.
Lockout Devices.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag
numbers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.6
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
C.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions
for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES ON EQUIPMENT
A.
Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs:
1.
Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
Engraved legend with white letters on black face for normal power, white letters on red
face for emergency power.
a. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
b. Text is at 1/2-inch (13 mm) high lettering
B.
Nameplates shall adequately describe the function of the particular equipment involved.
Where nameplates are detailed on the drawings, inscription and size of letters shall be as
shown and shop drawing submitted for approval. Nameplates for panelboards and
switchboards shall include the panel designation, voltage, phase and wire. The next
item shall be either LAWA, Concessions, or Airline panel, depending on loads served.
In addition, describe where the panel is fed from.
For example,
PANEL 1LA, 120/208V, 3PH, 4W
LAWA PANEL
FED FROM MS
C.
Nameplates shall be secured to equipment front using stainless steel screws or rivets.
D.
Custom metal master nameplates shall be furnished and installed by the manufacturer on
each distribution section, switchboard section, and motor control center indicating the
manufacturer’s name, ampere rating, short-circuit rating (bus bracing) and date. Paper
stickers are not acceptable.
For example,
ABC SWITCHBOARD CO.
AMPERE RATING: 5000A
SHORT CIRCUIT RATING: 100KAIC
DATE: 01/01/2011
A.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.2
PERMANENT MARKINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
LABELS
A.
2.4
All conduits, busways, cable trays and pull boxes shall be identified with permanent
stenciled black letters and numbers which indicate the source panel (feeder supply
source), circuit numbers and designated panel or load. For example,“PA-1, 3, 5 TO
MG.” For conduits, the letter height shall be one-third (1/3) the conduit size with ¼ inch
minimum height. For pull boxes and busways, the letter height shall be ½ inch
minimum height and not larger than ¾ inch in height.
The identifications for conduits, busways and cable trays shall be placed at every 50
feet intervals and within 10 feet of wall and floor penetrations, pull boxes, panels,
distribution boards, switchboards and electrical equipment.
Spare conduits, pull boxes, busways, and abandoned raceways (that are to remain) shall
be identified as described above (A,B).
The permanent marking identifications on the raceways and pull boxes shall be visible
after the installations are made.
All receptacle and switch faceplates shall be labeled with the source panel and circuit
number. The label shall be black Arial font on white or clear tape, produced by a
P-Touch or other label machine.
All boxes and enclosures (including transfer switches, generators, and power panels) for
emergency circuits shall be permanently marked in red with the words, “EMERGENCY
SYSTEM”, so they will be readily identified as a component of an emergency circuit or
system.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on white background for
normal power;
white letters on red background for emergency power.
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
B.
Legend:
1.
2.
2.5
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number.
Control Circuits: Control wire number.
CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A.
Description: Permanent, detectable, red colored, continuous printed, polyethylene tape
with suitable warning legend describing burial electrical lines. Taps shall be minimum 6
inches wide by 4 mils thick.
B.
Color:
1.
( Normal Power) : Black lettering on white background;
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.
C.
Legend:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Description: 6 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning
legend describing buried electrical lines.
LOCKOUT DEVICES
A.
Lockout Hasps:
1.
2.8
Medium Voltage System: 5k, 15kV or 35kV as applicable.
480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS.
208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.
2.7
(Emergency Power): White lettering on red background.
Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3
inches.
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
A.
Panelboard directories shall be typewritten or computer generated, arranged in numerical
order, and shall list each circuit load and room number in which each load is located.
Directories shall be mounted in a 6 by 8 inch metal frame under transparent plastic inside
each panelboard door.
B.
Changes to existing panelboard directories shall be made with a P-Touch or other label
machine.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B.
Nameplate Installation:
1.
2.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
3.
4.
5.
6.
with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located
outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, or rivets.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished
locations.
Install nameplates for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
7.
C.
Install nameplate to maintain NEMA rating of enclosure.
Label Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install label parallel to equipment lines.
Install label for identification of individual control device stations.
Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
Wire Marker Installation:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Panelboards.
Transformers.
Disconnect Switches
Motor Control Centers.
Pushbutton Stations,
Terminal Cabinets.
Control Panels.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Generators.
Transfer Switches.
Enclosed Controllers.
Variable-Frequency Controllers.
Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes,
outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.
Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible
locations along the cable run.
Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation.
Underground Warning Tape Installation:
1.
Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit,
raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried
conduit, raceway, or cable.
END OF SECTION 26 05 54
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 54 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 05 73 – SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes computer-based, fault current and overcurrent protective
devices coordination including ground fault protection and arc fault hazard
analysis studies to be performed by the contractor. Protective devices shall be set
based on the result of the protective device coordination study. Arc fault hazard
analysis warning nameplates shall be printed and affixed to the electrical system
equipment after the final protective relay settings have been applied and
confirmed operational. Settings and adjustments of the relays shall be performed
by an independent qualified agency familiar with this work and the agency is to
be retained by the contractor. The person performing this work shall have a
minimum of five years experience.
NOTE: This coordination study shall include the existing distribution
equipment that feeds the new equipment and is in addition to the short circuit
study performed by the Electrical Engineer of Record during the course of
preparing his design.
B.
Contractor shall retain a 3rd party independent consultant to perform the study
indicated in this section.
C.
It is the responsibility of the entity performing the Short Circuit and Coordination
Study to collect all data to fully perform the study, including but not limited to
engine generator data, motor data, circuit breakers, utility company short circuit,
available new and existing device ratings, conductor data, transformer ratings,
etc.
D.
The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective
device in series from the individual device back to the source. The study shall
reflect the operation of each device ratings, conductor data, transformer ratings,
etc.
E.
The short circuit portion of the study shall be submitted prior to or along with the
switchgear submittal, and shall include all equipment which has an AIC rating.
The short circuit study shall reflect that all equipment with an AIC rating is
properly rated for its specific application. The submitted switchgear (including
all equipment which has and AIC rating) shall reflect the findings of short circuit
study (i.e, the AIC ratings of the equipment shall exceed the available short
circuit current and any required derating factors at each point in the system).
Series ratings are not acceptable.
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Designers:
1.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
1.3
IEEE 242 - Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book).
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study to meet
requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Report Preparation:
1.
2.
3.
Prepare study prior to ordering distribution equipment to verify
equipment ratings required.
Perform study with aid of computer software program.
Calculate short circuit interrupting and, when applicable, momentary
duties for assumed 3-phase bolted fault short circuit current and phase to
ground fault short circuit current at each of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
4.
C.
Utility supply bus.
Medium voltage air interrupter switchgear.
Automatic transfer switch.
Manual transfer switch.
Engine generator.
Medium voltage motor controllers.
Low-voltage switchgear.
Switchboards.
Motor control centers.
Distribution panelboards.
Branch circuit panelboards.
Each other significant equipment location throughout system.
Report Contents (similar to SKM Power Tools):
1.
Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Calculation methods and assumptions.
Base per unit value selected.
One-line diagram, with short circuit values, arc flash values,
feeder values and lengths.
Source impedance data including power company system
available power and characteristics.
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
e.
Typical calculations.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
f.
g.
One-line diagram revised by adding actual instantaneous short
circuits available.
State conclusions and recommendations.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Prepare time-current device coordination curves
graphically indicating coordination proposed for system,
centered on conventional, full-size, log-log forms.
Prepare with each time-curve sheet complete title and
one-line diagram with legend identifying specific portion
of system covered by that particular curve sheet.
Prepare detailed description of each protective device
identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and timecurrent characteristics. Tabulate recommended device
tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay
settings.
Plot device characteristic curves at point reflecting
maximum symmetrical fault current to which device is
exposed. Include on curve sheets the following:
Power company relay characteristics.
Power company fuse characteristics.
Medium voltage equipment protective relay characteristics.
Medium voltage equipment protective fuse characteristics.
Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device
characteristics.
Low voltage equipment fuse characteristics.
Cable damage point characteristics.
Pertinent transformer characteristics including:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
p.
q.
Fault impedance.
X to R ratios.
Asymmetry factors.
Motor fault contribution.
Short circuit kVA.
Symmetrical and asymmetrical phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground fault currents.
Tabulations of calculation quantities and results.
Transformer full load current.
Transformer magnetizing inrush.
ANSI transformer withstand parameters.
Significant symmetrical fault current.
Pertinent motor characteristics.
Generator characteristics including:
(1)
Phase and ground coordination of generator protective
devices.
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
r.
s.
1.4
Decrement curve and damage curve.
Operating characteristic of protective devices.
Actual impedance value.
Time constants.
Current boost data.
Do not use typical values for generator.
Transfer switch characteristics.
Other system load protective device characteristics.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualifications Data: Submit the following for review prior to starting study.
1.
2.
Submit qualifications and background of firm.
Submit qualifications of Professional Engineer performing study.
B.
Software: Submit for review information on software proposed to be used in
performing study.
C.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1.
Report: Summarize results of study in report format including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
E.
Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope of study.
Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device
ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties, and commentary
regarding same.
Protective device time versus current coordination curves,
tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse
selection, and commentary regarding same.
Fault current calculations including definition of terms and guide
for interpretation of computer printout.
Submit copies of final report signed by Professional Engineer. Make additions or
changes required by review comments.
Short Circuit Study:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available
short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor
contribution in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of
the protective devices.
Entire system shall be modeled under both normal and emergency power.
If any closed transition transfer switches are used, normal and emergency
power shall be combined.
The short circuit study shall incorporate the actual feeder types, sizes and
lengths proposed to be used by the Professional Engineer.
The calculations may be prepared by means of a digital computer. All
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
5.
pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing the calculations
shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study.
Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format.
Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
F.
Device identification.
Operating voltage.
Protective device.
Device rating.
Calculated short circuit current, indicating worst-case fault
current incorporating all system models as outlined above.
Coordination Curves:
1.
2.
Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settings of
protective devices to assure selective coordination. Graphically illustrate
on log-log paper that adequate time separation exists (where possible)
between series devices, including the utility company upstream device.
Plot the specific time-current characteristics of each protective device in
such a manner that all upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one
sheet. Where a switchboard or panelboard has multiple devices of
different sizes, it is not necessary to plot curves for each device when
coordination for one device is demonstrated graphically and it is
intuitively obvious that the other devices coordinate as well.
The following specific information shall also be shown on the
coordination curves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
Device identification.
Voltage and current ratio for curves.
3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage points for each transformer.
No-damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
Cable damage curves.
Transformer inrush points.
Maximum short circuit cutoff point.
Short-time withstand capability of main 480V circuit breakers.
Coordination between the directional overcurrent relays and the
main 480V breaker.
Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the protective
devices. Include in the table the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Device identification.
Relay CT ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup.
Circuit breaker sensor rating, long-time, short-time, and
instantaneous settings, and time bands.
Fuse rating and type.
Ground fault pickup and time delay.
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
B.
Use commercially available software, designed specifically for short circuit and
protective device coordination studies with minimum of three years documented
availability approved by LAWA.
C.
Perform study in accordance with IEEE 242.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Study Preparer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience and having completed projects of
similar size and complexity within the past three years.
B.
Perform study under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this Work and licensed at in State of California with minimum of five
years experience in power system analysis.
C.
Demonstrate company performing study has capability and experience to provide
assistance during system start up.
SEQUENCING
A.
The short circuit portion of the study shall be submitted prior to or along with the
switchgear submittal, and shall include all equipment which has an AIC rating.
The short circuit study shall reflect that all equipment with an AIC rating is
properly rated for its specific application. The submitted switchgear (including
all equipment which has an AIC rating) shall reflect the findings of short circuit
study (i.e., the AIC ratings of the equipment shall exceed the available short
circuit current and any required derating factors at each point in the system.).
No series rated devices will be allowed.
B.
When formal completion of study will cause delay in equipment manufacturing,
obtain approval from LAWA for preliminary submittal of study data sufficient in
scope to ensure selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory.
SCHEDULING
A.
1.9
Schedule work to expedite collection of data to ensure completion of study for
final approval of distribution equipment shop drawings prior to release of
equipment for manufacturing.
COORDINATION
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
Coordinate work with local power company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide assistance to electrical distribution system equipment manufacturer
during start up of electrical system and equipment.
B.
Select each primary protective device for delta-wye connected transformer so
device’s characteristic or operating band is within transformer characteristics,
including point equal to 58 percent of ANSI withstand point to provide
secondary line-to-ground fault protection.
C.
Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves from
associated secondary device characteristics by 16 percent current margin to
provide proper coordination and protection in event of secondary line-to-line
faults.
D.
Separate medium-voltage relay characteristic curves from curves for other
devices by at least 0.4 second time margin.
E.
Analyze the short circuit calculations, and highlight any equipment that is
determined to be underrated as specified. Propose approaches to effectively
protect the underrated equipment. Provide minor modifications to conform with
the study (Examples of minor modifications are trip sizes within the same frame,
the time curve characteristics of induction relays, CT ranges, etc.).
F.
After developing the coordination curves, highlight areas lacking coordination.
Present a technical valuation with a discussion of the logical compromises for
best coordination.
ADJUSTING
A.
Protective devices shall be set based on the results of the protective device
coordination study.
B.
Arc fault hazard analysis warning labels shall be printed and affixed to the
electrical system equipment after the final protective relay settings have been
applied and confirmed operational.
C.
Settings and adjustments of the relays shall be performed by and independent
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
qualified agency familiar with this work and the agency is to be retained by the
contractor. The person performing this work shall have a minimum of five years
experience.
D.
Accomplish necessary field settings, adjustments, and minor modifications to
conform with the study without cost to LAWA.
END OF SECTION 26 05 73
SHORT CIRCUIT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
STUDY
26 05 73 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 09 13 – WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE: For compatibility purposes, throughout LAX, all new web based power
monitoring systems shall match the installation at Bradley West.
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section describes the metering, communications, and visualization requirements for
a modular, scalable Web-based Power Monitoring Communications System. The goal of
this system is to provide the user the ability to monitor and manage their power system
without the installation of any software other than an internet browser. This system may
require the user to store web links in their browser to each of the web enabled devices;
however the intent of this approach is to significantly reduce installation, configuration
and operational costs of the system.
1.
The PMCS shall comply with new construction installations utilizing web-based
components to function independently or to co-exist with other Eaton CutlerHammer IMPACC system components or other Modbus RTU communicating
devices in a heterogeneous environment.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish and install the equipment specified herein. The equipment
shall be as outlined below.
C.
This section includes the supply and installation of a complete Power Monitoring
Communications System (PMCS) as described in this specification. The PMCS is defined
to include, but not to be limited to, remote devices for metering, monitoring, control and
protection, a network time server, all Ethernet communications gateways,
intercommunication wiring, ancillary equipment, startup and training services, and
ongoing technical support.
NOTE: All Tenant power feeders are to be metered by this web based monitoring
system.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
The PMCS shall comply with the applicable portions of ANSI/IEEE 802.3 and NEMA
standards. In addition, the master control unit shall comply with FCC Emission Standards
specified in Part 15, Subpart J for Class A application.
SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A.
The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1.
System description including an overview of the system provided with detailed
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
1.4
SUBMITTALS – FOR INFORMATION
A.
1.5
description of system architecture. A customized system diagram showing
location of computers, repeaters, gateways and assemblies/devices to be
connected to the system, as well as types of wiring required (twisted pair, coax,
fiber), and a general layout of wiring referencing the specific building/facility
layout shall also be part of this description
Bill of material including a complete listing of all hardware, software, training,
software configuration, and startup services.
Hardware and software description shall be provided in detail for all
communications hardware, software, including sensor devices and gathering data
to be transmitted over the network, and master display unit. This description will
include a list of all the communicating devices to be connected to the network.
Typical software screen displays shall be provided in printout form and/or on
disk.
The Contractor shall provide a submittal for information to include a detailed listing of
customer required actions, with timetable, to insure trouble-free startup of the PMCS.
This information shall include any equipment access requirement, office requirements
and manpower requirements. This submittal shall include the projected system startup
time-line, including training dates. In addition, a proposed detailed wiring specification in
compliance with these plans and specifications shall be included. The communication
wiring specification shall include proposed communication cable, including general cable
ratings, communication characteristics, cable routing proposed, termination requirements,
and splicing/connections proposed to be made.
SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
In addition, the systems operation manual shall include the following information:
1.
2.
B.
A section on communication wiring which includes:
1.
2.
3.
C.
A system description overview, descriptive bulletins and/or sales aids covering
all components in the system
A maintenance section including all instruction leaflets and technical data
necessary to set up, change setup parameters and maintain the communicating
devices and sensors
Type of communication wire utilized.
General cable ratings and communications characteristics.
Cable routing diagram including terminations and splicing connections made.
A detailed startup report, including a list of trained customer personnel shall be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cutler-Hammer
B.
Square D
C.
General Electric
GENERAL
A.
2.3
The PMCS is defined to include, but not to be limited to, remote devices for metering,
monitoring, control and protection, a network time server, all Ethernet communications
gateways, intercommunication wiring, printer, ancillary equipment, startup and training
services, and ongoing technical support.
WEB-ENABLED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A.
The web-enabled power monitoring communication system shall use Ethernet as the
primary communication backbone between the equipment and the users or legacy
systems.
B.
The web-enabled power monitoring communication system shall support multiple
protocols over Ethernet to ensure the system can easily be integrated into existing
systems. These protocols shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
HTML web pages to display data to users using a browser
Modbus TCP/IP to support integration into third party systems
BacNet Web Services to support integration into third party systems
SNMP to support integration into Data Center management systems
The web enabled power monitoring communication system shall provide connectivity to
the actual power system in one of two ways:
1.
2.
Web enabled meters that measure the critical power system parameters as
described herein.
Web enabled gateways that communicate to power system devices over device
specific communication links as described herein. Web enabled gateways will
support the following device communication protocols:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Eaton’s INCOM protocol
ModBus RTU over RS-485
Eaton’s QC Port over RS-485
The web enabled gateway shall support devices as required.
The devices connected to the Web enabled gateway shall communicate using the
protocols described in Section 2.03 F2 over a local area network Interconnected
with #18 gauge twisted pair shielded cable, 600 V Class Belden 9463 family, in
properly sized conduit (when run outside of factory assembled equipment for the
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
communication channel).
D.
The web enabled power monitoring communication system shall provide support for
configuration of all web enabled meters and gateways directly via the web pages on the
device. No additional software shall be required.
1.
E.
All devices in the web enabled power monitoring communication system that are
connected directly to Ethernet shall support the ability to synchronize their time clock
using NTP. The purpose for this support is to ensure all device clocks are accurate so
that event sequences can be adequately analyzed.
1.
2.4
To support the configuration of legacy devices on the device networks connected
to the gateway, the gateway shall support a “pass thru mode” to allow the legacy
configuration software to connect from any computer on the users network to the
device via the gateway.
For devices that support clock synchronization and are on the device networks
connected to the gateways, they shall support the ability to sync their clock to the
clock in the gateway.
F.
A User Guide shall be provided with the web enabled equipment to describe the
commissioning process for setting the equipment’s Ethernet address, and ensuring
trouble-free data access from any computer on the network, using a standard Internet
browser.
G.
In all web enable devices, a common user interface shall be implemented across all types
of power equipment, from Medium-Voltage Switchgear to Low-Voltage Switchgear,
Switchboards, Motor Control Centers (MCCs), Power Distribution Units (PDUs) and
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPSs). The purpose of this is to reduce end user
training time and improve system usability.
ETHERNET SWITCHES
A.
A single web access point: 4 or 6 port Ethernet switch shall be provided in the equipment
to allow a single access point for the user and the ability to connect more than one
network device directly on the customer’s Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).
B.
Ethernet switch shall support standard copper RJ45 connectors and/or 100BaseFX FiberOptic via ST connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WARRANTY
A.
The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment supplied hereunder. The warranty shall
include:
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.2
FACTORY TESTING
A.
The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under
this section:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
3.4
Two (2) year free telephone technical support
Warranty on all hardware supplied under this system shall be for two (2) years.
Configure and load all software
Test and operate computer and software in a simulated system mode for
minimum of 24 hours
Demonstrate full system functionality
INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall furnish, install and terminate all communication conductors and
associated conduits external to any factory supplied equipment.
B.
All communication conductor wiring and routing shall be per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The contractor shall furnish the services of a manufacturer’s representative to assist
LAWA in starting up and programming the system. The manufacturer’s representative
shall be factory-trained and shall have a thorough knowledge of the software, hardware,
and system programming. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide the following
services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Setting all the addresses of all devices in the equipment
Verifying and troubleshooting the integrity of the data line (run by others)
Assisting LAWA in correcting any data line problems
Coordinating any possible warranty problems with the PMCS
Configure the PMCS software to match the field devices
3.5
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
3.6
FIELD TESTING
A.
Verify complete system operation including all hardware, software and communication
devices.
B.
Verify networking performance with all interfacing systems by other manufacturers.
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.7
3.8
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A.
A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the
equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B.
The Contractor shall provide five (5) copies of the manufacturer’s representative’s
certification.
TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall furnish the services of a manufacturer’s representative for a period
of one (1) 8-hour days to train the LAWA’s personnel in operation and programming of
the system. The manufacturer’s representative shall be factory-trained and shall have a
thorough knowledge of the software, hardware and system programming. The training
session shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.9
Hands-on training of site personnel
Explanation of system operation
Explanation of devices
Explanation of LAWA’s system
AFTER STARTUP SUPPORT
A.
The PMCS manufacturer shall provide a 24-hour 800 telephone number manned with
Engineers/Technicians expert in PMCS devices, software and communication system
troubleshooting or capable of providing technical information.
B.
The PMCS Manufacturer shall provide a 1 year service contract to maintain the software
and system devices. The contract shall be renewable on an annual basis at a fixed charge
and shall include a minimum of 2 site visits yearly to perform system maintenance. The
service contract shall include as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation of Software patches and Upgrades to System Operating Software as
required
Anti-Virus Software upgrades as required
PMCS Software upgrades as required.
Database maintenance and archiving of data
END OF SECTION 26 09 13
WEB-BASED POWER MONITORING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
26 09 13 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 09 23 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remote control lighting relays.
Lighting contactors.
Switches.
Switch plates.
Occupancy sensors.
Photocells.
Photocell control unit.
NOTE: The devices are to be connected to the Network Lighting Control System.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and
Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot
Devices.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
Distributed switching control using self contained individually mounted lighting relays.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components
and accessories.
1.
One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
1.5
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard product data for each system component.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record the following information:
1.
2.
B.
3.
1.7
1.9
Submit replacement parts numbers.
Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions and operating
instructions.
Recommended renewal parts list.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with standard.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8
Actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching
arrangements.
Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and
numbered, system components and devices.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
2.
1.6
and type of switches or devices.
Include typical wiring diagrams for each component.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept components on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect components by storing in manufacturer’s containers indoor protected from
weather.
WARRANTY
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAYS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: Heavy duty, single-coil momentary contact mechanically held
remote control relays.
C.
Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts. Rated for lighting applications with high
intensity discharge (HID), quartz halogen, tungsten, or fluorescent lamps.
D.
Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.
E.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
2.2
LC & D
Lutron
General Electric.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4.
LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
Square D.
General Electric.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.
C.
Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control.
D.
Coil Operating Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hertz.
E.
Poles: To match circuit configuration and control function.
F.
Contact Rating: 20A
G.
Accessories:
1.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard-duty heavy-duty oiltight
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
2.3
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4.
SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
C.
Material: Plastic.
Color: White.
Wall Switch: Industrial Grade non-pilot light toggle switches for overriding relays.
1.
D.
Hubbell Incorporated.
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Pass and Seymour.
Wall Switch: Specification Grade unlighted, momentary pushbutton type for overriding
relays.
1.
2.
2.4
type with Form Z contacts, rated A150.
Pushbutton: ON/OFF function, with unguarded recessed covered configuration.
Selector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function, with rotary action.
Auxiliary Contacts: One field convertible in addition to seal-in contact.
Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, in each enclosed contactor.
Furnish fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to
enclosure.
Color: White
Key Switch: Cylinder lock type. Match non-key switch ratings.
SWITCH PLATES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hubbell Incorporated.
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Pass and Seymour.
Product Description: Specification Grade.
1.
2.
Material: Stainless steel, type 302.
Color: to be selected by Designer.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.5
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Compatible with modular relay panels. Capable of being wired directly to Class 2
wiring without auxiliary components or devices.
C.
Separate sensitivity and time delay adjustments with LED indication of sensed
movement. User adjustable time-delay: 30 seconds to 12 minutes.
D.
Furnish with manual override.
E.
Operation: Silent.
F.
Room Sensors: Dual Technology.
G.
Corridor and Hallway Sensors:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
LC & D.
Novitas.
Watt Stopper.
Capable of detecting motion 14 feet wide and 80 feet long with one sensor
mounted 10 feet above floor.
Capable of detecting motion in warehouse aisle 10 feet wide and 60 feet long or
100 feet long when mounted 22 feet above floor.
Capable of being wired in master-slave configuration to extend area of coverage.
PHOTOCELLS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
LC & D.
Novitas.
Watt Stopper.
B.
General: Consist of sensor mounted with separate control-calibration module. Sensor
connected to control-calibration module via single shielded conductor with maximum
distance of 500 feet (150 m).
C.
Control-Calibration Module: Furnish with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Capable of being switched between 4 measurement ranges.
Separate trip points for high and low response settings.
Momentary contact device to override photocell relays.
Three minute time delay between switching outputs to avoid nuisance tripping.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
D.
Sensor Devices: Each sensor employs photo diode technology to allow linear response to
daylight within illuminance range.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Exterior Lighting: Hooded sensor, horizontally mounted, employing flat lens,
and working range 1-10 footcandles in 10 percent increments. Entire sensor
encased in optically clear epoxy resin.
Indoor Lighting: Sensor with Fresnel lens providing for 60 degree cone shaped
response area to monitor indoor office lighting levels.
Atriums: Sensor with translucent dome with 180 degree field of view and
respond in range of 100-1,000 footcandles.
Skylights: Sensor with translucent dome with 180 degree field of view and
respond in range of 1,000-10,000 footcandles.
PHOTOCELL CONTROL UNIT
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
LC & D.
Novitas.
Watt Stopper.
Product Description: Photodiode control unit with PHOTOCELL ENABLE and
MASTER OVERRIDE inputs for remote control, 3 minute time delay, and with
selectable ranges for 1-10 footcandle, 10-100 footcandle, 100-1000 footcandle, and
1000-10,000 footcandle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount switches, occupancy sensors, and photocells.
B.
Use only properly color coded, stranded wire, installed in conduit.
C.
Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel.
D.
Mount relays. Provide wiring to numbered relays in panel to control each load.
E.
Install relays to be accessible. Allow space around relays for ventilation and circulation
of air.
F.
Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load. When multiple
circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to indicate originating
panel designation.
G.
Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Furnish services for minimum of one day for check, test, and start-up. Perform the
following services:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
3.4
Check installation of panelboards.
Test operation of remote controlled devices.
Repair or replace defective components.
ADJUSTING
A.
Test each system component after installation to verify proper operation.
B.
Test relays, contactors, switches and sensors after installation to confirm proper
operation.
C.
Confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstrate operation of the following system components to staff to be trained:
1.
2.
3.
Operation of switches.
Operation of each type of occupancy sensors.
Operation of each type of photocell.
B.
Furnish 4 hours to instruct LAWA's personnel in operation and maintenance of system.
Schedule training with LAWA, provide at least 7 days notice to Designer of training date.
C.
Provide manuals for attendees.
END OF SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL PANELS
26 09 23 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 09 43 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE: This system controls those devices specified in Lighting Control Devices
and Control Panels.
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General
Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this
section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a
complete and operable system. All Labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment,
facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all
operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this
Section.
B.
Furnish and install a complete system for the control of lighting and other equipment and
as further defined herein.
C.
The system shall include but not be limited by the following list: Pre-wired,
microprocessor controlled relay panels with electrically held, electronically latched relays
controlled via a complete list of communications based accessories including digital
switches, digital photocells, Digital Time Clock (DTC) and interface cards to dimming
systems, building automation systems, thermostats, and any contact closure or analog
based device. The type of lighting control equipment and wiring specified in this section
is covered by the description: Microprocessor Controlled Digital Relay Lighting Control
system with RS 485 Bus communications. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in
these specifications for work including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes
and fittings required for installation of control equipment and wiring. They are not the
work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting control system and accessories
including, but not necessarily limited to, relay panels, switches, DTC, photocells and
other interfaces.
B.
Product Data: Submit for approval 6 copies of manufacturer's data on the specific lighting
control system and components. Submittal shall be in both electronic and hard copy
formats. To prevent departures from approved system operation, electronic file
submitted shall be able to be directly downloaded to the specified system at manufacturer
facility. Submit a complete bill of materials with part numbers, description and voltage
specifications.
C.
One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the system configuration indicating the
type, size and number of conductors between each component. Submittals that show
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
typical riser diagrams are not acceptable. Provide completely filled out control
schedules, switch engraving schedules and panel schedules.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
NOTE: Verify the BMS protocol with your designated LAWA Representative.
This protocol may involve providing a connection to the Central Utility Plant
(CUP).
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
1.4
LC&D
Lutron
B.
Control wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 2 remote
control systems, Article 725 and manufacturer specification.
C.
A licensed electrician shall functionally test each system component after installation,
verify proper operation and confirm that all relay panel and switch wiring conform to the
wiring documentation, and as per manufacturer recommendations.
D.
Comply with NEC and all local and state codes as applicable to electrical wiring work.
E.
Lighting control panels shall be ETL listed to UL 916. LCPs controlling emergency
circuits shall be ETL listed to UL 924.
F.
The lighting control system shall also be listed or approved by all national, state and local
energy codes to include but not limited to California Title 24 and Los Angeles Building
Code.
G.
System shall have open software protocol to interface with BMS and central utility plant
monitoring systems.
H.
Specifications are based on LC&D system. Lutron shall comply with the compatibility
and functionality to achieve the design intent.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Provide 8 spare relays per LCP, 4 Micro panels.
C.
Provide extra CD version of manufacturers operating software to include graphical
interface software.
D.
Provide 2 extra sets of as-built and operating manuals.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.5
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
No substitutions are permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS
A.
Smart Panelboards shall be made up of the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Controllable Breakers
1.
2.
3.
C.
NEMA rated enclosure with hinged door, available with main lug or main
breaker and in voltages of 120/240, 208Y/120 and 480Y/277. Continuous main
current ratings as indicated on the panelboard schedule. Minimum AIC rating to
be 10,000. NEMA4 rating for outdoor installation.
Control electronics mounted internally to each smart panelboard shall be capable
of driving up to 42 controllable breakers, control any individual or group of
breakers, store all programming in non-volatile memory, after power is restored
return system to current state, provide programmable blink warn timers for each
breaker and every zone and be able to control a Micro Relay panel located
downstream of non-controllable breaker.
Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of a Master LCP with up to
31 controllable, Slave LCPs with up to 42 controllable breakers in each panel, a
Micro LCP with up to 4 individual relays, digital switches and digital interface
cards (see interfaces). One individual bus network each for North Concourse +
North Core and South Concourse + South Core. All system components shall
connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable, providing
real time two-way communication with each system component. Analog
systems are not acceptable.
Lighting control system shall have the capability to output 4 independent 0v to
10v signals in a Micro LCP. Micro LCP shall control 4 independent 20a
fluorescent lighting circuits. Each circuit shall have an adjustable fade rate and
take inputs from a wall device, DTC system controller or a digital photocell.
Quantity and rating of breakers as required.
16 AWG steel barrier shall separate the high voltage and low voltage
compartments of the panel and separate 120v and 277v.
Solenoid operated thermal magnetic breakers.
Ratings of 120/240V AC; 15, 20 and 30 Amp; 1- and 2-pole, 277/480V AC, 15,
20 and 30 amp: 1 and 2-Pole.
Rated at 20 Amp, 277VAC Ballast, Tungsten, HID, 1 HP at 120 Vac, 2 HP at
240 Vac.
Standard Output Relays
1.
2.
Electrically held, electronically latched SPST relay.
Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
of accepting two
a.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Rated at 20 Amp, 277VAC Ballast, Tungsten, HID, 1 HP at 120 Vac, 2 HP at
240 Vac.
Relays to be rated for 250,000 operations minimum at 20a lighting load, use Zero
Cross circuitry and be Normally Closed (NCZC). All incandescent circuits shall
be energized by use of a Normally Closed SoftStart™ (NCSS) relay rated at
100,000 operations at full 20a load. No exceptions.
Optional relay types available shall include: Normally Open (NO) relay rated for
100,000 operations, a 600v 2-pole NO and NC and a Single Pole, Double Throw
(SPDT) relay.
Switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
#10AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that do not
allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable.
All switches shall be digital and communicate via RS 485. Contact closure style
switches shall not be acceptable. Any switch button function shall be able to be
changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or
Ethernet.
Switches shall be available in 1 through 6-button version with engraveable
buttons, red LED annunciation for each button and a constantly on green LED
locator.
Switches may be programmed to be Momentary ON, Momentary OFF, Toggle or
Maintained. These functions shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or
a PC) or remotely, via modem.
Contractor to verify all switch types and quantities per plans and specifications.
Accessories available to include digital key switch and digital key enable switch.
DTC - Digital Electronic Time Clock:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control
system and supply all time functions and accept interface inputs.
DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one
set of On and Off times per day for each day of the week and for each of two
holiday lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays.
The DTC shall be capable of controlling up to 126 digital devices on a single bus
and capable of interfacing digitally with other individual busses using
manufacturer supplied interface cards.
The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of a 8
line 21-letter display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port.
All commands shall be in plain English. Help pages shall display on the DTC
screen.
The DTC shall be run from non-volatile memory so that all system programming
and real time clock functions are maintained for a minimum of 15 years with loss
of power.
Software pre-installed to accept standard Unity Graphical Management Software
(GMS) pages. GMS software shall provide via local or remote PC a visual
representation of each device on the bus, show real time status and the ability to
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
7.
8.
F.
Interfaces: For future expansion capability, system to have available all of the following
interfaces. Verify and install only those interfaces indicated on the plans.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
change the status of any individual device, relay or zone.
Pre-Installed modem that allows for remote programming from any location
using a PC. Modem to include all necessary software for local or remote control.
DTC shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zoned that
is overridden On, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the
DTC a maximum of 2 hours later.
A dry contact input interface card that provides 14 programmable dry contact
closure inputs. Use shielded cable to connect input devices to interface card.
Interface card providing digital communication from one system bus to another
system bus, allowing up to 12,000 devices to communicate.
An exterior (PCO) or interior (PCI) photocell that provides readout on the DTC
screen in number values analogous to foot-candles. Each photocell shall provide
a minimum of 14 trigger points. Each trigger can be programmed to control any
relay or zone. Each trigger shall be set through programming only. Photocells
which requires the use of setscrews or which must be programmed at the
photocell control card shall be not acceptable.
An interface card that allows the DTC to control up to 32 digital XCI brand
thermostats. Programming of thermostats to be able to done locally (at the
DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet.
A voice prompted telephone override interface module. Interface module shall
accept up to 3 phone lines and allow up to 3 simultaneous phone calls. Voice
prompted menu and up to 999 unique pass codes shall be standard with each
interface module.
Software pre-installed to run Unity GX Graphical Management Software
(GMS-GX) pages. GMS-GX software shall provide via local or remote PC a
visual representation of a specific area or the total area of the project. GMS full
graphic pages shall be designed to the LAWA’s specifications. Provide 2 GMS
pages.
Direct digital interface to Smart Panelboards. Smart Panelboard circuits shall
appear on the system software as distinct items and maintain all functions and
features of the system software to include GMS pages.
Direct digital interface to DMX 512 based systems. Lighting control system shall
provide 14 global DMX commands, each of which can be modified locally or
remotely using lighting controls manufacturer supplied software. DMX
interface shall be integral to the system bus and shall connect and be controlled
via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable, providing real time two¬way
communication between lighting control system and a DMX based system.
BMS interface to be provided and coordinated with mechanical controls
contractor as required.
MODES OF OPERATIONS
A.
DTC – Digital Electronic Time Clock: DTC shall control any relay or group of relays by
the following modes: ON only, OFF only, Maintained, Maintained with timer and OFF
sweep warning (Blink warn), maintained with timer (No blink warning). Timers
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
adjustable from 1 minute to 4 hours. When the scheduled program in the DTC is ON the
associated timers are disabled. When the scheduled program in the DTC is off and a
relay or zone is overridden, the DTC will put that relay or zone into the timer mode and
automatically sweep off at the end of the programmed timer period (Maximum 2-Hour
Timed Override). All DTC settings, schedules, photocell trip points, temperature
settings, longitude and latitude, time zone offset to sunrise and sunset and any other
LAWA settings shall be able to be changed though software locally (at the DTC or a PC)
or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet. No exceptions.
B.
Switches: All system switches shall be digital and daisy chained on a single category 5, 4
twisted pair cable with all LCPs. Any switch button shall be able to control any relay or
group of relays anywhere on the system in the following modes: ON, OFF, Mixed (Some
relays ON some OFF), Toggle (first push ON, next OFF etc.) Maintain. Timer ON with a
time set from 1 minute to 4 hours. Timer ON with Off sweep warning, (Blink warning 5
min or as programmed prior to OFF sweep.) Timer ON with Horn Warning (Horn output
turns ON for the warning 5 min or as programmed prior to OFF sweep.) Any switch
function shall be able to changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem,
Internet or Ethernet. Any relay, group or zoned that is overridden On, before or after
hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the DTC a maximum of 2 hours later.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Mount smart breaker panelboards to wall. Attach to backing or structure similar to
standard panelboards. Locate strategically to allow access to low and live voltage
compartments. Vacuum all construction debris prior to installing electronics.
B.
Switches: Provide outlet boxes, single or multi-gang, as shown on the plans for the low
voltage digital switches. Mount switches as per plans. Supply faceplates per plans and
specifications. EC is specifically responsible to supply and install the required low
voltage cable, Category 5, 4 twisted pair, with pre-assemble RJ45 connectors and
snagless boots (commonly referred to as a Cat 5 patch cable) between all switches and
panels. Field-test all Cat 5 patch cable with a recognized cable tester. All low voltage
wire to be run in conduit, per local codes.
C.
Wiring
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not mix low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same conduit. No
exceptions.
Ensure low voltage conduits or control wires do not run parallel to current
carrying conduits.
Place manufacturer supplied “terminators” at each end of the system bus per
manufacturer instructions.
Neatly lace and rack wiring in cabinets.
Plug in Category 5, 4-twisted pair patch cable that has been field tested with a
recognized cable tester at the indicated RJ45 connector provided with each
lighting control device, per manufacturer instructions.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.2
DOCUMENTATION
A.
3.3
Use Category 5, 4 twisted pair patch cable for all system low voltage
connections. Additional conductors may be required to compensate for voltage
drop with specific system designs. Contact LC&D or refer to the GR2400
manual for further information. Use shielded cable for dry contact inputs to
lighting control system.
Do not exceed 4000ft-wire length for the system bus.
All items on the bus shall be connected in sequence (daisy chained). Star and
spur topologies are not acceptable.
The specified lighting control system shall be installed by the electrical
contractor who shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices
and equipment, to include photocell. EC to wire per manufacturer instructions.
Each Smart breaker Panelboard shall have properly filled up directory. Provide a
point-to-point wiring diagram for the entire lighting control system. Diagram must
indicate exact mounting location of each system device. This accurate “as built” shall
indicate the loads controlled by each relay and the identification number for that relay,
placement of switches and location of photocell. Original to be given to LAWA, copies
placed inside the door of each LCP.
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A.
Start Up: EC shall contact manufacturer at least 7 days before turnover of project.
Manufacturer will remotely dial into the lighting control system, run diagnostics and
confirm system programming. EC shall be available at the time of dial in to perform any
corrections required. EC is responsible for coordinating with GC and LAWA the
installation of a dedicated telephone line or a shared phone line with A/B switch. Phone
jack to be mounted within 12” of Master LCP. Label jack with phone number. EC to
connect phone line from jack to Master LCP.
B.
Telephone factory support shall be available at no additional cost to the LAWA both
during and after the warranty period. Factory to pre-program the lighting control system
per plans and approved submittal, to the extent data is available. The specified
manufacturer, at no added cost, shall provide additional programming via modem as
required by LAWA for the operation life of the system. Manufacturer warrants that the
DTC software can be upgraded and monitored remotely. Upon request manufacturer to
provide remote dial up software at no added cost to LAWA. No exceptions.
C.
Provide a factory technician for on-site training of the LAWA’s representatives and
maintenance personnel. Coordinate timing with General Contractor. Provide 2 days of
factory on-site training for a minimum of ten people.
D.
On Call Service
1.
2.
Control contractor shall perform monthly system diagnostics (viewing system log
files and review of performance/error data logged in the system).
Provide one technician for 120 hours total (duration of site visit determined on
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
time required to perform the system review) for a period of six (6) months after
final acceptance of the project. Time may also be utilized by LAWA to provide
as-needed modifications, troubleshooting, and/or clarifications to the system.
Use of time is as the sole discretion of LAWA.
3.4
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Remove dirt and debris from all LCP enclosures.
C.
Clean photocell lens as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Clean all switch faceplates.
WARRANTY
A.
Two (2) years parts and labor.
B.
Five (5) years limited parts and labor warranty for repair and replace of defective system
components.
END OF SECTION 26 09 43
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 43 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 13 13 – METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE: This section applies to any electrical new work at Terminal 1 due to the
existing 4160V System that is exclusive to this Terminal.
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
The Contractor shall furnish and install the equipment as specified herein.
The metal-clad switchgear and all components shall be designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA SG-4 and SG-5, and
but not limited to, ANSI/IEEE 37.20.2.
SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A.
The following information shall be submitted to LAWA:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Master drawing index
Front view elevation
Floor plan
Top view
Single line diagram
Nameplate schedule
Component list
Conduit entry/exit locations
Assembly ratings including:
Short-circuit rating
Voltage
Continuous current
Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts
Major component ratings including:
a.
b.
c.
15.
16.
B.
Voltage
Continuous current
Interrupting ratings
Cable terminal sizes
Product data sheets
Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to LAWA:
1.
Busway connection
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
26 13 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
C.
Submit shop drawings after Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination Study is approved. Shop drawings submitted without approved study will
be returned and not reviewed.
D.
The AIC ratings of all submitted equipment must conform to the approved Short Circuit
and Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
E.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Connection details between close-coupled assemblies
Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies
Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
Descriptive bulletins
Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.3, and
shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process.
Wiring diagrams
Certified production test reports
Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions
Seismic certification as specified
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components
within the assembly.
B.
For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
C.
The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for
a minimum period of twenty-five (25) years. When requested by LAWA, an acceptable
list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance
with this requirement.
D.
Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows:
1.
The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet
all applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) &
California Building Code (CBC) Sections 1704 through 1708 for Site
Classification D application and highest 1.5 importance factor. Guidelines for
the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
26 13 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment.
The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping factor,
IBC: a peak of 2.45g’s (3.2-11 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.98g’s applied at the base of
the equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all
equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. The certificate of compliance
with the requirements shall show that the shake table tested forces that the
equipment can withstand exceed the Site Classification D requirements by a 15%
margin. Equipment must utilize the shake table test method; computer modeling,
calculations or historical data are not acceptable.
2.
The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met,
unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards.
a.
b.
c.
E.
The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated
with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a
licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be
provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used
to verify the seismic design of the equipment.
The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can
withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both
vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes.
The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary
for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification
shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets
or exceeds the specified response spectra.
All switchgear shall have Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety approved lab
test certification.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of
shipment.
B.
Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups
shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped
separately.
C.
Split shipping packages are a must to accommodate designed access hatchway.
D.
Switchgear shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available,
switchgear shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower
the groups.
NOTE: All new switchgear delivered to the jobsite, shall be stored in a covered and
conditioned area where it is protected from the corrosive marine environment at the
airport.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
26 13 13 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
E.
1.8
Switchgear being stored prior to installation shall be stored so as to maintain the
equipment in a clean and dry condition. If stored outdoors, indoor gear shall be covered
and heated, and outdoor gear shall be heated.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly
shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete
assembly and each major component. Submit spare parts listing; source and current
prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals. It shall also include original shop drawings, and recommended maintenance,
Manufacturer’s Certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cutler-Hammer
B.
Square D
C.
General Electric
D.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
RATINGS
A.
The switchgear described in this specification shall be designed for medium voltage,
three-phase, 3 wire, solidly grounded, 60-hertz system.
B.
Each circuit breaker shall have the following ratings:
Maximum Voltage
5 kV
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
26 13 13 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
BIL Rated
170 kV Peak
Continuous Current
1200A for mains and tie.
Feeders – 600 A.
Short-Circuit Current at rated
Maximum kV
40 kA RMS sym
Rated Voltage Range Factor K
1.0
Closing and Latching
Capability
108 kA Crest
Maximum Symmetrical
Interrupting and 3-Second
Rating
40 kA RMS SYM
Rated Interrupting Time
2.3
2.4
NOTE: Values in
this table are to be
verified by the
engineer of reocord
and compared to the
specific voltage
requirements for any
new terminal
improvement work at
the airport.
Cycle 3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
The switchgear assembly shall consist of individual vertical sections housing various
combinations of circuit breakers and auxiliaries, bolted to form a rigid metal-clad
switchgear assembly. Metal side sheets shall provide grounded barriers between adjacent
structures and solid removable metal barriers shall isolate the major primary sections of
each circuit. Hinged rear doors, complete with provisions for padlocking, shall be
provided.
B.
The stationary primary contacts shall be silver-plated and recessed within insulating
tubes. A steel shutter shall automatically cover the stationary primary disconnecting
contacts when the breaker is in the disconnected position or out of the cell. The circuit
breakers shall be a roll-out design to allow withdrawal for inspection and maintenance
without the use of a separate lifting device.
BUS
A.
The main bus shall be copper with fluidized bed epoxy flame-retardant and track-resistant
insulation. The bus supports between units shall be flame-retardant, track-resistant,
cycloaliphatic epoxy for medium voltage class. The switchgear shall be constructed so
that all buses, bus supports and connections shall withstand stresses that would be
produced by currents equal to the momentary ratings of the circuit breakers. Insulated
copper main bus shall be provided and have provisions for future extension. All bus
joints shall be plated, bolted and insulated with easily installed boots. The bus shall be
braced to withstand fault currents equal to the close and latch rating of the breakers. The
temperature rise of the bus and connections shall be in accordance with ANSI standards
METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR (Vacclad) – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
Gensler S&K Engineers
Section 3.1.2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
and documented by design tests.
B.
2.5
2.6
A copper ground bus shall extend the entire length of the switchgear.
WIRING/TERMINATIONS
A.
The switchgear manufacturer shall provide suitable terminal blocks for secondary wire
terminations and a minimum of 10% spare terminals shall be provided. One control
circuit cutout device shall be provided in each circuit breaker housing. Switchgear
secondary wire shall be #14 AWG, type SIS rated 600 volt, 90 degrees C, furnished with
wire markers at each termination. Wires shall terminate on terminal blocks with marker
strips numbered in agreement with detailed connection diagrams.
B.
Incoming line and feeder cable lugs of the type and size indicated elsewhere shall be
furnished.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
The circuit breakers shall be horizontal drawout type, capable of being withdrawn on
rails. The breakers shall be operated by a motor-charged stored energy spring mechanism,
charged normally by a universal electric motor and in an emergency by a manual handle.
The primary disconnecting contacts shall be silver-plated copper.
B.
Each circuit breaker shall contain three vacuum interrupters separately mounted in a selfcontained, self-aligning pole unit, which can be removed easily. The vacuum interrupter
pole unit shall be mounted on cycloaliphatic epoxy supports for medium voltage class. A
contact wear gap indicator for each vacuum interrupter, which requires no tools to
indicate available contact life, shall be easily visible when the breaker is removed from its
compartment. The current transfer from the vacuum interrupter moving stem to the
breaker main conductor shall be a non-sliding design. The breaker front panel shall be
removable when the breaker is withdrawn for ease of inspection and maintenance.
C.
The secondary contacts shall be silver-plated and shall automatically engage in the
breaker operating position, which can be manually engaged in the breaker test position.
D.
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent closing of a breaker between operating and test
positions, to trip breakers upon insertion or removal from housing and to discharge stored
energy mechanisms upon insertion or removal from the housing. The breaker shall be
secured positively in the housing between and including the operating and test positions.
E.
The breakers shall be electrically operated by the following control voltages: 240 volt AC
close and AC capacitor trip.
F.
Each breaker shall be complete with control switch and red and green indicating lights to
indicate breaker contact position.
G.
AC control voltage shall be derived from control transformers mounted in the switchgear.
A separate control transformer shall be provided on each side of the tie breaker. An
automatic throwover control scheme shall be provided and factory wired to provide
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 6
Electrical
Guide Specification
reliable control power to the entire lineup when one incoming source has failed, but the
other source is available. Each control transformer shall be sized to handle the control
load of the entire lineup.
2.7
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
A.
The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish and install, in the metal-clad switchgear, the
quantity, type and rating of protection relays and described hereafter in this specification.
B.
Microprocessor-Based Protective Relay
C.
FP-5000 Protective Relay
1.
2.
3.
The protective relays for the Mains/Tie & Feeder circuit protection shall be a
single multifunction, microprocessor-based relay that provides three-phase and
ground instantaneous and time overcurrent protection, ANSI 50/51, 50/51G, or
50/51N, and voltage protection, metering and control
functions
as
described
below. The relay
shall be Cutler-Hammer device type FP5000 or approved equal having all the features and functions herein specified.
The relay shall be a solid-state microprocessor-based multifunctional type that
operates from the 5 ampere secondary output of current transformers. The relay
shall provide ANSI 50/51 protective functions for each of the three (3) phases,
and ANSI 50/51N or 50/51G ground fault protection functions as shown on the
plans or as determined by the coordination study. The relay shall be true rms
sensing of each phase and ground. Ground element shall be capable of being
utilized in residual, zero sequence, ground source connection schemes, or
deactivated.
The relay shall provide the following protection functions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Phase overcurrent (forward/ reverse (67) or both (50/51)): Two inverse
time overcurrent (51P-1, 51P-2) functions and two instantaneous
overcurrent (50P-1, 50P-2) functions with adjustable time delay
Directional Ground inverse time overcurrent and two instantaneous
overcurrent functions from calculated values with adjustable time delay
(forward/reverse (67G), or both (51G, 50G-1, 50G-2))
Directional Ground inverse time overcurrent and two instantaneous
overcurrent functions from measured values with adjustable time delay
(forward/reverse (67G), or both (51X, 50X-1, 50X-2))
Ground directional option for Zero Sequence Voltage Polarizing,
Negative Sequence Polarizing or Ground Current Polarizing
Negative sequence overcurrent protection with adjustable time delay (46)
Three-phase overvoltage protection with adjustable time delay (59)
Three-phase undervoltage protection with adjustable time delay (27)
Overfrequency protection with adjustable time delay (81O)
(1)
i.
Negative sequence overvoltage protection with adjustable time
delay (47)
Underfrequency protection with adjustable time delay (81U)
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 7
Electrical
Guide Specification
j.
k.
l.
m.
Breaker failure protection with adjustable time delay (50BF).
Reverse/Forward Power (32-1, 32-2)
Sync Check (25)
Power Factor (55)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
Individual phase and ground currents with phase angles
Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages with phase angles
Watts
Vars
VA
Frequency
Power factor – apparent and displacement
Demand and Peak demand (ampere, Watt, VAR, and VA) with date and
time stamp since last reset
(1)
v.
w.
x.
The primary current transformer ratings being used for phase and
ground protection feeding the device shall be programmable for
current transformers with primary current ratings from 1 through
6,000 amperes, in 1 ampere steps.
The ground current input and ground protection elements shall
be independent of the phase inputs and shall be capable of being
connected to the phase residual current transformer connection
or to a zero sequence current transformer.
Both the phase and ground protection curves shall be
independently field selectable and programmable with or without
load. Curves shall be selectable from the following:
ANSI/IEEE: Moderately inverse, very inverse, and
extremely inverse
IEC: A, B or C
Thermal:
Flat, It, I2t, I4t
Thermal curves shall be similar to those on low voltage
trip units for close coordination with downstream
devices.
The relay shall have six trip rated contact outputs that may be
programmed for any protection function operation output.
The relay shall have a front panel display of relay condition,
breaker status and trip condition.
The relay shall have a built-in alphanumeric display capable of
displaying the following information with metering accuracy
phase current +/- 0.5% or +/- 0.025A from 0.02 to 20.0 per unit,
ground current +/- 0.5% of full scale (In) from 0.2 to 2.0 per
unit.
Forward, reverse and net watthours with start date and time
stamp
Lead, lag and net var hours with start date and time stamp
VA-hours with start date and time stamp
Minimum/maximum values of current, voltage, watts, vars, VA,
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 8
Electrical
Guide Specification
y.
z.
4.
Relay shall have the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
5.
7.
8.
9.
Integral manual testing capability for both phase and ground overcurrent
protection functions
Zone selective interlocking capability for phase and ground fault
protection. This function shall be provided and factory wired. Where
zone selective interlocking is not an integral part of the protective device,
a full bus differential scheme shall be required for both phase and
ground, in addition to specified time overcurrent and instantaneous
overcurrent phase and ground fault protection. Bus differential scheme
shall be provided with separate differential current transformers for all
incoming and outgoing loads, as well as appropriate differential relays
(ANSI 87 and 87G) as approved by LAWA.
Real-time clock for stamping of events, trips and minimum/maximum
values with 1 mS time resolution
Trip coil-monitoring circuits
User interface for programming and retrieving data from the front of the
unit without additional equipment
Eight (8) contact inputs that are user programmable
Continuous self-testing of internal circuitry
Self-diagnostic capability and a relay healthy alarm output
Integral test program for testing the relay operation by simulating
current and voltage conditions internally
Unit failure alarm contact for customer use
Programmable lockout/self-reset after trip function
Programmable set points for device curve selection
Programmable inputs, such as current transformer ratios
Access to program and test modes shall be via sealable hinged cover and
password protected for security.
Relay shall record information on the last 16 faults including:
a.
b.
6.
frequency, apparent pf and displacement pf with date and time stamping
Percent THD of voltage and current
Positive, negative and zero sequence components of voltage and current
with phase angles.
Date, time, currents and voltages at the time of fault
Waveforms of the voltages and currents.
Relay shall record the last 100 events into an event log with date and time
stamping
Relay shall have programmable logic control functions including logic gates and
timer for control of auxiliary functions
Relay shall provide and retain relay communication address and check sum
setting verification in non-volatile memory chip within the permanently installed
case.
Relay shall be suitable for operating temperatures from -30 degrees to 55 degrees
C. Relay shall be suitable for operating with humidity from 0 to 95% relative
humidity (non-condensing).
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 9
Electrical
Guide Specification
10.
Relay shall have the following communications ports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.8
A rear communication port that is FSK based and supports local area
network compatible to Cutler-Hammer PowerNet or IMPACC systems.
A rear communication port that is RS-485 based and supports the
Modbus RTU protocol.
A front communication port supporting ASCI communications to a
personal computer or laptop computer.
Relay shall be capable of the following over the communication
network: Ability to transmit all information contained in the relay such
as currents, set points, cause of trip, magnitude of trip current,
waveforms and open-close trip status. Ability to close and open the
associated breaker with proper access code from remote location over the
communication network when the relay is configured in remote
close/open mode.
Relay shall have communication ability to open and close the breaker remotely
via password protected access or locally from the front of the relay.
Relay shall store four setting groups which can be called for via communications,
front panel operation or contact input.
Relay trip contacts shall not change state if power is lost or an undervoltage
occurs. These contacts shall only cause a trip upon detection of an overcurrent or
fault condition based upon programmed settings.
A relay healthy alarm output shall be normally energized and shall drop out if a
relay failure is detected in the self-test function or if control power is lost.
The relay shall be suitable for operating on control power with a nominal input
voltage of 125 Vac or 250 Vac (60 Hz). When AC control power schemes
required, in addition to control power transformer or remote control power are
specified, a single-phase uninterruptable power supply shall be included to
supply control power to protective devices.
AUXILIARY DEVICES
A.
Ring type current transformers shall be furnished. The thermal and mechanical ratings of
the current transformers shall be coordinated with the circuit breakers. Their accuracy
rating shall be equal to or higher than ANSI standard requirements. Shorting terminal
blocks shall be furnished on the secondary of all the current transformers.
B.
Voltage and control power transformers of the quantity and ratings indicated in the
detailed specification shall be supplied. Voltage transformers shall be mounted in
drawout drawers contained in an enclosed auxiliary compartment. Control power
transformers up to 15 kV, 15 kVA, single-phase shall be mounted in drawout drawers.
Rails shall be provided as applicable for each drawer to permit easy inspection, testing
and fuse replacement. Shutters shall isolate primary bus stabs when drawers are
withdrawn.
C.
A mechanical interlock shall be provided to require the secondary breaker to be open
before the CPT drawer or CPT primary fuse drawer can be withdrawn.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 10
Electrical
Guide Specification
2.9
AUTOMATIC THROWOVER SYSTEM – OPEN TRANSITION
A.
Dual Source, With Tie, Open Transition Automatic Transfer Control System
1.
2.
3.
Provide an automatic transfer control system for control of three circuit breakers.
The logic of the transfer control system functions shall be provided via a
microprocessor. The set points shall be field adjustable without the use of special
tools
The transfer control system shall be provided with a local display. The display
shall show the status of the system as it is operating. When timers are
functioning, the display shall show the timer counting down. All time delays
shall be capable of being set from the front of the display using a timer setting
screen
The transfer control system includes the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Time delay to transfer on loss of Source 1, adjustable.
Time delay to transfer on loss of Source 2, adjustable.
Time delay re-transfer to Source 1, adjustable.
Time delay re-transfer to Source 2, adjustable.
Time delay neutral (main and tie open), adjustable.
The local system display shall show the following: Main- Tie- Main one
line diagram; main and tie breaker status (open, closed, tripped, out of
cell); readout marked “Source 1” and “Source 2” to indicate that
respective source voltages are available; automatic/manual mode select
pushbutton; pushbuttons for manual breaker control; and alarm
information (loss of source, breaker trip).
Sequence of Operation – Automatic Mode
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Under normal conditions, the main breakers are closed and the tie
breaker is open.
Upon phase loss or loss of phase-to-phase voltage of either utility source
to between 80% and 100% of nominal, and after a time delay, adjustable
from 1 to 60 seconds to override momentary dips and outages the
transfer control system shall open the affected main breaker and close
the tie breaker.
When normal voltage has been restored after a time delay, adjustable
from 10 to 600 seconds (to ensure the integrity of the source), the
transfer control system shall open the tie breaker. The transfer control
system shall have an adjustable neutral position timer (0-10 seconds) to
allow voltage to decay sufficiently before the affected main breaker is
then closed (open transition retransfer).
If Source 2 should fail while carrying the load, transfer to Source 1 shall
be made instantaneously upon restoration of Source 1 to satisfactory
conditions.
If both sources should fail simultaneously, no action shall be taken.
If the main or tie breakers trip due to a fault, the transfer control system
shall be reset to manual mode and manual operation of that breaker shall
be prevented until its overcurrent trip switch is reset.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 11
Electrical
Guide Specification
5.
Sequence of Operation – Manual Mode
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.10
While in manual mode, breakers shall be capable of being opened and
closed using control switches or pushbuttons on the transfer control
system display. Electrical interlocking shall be provided to prevent the
closing of both mains and the tie simultaneously.
Provide a control power transformer for each source with control power transfer
scheme
Provide electrically operated main and tie circuit breakers
Provide a programmable logic controller with 24 volts dc ride-through power
supply
Provide an industrial display panel
LAWA METERING
A.
Provide a separate LAWA metering devices and compartment with front hinged doors.
Include associated instrument transformers.
B.
Provide current transformers for metering. Current transformers shall be wired to shorting
type terminal blocks.
C.
Provide potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means for metering.
D.
Microprocessor-based metering system. Power Xpert 8000
1.
2.
Provide a microprocessor based line of Power Quality complete 8000 Meters,
designated PX-M consisting of a Power Quality Meter Base(s) designated PX-B
along with an integrally mounted Power Quality Meter Display designated PX-D.
The PX-M shall be equal to Cutler-Hammer type PowerXpert 8000 as herein
specified. PX-B shall be NEMA 1 rated and PX-D shall be NEMA 12 rated.
Complete PX-8000 shall be have the following minimum listings and/or
certifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Safety: UL 61010A-1, EN 610101.
Accuracy: ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2, IEC/EN60687 0.2 for revenue
meters.
EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A immunity.
IEC Standards: 50081-2, 61000-3, 61000-4, and 61000-6.
Meter shall be supplied suitable for standard 120/240 Vac as required.
Current inputs for each channel shall be from standard instrument current
transformers.
a.
b.
The analog current input shall be converted to 1024 samples per cycle
with a delta-sigma converter digitally filtered down to 256 samples per
cycle for anti-aliasing.
Meter burden shall be less than 10 milliohms.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 12
Electrical
Guide Specification
c.
d.
5.
Voltage inputs for each channel shall allow for connection into circuits with the
following parameters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Overload withstand capability shall be a minimum of 500A for 1 second,
non-repeating.
Input range capability shall be 0.005 to 20 amperes.
Input range of 600V L-L, 347V L-N direct connected.
PT primary input of 120 volts to 500,000 volts.
Nominal full-scale value of 700 volts rms.
Input impedance of 2 mega ohms.
The analog voltage input shall be converted to 1024 samples per cycle by
means of a delta sigma converter and digitally filtered down to 256
samples per cycle for anti-phasing.
The PX-Metering series shall be capable of monitoring, displaying, and
communicating the below true rms minimum information where applicable with
the accuracy as indicated of read or calculated values based on 3 to 300% full
scale. The PX-Metering series shall be suitable for installation in single phase,
two or three wire systems or in three phase, three or four wire systems
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
AC current (amperes) in A, B and C phase, 3-phase average, Neutral (N)
and Ground (G). A total of five (5) current inputs shall be provided.
Accuracy of all current inputs shall be 0.05% reading, +/- 0.01% of full
scale. Provide neutral and ground current transformers. The 5 ampere
current inputs shall withstand 40 amperes continuous and 300 amperes
for 1 second. Current transformer ratios shall be selectable.
AC voltage (volts) for A-B, B-C and C-A, phase average, A-N, B-N and
C-N, average phase to N, and N to G. Accuracy of all voltage inputs
shall be +/- 0.1% reading, +/-0.05% maximum of full scale. Capable of
metering up to 600 volt without external Potential Transformers (PTs)
and up to 500 kV with appropriate PTs.
Real Power (Watts), Reactive Power (vars), Apparent Power (VA), for
each phase and system. Accuracy +/- 0.10% reading and +/- 0.0025%
full scale. Forward/Reverse indication shall be provided.
Accumulated, Incremental and conditional measurement for Real Energy
(WH), Reactive Energy (VARH), Apparent Energy (VAH) for each
phase and system. Accuracy +/- 0.10% reading and +/- 0.0025% full
scale. Forward/Reverse and Net difference indication shall be provided.
Frequency (Hz) Accuracy +/- 0.01 hertz.
Demand values including present, running average, last complete interval
and peak for System Current (Amperes). Demand values including
present, running average, last complete interval, peak and coincident
with peak kVA and kW demand for System Real Power (Watts), System
Reactive Power (vars), and System Apparent Power (VA).
Power Factor for both Displacement only 60-cycle fundamental Watts to
VA and Apparent total Watts to total vars including harmonics for A, B
and C phase and 3 phase average. Accuracy +/- 0.10% at unity PF and
+/-0.30% at 0.5 PF.
Current percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in A, B and C phase
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 13
Electrical
Guide Specification
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
7.
The PX series shall provide the following sampling capabilities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
8.
and N.
(1)
Voltage percent THD in A-B, B-C and C-A phase, A-N, B-N
and C-N.
K-Factor (sum of the squares of harmonic currents times the square of
their harmonic numbers).
Transformer Derating Factor (1.414 divided by the Crest Factor).
Crest Factor (ratio of peak current to rms current).
CBEMA (ITIC) curve data
Flicker data
Nines (9’s) availability data.
Power Quality Index
A/D technology, sampling at 1024 samples per cycle.
Over-sampling and quantizing filtering to eliminate false signal noise.
ITIC representation of power events.
DV/dt triggers for sub-cycle oscillatory transients. Both dv/dt and
absolute threshold triggering shall be supported on all voltage inputs,
including N-G voltage.
Six (6) MHz/ one (1) MHz capture of impulsive transients. 20 ms of
data shall be captured at six (6) MHz or 120 ms of data shall be captured
at one (1) MHz.
Waveform recorded at 100,000 high rate samples per cycle. Waveforms
shall be displayed on standard web browser without requiring separately
purchased and installed software.
Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast transient capture.
Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering.
The PX series shall provide the following advanced analysis features:
a.
b.
c.
Calculation of harmonic magnitudes and phase angle for each phase
voltage and current through the 85th harmonic.
Waveforms shall be available in non-volatile memory and retrievable via
file transfer protocol (FTP) in COMTRADE file format over the Internet
network. No special software shall be required to download or view
waveforms. Waveforms shall be viewable within standard web browser.
Historical Trending: Historical trend logging for graphical viewing from
the Local PX-D display or from an embedded WEB server. The
graphical views of historical data shall support both pan and zoom
functions. All standard metering parameters shall be logged as part of
the standard meter functionality including minimum, maximum and
average for each metered parameter. The minimum and maximum
readings shall be based on 200ms calculations. The averages shall be
calculated over the user selected time interval period. Minimum storage
capacity for standard trend plots shall be as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
One-minute intervals for 9 days.
Sixty-minute intervals for 540 days.
Data storage up to 512 MB.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 14
Electrical
Guide Specification
d.
Time of Use Monitoring: Time of use monitoring shall include:
(1)
(2)
(3)
e.
Energy Profile: Energy profile data shall include recording of real and
reactive energy forward, reverse, net and absolute sum as well as
apparent energy (KVAH). Up to eight (8) status inputs shall be
configurable as energy accumulators for counting KYZ pulse inputs.
These readings shall be stored over a configurable interval from 1 to 60
minutes as well as in daily and weekly totals. Storage capacity shall be as
follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
f.
(4)
(5)
h.
Sixty-two (62) days of fifteen (15) minute interval energy and
pulse interval data. (Fixed interval capacity shall equal 5,952
intervals configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).
Three hundred and seventy-two (372) days of 1 day accumulated
energy and pulse interval data.
Two Hundred and eight (208) weeks of one (1) week
accumulated energy and pulse interval data.
Event Triggers: The PX-M shall have a quantity of five (5) types of
configurable event triggers configurable using a web browser consisting
of 1) Out of limits, 2) Demand overload, 3) ITIC, 4) Sub-Cycle
disturbance and 5) Fast Transient. The web browser shall not require
any user-installed software. These triggers shall permit pickup, reset
and pickup delay to be user configurable. When a trigger occurs, actions
shall include Performance monitoring (Nines (9s) analysis, Capturing
Waveform, Capture all metered parameters, and ability to send by email
and/or activate a relay output. The meter graphic display PX-MD shall
flash an LED to annunciate the alarm condition and an audible alarm
shall be available. The following trigger options shall be included:
(1)
(2)
(3)
g.
Four rate periods for time of use revenue metering.
Total rate independent of time of use.
Up to 4 rate schedules (weekdays and weekends).
Out of limits – one hundred and five (105) triggers.
Demand overload – Ten (10) triggers.
ITIC curve display sag or swell voltage events – Eight (8)
triggers.
Fast transient – dV/dt and absolute per phase.
Sub-cycle disturbance – dV/dt and absolute.
Event Logging: The PX-M or embedded WEB Server shall allow the
user to view a list of triggered events along with any captured
parameters, event details, and triggered waveforms. In addition, a
separate event log shall include logging of activities including
acknowledged triggers, new minimum and maximum events, and
systems operations, such as resets. The size of each event log shall be
virtually unlimited based only on the memory option selected.
ITIC Analysis Plot: The PX-M or embedded WEB Server shall include a
graphic display of the Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC)
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 15
Electrical
Guide Specification
i.
j.
plot with counts of disturbances and transients that have occurred. The
ITIC plot shall organize events into eight (8) distinct disturbance zones
corresponding to the severity of the event and a ninth (9th) zone for
transients. A pass/fail count shall be displayed to indicate how many
events are outside the ITIC limits. Operator clicking of any counter, or
the event itself in the ITIC WEB page shall link the user to the event
view and display all triggered events in the selected zone making it easy
to view disturbance waveforms associated with the ITIC plot.
Sag/Swell and Waveform recording: Sixty (60) cycles of waveform shall
be recorded at 256 samples per cycle including 30 cycles of pre and post
event data. The embedded WEB server shall be capable of supporting
viewing of all triggered waveforms one channel at a time and shall
include the ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally using a slider bar.
Waveforms shall be stored in non-volatile flash memory using industry
standard COMTRADE format. Waveforms shall be automatically sent
out as COMTRADE attachments to an email following an event, or shall
be retrievable from an FTP directory structure from the meter’s memory.
Minimum and Maximum values for the following parameters:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
9.
Voltage L-L and L-N
Current per phase
Apparent Power Factor and Displacement Power Factor
Real, Reactive, and Apparent total Power
THD voltage L-L and L-N
THD Current per phase
Frequency
The PX-8000 meter base and display shall have a digital Input/Output (I/O) card
which shall include:
a.
b.
Eight (8) digital inputs – self sourced 24 Vdc. These shall be interrupt
driven, allowing for 1ms accuracy of digital events time stamps when
utilizing local NTP server. Inputs shall be configurable for demand
synch, and pulse counting. Inputs selected for pulse counting shall be
scalable. Interval by interval pulse recordings shall be maintained in the
PX-M/PX-B profile memory and shall be capable of being displayed
graphically.
Three (3) relay outputs – 5A maximum form C continuous, 380Vac
maximum, 125Vdc maximum. Outputs shall be suitable for KYX or
alarm annunciation. Relay outputs shall have the following minimum
ratings:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Make: 30A, 30 Vdc, 120-240 Vac.
Break: 5A, 30 Vdc, 120-240 Vac.
Resistive load: 0.5A, 125Vdc; 0.25A, 250 Vdc.
Mechanical Operations: 1,000,000 no-load and100,000 under
rated voltage and current.
Output Relay when event triggered shall be capable of operating
in timed, normal or latched mode.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 16
Electrical
Guide Specification
c.
10.
The PX-8000 base and display shall be provided with multiple communications
ports and protocols, including the following minimum capability:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
11.
b.
c.
d.
e.
13.
RS-232
RS-485
RJ-45 10/100 Base-T Local Ethernet Configuration Port for local WEB
server connection
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
HTML web pages
File transfer protocol (FTP)
Ethernet TCP/IP
The PX-8000 graphically display shall utilize a simple “twist and click”
navigation control dial to easily navigate the menus, select links to related pages,
and to drill down into increasing levels of further details. A “back” key shall be
provided for easy navigation to higher level screens. The graphical display shall
have the following features:
a.
12.
Two (2) solid state outputs – 80 mA maximum continuous, 30 Vdc
maximum.
Backlight LCD remote graphics display with 320 x 240 pixels. This
display must supporting reviewing, displaying and scrolling through
waveform captures without requiring a separate computer or separately
purchased software.
Capable of being mounted to the Meter base unit or remote mounting of
display up to 2000 ft away with capability of displaying up to 16 base
units or complete Meters.
A set of screens including real time data, trend lots, waveform views and
ITIC plot.
Allow basic device setup and password protected resets.
An audible alarm to annunciate alarm conditions.
The WEB server shall provide the user with remote WEB access to all the
metered, trend and waveform information. The WEB server shall include real
time monitored information in both numeric and graphical visual formats.
The meter shall be cable of providing the graphically display of the following
Main Meter Menu Screens:
a.
Meter Screen providing:
(1)
(2)
(3)
b.
Volts: L-L and L-N, and average
Frequency
Current and average phase A, B, and C, N & G
Power Screen providing:
(1)
(2)
Energy
Demand
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 17
Electrical
Guide Specification
(3)
c.
Quality Screen providing:
(1)
(2)
(3)
d.
2.11
View set-up
Edit set-up
Login
Logout
A tool bar for screen selection which is always present and viewable shall be
provided along the bottom of the graphical display. Selection of one of the main
screens shall be by turning the navigation knob and highlighting the desired
screen. Once selected, pressing the knob shall make the selection.
ENCLOSURES
A.
2.12
Latest events
Enabled Triggers
Historical Events
Set-up screen providing:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
14.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of volts and current
Flicker
Percent Nines (9s) reliability
Events screen providing:
(1)
(2)
(3)
e.
Power Factor
The switchgear described in these specifications shall be indoor construction.
NAMEPLATES
NOTE: Refer to Identification for Electrical Systems for information pertaining to
nameplates on equipment.
A.
2.13
Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays,
pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to
appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.
FINISH
A.
The finish shall consist of a coat of gray (ANSI-61), thermosetting, polyester powder
paint applied electrostatically to pre-cleaned and phosphatized steel and aluminum for
internal and external parts. The coating shall have corrosion resistance of 600 hours to
5% salt spray.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 18
Electrical
Guide Specification
2.14
ACCESSORIES
A.
The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish accessories for test, inspection, maintenance
and operation, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.15
CORONA FREE DESIGN
A.
2.16
2.17
One – Maintenance tool for manually charging the breaker closing spring and
manually opening the shutter
One – Levering crank for moving the breaker between test and connected
positions
One – Test jumper for electrically operating the breaker while out of its
compartment
One – Breaker lifting yoke used for attachment to breaker for lifting breaker on
or off compartment rails, when applicable
One – Set of rail extensions and rail clamps, when applicable
One – Test cabinet for testing electrically operated breakers outside housing
One – Electrical levering device
The switchgear shall be corona free by design and shall be tested for partial discharges in
accordance with EEMAC standard G11-1. The corona discharges measured during the
tests shall be less than 100 picocoulombs.
PARTIAL DISCHARGE SENSING EQUIPMENT
A.
The switchgear shall be equipped with factory installed partial discharge sensors and
relay for continuous monitoring of the partial discharges under normal operation. The
purpose of partial discharge sensing is to identify potential insulation problems
(insulation degradation) by trending of PD data over time so that corrective actions can
be planned and implemented before permanent insulation deterioration develops.
B.
The PD sensing and monitoring system shall consist of sensors and relay specifically
developed for such applications, such as Eaton’s RFCT sensor and InsulGard relay, or
equivalent. One RFCT sensor shall be installed over floating stress shields of specially
designed bus or line side primary bushings, at every two vertical section for detection of
partial discharges within the switchgear compartments. An RFCT sensor shall also be
provided for installation around ground shields of the incoming or outgoing power cable
termination for detection of PD activity in the cables up to 100 feet from the switchgear.
Output signals from each RFCT shall be factory wired to PD monitoring relay for
continuous monitoring.
CONTROLS & CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
A.
The metal-clad switchgear auxiliary section for control and instrumentation shall include
the following:
1.
Line-to-line voltage transformers.
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 19
Electrical
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
2.18
Current transformers.
Single-phase control power transformers with automatic throwover system. The
size of the transformers shall be determined by the VacClad lineup manufacturer
and each transformer shall handle the full control power load of the lineup (tie
breaker closed, single source available).
Microprocessor-based PowerXpert 8000 metering system
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Furnish shop inspection and testing in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
B.
Make completed switchboard available for inspection at manufacturer’s factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
LAWA at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FACTORY TESTING
A.
The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the circuit breaker element
provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of
ANSI standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Alignment test with master cell to verify all interfaces and interchangeability
Circuit breakers operated over the range of minimum to maximum control
voltage
Factory setting of contact gap
One-minute dielectric test per ANSI standards
Final inspections and quality checks
The following production test shall be performed on each breaker housing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alignment test with master breaker to verify interfaces
One-minute dielectric test per ANSI standards on primary and secondary circuits
Operation of wiring, relays and other devices verified by an operational sequence
test
Final inspection and quality check
C.
The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.
D.
Factory tests as outlined above under 3.02.B shall be witnessed by LAWA.
1.
2.
The manufacturer shall notify LAWA two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are
to be performed.
The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 20
Electrical
Guide Specification
three (3) LAWA’s representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses
shall be LAWA’s responsibility.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to assist
the Contractor in installation and startup of the equipment specified under this section for
a period of 5 working days. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical
direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment,
connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained
therein.
B.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s field startup report.
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A.
A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the
equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s representative’s
certification.
TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to ten (10) LAWA’s
representatives for 3 normal workdays at a job site location determined by LAWA.
B.
The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer’s qualified representative.
Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, protective
devices, and other major components.
INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations and
contract drawings.
B.
All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the
Contractor.
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A.
The relays shall be set in the field by:
1.
A qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 21
Electrical
Guide Specification
accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as
required elsewhere in the contract documents.
END OF SECTION 26 13 13
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR (VACCLAD)
26 13 13 - 22
Electrical
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 22 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
1.2
Section includes two-winding transformers; K- factor rated shielded transformer.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories,
unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations,
insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and
sound level.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type).
NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Revised 09/2012
26 22 00 - 1
Guide Specification
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler Hammer
General Electric.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type transformers.
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
E.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
2.
1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
F.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at
full load.
G.
Winding Taps:
1.
2.
H.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1-5 kVA: 30 dB.
6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Revised 09/2012
26 22 00 - 2
Guide Specification
I.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers
300 kVA and larger.
J.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
K.
Mounting:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
L.
Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.
M.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 indoor, dry locations and Type 3R for wet locations.
Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
N.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
O.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer
General Electric
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type transformers.
K- factor 13 rated, 220 degree C insulation.
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
E.
200% neutral.
F.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
G.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at
full load.
H.
Winding Taps:
1.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Revised 09/2012
26 22 00 - 3
Guide Specification
2.
I.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
J.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers
300 kVA and larger.
K.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
L.
Mounting:
1.
2.
2.3
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
M.
Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.
N.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 indoor, dry locations and Type 3R for wet locations.
Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
O.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
P.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
Q.
Provide an electrostatic shield.
Source Quality Control
A.
Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify mounting supports are properly sized and located including concealed bracing in
walls.
INSTALLATION
A.
Set transformer plumb and level.
B.
Use flexible conduit, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Revised 09/2012
26 22 00 - 4
Guide Specification
conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C.
Support transformers.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets
furnished by manufacturer.
Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for
isolating transformer noise from building structure.
Mount trapeze-mounted transformers.
Provide seismic restraints.
NOTE: Electrical transformer for toilets, urinals and sensors shall be located in ceiling
and provided with ceiling access panels to the extent possible.
3.3
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.1.
ADJUSTING
A.
Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Revised 09/2012
26 22 00 - 5
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 22 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
1.2
Section includes two-winding transformers; K- factor rated shielded transformer.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and
accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap
configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and
sound level.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type).
NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler Hammer
General Electric.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type
transformers.
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
E.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
2.
1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
F.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at
full load.
G.
Winding Taps:
1.
2.
H.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1-5 kVA: 30 dB.
6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers
300 kVA and larger.
J.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
K.
Mounting:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
0-9 kVA: 40 dB.
10-50 kVA: 45 dB.
51-150 kVA: 50 dB.
151-300 kVA: 55 dB.
301-500 kVA: 60 dB.
501-700 kVA: 62 dB.
1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
L.
Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.
M.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 indoor, dry locations and Type 3R for wet locations.
Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
N.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
O.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer
General Electric
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type
transformers. K- factor 13 rated, 220 degree C insulation.
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase or unless otherwise noted.
E.
200% neutral.
F.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
G.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at
full load.
H.
Winding Taps:
1.
2.
I.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
0-9 kVA: 40 dB.
10-50 kVA: 45 dB.
51-150 kVA: 50 dB.
151-300 kVA: 55 dB.
301-500 kVA: 60 dB.
501-700 kVA: 62 dB.
J.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers
300 kVA and larger.
K.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
L.
Mounting:
1.
2.
2.3
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full
capacity taps on primary winding.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
M.
Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.
N.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 indoor, dry locations and Type 3R for wet locations.
Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
O.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
P.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
Q.
Provide an electrostatic shield.
Source Quality Control
A.
Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify mounting supports are properly sized and located including concealed bracing in
walls.
INSTALLATION
A.
Set transformer plumb and level.
B.
Use flexible conduit, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make
conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C.
Support transformers.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets
furnished by manufacturer.
Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for
isolating transformer noise from building structure.
Mount trapeze-mounted transformers.
Provide seismic restraints.
NOTE: Electrical transformer for toilets, urinals and sensors shall be located in ceiling
and provided with ceiling access panels to the extent possible.
3.3
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.1.
ADJUSTING
A.
Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 23 00 - METAL-ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR - LOW VOLTAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
The Contractor shall furnish and install, a deadfront type, low voltage metal-enclosed
switchgear assembly utilizing drawout power circuit breakers.
REFERENCES
A.
The low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear assembly and all components shall be
designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the following latest applicable
standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
ANSI-C37.20 - Switchgear assemblies
ANSI-C37.13 - Low voltage power circuit breakers
ANSI-C37.17 - Trip devices
NEMA SG-5 - Switchgear assemblies
NEMA SG-3 - Low voltage power circuit breakers
UL 1558
UL 819
SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A.
The following information shall be submitted to LAWA:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Master drawing index
Front view and plan view of the assembly
Three-line diagram
Schematic diagram
Nameplate schedule
Component list
Conduit space locations within the assembly
Assembly ratings including:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Short-circuit rating
Voltage
Continuous current rating
Major component ratings including:
a.
b.
c.
Voltage
Continuous current rating
Interrupting ratings
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
10.
Cable terminal sizes
11.
Product data sheets
Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to LAWA:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
C.
Submit shop drawings after Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination Study is approved. Shop drawings submitted without approved study will
be returned and not reviewed.
D.
AIC ratings of all submitted equipment must conform to the approved Short Circuit and
Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study, minimum 100,000AIC.
E.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Busway connection
Composite front view and plan view of close-coupled assemblies
Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
Mimic bus size and color
Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and
shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process
Wiring diagrams
Certified production test reports
Installation information
Seismic certification as specified
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components
within the assembly.
B.
For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
C.
The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for
a minimum period of twenty-five (25) years. When requested by LAWA, an acceptable
list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance
with this requirement.
D.
Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows:
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
E.
The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all
applicable seismic requirements of the California Building Code (CBC) through Site
Classification D. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall
be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative
equipment. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping
factor, CBC: a peak of 2.15g’s, and a ZPA of 0.86g’s applied at the base of the
equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural
frequencies up to at least 35 Hz.
F.
The manufacturer may certify the equipment based on a detailed computer analysis of the
entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for the installation consistent
with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based
upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall document
the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment
G.
The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless
specifically modified by the above referenced standards.
1.
2.
3.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
The switchgear shall bear a UL 1558 label.Certified copies of production test reports
shall be supplied demonstrating compliance with these standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the
equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil
engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the
manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic
design of the equipment.
The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that
is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral
required response spectra as specified in above codes.
The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for
proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be
considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the
specified response spectra.
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of
shipment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly
shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
assembly and each major component. Submit spare parts listing; source and current
prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals. It shall also include original shop drawings, and recommended maintenance,
Manufacturer’s Certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cutler-Hammer
B.
Square D
C.
General Electric
D.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above
are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
RATINGS
A.
The entire assembly shall be suitable for 600 volts maximum ac service.
B.
The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit
conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of
100,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.
C.
The bus system shall have a minimum ANSI short-circuit withstand rating of 100,000
amperes symmetrical tested in accordance with ANSI C37.20.1 and UL1558.
D.
All circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity of 100,000
amperes. To ensure a fully selective system, all circuit breakers shall have 30 cycle
short-time withstand ratings equal to their symmetrical interrupting ratings through
85,000 amperes, regardless of whether equipped with instantaneous trip protection or not.
E.
All ratings shall be tested to the requirements of ANSI C37.20.1, C37.50 and C37.51 and
UL witnessed and approved.
CONSTRUCTION
A.
The switchgear shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to
form a rigid assembly. The sides shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All
edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide ventilators located
on the top of the switchgear over the breaker and bus compartments to ensure adequate
ventilation within the enclosure. Hinged rear doors, complete with provisions for
padlocking, shall be provided.
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being
moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor
sills providing the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3-foot distance in any direction.
Provisions shall be made for jacking of shipping groups, for removal of skids or insertion
of equipment rollers. Base of assembly shall be suitable for rolling directly on pipes
without skids. The base shall be equipped with slots in the base frame members to
accommodate the use of pry bars for moving the equipment to its final position.
C.
Each vertical steel unit forming part of the switchgear line-up shall be a self-contained
housing having one or more individual breaker or instrument compartments, a centralized
bus compartment and a rear cable compartment. Each individual circuit breaker
compartment, or cell, shall be segregated from adjacent compartments and sections by
means of steel barriers to the maximum extent possible. It shall be equipped with drawout
rails and primary and secondary disconnecting contacts. Removable hinge pins shall be
provided on the breaker compartment door hinges. Current transformers for feeder
instrumentation, where shown on the plans, shall be located within the appropriate
breaker cells and be front accessible and removable.
D.
The stationary part of the primary disconnecting devices for each power circuit breaker
shall be breaker mounted and consist of a set of contacts extending to the rear through a
glass polyester insulating support barrier; corresponding moving finger contacts, suitably
spaced, shall be furnished on the power circuit breaker studs which engage in only the
connected position. The assembly shall provide multiple silver-tosilver full floating high
pressure point contacts with uniform pressure on each finger maintained by springs. Each
circuit shall include the necessary three-phase bus connections between the section bus
and the breaker line side studs. Load studs shall be equipped with insulated copper load
extension buses terminating in solderless type terminals in the rear cable compartment of
each structure. Bus extensions shall be silver-plated where outgoing terminals are
attached.
E.
The circuit breaker door design shall be such that the following functions may be
performed without the need to open the circuit breaker door: lever circuit breaker
between positions, operate manual charging system, close and open circuit breaker,
examine and adjust trip unit, and read circuit breaker rating nameplate.
F.
The secondary disconnecting devices shall consist of floating terminals mounted on the
stationary unit and engaging mating contacts at the front of the breaker. The secondary
disconnecting devices shall be gold-plated and engagement shall be maintained in the
“connected” and “test” positions.
G.
The removable power circuit breaker element shall be equipped with disconnecting
contacts and interlocks for drawout application. It shall have four positions, “connected”,
“test”, “disconnected” and “removed”. The breaker drawout element shall contain a
worm gear levering “in” and “out” mechanism with removable lever crank. Levering
shall be accomplished via the use of conventional tools. Mechanical interlocking shall be
provided so that the breaker is in the tripped position before levering “in” or “out” of the
cell. The breaker shall include an optional provision for key locking open to prevent
manual or electric closing. Padlocking shall provide for securing the breaker in the
connected, test, or disconnected position by preventing levering.
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
H.
An insulating flash shield shall be mounted above each circuit breaker to prevent
flashover from the arc chutes to ground.
1.
I.
Provide a rear compartment barrier between the cable compartment and the main bus to
protect against inadvertent contact with main or vertical bus bars.
J.
Provide in the cell when the circuit breaker is withdrawn, a safety shutter which
automatically covers the line and load stabs and protects against incidental contact.
1.
K.
2.4
2.5
The switchgear shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be
labeled in accordance with UL requirements.
Provide a metal barrier full height and depth between adjacent vertical structures
in the cable compartment.
Provide a glass polyester full height and depth barrier between adjacent vertical structures
in the bus compartment with appropriate slots for main bus.
BUS
A.
All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with
all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on ANSI
standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside
the enclosure).
B.
Provide a full capacity neutral bus.
C.
A copper ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure
and shall extend the entire length of the switchgear. The ground bus short-time withstand
rating shall meet that of the largest circuit breaker within the assembly.
D.
All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. All bus
joints shall be provided with Belleville-type washers.
E.
Provide bus extensions on ends for future sections.
WIRING/TERMINATIONS
A.
Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchgear shall be
furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly shall be suitably
marked for identification corresponding to the appropriate designations on
manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.
B.
Provide a front accessible, isolated vertical wireway for routing of factory and field
wiring. Factory provisions shall be made for securing field wiring without the need for
adhesive wire anchors.
C.
Front access to all circuit breaker secondary connection points shall be provided for ease
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
of troubleshooting and connection to external field connections without the need of
removing the circuit breaker for access.
2.6
D.
All control wire shall be type SIS. Control wiring shall be 16 ga for control circuits and
14 ga for shunt trip and current transformer circuits. Wire bundles shall be secured with
nylon ties and anchored to the assembly with the use of pre-punched wire lances or nylon
non-adhesive anchors. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to
conveniently accessible shorting terminal blocks before connecting to any other device.
Shorting screws with provisions for storage shall be provided. All groups of control wires
leaving the switchgear shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering
strips and provisions for #10 AWG field connections. Each control wire shall be marked
to the origin zone/wire name/destination zone over the entire length of the wire using a
UV cured ink process. Plug-in terminal blocks shall be provided for all shipping split
wires. Terminal connections to remote devices or sources shall be front accessible via
doors above each circuit breaker. Terminal blocks shall be of the latched pull-apart type.
E.
NEMA 2-hole mechanical- type lugs shall be provided for all line and load terminations
suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size.
F.
Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding
conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be
provided.
G.
Provide 25% spare terminals.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
All protective devices shall be low voltage power circuit breakers. All breakers shall be
UL listed for application in their intended enclosures for 100% of their continuous
ampere rating.
B.
All power circuit breakers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ANSI
C37.13, C37.16, C37.17, C37.50, UL 1066 and NEMA SG-3 standard. The breaker shall
carry a UL label.
C.
Breakers shall be provided in drawout configuration. The 800, 1600, 2000 and 3200
ampere frame power circuit breakers shall be provided in the same physical frame size,
while 4000, 5000 and 6000 ampere frame power circuit breakers shall be provided in a
second physical frame size. Both physical frame sizes shall have a common height and
depth.
D.
Power circuit breakers shall utilize a two-step stored-energy mechanism to charge the
closing springs. The closing of the breaker contacts shall automatically charge the
opening springs to ensure quick-break operation.
E.
Breakers shall be electrically operated (EO).
F.
Electrically operated breakers shall be complete with 120 Vac motor operators. The
charging time of the motor shall not exceed 6 seconds. Control power for all switchgear
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
control circuits shall be provided by a factory-sized control power transformer wired on
the line side of the main breaker(s).
G.
To facilitate lifting, the power circuit breaker shall have integral handles on the side of
the breaker.
H.
The power circuit breaker shall have a closing time of not more than 3 cycles.
1.
I.
The power circuit breaker shall have three windows in the front cover to clearly indicate
any electrical accessories that are mounted in the breaker. The accessory shall have a
label that will indicate its function and voltage. The accessories shall be plug and lock
type and UL listed for easy field installation. They shall be modular in design and shall
be common to all frame sizes and ratings.
J.
The breaker control interface shall have color-coded visual indicators to indicate contact
open or closed positions, as well as mechanism charged and discharged positions. Manual
control pushbuttons on the breaker face shall be provided for opening and closing the
breaker. The power circuit breaker shall have a “Positive On” feature. The breaker flag
will read “Closed” if the contacts are welded and the breaker is tripped or opened.
1.
2.7
The primary contacts shall have an easily accessible wear indicator to indicate
contact erosion.
The current sensors shall have a back cover window that will permit viewing the
sensor rating on the back of the breaker. A rating plug will offer indication of the
rating on the front of the trip unit.
K.
A position indicator shall be located on the faceplate of the breaker. This indicator shall
provide color indication of the breaker position in the cell. These positions shall be
Connect (Red), Test (Yellow), and Disconnect (Green). The levering door shall be
interlocked so that when the breaker is in the closed position, the breaker levering-in door
shall not open.
L.
Each power circuit breaker shall offer sixty (60) front-mounted dedicated secondary
wiring points. Each wiring point shall have finger safe contacts, which will accommodate
#10 AWG maximum field connections with ring tongue or spade terminals or bare wire.
TRIP UNITS
A.
Each low voltage power circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid-state tripping
system consisting of three current sensors, microprocessor-based trip device and
flux-transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and signal function. The
trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the basic adjustable
time-current protection functions. True rms sensing circuit protection shall be achieved
by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current
sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined
trip levels and time delay settings are reached. Interchangeable current sensors with their
associated rating plug shall establish the continuous trip rating of each circuit breaker.
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
The trip unit shall have an information system that utilizes battery backup LEDs to
indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of
trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A reset button shall be provided to turn off
the LED indication after an automatic trip. A test pushbutton shall energize a LED to
indicate the battery status.
C.
The trip unit shall be provided with a display panel, including a representation of the
time/current curve that will indicate the protection functions. The unit shall be
continuously self-checking and provide a visual indication that the internal circuitry is
being monitored and is fully operational.
D.
The trip unit shall be provided with a making-current release circuit. The circuit shall be
armed for approximately two cycles after breaker closing and shall operate for all peak
fault levels above 25 times the ampere value of the rating plug.
E.
Trip unit shall have selectable powered and unpowered thermal memory for enhanced
circuit protection.
F.
Complete system selective coordination shall be provided by the addition of the
following individually adjustable time/current curve shaping solid-state elements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
All circuit breakers shall have adjustments for long delay pickup and time.
All circuit breakers shall have individual adjustments for short delay pickup and
time, and include I2t settings.
All circuit breakers shall have an adjustable instantaneous pickup.
All circuit breakers shall have individually adjustable ground fault current pickup
and time, and include I2t settings.
G.
The trip unit shall have provisions for a single test kit to test each of the trip functions.
H.
The trip unit shall provide zone interlocking for the short-time delay and ground fault
delay trip functions for improved system coordination. The zone interlocking system
shall restrain the tripping of an upstream breaker and allow the breaker closest to the fault
to trip with no intentional time delay. In the event that the downstream breaker does not
trip, the upstream breaker shall trip after the present time delay. Factory shall wire for
zone interlocking for the power circuit breakers within the switchgear.
I.
The trip unit shall include a power/relay module which shall supply control to the readout
display. Following an automatic trip operation of the circuit breaker, the trip unit shall
maintain the cause of trip history and the mode of trip LED indication as long as its
internal power supply is available.
J.
The trip unit shall include a voltage transformer module, suitable for operation up to
600V, 50/60 Hz. The primary of the voltage transformer module shall be connected
internally to the line side of the circuit breaker through a dielectric test disconnect plug.
K.
Provide a trip unit with Arc Reduction Module built into the trip unit, which includes
multiple instantaneous trip set points, a normal/maintenance mode switch and indicating
light to remind maintenance personel when the switch is in the maintenance mode B all
integral to the breaker trip unit. The ARMS reduction feature shall also have provisions
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
for remote setting of the breaker into a maintenance mode.
L.
For emergency Circuit breakers, provide individually adjustable ground fault alarm only.
M.
The trip unit shall be equipped to permit communication via a network twisted pair for
remote monitoring and control.
N.
The trip unit shall include a power/relay module which shall supply control to the readout
display. Following an automatic trip operation of the circuit breaker, the trip unit shall
maintain the cause of trip history and the mode of trip LED indication as long as its
internal power supply is available. An internal relay shall be programmable to provide
contacts for remote ground alarm indication.
O.
The trip unit shall include a voltage transformer module, suitable for operation up to
600V, 50/60 Hz. The primary of the voltage transformer module shall be connected
internally to the line side of the circuit breaker through a dielectric test disconnect plug.
P.
The display for the trip units shall be a 24-character LED display.
Q.
Metering display accuracy of the complete system, including current sensors, auxiliary
CTs, and the trip unit, shall be +/- 1% of full scale for current values. Metering display
accuracy of the complete system shall be +/- 2% of full scale for power and energy
values.
R.
The unit shall be capable of monitoring the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Instantaneous value of phase, neutral and ground current
Instantaneous value of line-to-line voltage
Minimum and maximum current values
Watts, vars, VA, watthours, varhours and VA hours
S.
The energy-monitoring parameter values (peak demand, present demand, and energy
consumption) shall be indicated in the trip unit’s alphanumeric display panel.
T.
The trip unit shall display the following power quality values: crest factor, power factor,
percent total harmonic distortion, and harmonic values of all phases through the 31st
harmonic.
U.
An adjustable high load alarm shall be provided, adjustable from 50 to 100% of the long
delay pickup setting.
V.
The trip unit shall contain an integral test pushbutton. A keypad shall be provided to
enable the user to select the values of test currents within a range of available settings.
The protection functions shall not be affected during test operations. The breaker may be
tested in the TRIP or NO TRIP test mode.
W.
Programming may be done via a keypad at the faceplate of the unit or via the
communication network.
X.
System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 10
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
programmable timecurrent curve shaping adjustments. The short-time pickup adjustment
shall be dependant on the long delay setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Y.
The trip unit shall offer a three-event trip log that will store the trip data, and shall time
and date stamp the event.
Z.
The trip unit shall have the following advanced features integral to the trip unit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.8
2.9
Programmable long-time setting
Programmable long-time delay with selectable I2t or I4t curve shaping
Programmable short-time setting
Programmable short-time delay with selectable flat or I2t curve shaping, and zone
selective interlocking
Programmable instantaneous setting
Programmable ground fault setting trip or ground fault setting alarm
Programmable ground fault delay with selectable flat or I2t curve shaping and
zone selective interlocking
Adjustable undervoltage release
Adjustable overvoltage release
Reverse load and fault current
Reverse sequence voltage alarm
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Voltage phase unbalance and phase loss during currect detection
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A.
Key interlocks shall be provided. These interlocks shall keep the circuit breakers trip-free
when actuated.
B.
Fused control power transformers shall be provided as required for proper operation of
the equipment. A manual disconnect shall be provided ahead of the primary fuses.
Control power transformers shall have adequate capacity to supply power to all the
control circuits within the lineup.
LAWA METERING
A.
Provide a separate LAWA metering compartment with front hinged door, where required.
B.
Provide current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall be wired to
shorting-type terminal blocks.
C.
Provide potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means for metering.
D.
Microprocessor-Based Digital Metering Unit (DMU) shall include branch circuit
metering utilizing Eaton IQ-260 meters and main circuit metering utilizing IQ-2270
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 11
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
meters. All meters shall utilize RS-485 daisy-chained factory-supplied connection and a
PowerXpert 600 Gateway per lineup for customer/contractor supplied network cable
between lineups.
2.10
ENCLOSURES
A.
2.11
2.12
NAMEPLATES
A.
Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all
main and feeder circuits. Refer to Electrical Identification for additional information.
B.
Furnish master nameplate giving switchgear designation, voltage ampere rating,
short-circuit rating, and manufacturer’s name.
C.
Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays,
pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to
appropriate designations on manufacturer’s drawings.
FINISH
A.
2.13
All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchgear shall be properly cleaned and
provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchgear
shall be ANSI 61.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.14
NEMA 1 Enclosure for indoors, or NEMA 3R for outdoors.
Provide a floor running portable circuit breaker transfer truck with manual lifting
mechanism, one for each concourse main electrical room.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Furnish shop inspection and testing in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
B.
Make completed switchboard available for inspection at manufacturer’s factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
LAWA at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 12
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.1
FACTORY TESTING
A.
The switchgear shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory.
After assembly, the complete switchgear shall be tested to ensure the accuracy of the
wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main bus system shall be given a
dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between live parts and ground and between
opposite polarities.
B.
The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one
minute, or 1800 volts for one second, between live parts and ground, in accordance with
ANSI C37.20.1.
C.
A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be shipped with each
assembly.
D.
Factory test as outlined above shall be witnessed by LAWA’s representative.
1.
2.
3.2
3.3
3.4
The manufacturer shall notify LAWA two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests
are to be performed
The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to
three (3) LAWA’s representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses
shall be LAWA’s responsibility
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to assist
the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section
for a period of 5 working days. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical
direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment,
connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained
therein.
B.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s field startup report.
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A.
A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the
equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s representative’s
certification before final payment.
TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to ten (10) LAWA’s
representatives for 2 normal workdays at a job site location determined by LAWA.
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 13
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
3.5
The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer’s qualified representative. The
training program shall consist of the instruction on the operation of the assembly, circuit
breakers, and major components within the assembly.
INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the
Contractor.
C.
The equipment shall be installed and checked in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. This shall include but not limited to:
1.
2.
Checking to ensure that the pad location is level to within 0.125 inches per three
foot of distance in any direction
Checking to ensure that all bus bars are torqued to the manufacturer’s
recommendations
D.
Assembling all shipping sections, removing all shipping braces and connecting all
shipping split mechanical and electrical connections
E.
Securing assemblies to foundation or floor channels
F.
Measuring and recording Megger readings phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and
neutral-to-ground (four wire systems only)
G.
Inspecting and installing all circuit breakers in their proper compartments
END OF SECTION 26 23 00
METAL ENCLOSED DRAWOUT SWITCHGEAR – LOW VOLTAGE
26 23 00 - 14
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 24 13-SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes main and distribution switchboards.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
B.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
2.
C.
ANSI C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering.
ANSI C39.1 - Requirements, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
IEEE C57.13 - Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
D. International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
1.3
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;
conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars
for each phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Product Data: Submit electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings,
fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of equipment and components.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale drawings including interior elevations of
all electrical rooms and areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms
and indicate clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. These drawings
shall be submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches will be returned and not reviewed.
NOTE: The equipment depicted on the plans and interior elevations shall match the
equipment indicated on the shop drawings.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production and field tests.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of
switchboards and their components on single line diagrams and plan layouts.
B.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts data listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
B.
1.6
The manufacturer of the switchboard assembly shall be the same as the manufacturer of the
circuit breakers installed within the assembly.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage.
1.7
B.
Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic
cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.
Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA PB 2, enclosed switchboard.
C.
Switchboards shall be “fully-rated” for the available short circuit current. “Series-rated”
equipment is not acceptable. Main 480 volt service switchboards in the terminals shall be
rated 100kAIC.
D. Device Mounting:
1.
2.
E.
Bus:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Main Section: Panel mounted.
Distribution Section: Panel mounted.
Material: Copper with silver or tin plating standard size.
Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
Provide bus extensions on ends for future sections.
Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
G. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from front only of switchboard, suitable for
conductor materials.
H. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections,
insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Leave space in design for one spare section to
be added. Provide footprint area for future expansion.
I.
Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
J.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal
surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.2
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOTE: Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for typical frame sizes ranging from 110A
to 2500A.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
General Electric.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: UL 489, molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and
larger have mechanism for adjusting long time short time continuous current; short time long
time pickup current setting for automatic operation.
D. Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200
amperes and larger have changeable trip units.
E.
Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable
current settings; ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing instantaneous trip; and
adjustable short time trip.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Shunt Trip Device.
Undervoltage Trip Device.
Auxiliary Switch.
Alarm Switch.
Electrical Operator.
Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking.
Grounding Lug: In each enclosure.
INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOTE: Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for typical frame sizes ranging from 800A
to 6000A.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
General Electric.
Square D.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: UL 489, enclosed, insulated-case circuit breaker.
C.
Trip Unit: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings;
ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing instantaneous trip; and adjustable short
time trip.
NOTE: Incorporating any of the below accessories is dependent on the design of the
new electrical system.
D. Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Shunt Trip Device.
Undervoltage Trip Device.
Auxiliary Switch.
Alarm Switch.
Electrical Operator.
Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking.
Grounding Lug: In each enclosure.
POWER METERS
NOTE: Power meters are to meter the entire switchboard. Tenant sub metering may
be required.
A. Provide electronic power meter to indicate the following parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
Voltage: Phase-Phase and Phase-Neutral.
Current in Each Phase.
KW.
KVA.
KVAR.
Power Factor.
Current Demand.
Maximum Demand.
Kwhour.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Furnish shop inspection and testing in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
B.
Make completed switchboard available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify LAWA
at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.
C.
Install engraved nameplates.
D. Install breaker circuit directory.
E.
3.2
Ground and bond switchboards.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
3.3
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B.
Tighten bolted bus connections.
C.
Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as indicated on short circuit study.
Refer to Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
NOTE: These above adjustments shall be performed by a third party. These adjustments
shall include but are not limited to, the following studies: short circuit study, coordination
study and arc flash study.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 24 13-SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes main and distribution switchboards.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
B.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
2.
C.
ANSI C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering.
ANSI C39.1 - Requirements, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
IEEE C57.13 - Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
D. International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
1.3
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;
conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars
for each phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Product Data: Submit electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings,
fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of equipment and components.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale drawings including interior elevations of
all electrical rooms and areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms
and indicate clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. These drawings
shall be submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches will be returned and not reviewed.
NOTE: The equipment depicted on the plans and interior elevations shall match the
equipment indicated on the shop drawings.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production and field tests.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of
switchboards and their components on single line diagrams and plan layouts.
B.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts data listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
B.
1.6
The manufacturer of the switchboard assembly shall be the same as the manufacturer of the
circuit breakers installed within the assembly.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage.
1.7
B.
Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic
cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.
Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA PB 2, enclosed switchboard.
C.
Switchboards shall be “fully-rated” for the available short circuit current. “Series-rated”
equipment is not acceptable. Main 480 volt service switchboards in the terminals shall be
rated 100kAIC.
D. Device Mounting:
1.
2.
E.
Bus:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Main Section: Panel mounted.
Distribution Section: Panel mounted.
Material: Copper with silver or tin plating standard size.
Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
Provide bus extensions on ends for future sections.
Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
G. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from front only of switchboard, suitable for
conductor materials.
H. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections,
insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Leave space in design for one spare section to
be added. Provide footprint area for future expansion.
I.
Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
J.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal
surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.
J.K. Short Circuit Rating: The short circuit rating of the equipment shall exceed 130% of the
available short circuit current at the equipment.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.2
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOTE: Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for typical frame sizes ranging from 110A
to 2500A.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
General Electric.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: UL 489, molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and
larger have mechanism for adjusting long time short time continuous current; short time long
time pickup current setting for automatic operation.
D. Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200
amperes and larger have changeable trip units.
E.
Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable
current settings; ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing instantaneous trip; and
adjustable short time trip.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Shunt Trip Device.
Undervoltage Trip Device.
Auxiliary Switch.
Alarm Switch.
Electrical Operator.
Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking.
Grounding Lug: In each enclosure.
INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOTE: Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for typical frame sizes ranging from 800A
to 6000A.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
General Electric.
Square D.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: UL 489, enclosed, insulated-case circuit breaker.
C.
Trip Unit: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings;
ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing instantaneous trip; and adjustable short
time trip.
NOTE: Incorporating any of the below accessories is dependent on the design of the
new electrical system.
D. Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Shunt Trip Device.
Undervoltage Trip Device.
Auxiliary Switch.
Alarm Switch.
Electrical Operator.
Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking.
Grounding Lug: In each enclosure.
POWER METERS
NOTE: Power meters are to meter the entire switchboard. Tenant sub metering may
be required.
A. Provide electronic power meter to indicate the following parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
Voltage: Phase-Phase and Phase-Neutral.
Current in Each Phase.
KW.
KVA.
KVAR.
Power Factor.
Current Demand.
Maximum Demand.
Kwhour.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Furnish shop inspection and testing in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
B.
Make completed switchboard available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify LAWA
at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.
C.
Install engraved nameplates.
D. Install breaker circuit directory.
E.
3.2
Ground and bond switchboards.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
3.3
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B.
Tighten bolted bus connections.
C.
Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as indicated on short circuit study.
Refer to Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
NOTE: These above adjustments shall be performed by a third party. These adjustments
shall include but are not limited to, the following studies: short circuit study, coordination
study and arc flash study.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
NOTE: For all panelboards above 800A, use switchboards.
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
2.
3.
UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and
sizes.
B.
1.4
Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual
circuiting arrangements.
B.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
B.
1.6
The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the same manufacturer of the major components
within the assembly, including circuit breakers and fusible switches.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to LAWA’s current keying
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
NOTE: Due to the corrosive exterior environment at the airport, all panelboards are to be
located indoors, as much as possible. In the event that an exterior installation is the only option,
all exterior panelboards are to be a NEMA Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, and furnish copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Amperes rms symmetrical shall be 42,000A rms
symmetrical. Panelboards shall be fully rated; series rated equipment is not acceptable.
E.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for
air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F.
Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for indoors, Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better for
outdoors.
H. Cabinet Front: Surface door-in-door type, fastened with screws, hinged door with flush lock,
metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel – NC16.
2.2
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components. Furnish copper ground bus in each
panelboard with full sized neutral; furnish insulated ground bus.
D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper,
solid neutral.
E.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt
panelboards; 42,000 amperes min, rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.
F.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment
circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or for indoor, or NEMA 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better
for outdoors.
H. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20
inches inches wide for 480 volt panelboards. Surface mounted.
I.
Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush
lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. No concealed trim clamps.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Install panelboards plumb.
C.
Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more
than 4 inches above floor.
E.
Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Refer to LAWA standard
before revising directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads.
G. Install engraved nameplates per LAWA standards.
H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling or
below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
I.
3.2
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in
accordance with NFPA 70.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
C.
Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 24 16-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
NOTE: For all panelboards above 800A, use switchboards.
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
2.
3.
UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and
sizes.
B.
1.4
Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual
circuiting arrangements.
B.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
B.
1.6
The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the same manufacturer of the major components
within the assembly, including circuit breakers and fusible switches.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to LAWA’s current keying
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
NOTE: Due to the corrosive exterior environment at the airport, all panelboards are to be
located indoors, as much as possible. In the event that an exterior installation is the only option,
all exterior panelboards are to be a NEMA Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, and furnish copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Amperes rms symmetrical shall be 42,000A rms
symmetrical. Panelboards shall be fully rated; series rated equipment is not acceptable. The
short circuit rating of the equipment shall exceed 130% of the available short circuit current at
the equipment.
E.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for
air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F.
Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for indoors, Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better for
outdoors.
H. Cabinet Front: Surface door-in-door type, fastened with screws, hinged door with flush lock,
metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel – NC16.
2.2
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components. Furnish copper ground bus in each
panelboard with full sized neutral; furnish insulated ground bus.
D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper,
solid neutral.
E.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt
panelboards; 42,000 14,000 amperes min, rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.
Panelboards shall be fully rated; series rated equipment is not acceptable. The short circuit
rating of the equipment shall exceed 130% of the available short circuit current at the
equipment.
F.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment
circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or for indoor, or NEMA 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better
for outdoors.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
H. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20
inches inches wide for 480 volt panelboards. Surface mounted.
I.
Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush
lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. No concealed trim clamps.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Install panelboards plumb.
C.
Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more
than 4 inches above floor.
E.
Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Refer to LAWA standard
before revising directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads.
G. Install engraved nameplates per LAWA standards.
H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling or
below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
I.
3.2
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in
accordance with NFPA 70.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
C.
Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 24 19-MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes motor control centers.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 2.3 - Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
of Motor Control Centers.
NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Control and Systems: Factory Built Assemblies.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives.
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,
and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;
conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars
for each phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and
trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time and current curves of equipment and components.
B.
Product Data: Submit electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings,
fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of equipment and components.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
C.
Submit dimensioned room layout complete with all equipment shown to scale.
D. Submit control schematics for each starter within.
E.
1.4
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and areas
including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate clearances per
NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be submitted along with or
prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal without sketches shall be returned
and not reviewed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of motor
control centers and major components.
B.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement parts list for controllers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 3, Class I, Type B heavy duty, industrial grade motor control
center.
C.
Service Conditions: NEMA ICS 2.
D. Main Overcurrent Protection: Molded case circuit breaker.
E.
Feeder Tap Units: Molded case thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
F.
Voltage Rating: 480 or 120/208 volts, three phase, three or four wire, 60 Hertz.
G. Horizontal Bus: Copper, with continuous current rating. Include copper ground bus entire
length of control center.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
H. Vertical Bus: Copper.
I.
Configuration: Units front mounting only, accessible from front only.
J.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R, non-walk-in or 3R, walk-in or 12.
K. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
L.
All indicating and pilot lights shall be LED with metal housing and easily replaceable parts.
M. All control wiring shall be installed in Panduit wiring ducts. Control wiring shall be stranded
copper.
2.2
FULL-VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower.
C.
Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal or melting alloy.
D. Product Options and Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.3
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy duty type.
Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
Indicating Lights: LED type.
Selector Switches: Rotary type, Hand-Off-Auto.
Relays: NEMA ICS 5.
Control Power Transformers: In each motor controller as scheduled. Furnish fused
primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
TWO-SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower. Include integral time delay transition between FAST
and SLOW speeds.
C.
Control Voltage: As required.
D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal or melting alloy.
E.
Product Options and Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy duty type.
Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
Indicating Lights: LED type.
Selector Switches: Rotary type, with “High-Low”.
Relays: NEMA ICS 5.
Control Power Transformers: In each motor controller as scheduled. Furnish fused
primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
FULL-VOLTAGE REVERSING CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower. Include electrical interlock and integral time delay
transition between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation.
C.
Control Voltage: As required.
D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal or melting alloy.
E.
Product Options and Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy duty type.
Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
Indicating Lights: LED type.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
Relays: NEMA ICS 5.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
8.
2.5
Control Power Transformers: In each motor controller as scheduled. Furnish fused
primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA AB 1, molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and
larger have mechanism for adjusting long time, short time, continuous current and long time
pickup current setting for automatic operation.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller in accordance with
manufacturer's standards.
B.
Make completed motor control center available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior
to packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify LAWA
at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces are suitable for motor control center installation.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.
C.
Inspect and test variable frequency controllers according to NEMA ICS 7.1.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 5
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install engraved nameplates.
B.
Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage rating, and phase rating.
Place label in clear plastic holder.
C.
Ground and bond motor control centers.
D. Provide wire markers or tags for all control wiring at all termination points. See Identification
for Electrical Systems.
E.
Each plug-in unit shall control only one motor, no dual starters.
F.
Provide a circuit breaker for the unit disconnect device, not a fusible switch.
G. Provide side mounted, latched pull-apart terminal blocks for all remote control wiring.
Provide 25% spare terminals.
H. No interlock for A-B motor configuration.
I.
Overload reset button shall be operable without wires blocking access.
J.
Wire ties shall be attached to the unit with screws or epoxy, not adhesive tape.
END OF SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 19 - 6
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 25 00 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes busway and fittings.
REFERENCES
A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA BU 1 - Busways.
NEMA BU 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot
Devices.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment
Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate ratings, dimensions and finishes. Include dimensioned layout
diagram; installation details; locations of supports and fittings; and firestops and
weatherseals at penetrations. Include details of wall and floor penetrations. Include
isometric layouts/views of bus duct configuration.
B.
Product Data: Submit catalog data for components.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Indicate busway layout and support locations.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
26 25 00 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of busway routing.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit joint re-tightening schedule.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum five years documented experience.
B.
Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
C.
All busway components shall be of the same manufacturers as the busway.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle in accordance with NEMA BU 1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Protect from moisture by using appropriate coverings. Store in dry interior locations.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install indoor busway until building is closed in and suitable temperature
conditions are controlled.
B.
Conform to NEMA BU 1 service conditions during and after installation of busway.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.9
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
SEQUENCING
A.
Sequence Work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation of other
products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUSWAY
A.
Manufacturers:
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
26 25 00 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: NEMA BU1, 3 phase, 4wire enclosed busway. Indoor: Sprinkler
proof. Outdoor; NEMA 3R. Feeder type or plug-in type as applicable or as required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Cutler Hammer.
General Electric.
Square D.
Voltage: 277/480 volts, 60 Hz, or as required.
Ampere Ratings: As required.
Full neutral.
Insulated ground bus.
C.
Conductors: Copper bars, fully insulated except at joints.
D.
Joints: Single bolt type, with silver-plated contact surface for bus and splice plate.
E.
Fittings: According to manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test according to NEMA BU1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with NEMA BU1.1.
B.
Tighten joints using torque wrench, to manufacturer's specified values.
C.
Install busway length with expansion fitting at each location where busway run crosses
building expansion joint.
D.
Support busway at maximum 10 feet intervals or as recommended by manufacturer.
Support vertical riser at each floor.
E.
Install busway with integral fire stops located where busway penetrates fire-rated walls
and floors. Seal around opening to maintain fire-rating equal to wall or floor rating.
F.
Install concrete curb around interior floor penetrations.
G.
Install engraved nameplates.
H.
Ground and bond busway.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
26 25 00 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4.
END OF SECTION 26 25 00
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
26 25 00 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 27 16 - ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal
blocks.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of product.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.5
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each key.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOTE: Due to the corrosive exterior environment at the airport, all electrical cabinets
and enclosures are to be located indoors, as much as possible. In the event that an exterior
installation is the only option, these items are to be a NEMA Type 4x – Stainless Steel.
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
26 27 16 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.1
HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
B.
Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoors or 4X stainless steel enclosure for outdoor
installations.
C.
Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
D.
Furnish interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;
finish with white enamel.
E.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Hoffman Electrical Products.
Square D
General Electric
Hoffman Electrical Products.
Square D.
General Electric.
B.
Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls.
C.
Backboard: Furnish 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks.
Paint matte white.
D.
Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type with screw cover front, door with concealed hinge.
Finish with gray baked enamel.
E.
Knockouts: as required for conduit entry.
F.
Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and
voltages.
G.
Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
TERMINAL BLOCKS
A.
Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4.
B.
Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 600 volts.
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
26 27 16 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
C.
Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting,
with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
D.
Furnish ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at
each corner.
B.
Install cabinet fronts plumb.
CLEANING
A.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.
B.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION 26 27 16
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
26 27 16 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multioutlet assembly; and
device plates and decorative box covers.
NOTE: The colors for all new wiring devices shall be compatible with the
interior design aesthetic established for the public areas of the terminal.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,
and configurations.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating materials,
construction, color, and finish.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.5
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOTE: All wiring devices for emergency circuits shall be red.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.1
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1 Industrial, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap
switch, Leviton Decora, or similar.
C.
Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch.
D.
Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; clear color handle.
E.
Ratings:
1.
2.
2.2
Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC.
Current: 20 amperes.
WALL DIMMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Leviton.
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Lutron.
B.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Type I semiconductor dimmer for incandescent
lamps and for fluorescent lamps. Coordinate ballast type with dimmable fluorescent
lamps.
C.
Voltage: 120V or as required for application.
D.
Power Rating: As required for application.
E.
Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1, industrial, Heavy-duty and general-duty general-use
receptacle, Leviton Decora or similar.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.4
C.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as required.
D.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
E.
GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to
meet regulatory requirements.
WALL PLATES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Leviton.
B.
Indoor Cover Plate: Stainless Steel, for indoor switches, dimmers and receptacles.
C.
Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal plate with hinged and gasketed device
cover for outdoor wiring devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B.
Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install devices plumb and level.
B.
Install switches with OFF position down.
C.
Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for
ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
D.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
F.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
G.
Install cover plates on switch, dimmer, receptacle, and blank outlets in all areas.
H.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install
stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors
are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not
place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.
1.
I.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and
above accessible ceilings.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes to obtain required mounting heights.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above back splash of counter.
E.
Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C.
Verify each receptacle device is energized.
D.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes fuses.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
1.5
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Select fuses to provide appropriate levels of short circuit and overcurrent protection for
the following components: wire, cable, bus structures, and other equipment. Design
system to maintain component damage within acceptable levels during faults.
B.
Select fuses to coordinate with time current characteristics of other overcurrent protective
elements, including other fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays. Design system to
maintain operation of device closest to fault operates.
FUSE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
B.
General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).
C.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: Submit data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including
time-current curves.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes, ratings, and locations of fuses.
QUALIFICATIONS
FUSES
26 28 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
1.8
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two fuse pullers for each type of fuses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Bussman
Gould.
Littlefuse.
B.
Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as required.
C.
Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuse with label oriented so manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
B.
Install spare fuse cabinet.
END OF SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
26 28 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 28 19 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes fusible and non-fusible switches.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
B.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
2.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL).
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
B.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
98 B Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches,
198C B High Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Types.
198E B Class R Fuses.
512 B Fuseholders.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of
installed fuses.
QUALIFICATIONS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, quick-make/quick break with externally
operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position,
enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1.
D.
Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
E.
2.2
General Electric.
Cutler Hammer.
Square D.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Electric.
Cutler Hammer.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD quick make/quick-break with externally
operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position
enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
D.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.3
SWITCH RATINGS
A.
Switch Rating: Number of poles, voltage, current and horsepower rating as required for
particular installation.
B.
Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used
with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing
appropriate fuse rejection schemes).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports.
B.
Height: 5 feet to operating handle.
C.
Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
D.
Install engraved nameplates.
E.
Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and
size installed.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION 26 28 19
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 28 23 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes molded-case and insulated-case circuit breakers in individual enclosures.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings after Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination Study, is approved. Shop drawings submitted without approved study will
be returned and not reviewed.
B.
AIC ratings shown on the single line diagrams are approximate values only. The AIC
ratings of all submitted equipment must conform to the approved Short Circuit and
Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
D.
Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and continuous current ratings of
enclosed circuit breakers.
QUALIFICATIONS
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Electric.
Cutler Hammer.
Square D.
B.
Product Description: Enclosed, molded-case circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1
and FS-W-C
C.
Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 400 amperes and
larger have mechanism for adjusting long time, short time, continuous current setting for
automatic operation.
D.
Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200
amperes and larger have changeable trip units.
E.
Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for
adjustable current settings; ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing;
instantaneous trip; and adjustable short time trip.
F.
Accessories: Conform to NEMA AB 1.
NOTE: Accessories will be dependent on the system design.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
H.
Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts, AC.
Undervoltage Trip Device: 120 volts, AC.
Auxiliary Switch: 120 volts, AC.
Alarm Switch: 120 volts, AC.
Electrical Operator: 120 volts, AC.
Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
Series Rating: Series rated breakers shall not be used.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field measurements.
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use.
D.
Beginning of installation means that installer accepts conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports.
B.
Height: 5 feet to operating handle.
C.
Locate and install engraved nameplates.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust trip settings to coordinate circuit breakers with other overcurrent protective
devices in circuit.
B.
Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and fault currents.
END OF SECTION 26 28 23
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 28 26 - ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes transfer switches in individual enclosures.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
C.
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
1.3
NEMA ICS 10 - Industrial Control and Systems: AC Transfer Switch Equipment.
UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings after Short Circuit and Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination Study, is approved. Shop drawings submitted without approved study will
be returned and not reviewed.
B.
AIC ratings shown on the single line diagrams are approximate values only. The AIC
ratings of all submitted equipment must conform to the approved Short Circuit and
Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
C.
The electrical contractor shall submit 3@=1=0@ scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
D.
Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, control schematics, short
circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.5
1.6
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed transfer switches.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit routine preventative maintenance and
lubrication schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of Project.
B.
Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switches for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Manufacturer
1.
2.
2.2
Russelectic Inc.
ASCO.
Onan.
The combination transfer bypass/isolation switch manufacturer shall employ a
nationwide factorydirect, field service organization, available on a 24-hour a day,
365 days a year, call basis.
The manufacturer shall maintain records of each combination transfer
bypass/isolation switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years.
C.
Product Description: Automatic transfer switch with by-pass isolation switches.
D.
Rating: State voltage and current rating and number of poles.
E.
Interrupting Capacity: As required from coordination study.
CONSTRUCTION
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
The automatic transfer switch (ATS) and its associated bypass/isolation (BPS)
shall be furnished. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles
shall be as required.
All ATS shall be a true 4-pole switch supplied with all four poles mounted on a
common shaft as a 3 pole switch. The continuous current rating and the closing
and withstand rating of the fourth pole shall be identical to the rating of the main
poles.
The combination automatic transfer bypass/isolation switch shall be mounted in a
freestanding NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be
fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum
wire bending space required by UL 1008.
Both units shall be bused together with silver plated copper bus and/or cable
interconnection bus to provide a complete pre-tested assembly. Construction
shall be such that the contractor needs to install only the power and control
connections.
Bypass/isolation switches shall provide a safe and convenient means for
manually bypassing and isolating the automatic transfer switch, regardless of the
condition or position of the ATS, with the ability to be used as an emergency
back-up system in the event the transfer switch should fail. In addition, the
bypass/isolation switch shall be utilized to facilitate maintenance and repair of
the automatic transfer switch.
The automatic transfer switch shall be completely isolated from the
bypass/isolation switch by means of insulating barriers and separate access doors
to positively prevent hazard to operating personnel while servicing the automatic
transfer switch.
The combination automatic transfer bypass/isolation switch shall be top and
bottom accessible.
The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main
power cables.
The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly
of the transfer switch.
When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU
neutral lugs shall be provided.
The complete combination automatic transfer bypass/isolation switch assembly
shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the
specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available
upon request.
Bypass/Isolation Construction
1.
2.
All main contacts and operating linkages of the bypass/isolation section shall be
identical to the ATS, except that the operation shall be manual.
The bypass/isolation switch shall be load break type and shall have the same
electrical ratings of ampacity, voltage, short circuit withstand, and temperature
rise capability as the associated ATS. The bypass/isolation switch shall be the
load-break type. The main contacts of the bypass switch shall be mechanically
locked in both the normal bypass and emergency bypass positions without the
use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs and shall be silver-tungsten alloy,
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
protected by arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts on each pole. The
switching mechanism shall provide “quick-make”, “quick-break” operation of
the contacts.
The primary buss work of the draw-out automatic transfer switch shall be
connected to the stationary bus stabs in the freestanding cubicle by silver plated,
segmented, self-aligning, primary disconnect fingers to facilitate proper
alignment between the removable draw-out when the ATS is withdrawn and
shall be available for inspection without disturbing or de-energizing the main
bus.
The secondary control disconnect contacts mounted on the ATS shall be
self-aligning and shall plug into the stationary elements mounted on the
freestanding cubicle. Separate, manual, secondary control disconnect plugs are
not acceptable.
The isolating portion of the bypass/isolation shall allow the automatic transfer
switch to be disconnected from all sources of power and control without opening
the enclosure door. The transfer switch shall have a true draw-out configuration
that does not require disconnection of any electrically or mechanical device by
maintaining personnel. The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with
rollers or casters to allow it to be removed from its enclosure simply by rolling it
out. Positive mechanical interlocks shall be provided to insure that the
bypass/isolation functions can be accomplished without the danger of a short
circuit. Overlapping contact bypass/isolation switches, that are dependent upon
the position of the automatic transfer switch for proper operation, are not
acceptable.
A fourth pole, switched neutral shall be provided if the associated automatic
transfer switch is designed as 4-pole. Basic 4-pole, bypass/isolation switch
construction shall be identical to the associated automatic transfer switch
construction.
Necessary controls shall be provided to ensure that the “engine run” circuit
remains closed when the switch is in the bypass-to-emergency position, even
though the associated transfer switch is in the “normal” position or completely
removed from the enclosure.
Automatic Transfer Switch
1.
2.
3.
The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by two electric
operators momentarily energized, and connected to the transfer
mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. Minimum transfer
time shall be 400 milliseconds.
The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically
and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be
mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use
of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy.
Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer
switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not
acceptable.
The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator,
designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall
provide the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to
prevent a flashover from switching the main contacts slowly. The external
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
manual operator shall be safely operated from outside of the transfer switch
enclosure while the enclosure door is closed.
D.
Automatic Transfer Switch Controls
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control
system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch.
The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall
have a real time clock with NiCad battery back up.
The CPU shall be equipped with self diagnostics which perform periodic checks
of the memory I/O and communication circuits, with a watchdog/power fail
circuit
The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication
protocol for highspeed serial communications via multi-drop connection to other
controllers and to a master terminal with up to 4000 ft of cable, or further, with
the addition of a communication repeater. The serial communication port shall
be RS422/485 compatible.
The serial communication port shall allow interface with the
manufacturer field service representative and BMS network.
The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified
and authorized personnel.
The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which
allows access to the system.
The controller shall include three-phase over/under voltage, over/under
frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both
normal and emergency sources.
The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for
access either locally or remotely:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total since
record reset).
Number of hours emergency power is available (total since record reset).
Total transfer in either direction (total since record reset).
Date, time, and description of the last four source failures.
Date of the last exercise period.
Date of record reset.
The controller shall also be capable of monitoring, logging and trending power
data and shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
The controller shall be accurate to 1% measured. Voltage and current for
all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in
conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions
(harmonics). The controller shall be capable of operating at nominal
frequencies of 45 to 66 Hz.
The controller shall accept inputs from industry standard current
transformers (5A secondary). Direct phase voltage connections, 600
VAC and under, shall be possible without the use of PT=s.
The controller shall be capable of being applied in single or 3-phase,
three and four wire circuits.
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
d.
e.
f.
The controller shall use industry standard open architecture
communication protocol for serial communications via multi-drop
connection to other controllers and to a master terminal with up to 4000
feet of cable, or further, with the addition of a communication repeater.
The serial communication port shall be RS422/485 compatible.
All setup parameters required by the controller for power monitoring
shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a
control power interruption.
The following metered readings shall be communicated by the
Controller, via local display and serial communication. And to the
master Control Cubicle at the Emergency Generator Control and
Distribution Switch Gear:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
g.
h.
Displaying each of the metered quantities shall be accomplished through
the use of menu scroll buttons.
Setup for systems requirements shall be allowed through the local access
display. Setup provisions shall include:
(1)
(2)
i.
k.
E.
CT rating
System type (single; three phase, 3 or 4 wire)
Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from
the local access display:
(1)
(2)
(3)
j.
Current, per phase RMS and neutral
Current Unbalance %
Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
Voltage Unbalance %
Real power (KW), per phase and 3-phase total
Apparent power (KVA), per phase and 3-phase total
Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and 3-phase total
Power factor, 3-phase total & per phase
Frequency
Accumulated Energy, (KWH, KVAH, and KVARH)
Real Energy (KWH)
Apparent Energy (KVAH)
Reactive Energy (KVARH)
All reset and setup functions shall have a means for
protection against unauthorized/accidental changes.
The Controller shall be capable of storing records in memory for access
either locally or remotely for up to 100 events. The reports shall include
date, time and a description of the event and shall be maintained in a non
volatile memory.
Sequence of Operation
1.
When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or
increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20%
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
F.
voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay
period of 0-9999 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips,
the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant.
The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has
reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases.
After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90%
to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and
voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-9999
seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization
of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time
delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source.
After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to
operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-9999 seconds, factory
set at 300 seconds.
Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and
dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout
out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and
dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of
rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%,
and phase sequence monitoring.
Programmable three phase sensing of the emergency source set to pickup at 90%
and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and
dropout out at 110% of rated voltage programmable frequency pickup at 95%
and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105%
of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases set at
20%, and phase sequence monitoring.
Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays
engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-9999
seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified.
Time delay to control contact transition time on transfer to either source.
Programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds.
Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at
300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable
0-9999 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation
after retransfer to normal.
Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set
at 3 seconds.
A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power
failure.
A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power
failure, remote switch initiated.
A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated.
Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source
to initiate engine starting.
Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for
customer functions.
Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate:
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
G.
switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position and controller is
running.
A plant exerciser shall be provided with (10) 7-day events, programmable for any
day of the week and (24) calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to
automatically exercise generating
Provision to select either "no commit" or "commit" to transfer operation in the
event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the "no commit position,"
the load will transfer to the emergency position unless normal power returns
before the emergency source has reach 90% of it's rated values (switch will
remain in normal). In the "commit position" the load will transfer to the
emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated.
Four auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800
amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted
on the main shaft, two closed on normal, two closed on emergency. All contacts
will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections.
A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all
three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and
emergency source.
A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for
both normal and emergency source.
An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability.
Include two time delay contacts that open simultaneously just (milliseconds)
prior to transfer in either direction. These contacts close after a time delay upon
transfer. Programmable 0-9999 seconds after transfer.
A block transfer function shall be included, energized from a 24 VDC signal
from the generator control switchgear, to allow transfer to emergency.
A load-shed function shall be included, energized from a 24 VDC signal from the
generator control switchgear, to disconnect the load from the emergency source
when an overload condition occurs.
Bypass/Isolation Switch
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operation of the bypass/isolation shall be assured, regardless of the position of
the automatic transfer switch.
Light emitting diodes shall be provided to indicate: bypass position, fully
isolated position, and source availability.
Positive sequencing of all contacts, with no possible intermediate position, shall
be accomplished through the manual operators from a dead front location.
Electrical testing during maintenance of the automatic transfer switch shall be
possible in the bypass position.
Inherent double-throw (break-before-make) operation shall provide positive
assurance against accidental short circuitry of the normal and emergency power
sources. Arrangements utilizing interlocking of single-throw devices are not
acceptable. The operating speed of the contacts shall be independent of the speed
at which the handle is moved.
The switch shall be fully manually operated and shall not be dependent upon
electrical operators, relays, or interlocks for operation.
The bypass/isolation switch shall be listed by Underwriters= Laboratories, Inc.,
Standard UL-1008 and meet the identical withstand ratings of its associated
transfer switch.
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
7.
8.
H.
Both the automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch shall be supplied
by the same manufacturer. The manufacturer shall verify that the design has
been in continuous production for not less than 10 years, with at least 100 similar
installations operating continuously and successfully for that period of time.
Bypass/isolation switch must have mechanical separation of normal and
emergency to assure against accidental connection of unsynchronized sources.
Electrical interlocking will not be considered acceptable.
Approval
1.
As a condition of approval, the manufacturer of the combination automatic
transfer bypass/isolation switches shall verify that their switches are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-1008 with 3 cycle short circuit
closing and withstand higher than available fault and minimum ratings as
follows:
Root Mean Square (RMS) Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC
100-400
42,000
Current Limiting
Fuse Rating
(Amperes)
200,000
600-800
65,000
200,000
Current Limiting
(Amperes)
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
1000-1200
85,000
200,000
1600-4000
100,000
200,000
The AIC ratings of automatic transfer switch shall exceed the available fault
current.
During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding
or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current
limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contact separation has not occurred, and
there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in
accordance with UL-1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc.
When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacture shall
include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the
combination transfer bypass/isolation switch to carry full rated current after
completing the overload and endurance tests.
The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Withstand & Closing Ratings (WCR) also:
Maximum Coordinated Breaker Rating (Amperes)
Storage conditions - 25 degrees C to 85 degrees C
Operation conditions - 20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient
Humidity 0 to 99% relative humidity, non-condensing
Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions
Surge withstand per ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978
Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Furnish shop inspection and testing of each transfer switch.
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Make completed transfer switch available for inspection at manufacturer’s factory prior
to packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before inspection is
allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
LAWA at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install 4” concrete housekeeping pads.
B.
Install engraved nameplates.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Check out transfer switch connections and operations and place in service.
Adjust control and sensing devices to achieve specified sequence of operation.
TRAINING
A.
Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal and emergency modes to
LAWA’s staff to be trained.
B.
Provide manuals for attendees.
C.
Training shall be provided at times for each of 3 shifts.
END OF SECTION 26 28 26
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 28 26 - 10
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 29 13 – ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
1.5
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot
Devices.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, control schematics,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and ratings of enclosed controllers.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Replacement parts list for controllers.
QUALIFICATIONS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 1
Revised 10/2012, Footer Updated 08/2013
Guide Specification
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER
A.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated,
full-voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, one NO and one NC
auxiliary contact, and toggle operator.
B.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or to meet conditions of installation. NEMA Type 4,
Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better for outdoor installations.
FRACTIONAL-HORSEPOWER MANUAL CONTROLLER
A.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated,
full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload
unit, red pilot light and toggle operator.
B.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or to meet conditions of installation.
MOTOR STARTING SWITCH
A.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, fullvoltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload
unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator.
B.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or to meet conditions of installation. NEMA Type 4,
Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better for outdoor installations.
FULL-VOLTAGE AND REDUCED VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING CONTROLLERS
A.
Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower.
B.
Control Voltage: as required.
C.
Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; melting alloy. D.Product Features:
1.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, with 4 each normally closed field convertible
contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
2.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy duty oiltight type.
3.
Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 2
Revised 10/2012, Footer Updated 08/2013
Guide Specification
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Pushbuttons: Shielded, Covered and Lockable type.
Indicating Lights: LED type.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Furnish fused primary and
secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
Reduced-Voltage starters to have delta/wye wiring arrangement.
E.
Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnect in common
enclosure, using thermal magnetic circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1, with
integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1.
2.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 4, Type 3R Stainless Steel, or better.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports.
B.
Height: 5 feet to operating handle.
C.
Install fuses for fusible switches.
D.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
E.
Install engraved nameplates.
F.
Neatly type label and place inside each motor controller door identifying motor served,
nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase
rating. Place label in clear plastic holder.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
END OF SECTION 26 29 13
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 3
Revised 10/2012, Footer Updated 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 32 13 - ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes engine generator set, exhaust silencer and fittings, fuel fittings and sub
base tank, remote control panel, battery, and charger.
NOTE: All generators shall be located outdoors. New underground fuel
tanks are not allowed at the airport.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
C.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
2.
1.3
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA ICS 10 - Industrial Control and Systems: AC Transfer Switch Equipment.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Description: Engine generator assembly and accessories to provide source of power for
Level 1 and 2 applications in accordance with NFPA 110.
B.
Capacity: As required with standby rating using specified engine cooling scheme.
C.
Diesel generator muffler, flex and mounting hardware.
D.
8 hour minimum fuel capacity with dual wall sub-base fuel storage tank. Tank shall be
constructed of corrosion resistance steel material.
E.
Provide engine generators approved by SCAQMD and local environmental agency for
use as emergency backup and Tier 4 regulations compliance.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Include
plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel
consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements,
electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.
B.
Product Data: Submit data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points,
and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, transfer switch, battery,
battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank, and remote
radiator.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate results of performance testing.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate inspections, findings, and recommendations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions and service manuals for normal
operation, routine maintenance, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and
emergency maintenance procedures. Include list of spare parts.
FACTORY PROTOTYPE TESTING
A.
The system manufacturer must certify that engine, generator and controls have been
tested as a complete system of representative engineering models (not on equipment
sold). The manufacturer shall supply equipment that is a current factory standard
production model.
B.
Prototype testing shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load.
Exhaust emissions.
Mechanical and exhaust noise.
Governor speed regulation at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load; and during transients
Motor starting kVA.
Generator temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40
Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation and telephone influence factor.
Generator short circuit capability.
Cooling system performance.
3 phase short circuit tests.
Maximum power (kW)
Generator revolving field assembly for 2 hours at 2700 rpm (150% overspeed)
and 70 degrees C and each production unit tested at 2250 rpm (125% overspeed)
at room temperature.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.7
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of project.
B.
Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum ten years
documented experience.
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
1.10
Five Year Manufacturer Warranty: The manufacturer’s standard warranty shall in no
event be for a period of less than five years form date of initial start-up of the system and
shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the job
site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters, antifreeze, and other service items made
unusable by the defect) used during the course of repair. Running hours shall not be a
limiting factor for the system warranty by either the manufacturer or servicing distributor.
An extended warranty for an additional five years shall be offered as an option.
Submittals received without written warranties as specified will be rejected in their
entirety.
Furnish service and maintenance of engine generators for five years from Date of
Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR EACH ENGINE GENERATOR
A.
Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of engine generator
system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
B.
Furnish two of each fuel, oil and air filter element.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ENGINE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Caterpillar.
Kohler.
Cummins.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.2
B.
Product Description: Air-cooled in-line or V-type, four-stroke cycle, compression
ignition Diesel internal combustion engine.
C.
Rating: Sufficient to operate under 10 percent overload for one hour in ambient of 90 ° F.
D.
Fuel System: No. 2 fuel oil.
E.
Engine speed: 1800 rpm.
F.
Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed,
and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
G.
Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of
starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Furnish remote starting
control circuit, with MANUALOFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator
control panel.
H.
Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic
control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F, and suitable for operation
on 120 or 208 volts AC.
I.
Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe
engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F. Radiator air flow restriction
0.5 inches of water maximum.
J.
Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel
transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Furnish fuel pressure gage,
water temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine/generator control panel.
K.
Mounting: Furnish unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on
structural steel base.
GENERATOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
As provided by engine generator manufacturer.
Product Description: NEMA MG1, three phase, four pole, reconnectable brushless
synchronous generator with brushless exciter.
NOTE: Generator voltage, ampere and power factor ratings are required to be
shown on the drawings.
C.
Insulation: The insulation material shall meet NEMA standards for Class H insulation
and be vacuum impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant. Temperature rise
of the rotor and stator shall not exceed NEMA class F. The excitation system shall be of
brushless construction.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.3
D.
Temperature Rise: 80 degrees C Standby, maximum as measured by resistance and based
on 40 degrees C ambient temperature.
E.
Enclosure: NEMA MG1, open drip proof
F.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Not to exceed three percent.
G.
Telephone Influence: Below 50.
H.
Exciter (Self-Excited): The self-excited, brushless exciter shall consist of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge
suppressors shall be included to protect the diodes from voltage spikes.
I.
Automatic Voltage Regulator: The digital automatic voltage regulator (DVR) shall
maintain generator output voltage within +/- 0.5% for any constant load between no load
and full load. The regulator shall be a totally solid state design, which includes electronic
voltage buildup, volts per Hertz regulation, three phase sensing, over excitation
protection, loss of sensing protection, temperature compensation, shall limit voltage
overshoot on startup, and shall be environmentally sealed.
GOVERNOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
2.4
2.5
As provided by engine generator manufacturer.
Product Description: Isochronous governor to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent,
steady state, and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2
seconds following sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for manual
operation and adjustment.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
Circuit Breaker Specifications: Provide a generator mounted circuit breaker, molded case
or insulated case construction, rating as indicated. Breaker shall itilze a thermal megneic
trup unit and 24VDC shunt trip. The breaker shall be UL listed with shunt trip device
connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breaker shall be set to protect the
generator from short circuit damage. Breaker shall be housed in an extension terminal
box mounted on the side of the generator. Mechanical type lugs, sized for the circuit
breaker feeders, shall be supplied on the load side of breaker.
B.
Provide an additional circuit breaker for the radiator mounted load bank.
CONTROL PANEL
A.
Generator Mounted Control Panel: Provide a generator mounted control panel for
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
complete control and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions. Panel shall
include automatic start/stop operation; adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering
(0.5% true rms accuracy) with phase selector switch, digital engine monitoring,
shutdown sensors and alarms with horn and reset, adjustable cool down timer and
emergency stop push-button. Panel shall incorporate self-diagnostics capabilities and
fault logging. Critical components shall be environmentally sealed to protect against
failure from moisture and dirt. Components shall be housed in a NEMA 1/IP22 enclosure
with hinged lid.
B.
Digital Readouts: Provide the following digital readouts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
Alarm NFPA 110: Provide the following indications for protection and diagnostics
according to NFPA 110 level 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
D.
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Engine RPM
System DC Volts
Engine running hours
Generator AC volts
Generator AC amps
Generator frequency
KW meter
Percentage of rated Power
KVA meter
KVAr meter
Power Factor meter
KWHR meter
Low oil pressure
High water temperature
Low coolant level
Overspeed
Over crank
Emergency stop depressed
Approaching high coolant temperature
Approaching low oil pressure
Low coolant temperature
Low voltage in battery
Control switch not in auto. position
Low fuel main tank
Battery charger ac failure
High battery voltage
EPS supplying load
Basemounted tank low fuel level
Basemounted tank high fuel level
Spare
Remote Annunciator NFPA 110: Provide one remote annunciator to meet the
requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. The annunciator will be installed by contractor.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
The annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall
incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent
alarms will sound the horn.
NOTE: The location of the remote annunciator shall be clearly identified on the
electrical and architectural drawings.
E.
Programmable Control Panel: Provide programmable protective relay functions inside
the control panel to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
2.7
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Over frequency
Under frequency
Reverse power
Overcurrent (phase and total)
KW level (overload)
Three spare LED's
Four spare inputs
FUEL SYSTEM
A.
Fuel Filter: Filter/Separator - In addition to the standard fuel filters provided by the
engine manufacturer, there shall also be installed a primary fuel filter/water separator in
the fuel inlet line to the engine.
B.
Fuel Piping: All fuel piping shall be black iron or flexible fuel hose rated for
this service. No galvanized piping will be permitted.
C.
Fuel Line Rating: Flexible fuel lines rated 300 degrees F and 100 PSI.
D.
Sub-Base Fuel Tank.
SUB-BASE FUEL TANK
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
A.
IBI
International Supply Co.
Tramont
Provide a sub-base concrete encased fuel tank for the generator set, sized to allow 8 hours
of operation.
1.
All Protected Base Tanks are UL Secondary Containment list and labeled. It is
comprised of a UL142 steel tank, surrounded by a minimum of 6” light weighted
insular concrete, enclosed by a UL142 steel outer shell with a interstitial
monitoring tube. All steel tanks are tightness tested at the manufacturer’s facility,
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 7
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.8
in accordance with testing procedures specified by UL142 for AST’s, and meet
UL requirements for standard and emergency venting. The interior of the primary
tank has been cleaned and free of any loose material, mill scale, or debris. Sub
base tanks are UL 2085 listed for the UL 2 hour fire burn test. Tanks must be
ballistic and impact rated per UL 2085 specification.
The base tank shall be furnished as a complete, factory assembled and tested
assembly and listed as an assembly by Underwriters Laboratories, to UL 142 and
UL 2085 factory installed.
Primary tanks shall be of minimum thickness per UL 142. Inner tanks will be of
rectangular configuration per UL standard 142. All welds must comply with
AWS, and ASME IX and ASME B31.1.
Secondary containment consists of UL 142 primary tank, completely enclosed by
a UL 142 secondary containment tank, which is 110% of the primary. Primary
and secondary tank will be Rectangular in configuration. Both tanks are pressure
tested to between 3PSI and 5PSI per UL requirements. Insulation material will be
of a lightweight concrete design. Concrete will be poured in a monolithic method
to eliminate voids. The minimum insulation thickness will be 6”. The exterior of
the tank will be steel.
All tank systems and sub-assemblies shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable fire and environmental
codes.
All tanks are primed with a Rustoleum Shop Coat Enamel. Top coat is an Alkyd
High Gloss Enamel paint (Sherwin WilliamsSW6004 Mink.)
All tanks to be installed on reinforced engineered concrete slab. Protective
barriers shall be installed as required by state and local codes.
Tanks shall be marked on a visible side with “Flammable”, “Combustible”, and
“No Smoking”, product identification, and other signs as required by state and
local codes.
The system installation (end user) shall be inspected and approved by the system
installer or its certified contractor. The system installer shall submit a
comprehensive checklist of quality and safety items associated with the
installation of the system and its sub-assemblies to verify that the installation is
in compliance with applicable local fire and environmental codes.
Emergency tank and basin vents.
Mechanical level gauge.
Fuel supply and return lines, connected to generator set with flexible fuel lines as
recommended by the engine manufacturer and in compliance to UL2200 and
NFPA requirements.
Leak detection provisions, wired to the generator set control for local and remote
alarm indication.
High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to
generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level.
Basin drain.
Integral lifting provisions
TIER 4 COMPLIANT CATALYTIC EXHAUST TREATMENT SYSTEM
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 8
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.9
A.
Provide and install as per manufacturer recommendations.
B.
Silencer: A critical type silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless steel exhaust
fitting properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Mounting shall be provided by the contractor. The silencer shall be
mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth
due to thermal expansion be imposed on the engine. Exhaust pipe size shall be sufficient
to ensure that exhaust backpressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified
by the engine manufacturer.
C.
Exhaust System: The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be "lagged" by the
contractor to maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 150 degrees F. The insulation
shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust
fitting.
D.
Muffler shall be critical type similar to Nelson-300 or equal. Provide engine exhaust roof
thimbles with flexible tubes and pipes as required.
STARTING SYSTEM
A.
Starting Motor: The engine shall be started by two 24 V DC electric starting motors.
Crank termination switch and 24 V DC fuel solenoid valve shall be provided for remote
automatic start/stop capability.
B.
Jacket Water Heater: A unit mounted forced circulation type water heater. The heater
Watt rating shall be sized by the manufacturer to maintain jacket water temperature at 90
degrees F, and shall be a 480 volt, three phase, 60 hertz.
C.
Batteries: Lead acid batteries of sufficient capacity for four 15 second crank periods with
10 second rest intervals shall be furnished. Battery voltage of 24 V DC shall be derived
from four 12 V DC, 205 amp hour high performance batteries, dry charged. Two battery
interconnection cables and four battery-tostarter cables.
1.
2.
Battery Trays: A battery tray shall be provided for the batteries and shall
conform to NEC 480-7(b). It shall be treated to be resistant to deterioration by
battery electrolyte. Further, construction shall be such that any spillage or
boil-over battery electrolyte shall be contained within the tray to prevent a direct
path to ground.
Battery Charger: A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to
automatically recharge batteries. Charger shall float at 2.17 volts per cell and
equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. It shall include overload protection, silicon diode
full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, and
fused AC input. Ac input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. Charger shall
have LED annunciation for low DC volts, rectifier failure, loss of AC power,
high DC volts. Amperage output shall be no less than ten (10) amperes. Charger
shall be wall-mounting type in NEMA 1 enclosure.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 9
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.10
2.11
2.12
RADIATOR MOUNTED LOAD BANK
A.
Furnish a continuous duty load bank, complying with UL 508A, mounted
directly on the skid base, on the exhaust side of the radiator, complete with all
necessary pilot and power control, wiring and devices to furnish a functional
system for the intended use. Load bank shall comply with all applicable NEMA,
NEC and ANSI Standards. Load bus configuration and load terminations shall be
clearly identified.
B.
The load bank shall have the capability of maintaining a constraint load for the
Emergency Power Supply Source (EPSS), during both exercising and actual use
condition. Rating shall be a minimum of 100% of the generator output rating and
matched to the EPSS voltage. Load steps at a minimum of three (3) incremental
loads, manually controlled.
C.
Enclosure shall be suitable for installation on the exhaust side of the engine
radiator. It shall match dimensionally the radiator’s duct flange height and width
without adaptive duct work. The control section shall have a hinged and
gasketed access door(s).
D.
Manufacturer shall be Avtron load bank K-711 Series, or equal.
E.
Construction shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. All fasteners shall be stainless steel.
Load elements shall be helically wound and rated to operate at 50% of the maximum
continuous wire rating. Each 50 kW element shall have current limiting fuses. (Furnish
three (3) sets of three (3) fuses as spares.)
VIBRATION ISOLATORS FOR EACH ENGINE GENERATOR
A.
For unit to base provide spring type with neoprene acoustical pads, leveling devices and
vertical limit stops. Minimum static deflection shall be 1 inch.
B.
For base to concrete pad spring mountings, provide adjustable type to provide minimum
clearance of 4 inches between structural base and floor, with alignment and lift off
restraints.
C.
Provide for engine-generator set base, engine-generator set base and remote radiator and
silencer and exhaust pipe.
SPARE PARTS
A.
2.13
Deliver 1 set of filter elements (air, fuel and oil), complete set of fuses, for each size used
and one belt for every belt drive to LAWA at final acceptance.
ENCLOSURE
A.
Provide a weather proof enclosure.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 10
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
NOTE: Acoustic mitigation measures may be required due to the generator's
proximity to acoustically sensitive areas such as, but not limited to, office areas,
conference rooms, etc..
2.14
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly.
B.
Make completed engine-generator assembly available for inspection at manufacturer’s
factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before
inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
LAWA at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and all applicable
codes.
B.
Install engraved plastic nameplates.
C.
Ground and bond generator and other electrical system components.
START-UP AND TESTING
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.
C.
Coordinate all start-up and testing activities with LAWA.
D.
After installation is complete and normal power is available, the manufacturer's
local dealer shall perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify that the equipment is installed properly.
Check all auxiliary devices for proper operation, including battery
charger, jacket water heater(s), generator space heater, remote
annunciator, etc.
Test all alarms and safety shutdown devices for proper operation and
annunciation.
Check all fluid levels.
Start engine and check for exhaust, oil, fuel leaks, vibrations, etc.
Verify proper voltage and phase rotation at the transfer switch before
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 11
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
7.
connecting to the load.
Perform a 4-hour load bank test at .80 power factor at full nameplate load
using a reactive load bank and cables supplied with the generator.
Observe and record the following data at 15-minute intervals:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
8.
3.3
3.4
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed to meet specified ratings.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Prepare and start up engine-generator assembly.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Connect the generator to building load and verify that the generator will
start and run all designated loads in the building.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Service meter hours
Volts AC - All phases
Amps AC - All phases
Frequency
Power factor or Vars
Jacket water temperature
Oil Pressure
Fuel pressure
Ambient temperature
Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters with new.
TRAINING
A.
Furnish eight hours of instruction to be conducted at project site with
manufacturer's representative to LAWA choice of staff to be trained. Provide
training session for each of 3 shifts.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 12
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
B.
Describe loads connected to emergency and standby system and restrictions for
future load additions.
C.
Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate system
operates to provide emergency and standby power.
D.
Provide manuals for attendees.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 13
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 32 13 - ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes engine generator set, exhaust silencer and fittings, fuel fittings and sub
base tank, remote control panel, battery, and charger.
NOTE: All generators shall be located outdoors. New underground fuel
tanks are not allowed at the airport.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
International Electrical Testing Association:
1.
C.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
2.
1.3
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
NEMA ICS 10 - Industrial Control and Systems: AC Transfer Switch Equipment.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Description: Engine generator assembly and accessories to provide source of power for
Level 1 and 2 applications in accordance with NFPA 110.
B.
Capacity: As required with standby rating using specified engine cooling scheme.
C.
Diesel generator muffler, flex and mounting hardware.
D.
8 hour minimum fuel capacity with dual wall sub-base fuel storage tank. Tank shall be
constructed of corrosion resistance steel material.
E.
Provide engine generators approved by SCAQMD and local environmental agency for
use as emergency backup and Tier 4 regulations compliance.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Include
plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel
consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements,
electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.
B.
Product Data: Submit data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points,
and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, transfer switch, battery,
battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank, and remote
radiator.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate results of performance testing.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate inspections, findings, and recommendations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions and service manuals for normal
operation, routine maintenance, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and
emergency maintenance procedures. Include list of spare parts.
FACTORY PROTOTYPE TESTING
A.
The system manufacturer must certify that engine, generator and controls have been
tested as a complete system of representative engineering models (not on equipment
sold). The manufacturer shall supply equipment that is a current factory standard
production model.
B.
Prototype testing shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load.
Exhaust emissions.
Mechanical and exhaust noise.
Governor speed regulation at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load; and during transients
Motor starting kVA.
Generator temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40
Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation and telephone influence factor.
Generator short circuit capability.
Cooling system performance.
3 phase short circuit tests.
Maximum power (kW)
Generator revolving field assembly for 2 hours at 2700 rpm (150% overspeed)
and 70 degrees C and each production unit tested at 2250 rpm (125% overspeed)
at room temperature.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.7
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of project.
B.
Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum ten years
documented experience.
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
1.10
Five Year Manufacturer Warranty: The manufacturer’s standard warranty shall in no
event be for a period of less than five years form date of initial start-up of the system and
shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the job
site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters, antifreeze, and other service items made
unusable by the defect) used during the course of repair. Running hours shall not be a
limiting factor for the system warranty by either the manufacturer or servicing distributor.
An extended warranty for an additional five years shall be offered as an option.
Submittals received without written warranties as specified will be rejected in their
entirety.
Furnish service and maintenance of engine generators for five years from Date of
Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR EACH ENGINE GENERATOR
A.
Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of engine generator
system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
B.
Furnish two of each fuel, oil and air filter element.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ENGINE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Caterpillar.
Kohler.
Cummins.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Product Description: Air-cooled in-line or V-type, four-stroke cycle, compression
ignition Diesel internal combustion engine.
C.
Rating: Standby rating in accordance with ISO-8528 and ISO-3046.Sufficient to operate
under 10 percent overload for one hour in ambient of 90 ° F.
2.2
D.
Fuel System: No. 2 fuel oil.
E.
Engine speed: 1800 rpm.
F.
Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed,
and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
G.
Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of
starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Furnish remote starting
control circuit, with MANUALOFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator
control panel.
H.
Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic
control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F, and suitable for operation
on 120 or 208 volts AC.
I.
Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe
engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F. Radiator air flow restriction
0.5 inches of water maximum.
J.
Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel
transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Furnish fuel pressure gage,
water temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine/generator control panel.
K.
Mounting: Furnish unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on
structural steel base.
GENERATOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
As provided by engine generator manufacturer.
Product Description: NEMA MG1, three phase, four pole, reconnectable brushless
synchronous generator with brushless exciter.
NOTE: Generator voltage, ampere and power factor ratings are required to be
shown on the drawings.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.3
C.
Insulation: The insulation material shall meet NEMA standards for Class H insulation
and be vacuum impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant. Temperature rise
of the rotor and stator shall not exceed NEMA class F. The excitation system shall be of
brushless construction.
D.
Temperature Rise: 80 degrees C Standby, maximum as measured by resistance and based
on 40 degrees C ambient temperature.
E.
Enclosure: NEMA MG1, open drip proof
F.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Not to exceed three percent.
G.
Telephone Influence: Below 50.
H.
Exciter (Self-Excited): The self-excited, brushless exciter shall consist of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge
suppressors shall be included to protect the diodes from voltage spikes.
I.
Automatic Voltage Regulator: The digital automatic voltage regulator (DVR) shall
maintain generator output voltage within +/- 0.5% for any constant load between no load
and full load. The regulator shall be a totally solid state design, which includes electronic
voltage buildup, volts per Hertz regulation, three phase sensing, over excitation protection,
loss of sensing protection, temperature compensation, shall limit voltage overshoot on
startup, and shall be environmentally sealed.
GOVERNOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
2.4
As provided by engine generator manufacturer.
Product Description: Isochronous governor to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent,
steady state, and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2
seconds following sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for manual
operation and adjustment.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
Circuit Breaker Specifications: Provide a generator mounted circuit breaker, molded case
or insulated case construction, rating as indicated. Breaker shall utilize a thermal magnetic
trip unit and 24VDC shunt trip. The breaker shall be UL listed with shunt trip device
connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breaker shall be set to protect the
generator from short circuit damage. Breaker shall be housed in an extension terminal
box mounted on the side of the generator. Mechanical type lugs, sized for the circuit
breaker feeders, shall be supplied on the load side of breaker.
B.
Provide an additional circuit breaker for the radiator mounted load bank.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.5
CONTROL PANEL
A.
B.
Generator Mounted Control Panel: Provide a generator mounted control panel for complete
control and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions. Panel shall include
automatic start/stop operation; adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering (0.5% true
rms accuracy) with phase selector switch, digital engine monitoring, shutdown sensors and
alarms with horn and reset, adjustable cool down timer and emergency stop push-button.
Panel shall incorporate self-diagnostics capabilities and fault logging. Critical components
shall be environmentally sealed to protect against failure from moisture and dirt.
Components shall be housed in a NEMA 1/IP22 enclosure with hinged lid.
Digital Readouts: Provide the following digital readouts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Engine RPM
System DC Volts
Engine running hours
Generator AC volts
Generator AC amps
Generator frequency
KW meter
Percentage of rated Power
KVA meter
KVAr meter
Power Factor meter
KWHR meter
Alarm NFPA 110: Provide the following indications for protection and diagnostics
according to NFPA 110 level 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Low oil pressure
High water temperature
Low coolant level
Overspeed
Over crank
Emergency stop depressed
Approaching high coolant temperature
Approaching low oil pressure
Low coolant temperature
Low voltage in battery
Control switch not in auto. position
Low fuel main tank
Battery charger ac failure
High battery voltage
EPS supplying load
Base-mounted tank low fuel level
Base-mounted tank high fuel level
Spare
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
D.
Remote Annunciator NFPA 110: Provide one remote annunciator to meet the
requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. The annunciator will be installed by contractor.
The annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall
incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent
alarms will sound the horn.
NOTE: The location of the remote annunciator shall be clearly identified on the
electrical and architectural drawings.
E.
Programmable Control Panel: Provide programmable protective relay functions inside
the control panel to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
2.7
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Over frequency
Under frequency
Reverse power
Overcurrent (phase and total)
KW level (overload)
Three spare LED's
Four spare inputs
FUEL SYSTEM
A.
Fuel Filter: Filter/Separator - In addition to the standard fuel filters provided by the
engine manufacturer, there shall also be installed a primary fuel filter/water separator in
the fuel inlet line to the engine.
B.
Fuel Piping: All fuel piping shall be black iron or flexible fuel hose rated for
this service. No galvanized piping will be permitted.
C.
Fuel Line Rating: Flexible fuel lines rated 300 degrees F and 100 PSI.
D.
Sub-Base Fuel Tank.
SUB-BASE FUEL TANK
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
A.
IBI
International Supply Co.
Tramont
Provide a sub-base concrete encased fuel tank for the generator set, sized to allow 8 hours
of operation.
1.
All Protected Base Tanks are UL Secondary Containment list and labeled. It is
comprised of a UL142 steel tank, surrounded by a minimum of 6” light weighted
insular concrete, enclosed by a UL142 steel outer shell with an interstitial
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
monitoring tube. All steel tanks are tightness tested at the manufacturer’s facility,
in accordance with testing procedures specified by UL142 for AST’s, and meet
UL requirements for standard and emergency venting. The interior of the primary
tank has been cleaned and free of any loose material, mill scale, or debris. Sub
base tanks are UL 2085 listed for the UL 2 hour fire burn test. Tanks must be
ballistic and impact rated per UL 2085 specification.
The base tank shall be furnished as a complete, factory assembled and tested
assembly and listed as an assembly by Underwriters Laboratories, to UL 142 and
UL 2085 factory installed.
Primary tanks shall be of minimum thickness per UL 142. Inner tanks will be of
rectangular configuration per UL standard 142. All welds must comply with
AWS, and ASME IX and ASME B31.1.
Secondary containment consists of UL 142 primary tank, completely enclosed by
a UL 142 secondary containment tank, which is 110% of the primary. Primary and
secondary tank will be Rectangular in configuration. Both tanks are pressure
tested to between 3PSI and 5PSI per UL requirements. Insulation material will be
of a lightweight concrete design. Concrete will be poured in a monolithic method
to eliminate voids. The minimum insulation thickness will be 6”. The exterior of
the tank will be steel.
All tank systems and sub-assemblies shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable fire and environmental
codes.
All tanks are primed with a Rustoleum Shop Coat Enamel. Top coat is an Alkyd
High Gloss Enamel paint (Sherwin WilliamsSW6004 Mink.)
All tanks to be installed on reinforced engineered concrete slab. Protective
barriers shall be installed as required by state and local codes.
Tanks shall be marked on a visible side with “Flammable”, “Combustible”, and
“No Smoking”, product identification, and other signs as required by state and
local codes.
The system installation (end user) shall be inspected and approved by the system
installer or its certified contractor. The system installer shall submit a
comprehensive checklist of quality and safety items associated with the
installation of the system and its sub-assemblies to verify that the installation is
in compliance with applicable local fire and environmental codes.
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Emergency tank and basin vents.
Mechanical level gauge.
Fuel supply and return lines, connected to generator set with flexible fuel lines as
recommended by the engine manufacturer and in compliance to UL2200 and
NFPA requirements.
Leak detection provisions, wired to the generator set control for local and remote
alarm indication.
High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to
generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level.
Basin drain.
Integral lifting provisions
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 8
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.8
2.9
TIER 4 COMPLIANT CATALYTIC EXHAUST TREATMENT SYSTEM
A.
Provide and install as per manufacturer recommendations.
B.
Silencer: A critical type silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless steel exhaust
fitting properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Mounting shall be provided by the contractor. The silencer shall be
mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth
due to thermal expansion be imposed on the engine. Exhaust pipe size shall be sufficient
to ensure that exhaust backpressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified
by the engine manufacturer.
C.
Exhaust System: The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be "lagged" by the
contractor to maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 150 degrees F. The insulation
shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust
fitting.
D.
Muffler shall be critical type similar to Nelson-300 or equal. Provide engine exhaust roof
thimbles with flexible tubes and pipes as required.
STARTING SYSTEM
A.
Starting Motor: The engine shall be started by two 24 V DC electric starting motors.
Crank termination switch and 24 V DC fuel solenoid valve shall be provided for remote
automatic start/stop capability.
B.
Jacket Water Heater: A unit mounted forced circulation type water heater. The heater
Watt rating shall be sized by the manufacturer to maintain jacket water temperature at 90
degrees F, and shall be a 480 volt, three phase, 60 hertz.
C.
Batteries: Lead acid batteries of sufficient capacity for four 15 second crank periods with
10 second rest intervals shall be furnished. Battery voltage of 24 V DC shall be derived
from four 12 V DC, 205 amp hour high performance batteries, dry charged. Two battery
interconnection cables and four battery-to-starter cables.
1.
2.
Battery Trays: A battery tray shall be provided for the batteries and shall
conform to NEC 480-7(b). It shall be treated to be resistant to deterioration by
battery electrolyte. Further, construction shall be such that any spillage or
boil-over battery electrolyte shall be contained within the tray to prevent a direct
path to ground.
Battery Charger: A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to
automatically recharge batteries. Charger shall float at 2.17 volts per cell and
equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. It shall include overload protection, silicon diode
full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, and
fused AC input. Ac input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. Charger shall
have LED annunciation for low DC volts, rectifier failure, loss of AC power,
high DC volts. Amperage output shall be no less than ten (10) amperes. Charger
shall be wall-mounting type in NEMA 1 enclosure.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 9
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.10
2.11
2.12
RADIATOR MOUNTED LOAD BANK
A.
Furnish a continuous duty load bank, complying with UL 508A, mounted
directly on the skid base, on the exhaust side of the radiator, complete with all
necessary pilot and power control, wiring and devices to furnish a functional
system for the intended use. Load bank shall comply with all applicable NEMA,
NEC and ANSI Standards. Load bus configuration and load terminations shall be
clearly identified.
B.
The load bank shall have the capability of maintaining a constraint load for the
Emergency Power Supply Source (EPSS), during both exercising and actual use
condition. Rating shall be a minimum of 50%100% of the generator output rating
and matched to the EPSS voltage. Load steps at a minimum of three (3)
incremental loads, manually controlled.
C.
Enclosure shall be suitable for installation on the exhaust side of the engine
radiator. It shall match dimensionally the radiator’s duct flange height and width
without adaptive duct work. The control section shall have a hinged and
gasketed access door(s).
D.
Manufacturer shall be Avtron load bank K-711 Series, or equal.
E.
Construction shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. All fasteners shall be stainless steel.
Load elements shall be helically wound and rated to operate at 50% of the maximum
continuous wire rating. Each 50 kW element shall have current limiting fuses. (Furnish
three (3) sets of three (3) fuses as spares.)
VIBRATION ISOLATORS FOR EACH ENGINE GENERATOR
A.
For unit to base provide spring type with neoprene acoustical pads, leveling devices and
vertical limit stops. Minimum static deflection shall be 1 inch.
B.
For base to concrete pad spring mountings, provide adjustable type to provide minimum
clearance of 4 inches between structural base and floor, with alignment and lift off
restraints.
C.
Provide for engine-generator set base, engine-generator set base and remote radiator and
silencer and exhaust pipe.
SPARE PARTS
A.
2.13
Deliver 1 set of filter elements (air, fuel and oil), complete set of fuses, for each size used
and one belt for every belt drive to LAWA at final acceptance.
ENCLOSURE
A.
Provide a weather proof enclosure.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 10
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
NOTE: Acoustic mitigation measures may be required due to the generator's
proximity to acoustically sensitive areas such as, but not limited to, office areas,
conference rooms, etc..
2.14
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly.
B.
Make completed engine-generator assembly available for inspection at manufacturer’s
factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify LAWA at least seven days before
inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
LAWA at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and all applicable
codes.
B.
Install engraved plastic nameplates.
C.
Ground and bond generator and other electrical system components.
START-UP AND TESTING
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.
C.
Coordinate all start-up and testing activities with LAWA.
D.
After installation is complete and normal power is available, the manufacturer's
local dealer shall perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify that the equipment is installed properly.
Check all auxiliary devices for proper operation, including battery
charger, jacket water heater(s), generator space heater, remote
annunciator, etc.
Test all alarms and safety shutdown devices for proper operation and
annunciation.
Check all fluid levels.
Start engine and check for exhaust, oil, fuel leaks, vibrations, etc.
Verify proper voltage and phase rotation at the transfer switch before connecting to
the load.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 11
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
7.
Perform a 4-hour load bank test at .80 power factor at full nameplate load
using a reactive load bank and cables supplied with the generator. Observe
and record the following data at 15-minute intervals:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
8.
3.3
3.4
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed to meet specified ratings.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Prepare and start up engine-generator assembly.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Connect the generator to building load and verify that the generator will
start and run all designated loads in the building.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Service meter hours
Volts AC - All phases
Amps AC - All phases
Frequency
Power factor or Vars
Jacket water temperature
Oil Pressure
Fuel pressure
Ambient temperature
Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters with new.
TRAINING
A.
Furnish eight hours of instruction to be conducted at project site with
manufacturer's representative to LAWA choice of staff to be trained. Provide
training session for each of 3 shifts.
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 12
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
B.
Describe loads connected to emergency and standby system and restrictions for
future load additions.
C.
Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate system
operates to provide emergency and standby power.
D.
Provide manuals for attendees.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
26 32 13 - 13
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 33 00 - BATTERY EQUIPMENT (INVERTER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes emergency power supplies and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit catalog and data sheets showing electrical characteristics and
connection requirements. Include unit ratings, dimensions, and finishes. Include
performance data for batteries.
B.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
1.6
NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and
Standby Power Systems.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit battery maintenance and unit testing
procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 111.
B.
Maintain two copies of document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
BATTERY EQUIPMENT (INVERTER)
26 33 00 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
miles of project.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for batteries.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Lithonia
Chloride
Dual Lite
B.
Product Description: NFPA 111 Type A, Class 1.5 stored emergency power supply
system designed for Level 1 applications and consisting of rectifier/charger unit, storage
battery, and solid state inverter with static transfer switch, in one or several enclosures,
unit suitable for operating HID lamps without extinguishing lamp on transfer.
C.
Input Voltage:
D.
Output Power:
E.
Output Voltage:
F.
Inverter Output Frequency: 60 Hz plus 1 percent.
G.
Efficiency: 90 percent minimum.
H.
Maximum Recharge Time: 12 hours following 1.5 hour discharge.
I.
Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 10 percent at full resistive load.
J.
Battery: Nickel cadmium sealed type battery.
K.
Charger: Dual rate, designed to maintain battery in full-charge condition during normal
conditions.
L.
Furnish remote trouble monitor in enclosure with manufacturer’s standard finish.
M.
Accessories: Provisions for remote battery alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
BATTERY EQUIPMENT (INVERTER)
26 33 00 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.3
Install units plumb and level.
Verify operation of each unit by simulating outage.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Demonstrate normal operation of unit.
END OF SECTION 26 33 00
BATTERY EQUIPMENT (INVERTER)
26 33 00 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
26 33 53-STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements
for a continuous-duty three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power system (UPS). The
UPS shall provide high-quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads.
NOTE: A static UPS is mandatory for all systems that require memory or control
retention such as those found in baggage handling and building management
systems.
1.2
STANDARDS
A.
The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current
revision of the following documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.3
ANSI C62.41 (IEEE 587)
ASME
CSA 22.2, No. 107.1
FCC Part 15, Class A
ISO 9001
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)
NEMA PE-1
OSHA
UL Standard 1778
The UPS shall be ETL listed per UL Standard 1778 Uninterruptible Power Supplies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements - UPS Module
1.
Voltage. Input/output voltage specifications of the UPS shall be:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Rectifier Input: As required.
Bypass Input (for dual-input modules): As required.
Output: Three-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground, as required.
Output Load Capacity. Specified output load capacity of the UPS shall be as
required at 0.8 lagging power factor.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
B.
Design Requirements - Matching Battery Cabinet
1.
Battery Cells: Sealed, lead-acid, valve-regulated.
2.
Reserve Time: 30 minutes at full load, 0.8 power factor, with ambient
temperature between 20° and 30°C.
Recharge Time: to 95% capacity within ten (10) times discharge time.
3.
C.
Modes of Operation
1.
The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line, double-conversion, reversetransfer system in the following modes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Normal - The AC equipment is to be continuously powered by the UPS
inverter. The rectifier/charger derives power from a utility AC source
and supplies DC power to the inverter while simultaneously floatcharging a power reserve battery.
Emergency - Upon failure of utility AC power, AC equipment is to be
powered by the inverter, which without any switching obtains its power
from the battery. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical
load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.
Recharge - Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC
power outage, the rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in,
and gradually resume providing power to the inverter and also recharge
the battery system.
Bypass - If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or
repair, or should the inverter overload capacity be exceeded, the static
bypass transfer switch shall perform a reverse transfer of the connected
equipment from the inverter to the bypass source without interruption in
power to the mission critical AC equipment.
Performance Requirements
1.
AC Input to UPS DD
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: three-phase, 4-wire plus
ground.
Voltage Range: +10%, -20% of nominal.
Frequency: Nominal frequency +/-5%.
Power Factor: Up to 0.96 lagging at nominal input voltage and full rated
UPS output with input filter.
Inrush current: 800% of full load current maximum.
Current Limit: 115% of nominal AC input current maximum and 100%
of nominal for optional generator operation.
Input Current Walk-In: 15 seconds to full rated input current maximum.
Field selectable 5 or 20 seconds.
Current Distortion: 10% reflected input THD maximum at full load with
the optional input filter; 30% reflected input THD maximum at full load
without the optional input filter.
Surge Protection: The UPS shall be able to sustain input surges without
damage per criteria listed in ANSI C62.41 Category A and B.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.
AC Output, UPS Inverter
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
1.4
Voltage Configuration: three-phase, 4-wire plus ground
Voltage Regulation:
+/- 0.5% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load for
the combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery
voltage, ambient temperature, and load power factor.
+/- 1.0% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery
voltage, ambient temperature, and load power factor.
Frequency: Nominal frequency +/-0.1%.
Frequency Slew Rate: 5.0 Hertz per second maximum. Field selectable
from 0.1 to 5.0 Hz per second.
Phase Displacement:
+/- 0.5 degree for balanced load,
+/- 1.0 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
Bypass Line Sync Range:
+/- 0.5 Hertz,
Field selectable +/- 0.5 to 5.0 Hz.
Voltage Distortion:
1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads.
2.5% THD for 100% nonlinear loads (3:1 crest factor) without kVA/kW
derating.
Load Power Factor Range: 1.0 to 0.7 lagging without derating.
Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
Overload Capability:
125% for ten minutes (without bypass source).
150% for one minute (without bypass source).
200% for 10 cycles, pulse paralleling with the static switch.
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: +/-5% manual adjustment.
Voltage Transient Response:
100% load step
+/- 5.0%.
Loss or return of AC input power
+/- 1.0%.
Manual transfer of 100% load
+/- 3.0%.
Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage within one
cycle.
Voltage Unbalance: 100% unbalanced load
+/- 1%.
Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300%.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without
damage or degradation of operating characteristics:
1.
2.
Operating Ambient Temperature
UPS Module: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C).
Battery: 77 +/-9°F (25 +/-5°C).
Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 3
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
3.
4.
5.
1.5
UPS Module: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C).
Battery: -4°F to 92
F ( to 33°C)
-20°C
Relative Humidity
0 to 95%, non-condensing.
Altitude
Operating: to 6,600 ft. (2,000 meters) above Mean Sea Level. Derated for higher
altitude applications.
Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft. (12,200 meters) above Mean Sea Level.
Audible Noise
Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation shall not
exceed 65 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPS.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposal Submittals
1.
Submittals with the proposal shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
UPS Delivery Submittals
1.
C.
1.6
System configuration with single-line diagrams.
Functional relationship of equipment including weights, dimensions, and
heat dissipation.
Descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including deviations from
these specifications.
Size and weight of shipping units to be handled by installing contractor.
Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections.
Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations.
Submittals upon UPS delivery shall include a complete set of submittal drawings
and one (1) instruction manual that shall include a functional description of the
equipment with block diagrams, safety precautions, instructions, step-by-step
operating procedures and routine maintenance guidelines, including illustrations.
The electrical contractor shall submit ¼”=1’0” scale sketches of all electrical rooms and
areas including actual dimensions of all equipment in electrical rooms and indicate
clearances per NEC, as well as door swings or other obstacles. Sketches shall be
submitted along with or prior to shop drawing submittals. Shop drawing submittal
without sketches shall be returned and not reviewed.
WARRANTY
A.
UPS Module
1.
The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS module against defects in materials
and workmanship for 12 months after the installation is accepted by LAWA.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
B.
Battery
1.
1.7
The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the end
user.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications
1.
B.
A minimum of twenty year’s experience in the design, manufacture, and testing
of solid-state UPS systems is required. The system shall be designed and
manufactured according to world-class quality standards. The manufacturer shall
be ISO 9001 certified.
Factory Testing
1.
Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the system to
assure compliance with the specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Materials
1.
2.
C.
Liebert
Eaton Corp.
Toshiba
All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade and
free from all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required
during factory testing.
The maximum working voltage, current, and di/dt of all solid-state power
components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75% of the ratings
established by their manufacturer. The operating temperature of solid-state
component sub-assembly shall not be greater than 75% of their ratings.
Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and be operated at no more than
95% of their voltage rating at the maximum rectifier charging voltage.
Wiring
1.
Wiring practices, materials and coding shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). All bolted connections
of bus bars, lugs, and cables shall be in accordance with requirements of the
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 5
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.
D.
Construction and Mounting
1.
2.
E.
2.
Cooling of the UPS shall be by forced air. Low-velocity fans shall be used to
minimize audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPS output.
The thermal design, along with all thermal and ambient sensors, shall be
coordinated with the protective devices before excessive component or internal
cabinet temperatures are exceeded.
Grounding
1.
2.2
The UPS unit, comprised of input transformer (if required), rectifier/charger with
input filter, inverter, static transfer switch, output transformer and maintenance
bypass switch, shall be housed in a single free-standing NEMA type 1 enclosure.
Cabinet doors/covers shall require a tool for gaining access. Casters and stops
shall be provided for ease of installation. Front access only shall be required for
expedient servicing, adjustments, and installation. The UPS cabinet shall be
structurally adequate and have provisions for hoisting, jacking, and forklift
handling.
The UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with the manufacturer’s
standard color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies.
Printed circuit assemblies shall be plug connections. Like assemblies and like
components shall be interchangeable.
Cooling
1.
F.
National Electrical Code and other applicable standards. All electrical power
connections are to be torqued to the required value and marked with a visual
indicator.
Provision shall be made for power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom
of the UPS cabinet.
The AC output neutral shall be electrically isolated from the UPS chassis. The
UPS chassis shall have an equipment ground terminal. Provisions for local
bonding shall be provided.
COMPONENTS
A.
Input Transformer
1.
B.
When required, the input transformer shall be factory installed inside the UPS
module cabinet without increasing the standard footprint.
Rectifier/Charger
1.
General
a.
The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid-state equipment and
controls necessary to convert incoming AC power to regulated DC power
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 6
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
for input to the inverter and for battery charging. The rectifier/charger
shall be a phase-controlled, solid-state SCR type with constant
voltage/current limiting control circuitry.
2.
AC Input Current Limiting
a.
3.
Input Current Walk-In
a.
4.
The rectifier/charger shall have an output filter to minimize ripple
voltage into the battery. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the
battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter shall be adequate to insure that the
DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input requirements of the
inverter. The inverter shall be able to operate from the rectifier/charger
with the battery disconnected.
Automatic Rectifier Restart
a.
7.
Power semiconductors in the rectifier/charger shall be fused with fastacting fuses, so that loss of any one-power semiconductor shall not cause
cascading failures.
DC Filter
a.
6.
The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the
unit to gradually assume the load over a 15-second time interval after
input voltage is applied. Walk-in time shall be field selectable for 5 or
20 seconds.
Fuse Failure Protection
a.
5.
The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with AC input current
limiting whereby the maximum input current shall be limited to 115% of
the full input current rating. The rectifier/charger shall operate at a
reduced current limit mode whenever the critical load is powered from
the UPS static bypass circuit such that the maximum UPS input current
will not exceed 115% of full load input current. In addition, the
rectifier/charger shall have a separate battery current limit, adjustable
from 0 to 15% of the full load input current. An optional second circuit
shall limit the battery recharge current to zero when activated by a
customer-supplied contact closure to signal a customer function such as
generator operation.
Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage
and prior to a UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually
resume providing power to the inverter and also recharge the battery
system.
Battery Recharge
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 7
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
a.
8.
DC Over Voltage Protection
a.
C.
In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger
shall be capable of producing battery charging current sufficient to
replace 95% of the battery discharge power within ten (10) times the
discharge time. After the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger shall
maintain the battery at full charge until the next emergency operation.
There shall be DC over-voltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises
to the pre-set limit, the UPS is to shut down automatically and initiate an
uninterrupted transfer of the connected equipment to the static bypass
line.
Inverter
1.
General
a.
2.
Overload Capability
a.
3.
The inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150%
of its full-load rating for one minute. For greater currents or longer time
duration, the inverter shall have electronic current-limiting protection to
prevent damage to components. The critical load will be transferred to
the static bypass automatically and uninterrupted. The inverter shall be
self-protecting against any magnitude of connected output overload.
Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the inverter from the
critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses.
Step Load Response
a.
5.
The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for
overloads exceeding 100% and up to 200% of full load current. A status
indicator and audible alarm shall indicate overload operation. The UPS
shall transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.
Fault Clearing and Current Limit
a.
4.
The term inverter shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls to
convert DC power from the rectifier/charger or battery to regulated AC
power for supporting the critical load. The inverter shall use Insulated
Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) in a phase-controlled, pulse width
modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the specified AC output.
The output voltage shall be maintained to within
 5.0% with a 0
-to100% step load change or a 100%-to-0 step load change. The output
voltage shall recover to within 1% of nominal voltage within 1 cycle.
Voltage Distortion
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 8
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
a.
6.
Output Power Transformer
a.
7.
Power semiconductors in the inverter shall be fused with fast-acting
fuses, so that loss of any one-power semiconductor will not cause
cascading failures.
Inverter Shutdown
a.
10.
Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each phase so that an
unbalanced loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the
specified voltage unbalance or phase displacement. With 100% load on
one phase and 0% load on the other 2 phases or 100% load on 2 phases
and 0% load on the other phase, the voltage balance is to be within 1%
and the phase displacement is to be 120 degrees within
1 degree.
Fuse Failure Protection
a.
9.
A dry-type power transformer shall be provided for the inverter AC
output. It shall have copper wiring exclusively. The transformers hottest
spot winding temperature shall not exceed the temperature limit of the
transformer insulation class of material when operating at full load at
maximum ambient temperature.
Phase Balance
a.
8.
For linear loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall
not be greater than 1%. For 100% rated load of 3:1 crest factor nonlinear
loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion shall not be greater
than 2.5%. The output rating is not to be derated in kVA or kW due to
the 100% nonlinear load with 3:1 crest factor.
For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter
control electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors.
Simultaneously, the static transfer switch shall be turned on to maintain
continuous power to the critical load.
Inverter DC Protection
a.
The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels:
(1)
(2)
(3)
11.
DC Over voltage Shutdown
DC Under voltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve), user
adjustable from 1 to 99 minutes
DC Under voltage Shutdown (End of Discharge)
Over Discharge Protection
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 9
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
a.
12.
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment
a.
13.
The inverter shall use a software control to adjust the output voltage from
+/- 5% of the nominal value.
Output Frequency
a.
D.
To prevent battery damage from over discharging, the UPS control logic
shall automatically raise the shutdown voltage set point as discharge time
increases beyond fifteen (15) minutes.
An oscillator shall control the output frequency of the inverter. The
oscillator shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output
frequency to +/- 0.1% for steady state and transient conditions.
Frequency drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a 24-hour period. Total
frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, shall not
exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
Display and Controls
1.
Monitoring and Control
a.
The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status
display and controls section designed for convenient and reliable user
operation. A graphical display shall be used to show a single-line
diagram of the UPS, and shall be provided as part of the monitoring and
controls sections of the UPS. All of the operator controls and monitors
shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet. The monitoring
functions such as metering, status and alarms shall be displayed on the
graphical LCD display. Additional features of the monitoring system
shall include:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
2.
Menu-driven display with pushbutton navigation
Real time clock (time and date)
Alarm history with time and date stamp
Battery backed-up memory
Metering
a.
The following parameters shall be displayed:
(1)
Input AC voltage line-to-line
(2)
Input AC current for each phase
(3)
Input frequency
(4)
Battery voltage
(5)
Battery charge/discharge current
(6)
Output AC voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral for each phase
(7)
Output AC current for each phase
(8)
Output frequency
(9)
Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 10
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
(10)
3.
Alarm Messages
a.
The following alarm messages shall be displayed:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
b.
4.
Battery time left during battery operation
Input Line Fault
Input Phase Rotation Error
Input Over/Under Frequency
Input Current Limit
Rectifier Fail
Battery Test Failed
Battery Low Warning (Adjustable 1 To 99 Minutes)
Battery Low Transfer
DC Over Voltage Steady State
Bypass Frequency Error
Load On Bypass
Excessive Auto Retransfers
SBS SCR Shorted
Bypass Sync Error
Input Phase Loss
I DC Peak
Output Under Voltage Transfer
Output Over Voltage Transfer
Inverter Overload
SBS Overload
Inverter Overload Transfer
Transfer Failed Shutdown
Hardware Shutdown
Output Power Supply Fail
Inverter Control Fault Transfer
EPO Latched (remote EPO activated)
System Fan Fail
Ambient Over Temperature Limit
Over Temperature Timeout Shutdown
An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above
alarm conditions.
Status Messages
a.
The following UPS status messages shall be displayed:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Normal operation
On SBS
Load on UPS
Load on bypass
User Shutdown
Battery Discharging
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 11
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
5.
Controls
a.
6.
UPS start-up, shutdown, and bypass operations shall be accomplished
through the front-panel pushbutton controls. Menu-driven user prompts
shall be provided to guide the operator through system operation without
the use of additional manuals. Pushbuttons shall be provided to display
the status of the UPS and to test and reset visual and audible alarms. A
mimic diagram screen shall be available on the LCD screen to depict a
single-line diagram of the UPS and indicate switch positions and power
flow.
On-Line Battery Test
a.
The UPS shall be provided with a menu-driven On-Line Battery Test
feature. The test shall ensure the capability of the battery to supply
power to the inverter while the load is supplied power in the normal
mode. If the battery fails the test, the system shall automatically do the
following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
b.
The battery test feature shall have the following user selectable options:
(1)
(2)
(3)
E.
Maintain the load through the UPS
Display a warning message
Sound an audible alarm
Interval between tests (2 to 9 weeks)
Date and time of initial test
Enable/disable test
Static Transfer Switch
1.
General
a.
b.
A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral
part of the UPS. The static switch shall be a naturally commutated highspeed static (SCR-type) device rated to conduct full load current
continuously. The switch shall have an overload rating of 110% rated
load continuously, 200% rated load for five seconds. The static transfer
switch shall also have fault-clearing capabilities of 1100 amperes for 1
second, 3000 amperes for 10 cycles, and 6000 amperes peak for the first
half cycle.
The static transfer switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer
control circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and
operating and alarm conditions. This control circuit shall provide an
uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without
exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when an overload or
malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS for
maintenance.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 12
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
2.
Uninterrupted Transfer
a.
The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer
switch, transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the
transfer logic senses any of the following conditions:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
b.
The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the
critical load to the bypass source if any of the following conditions are
present:
(1)
(2)
(3)
3.
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
Bypass frequency out of limits
Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output
Uninterrupted Retransfer
a.
Retransfer of the mission critical AC equipment from the bypass source
to the inverter output shall be automatically initiated unless inhibited by
manual control. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic
retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following
conditions exists:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
F.
Inverter overload capacity exceeded
AC output over voltage or under voltage
Battery protection period expired
UPS fault condition
Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating
UPS fault condition present
Internal Maintenance Bypass Switch
1.
General
a.
2.
Isolation
a.
3.
A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be incorporated
into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the bypass
AC input power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and
static bypass transfer switch.
All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that maintenance
personnel do not inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or
terminals. A means to de-energize the static bypass switch shall be
provided when the UPS is in the maintenance bypass mode of operation.
Maintenance Capability
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 13
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
a.
4.
Battery Cabinet System
a.
G.
With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it
shall be possible to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger,
inverter, battery, and static bypass transfer switch.
The matching battery cabinet shall include sealed, lead-acid valve
regulated battery cells housed in a separate cabinet that matches the UPS
cabinet styling to form an integral system line-up. Battery cells shall be
mounted on slide-out trays for ease of maintenance. A battery
disconnect circuit breaker with under voltage release (UVR) shall be
included for isolation of the battery system from the UPS module. The
UPS shall automatically be disconnected from the battery by opening the
breaker when the battery reaches the minimum discharge voltage level.
Casters and leveling feet shall also be provided with the battery cabinet
for ease of installation. When the application calls for the battery cabinet
to be bolted to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be
provided, precut to the correct length and cable lugs installed, by the
UPS manufacturer.
Accessories
1.
Input Filter
a.
2.
The rectifier/charger shall include an input filter to reduce reflected input
current distortion to 10% THD at full load with nominal input voltage.
Another benefit of the input filter shall be to maintain the input power
factor at 0.90-0.96 lagging minimum from full load to half load with
nominal input voltage.
External Maintenance Bypass Cabinet
a.
3.
NOTE: Specific accessories will be dependent on design.
A matching external maintenance bypass cabinet shall be provided to
enable the UPS module to be completely isolated from the electrical
system while the critical load is powered through the external
maintenance bypass line. This optional cabinet shall provide makebefore-break operation for transfers to and from the external maintenance
bypass line with a single rotary switch. The following components shall
be standard: single rotary switch with auxiliary contacts, inter-cabinet
wiring, casters, and leveling feet. The following components shall be
optional: input circuit breaker, shielded isolation transformer, and output
circuit breaker. This matching cabinet shall bolt to the side of the UPS
module with a barrier shield to separate the two cabinets. Only front
access shall be required for installation and service.
Slim-Line Distribution Cabinet
a.
A matching distribution cabinet shall be provided for flexible cable
distribution of power from the UPS output to the critical loads. The
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 14
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
b.
4.
1+1 Redundant Paralleling
a.
5.
The Load Bus Sync® circuit shall synchronize the output of two
independent UPSs even if the UPSs are operating from asynchronous
bypass sources (e.g. backup generator sets) or on battery power. The
Load Bus Sync (LBS) circuit shall consist of a control enclosure and an
option card inside each UPS module. The LBS control enclosure shall
enable the operator to designate which bypass source will be the
Designated Master source, and both UPS systems will synchronize their
outputs to that source.
Programmable Relay Board
a.
7.
The UPS shall be available in a version capable of parallel-redundant
operation. Two modules with the paralleling option board shall be
connected to a simple parallel cabinet requiring no system-level controls
or displays. The parallel cabinet shall include two module isolation
circuit breakers and one system output breaker. All control and loadsharing logic shall be independent and contained within each module.
The only control connection between the two modules shall be a single
Category 5 Ethernet cable. The UPS modules shall load share within 1%
when the Ethernet cable is attached. As a fail-safe operating mode, the
UPS modules shall be capable of load sharing within 5% even if the
Ethernet cable is removed or damaged after system start-up. In like
manner, the system shall be capable of operating normally (including
overload and fault handling, manual transfers and automatic transfers to
bypass) for an indefinite period with no inter-module signals available.
Load Bus Synchronization
a.
6.
distribution cabinet shall include one or two 42-pole panel boards. Both
plug-in and bolt-in style panel boards shall be available to accommodate
specific site requirements. A main circuit breaker shall be provided with
each panel board.
The Slim-Line distribution cabinet shall be designed as a bolt-on section
to the UPS module or Maintenance Bypass cabinet for field installation
by the installing contractor. The Slim-Line distribution cabinet shall add
no more than ten (10) inches to the width of the UPS system.
Eight sets of isolated Form C contacts shall be provided to indicate a
change of status of any of the alarm conditions. Any of the UPS alarms
can be programmed onto any channel of the programmable relay board.
Remote Status Panel
a.
A remote status panel shall be provided and shall include the following:
(1)
(2)
Load on UPS LED
Load On Bypass LED
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 15
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
b.
8.
The UPS shall come with an internal modem capable of dialing out from
the UPS to notify up to two remote computers, terminals, PC’s, or pocket
pagers when important events occur. The modem will also be capable of
accepting incoming calls, with the appropriate security, and connecting
to a remote terminal, computer or PC, to perform all those functions
normally available on the front panel including viewing monitoring
screens.
SNMP
a.
11.
A battery circuit breaker shall be provided to isolate the battery from the
UPS. This breaker shall have an under voltage release (UVR) and
auxiliary contacts, and shall be in a separate wall mounted NEMA-1
enclosure. The battery breaker provides a manual disconnecting means,
short circuit protection, and over current protection for the battery
system. When opened, there shall be no battery voltage in the UPS
enclosure. The UPS shall be automatically disconnected from the battery
by opening the breaker when the battery reaches the minimum discharge
voltage level.
Internal Modem
a.
10.
The remote status panel shall be provided in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure
for wall mounting.
Battery Circuit Breaker
a.
9.
Battery Discharge LED
Low Battery Reserve LED
UPS Alarm Condition LED
New Alarm Condition LED (for a second UPS alarm condition)
Audible Alarm with Reset pushbutton
Lamp Test/Reset pushbutton
The UPS shall come equipped with an internal SNMP adapter, which
will connect the UPS directly to any I.P. based network using Ethernet
communications. The UPS will become a managed device on the
network. From a network management station the system administrator
shall be capable of monitoring important system measurements, alarm
status and alarm history data. In the event of a utility failure the SNMP
shall continue with live communication without the requirement of
additional or separate UPS equipment until such time as the UPS shuts
down for Low battery. On resumption of Utility power the SNMP shall
resume full SNMP communication automatically.
IBM* AS/400* UPS Signal
a.
The following isolated normally open contacts shall be provided for user
connection to an IBM AS/400 UPS signal interface:
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 16
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
b.
12.
UPS on (UPS is supplying power)
Bypass active (bypass is supplying power)
Utility failure (battery is discharging)
Battery low (limited battery time remaining)
A 50-foot shielded cable, compliant with NEMA Class 2 for plenum
applications, with sub-miniature 9-pin D-type connector, shall be
provided for connection to the signal interface.
IBM* AS/400* Multi-Interface System
a.
An AS/400 Multi-Interface System shall be provided where a single UPS
is powering multiple AS/400 units (up to 8). The MultiInterface Unit
(MIU) shall provide the required UPS status information to each AS/400
so it can perform an automatic unattended orderly shutdown when
necessary. Each AS/400 includes the software required to interface with
the UPS. The following status messages are activated in the IBM
system:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
UPS on (UPS is supplying power)
Bypass active (bypass is supplying power)
Utility failure (battery is discharging)
Battery low (limited battery time remaining)
b.
Each AS/400 individually monitors the UPS status to determine when to
initiate a quick power down to preserve data and protect hardware during
a utility power outage. This system requires the optional remote contact
board to provide isolated contacts. This system shall include a shielded
primary cable with a 9-pin subminiature D-shell connector, the AS/400
Multi-Interface Unit (MIU), and shielded secondary cables with RJ11
and 9-pin subminiature D-shell connectors. Cables shall be available in
selected lengths from 25 to 300 feet.
c.
IBM and AS/400 are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory-trained field service personnel shall perform the following inspections and test
procedures during the UPS startup.
1.
Visual Inspection
a.
b.
Inspect equipment for signs of damage
Verify installation is correct
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 17
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Mechanical Inspection
a.
b.
c.
3.
Check all control wiring connections for tightness
Check all power wiring connections for tightness
Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness
Electrical Inspection
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.2
Inspect cabinets for foreign objects
Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured
Inspect battery cases
Inspect battery for proper polarity
Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly
Check all fuses for continuity
Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct
Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being
used
Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s)
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE
A.
Service Personnel
1.
2.
3.
B.
Replacement Parts Stocking
1.
2.
C.
The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up,
maintenance, and repair of UPS and power equipment. The organization shall
consist of regional and local offices.
The manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national dispatch center to
coordinate field service personnel schedules. One toll-free number shall reach a
qualified support person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year. If
emergency service is required, response time shall be 20 minutes or less.
An automated procedure shall be in place to insure that the manufacturer is
dedicating the appropriate technical support resources to match escalating
customer needs.
Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure around-the-clock
parts availability throughout the country.
Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel
with back-up available from national parts center and the manufacturing location.
The national parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call
24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year for immediate parts availability.
Parts from the national parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next
available flight out and delivered to the customer’s site within 24 hours.
UPS Operator Training
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 18
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.
2.
D.
Operator training courses for customer employees shall be available by the UPS
manufacturer. The training course shall cover UPS theory, safety, battery
considerations and UPS operational procedures.
Training and materials shall be provided for LAWA personnel.
Maintenance Contracts
1.
A complete offering of preventive and full service maintenance contracts for both
the UPS system and battery system shall be available. An extended warranty and
preventive maintenance package shall be available. Factory-trained service
personnel shall perform warranty and preventive maintenance service.
END OF SECTION 26 33 53
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
26 33 53 - 19
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 43 13 - TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE
ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control,
and communication equipment
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transient
voltage surge suppression.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B.
Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.
C.
Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
D.
Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices.
E.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise
on-site testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 1
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Comply with NEMA LS 1.
Comply with UL 1283 and UL 1449.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty for Cord-Connected, Plug-in Surge Suppressors: Manufacturer's
standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electronic equipment
connected to circuits protected by surge suppressors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B.
Manufacturers of a Broad Line of Suppressors:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturers of Category A and Telephone/Data Line Suppressors:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
Square D Co.
General Electric
MCG Electronics, Inc.
NTE Electronics, Inc.
Telebyte Technology, Inc.
SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A.
Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features and
accessories:
1.
2.
3.
B.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status Copper lugs.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 2
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
and the following features and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240kA per phase.
D.
Connection Means: Permanently wired.
E.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages
of 480Y/277 and 208Y/120; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
G.
Line to Neutral: 400 V.
Line to Ground: 400 V.
Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits,
with high leg shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120 .
Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.
Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire
circuits, shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
Line to Ground: 400 V.
Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for voltages of 240, 480, 3-phase,
3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
2.3
Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring Copper lugs.
Integral disconnect switch.
Arrangement with copper busbars and for bolted connections to phase buses,
neutral bus, and ground bus.
Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
Surge-event operations counter.
Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V and 1000 V for 240 V.
Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V and 1000 V for 240 V.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 3
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
2.4
1.
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal
system operating voltage.
2.
Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F
3.
Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4.
Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet above sea level.
PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A.
Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features and
accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status Copper lugs.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
Integral disconnect switch.
Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250-V, ac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
Surge-event operations counter.
B.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per phase.
C.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages
of 480Y/277 and 208Y/120; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire
circuits, shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 and400 V for 208Y/120.
Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and400 V for 208Y/120.
Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and400 V for 208Y/120.
Line to Neutral: 400 V.
Line to Ground: 400 V.
Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits,
with high leg shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
Line to Ground: 400 V.
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 4
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
3.
F.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for voltages of 240, 480, 3-phase,
3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V and1000 V for 240 V.
Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V and800 V for 240 V.
ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
B.
Install devices for panelboard with conductors between suppressor and points of
attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
C.
Provide multipole, 15-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for the suppressor,
unless otherwise indicated, or direct bus mounted, internal to electrical equipment.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
3.4
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
B.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation
requirements.
TRAINING
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train LAWA maintenance ersonnel
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 5
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
to adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices.
B.
Train LAWA maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining
suppressors.
C.
Review data in maintenance manuals.
D.
Schedule training with LAWA with at least seven days' advance notice.
E.
Training to include minimum of 15 personnel for 40 hours training, 16 hours shall be
classroom training and 24 hours shall be hands-on training.
END OF SECTION 26 43 13
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
26 43 13 - 6
Electrical Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
NOTE: Consider the use of pendant lighting that may make the fixture more accessible for
routine maintenance. Linear lighting is preferred over typical "can" down lights.
General illumination lighting in passenger terminal public restrooms may be provided by
energy-saving compact fluorescent downlights (center of room). Supplemental lighting in
passenger terminal public restrooms may be provided by wall washers or cove lights at the
back of the toilet compartments, above the urinals and above wash basins. The emergency
light fixture is to located above the wash basins.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent
Lamp Ballast.
ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and
Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
B.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
C.
UL Underwriters Laboratories
D. ETL Intertek Testing Services
E.
NEC National Electric Code
F.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
G. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast Factor
B.
CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
C.
HID: High Intensity Discharge
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 1
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
D. LED: Light Emitting Diode
E.
LER: Luminaire Efficiency Rating
F.
Lumen: Measured output of luminaire, lamp, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including driver or ballast if included
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product
of manufacturer.
1.5
B.
Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C.
Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where
indicated in luminaire schedule.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum two years documented experience.
B.
1.6
Photometric Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Luminaire Data Photometric Testing performed by an independent agency complying
with IESNA Lighting Measurement Testing and Calculation Guides.
B.
1.7
Comply with NFPA 70.
MOCK-UP
A. Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify all critical measurements in the field prior to fabrication.
1.9
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures with other construction.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 2
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
1.11 WARRANTIES
A. All fixtures and workmanship shall be guaranteed free of defects and fully operational for the
duration of the warranty period. Defective fixtures or workmanship will be replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures, transformers for low voltage fixtures, and drivers for LED
fixtures shall be warranted against defects in workmanship or material. Warranty to provide
for replacement of fluorescent ballasts, transformers for low voltage fixtures, and LED drivers
at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
NOTE: Highly efficient LED fixtures with consistent color temperature (tight
binning), high Color Rendering Index (85+ CRI), and rated life greater than 50,000
hours are preferred.
All lighting fixtures shall be recessed, surface mounted if the existing condition
dictates.
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and
accessories as scheduled.
2.2
LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lighting Science Group.
Con-Tech Lighting.
Bega Lighting.
Lunera Lighting.
B.
Product Testing: Comply with U.L. 1598 and 8750. Test according to IES LM-79 and
LM-80.
C.
Drivers: Operation to be at standard rated voltage of driver, and not “over-driven.”.
NOTE: T8 and compact fluorescent lamps/ballasts are recommended for use on
the project. Minimize the lamp types for stocking and purchasing purposes.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Revised 10/2012
26 51 00 - 3
Guide Specification
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
D. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Philips.
Osram.
General Electric.
FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Philips.
General Electric.
Lutron.
B.
Product Description: Electrical assembly of control unit and ballast to furnish smooth
dimming of fluorescent lamps.
C.
Control Unit: Selected for energy efficiency and daylight harvesting capability.
D. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control unit
and suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire.
2.4
LED LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Lighting Science Group.
OptiLED.
Con-Tech Lighting.
NOTE: Incandescent or halogen lamps not recommended for use on the project unless the
lamp life exceeds 10,000 hours.For fluorescent lamps, a color rendering of 80+ CRI, and
color temperatures of 2800-3500 Kelvin are preferred.
2.5
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.6
Tivoli.
Ushio.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 4
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Philips.
Osram.
General Electric.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Product Description: Complete programmable system allowing for daylight harvesting, DMX512 fixture control, and interfacing with existing Building Automation Control system in
accordance with LEED guidelines.
B.
System Commissioning: Provide labor and temporary equipment as required to commission
lighting control system in accordance with LEED guidelines.
C.
Level Setting: Provide labor and temporary equipment necessary to set and program dimmed
and DMX-controlled lighting levels under the Lighting Consultant’s supervision.
D. Owner Training: Schedule and provide user training sessions for designated LAWA
personnel.
2.8
LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Downlights
1. Lightolier, 1002F1
2. Lightolier 1045, Lytecaster Recessed Downlight
3. LSI Lightron, Inc., Trim Series, 206CFLH
B.
Perimeter Lights
1. LSI Lightron, Inc., Series 99W
2. LSI Lightron, Inc., Series 900
3. Prudential Lighting, P-60-2T8-04-NS-TMW-D2
4. Prudential Lighting, IT8-04’ (08”)-BLA-SC-X4B-B
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.
3.2
B.
Extend existing interior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing installations, or as specified.
C.
Clean and repair existing interior luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A. Provide labor and materials to install and structurally support fixtures in accordance with all
applicable codes and safety practices.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Revised 10/2012
26 51 00 - 5
Guide Specification
NOTE: Provide additional labor and materials necessary to install color and/or diffusion
media in light fixtures as determined by a professional lighting designer. Locate lamps so
that they are accessible utilizing standard ladders and lifts.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Provide labor and materials for aiming and adjustment of all fixtures, color and/or diffusion
media, and accessories under the Lighting Consultant’s supervision.
3.5
CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
3.6
B.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Re-lamp all luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
NOTE: The recommended illumination levels (in footcandles) for the public areas of
the Terminals are as follows:
•
•
•
Arrival (Exterior) = 5-10FC
Artwork and Displays = 40-50FC
Back of House Areas
o General illumination for working areas = 25-35FC
o Corridors and stairways = 5-10FC
• Baggage Handling = 35-45FC
• Concessions and Food Courts
o General illumination = 15-20FC
o Work surfaces = 35-45FC
• Concourse = 10-15FC
• Departure (Exterior) = 5-10FC
• Information Desks = 30-40FC
• Restrooms = 10-15FC
• Retail
o General illumination = 20-25FC
INTERIOR LIGHTING
o Accenting = 40-50FC
26 51 00 - 6
• TSA / Security
o General illumination = Per current TSA guideline
• Ticketing
o General illumination = 15-20FC
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 7
Revised 10/2012
Guide Specification
SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
NOTE: Consider the use of pendant lighting that may make the fixture more accessible for
routine maintenance. Linear lighting is preferred over typical "can" down lights.
General illumination lighting in passenger terminal public restrooms may be provided by
energy-saving compact fluorescent downlights (center of room). Supplemental lighting in
passenger terminal public restrooms may be provided by wall washers or cove lights at the
back of the toilet compartments, above the urinals and above wash basins. The emergency
light fixture is to located above the wash basins.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1.
2.
ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent
Lamp Ballast.
ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and
Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
B.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
C.
UL Underwriters Laboratories
D. ETL Intertek Testing Services
E.
NEC National Electric Code
F.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
G. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast Factor
B.
CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
C.
HID: High Intensity Discharge
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 1
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
D. LED: Light Emitting Diode
E.
LER: Luminaire Efficiency Rating
F.
Lumen: Measured output of luminaire, lamp, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including driver or ballast if included
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product
of manufacturer.
1.5
B.
Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C.
Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where
indicated in luminaire schedule.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum two years documented experience.
B.
1.6
Photometric Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Luminaire Data Photometric Testing performed by an independent agency complying
with IESNA Lighting Measurement Testing and Calculation Guides.
B.
1.7
Comply with NFPA 70.
MOCK-UP
A. Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify all critical measurements in the field prior to fabrication.
1.9
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures with other construction.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 2
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
1.11 WARRANTIES
A. All fixtures and workmanship shall be guaranteed free of defects and fully operational for the
duration of the warranty period. Defective fixtures or workmanship will be replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures, transformers for low voltage fixtures, and drivers for LED
fixtures shall be warranted against defects in workmanship or material. Warranty to provide
for replacement of fluorescent ballasts, transformers for low voltage fixtures, and LED drivers
at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
NOTE: Highly efficient LED fixtures with consistent color temperature (tight binning),
high Color Rendering Index (85+ CRI), and rated life greater than 50,000 hours are
preferred.
All lighting fixtures shall be recessed, surface mounted if the existing condition dictates.
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and
accessories as scheduled.
2.2
LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lighting Science Group.
Con-Tech Lighting.
Bega Lighting.
Lunera Lighting.
B.
Product Testing: Comply with U.L. 1598 and 8750. Test according to IES LM-79 and
LM-80.
C.
Drivers: Operation to be at standard rated voltage of driver, and not “over-driven.”.
NOTE: T8 and compact fluorescent lamps/ballasts are recommended for use on
the project. Minimize the lamp types for stocking and purchasing purposes.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 3
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.3
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Philips.
Osram.
General Electric.
B. Product Description: Electronic ballasts shall be instant start and designed for the
type and quantity of lamps served. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. Comply with ANSI C82.11.
2.4
FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Philips.
General Electric.
Lutron.
B.
Product Description: Electrical assembly of control unit and ballast to furnish smooth
dimming of fluorescent lamps.
C.
Control Unit: Selected for energy efficiency and daylight harvesting capability.
D. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control unit
and suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire.
2.5
LED LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
General Electric.
Osram.
Philips.
NOTE: Incandescent or halogen lamps not recommended for use on the project unless the
lamp life exceeds 10,000 hours.For fluorescent lamps, a color rendering of 80+ CRI, and
color temperatures of 2800-3500 Kelvin are preferred.
2.6
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Tivoli.
Ushio.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 4
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
2.72.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Philips.
Osram.
General Electric.
2.82.7 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Product Description: Complete programmable system allowing for daylight harvesting, DMX512 fixture control, and interfacing with existing Building Automation Control system in
accordance with LEED guidelines.
B.
System Commissioning: Provide labor and temporary equipment as required to commission
lighting control system in accordance with LEED guidelines.
C.
Level Setting: Provide labor and temporary equipment necessary to set and program dimmed
and DMX-controlled lighting levels under the Lighting Consultant’s supervision.
D. Owner Training: Schedule and provide user training sessions for designated LAWA
personnel.
2.9
LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Downlights
1. Lightolier, 1002F1
2. Lightolier 1045, Lytecaster Recessed Downlight
3. LSI Lightron, Inc., Trim Series, 206CFLH
B.
Perimeter Lights
1. LSI Lightron, Inc., Series 99W
2. LSI Lightron, Inc., Series 900
3. Prudential Lighting, P-60-2T8-04-NS-TMW-D2
4. Prudential Lighting, IT8-04’ (08”)-BLA-SC-X4B-B
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.
B.
Extend existing interior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing installations, or as specified.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 5
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
C.
3.2
Clean and repair existing interior luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
A. Provide labor and materials to install and structurally support fixtures in accordance with all
applicable codes and safety practices.
NOTE: Provide additional labor and materials necessary to install color and/or diffusion
media in light fixtures as determined by a professional lighting designer. Locate lamps so
that they are accessible utilizing standard ladders and lifts.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Provide labor and materials for aiming and adjustment of all fixtures, color and/or diffusion
media, and accessories under the Lighting Consultant’s supervision.
3.5
CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
3.6
B.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Re-lamp all luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 6
Revised 08/2013
Guide Specification
NOTE: The recommended illumination levels (in footcandles) for the public areas of
the Terminals are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Arrival (Exterior) = 5-10FC
Artwork and Displays = 40-50FC
Back of House Areas
o General illumination for working areas = 25-35FC
o Corridors and stairways = 5-10FC
Baggage Handling = 35-45FC
Concessions and Food Courts
o General illumination = 15-20FC
o Work surfaces = 35-45FC
Concourse = 10-15FC
Departure (Exterior) = 5-10FC
Information Desks = 30-40FC
Restrooms = 10-15FC
Retail
o General illumination = 20-25FC
o Accenting = 40-50FC
TSA / Security
o General illumination = Per current TSA guideline
Ticketing
o General illumination = 15-20FC
o Work Surfaces = 35-45FC
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 7
Revised 08/2013
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 05 00 – BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall include in the Bid all labor, materials, tools, plant, transportation, storage
costs, training, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, inspections, taxes and all
necessary and related items required to provide complete and operational systems shown and
described in the Specifications.
B. The Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating final equipment arrangements,
locations, phased activities and construction methods that minimize disruption to Terminal
operations and provide complete and operational systems.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems that are being extended in the
Project in order to minimize disruption to the existing systems operations. Any systems
outages shall be approved in advance and scheduled with LAWA (refer to Section 27 05 05 –
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems).
D. The Contractor shall coordinate specialty electronic, ACAMS, Information Technology (IT)
data networks, common use and flight information systems and displays, CCTV, public
address and any other IT infrastructure systems.
E. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
1. LAWA Information Management and Technology Group Infrastructure Standards of
Practice, dated 04/01/11.
2. LAWA IT Requirements for New Concessions Model.
3. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
4. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
5. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
6. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
7. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
8. Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
9. Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
10. Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
11. Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
12. Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
13. Section 27 11 00 – IT Communication Rooms (Telecom & MPOE) Requirements
27 05 00 - 1
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
F. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
G. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. ANSI
American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM
American Society for Testing Materials
3. BFU
Board of Fire Underwriters
4. BICSI
Building Industry Consulting Services International
5. CSA
Canadian Standards Association
6. DEC
Department of Environmental Conservation
7. EIA
Electronics Industry Association
8. ER
Equipment Room
9. FCC
Federal Communications Commission
10. FM
Factory Mutual
11. IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
12. ISO
International Standards Organization
13. NEC
National Electrical Code
14. NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
15. NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
16. NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
17. OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
18. TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
19. TR
Telecommunications Room
20. TWC
Tenant Wiring Closet
21. UFBC
Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code
22. UL
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
27 05 00 - 2
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
B. Codes, Standards, and References
1. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in
accordance with the governing rules and regulations of the telecommunications industry,
as well as federal, state and local governmental agencies, including, but not limited to the
following:
a. ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated
b. ANSI C80-3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated
c. ICEA S-83-596
Optical Fiber Premises Distribution Cable
d. TIA-455-107 FOTP-107 Determination Of Component Reflectance Or Link/System
Return Loss Using A Loss Test Set
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455 Test Procedures For Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, TR
f.
ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-57 Optical Fiber End Preparation and Examination
g. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-59 Optical Time Domain Reflectometry
h. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-60 OTDR Measurement Of Fiber Optic Cable Length
i.
ANSI/TIA/EIA -526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode
Fiber Cable Plant
j.
ANSI/TIA/EIA 526-14 OFSTP-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements Of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant
k. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.1
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard Part 1: General Requirements, 02/02/09
l.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted-Pair
Components and Standards, April, 2010
m. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3
Telecommunications
Cabling
Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, June, 2008
n. ANSI/TIA/EIA –569-B
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces, May 2009
o. ANSI/TIA/EIA 598-C Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, 2005
p. ANSI/TIA/EIA -604-1 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, 2002
q. ANSI/TIA/EIA -606-A
Administration
Telecommunications Infrastructure, 11/24/08
Standard
for
Grounding
Commercial
r.
ANSI/TIA/EIA -607
Commercial Building
Requirements for Telecommunications, August 1994
and
Bonding
s.
ANSI/TIA/EIA –758-A
Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard 2004
t.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 854
A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000Mb/s
(1000BASE-TX) Operating over Category 6 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2001
u. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 862
Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for
Commercial Buildings, 2002
27 05 00 - 3
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
v. ANSI/TIA/EIA-4750000B Generic Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors
w. ASTM E814 Standard Test Method For Fire Tests Of Penetration Firestop Systems
x. BICSI
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (Tenth Edition)
y. FCC 47 Part 68
z. IEEE
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Telecommunications
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC); 2007
aa. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology - Generic Cabling For Customer Premises
bb. LADBS
Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety - City of Los Angeles
Electrical Code
cc. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum)
dd. NFPA-70
National Electric Code; 2008
ee. TIA/EIA TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of
Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems
ff. TIA/EIA TSB 72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines
gg. TIA/EIA TSB 75 Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open Offices
hh. TIA/EIA TSB 95 Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines For 4-Pair 100
Ohm Category 5 Cabling
ii. UL 1459
Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety – Telephone Equipment
jj. UL 1863 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety – Communications
Circuit Accessories
2. References to codes and standards called for in the Specifications refer to the latest
edition, amendments, and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of
these Specifications.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with all LAWA submittal procedures given in other Sections. The following is in
addition to or complementary to any requirements given elsewhere.
B. Submit a letter of approval or other certification from the manufacturer indicating that the
Bidder is a manufacturer certified installer of the proposed cabling system(s) (submit with
Bid).
C. Submit a detailed bill-of-materials listing all manufacturers, part numbers, and quantities that
the Bidder proposes to use in this project. Submit a two-foot length sample of each fiber
cable type/count to be installed.
D. Submit manufacturers’ data sheets for proposed racks and cabinets, termination equipment,
cable management or support hardware, power and grounding equipment, and labeling
material.
27 05 00 - 4
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
E. Submit manufacturers’ instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, operation, and installation of all products. Include any application conditions or
limitations of use stipulated by any product testing agency.
F. Submit all applicable Material Safety Data Sheets.
G. Submit all factory test information of cables prior to installation of the product.
H. Submit a complete test plan (and subsequent test data) per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C and
ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-67 for all cabling.
I.
Submit (5) hardbound copies of all cable test results and one electronic compact disc
J.
Submit calibration reports for all test equipment, the calibration shall be performed by a
manufacturer certified calibration facility and be dated no more than sixty (60) days prior to
the start of testing.
K. Submit all proposed labeling materials and nomenclature for approval.
L. Coordination Drawings:
1. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access.
2. Submit floor plans, elevations, and details indicating major equipment and end device
locations. Indicate all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations.
3. Layout of Telecommunication Rooms: Within thirty (30) days before beginning
installation, the Contractor shall furnish a telecommunications room drawing showing the
initial layout design and plans for the proposed equipment, cable routings, and
termination locations for all cable and equipment.
M. Project Record Documents required include:
1. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings
2. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings
3. Newly prepared Drawings
4. Marked-up copies of Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders
5. Marked-up Project Data submittals
6. Record Samples
7. Field records for variable and concealed conditions
8. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically
9. As-built drawings
10. Record drawings
11. Electronic as-built and LAWA LUSAD requirements
N. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Drawings will be updated
electronically and submitted to LAWA in accordance with the schedule provided for this by
LAWA. Do not wait until the end of the Project. Design Consultant will periodically review
Project Record Documents to assure compliance with this requirement.
27 05 00 - 5
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
O. At every quarter, submit Project Record Documents to Design Consultant for LAWA's
records.
1. Upon completion of the as built drawings, the Design Consultant will review the as built
work with the Contractor.
2. If the as built work is not complete, the Contractor will be so advised and shall complete
the work as required.
P. Project Record Drawings shall also be submitted in electronic format. Electronic drawing format
shall be AutoCAD® Release 2008 or later. LAWA shall have the right and capability to
manipulate all electronic file drawings and documentation.
1.06
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Manuals: Manuals including maintenance instructions and other descriptive
material as received from the manufacturers shall be provided that will enable LAWA
personnel to maintain equipment and test equipment. The Contractor shall make reasonable
effort to obtain specified maintenance documentation for all third party equipment. This
documentation shall include descriptions, specifications, theory of operation (where
applicable), layout drawings (showing component types and positions), and back-panel and
assembly wiring diagrams. In addition to hardcopies, electronic copies, in a Design
Consultant approved format, shall be provided.
B. Preventative Maintenance: Instructions shall be provided for preventive maintenance
procedures that include examinations, tests, adjustments, and periodic cleaning. The manuals
shall provide guidelines for isolating the causes of hardware malfunctions and for localizing
faults. The manuals shall provide thorough instructions on the use of any specialized test
equipment needed for hardware maintenance. In addition to hardcopies, electronic copies, in
a Design Consultant approved format, shall be provided.
C. Maintenance Schedule:
A recommended schedule for preventative, routine, and
emergency maintenance indicating frequency and response time. Preventative maintenance
services during peak activity periods shall be avoided. The Contractor shall coordinate with
LAWA to define peak activity periods. The Contractor shall submit a finalized preventative
maintenance schedule for Design Consultant approval.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Experience: The Contractor or approved sub-contractor shall be a Certified Cable
Installer, with the capability of providing a manufacturer’s certification of not less than
fifteen (15) years for the horizontal and backbone cabling and associated termination
equipment. The Contractor shall offer proof of certification by submitting a copy of
certification with the Bid.
B. The Contractor shall have at least one (1) Registered Communications Distribution Designer
(RCDD) on staff. The Contractor shall offer proof of RCDD certification by submitting a
copy of the certification with the Bid. The Contractors RCDD shall be part of the Contractors
27 05 00 - 6
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
team throughout the duration of the project to assist on shop drawings and other related
technical issues.
C. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance Inspector shall conduct a visual inspection of all
installations to verify that the installations are in accordance with the LAWA’s and
manufacturer's specifications. Records of the inspections signed and dated by the Quality
Assurance Inspector shall be provided to the Design Consultant. The Design Consultant shall
be notified by the Contractor of any inspection(s) and the Design Consultant/LAWA may
elect to participate in any inspection(s). All QC information shall be provided to LAWA for
input into the CMMS (refer to paragraph 3.13).
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.09
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids Specification
requirements.
B. Under no circumstances shall the LAWA be required to prove that an item proposed for
substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor
submits to Engineer all evidence to support the contention that the item proposed for
substitution is equal to the specified item. The Owner’s decision as to the equality of
substitution shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that the Design Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services
as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes
by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and
accessories furnished, or if the Design Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any
changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Design
Consultant’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the
Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor.
1.10
EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards (or equivalent) and
requirements of the NEC. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any
modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in
accordance with these requirements.
2. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations.
3. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the
manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material is not acceptable and will be
rejected.
27 05 00 - 7
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
4. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard
or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the
Specifications.
5. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label and listing of
Underwriters Laboratory or Factory Mutual. Application and installation of all equipment
and materials shall be in accordance with such labeling and listing.
6. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall
assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
7. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
8. Constituent parts, which are alike, shall be from a single manufacturer.
9. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended
service.
10. The Contractor shall guarantee for a minimum of fifteen (15) years, the performance of
assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as
required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.
B. Components of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, model number
and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral
with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.
C. Major items of equipment that serve the same function must be the same make and model.
D. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being
furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result.
E. Maximum standardization of components shall be provided to reduce spare part
requirements.
1.11
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Installation and testing crews shall have completed all appropriate training in copper and fiber
cabling installation as required by the manufacturer.
B. The Contractor shall employ the maintenance contractor with whom LAWA has a
maintenance contract to perform the disconnection, connection, re-connection or
configuration of ACAMS or other existing systems that might be affected by this Work.
C. The Contractor shall provide all new UTP cable, optical fiber cable, innerduct, racks,
cabinets, patch panels, cover plates, outlet boxes, related hardware, distribution, termination
equipment, and any other appurtenances and equipment associated with this project.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper placement of all cabling, racks, cabinets,
patch panels, cover plates, outlet boxes, and related hardware, as well as all distribution, and
termination equipment.
E. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of Engineer or Design Consultant for the final layout
of telecommunications rooms and tenant wiring closets prior to the installation of any
27 05 00 - 8
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
materials or equipment. Shop drawings showing proposed room layouts shall be submitted
for approval before beginning installation.
F. The Contractor shall furnish an adequate supply of technicians and materials at all times, and
shall perform the work in the most appropriate, expeditious, and economical manner
consistent with the interests of the LAWA.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible to LAWA for the acts and omissions of its employees,
subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the work
under a contract with the Contractor.
H. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any material or equipment.
Operations shall be confined to areas permitted by law, permits, and contract documents.
I. The Contractor shall have an experienced Project Manager on site at all times when work is in
progress on any project. The individual who represents the Contractor shall be the single
point of contact between the Contractor and LAWA, and shall be responsible for the entire
project. This representative shall be able to communicate with LAWA or designated
representative whenever requested throughout the life of the project.
J. While working in the facility, the Contractor shall not block any entrances, egresses, or other
passageways that are necessary for normal, safe operation. It should be noted that the
Contractor is responsible to provide any lifts, hand trucks, etc. that it will need to transport its
materials and equipment throughout the site.
K. The Contractor shall protect all buildings, walls, floors, and property from damage resulting
from the installation. Any and all damage to property shall be repaired by the Contractor at
its expense. If the Contractor enters an area that has damage (not caused by the Contractor),
the Contractor shall immediately bring this to the attention of the LAWA so the area can be
appropriately noted.
L. Following each day’s work, the Contractor shall clean up the areas in which it has been
working and dump all trash in the appropriate designated areas.
1.12
WARRANTY
A. Materials and workmanship shall meet or exceed industry standards and be fully guaranteed
for a minimum of fifteen (15) years from Final Acceptance. Cable integrity and associated
termination’s shall be thoroughly inspected, fully tested and guaranteed as free from defects,
transpositions, opens-shorts, tight kinks, damaged jacket insulation, etc.
B. All labor must be thoroughly competent and skilled, and all work shall be executed in strict
accordance with the best practice of the trades.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without expense to LAWA, any and
all defects arising during this warranty period that are due to imperfect materials, appliances,
improper installation or poor workmanship.
D. The Bidder shall submit a copy of all manufacturer warranty information.
E. The structured cabling system manufacturer of the cable products to be submitted shall
provide a minimum fifteen (15) year extended product warranty and application assurance
(system performance warranty). The warranty shall provide the following:
27 05 00 - 9
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. Ensure against all product defects.
2. Ensure that all copper and fiber approved cabling and components meet or exceed the
specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C and ISO/IEC IS 11801, meet or exceed the
NEXT requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-67, TSB-95 and ISO/IEC IS 11801 for
cabling links/channels.
3. Ensure that the installation of copper and fiber components will meet or exceed the loss
and bandwidth requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-67, TSB-95 and ISO/IEC IS 11801
for a fifteen year period.
4. Cover the repair or replacement of defective products, and the labor for repair or
replacement of such defective products.
5. Application assurance which shall cover the failure of the cabling system to support the
application which it was designed to support, as well as additional applications
introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use the
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C or ISO/IEC IS 11801 component and link/channel specifications.
F. The Bidder shall submit a letter of approval or other certification from the manufacturer
indicating that the Bidder is a manufacturer certified installer of the proposed cabling system
(submit with bid).
27 05 00 - 10
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT CABINETS
A. LAWA standard telecommunications room equipment cabinet is 28”W x 36”D x 84”H
DAMAC MODEL CSN1284Z23077-3 (part number includes cooling fans, enclosure light,
power strips, cable managers).
1. For raised floor applications provide DAMAC raised floor seismic support kit
2. Some applications (blade servers or data switches) require deep (42”) cabinets (DAMAC
MODEL CSN1284Z23079-3. Refer to Drawings.
3. Equipment mounting rails shall be 45U, EIA standard, with RMU markings, fully
adjustable.
4. Provide (2) 4” cutouts and (2) 6” long 4” conduit sleeves in top for cable routing.
5. Provide waterproofing seals for each conduit sleeve (STI products #FP400 4” fire stop
plug or equal).
B. Relay Racks (DAMAC MODEL RSE19084-3 or for extra heavy rack loading DAMAC
MODEL R4A19084B-3MU
1. 19-inch rack mounting space.
2. 84 inches high.
3. Lightweight aluminum construction.
4. Black polyurethane finish.
5. 15-inch deep base with four (4) ¾-inch bolt down holes.
C. Each rack shall have double-sided tapped holes with standard EIA hole pattern.
D. Each rack shall be equipped with a 12-position power strip. Power strip:
1. Shall be 20 amp, 120V.
2. Shall be rack mounted.
3. Shall be non-switched.
4. Shall be surge suppressed.
5. Shall have a minimum of twelve (12) outlets – transformer spaced.
6. Power shall be hardwired.
E. Relay racks shall meet UL 1363 and 1449 requirements.
F. Vertical Cable Channel:
27 05 00 - 11
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. Each rack will have an integral vertical cable channel with a minimum of 6 inches by 4
inches of channel space to facilitate the management of the cables entering the rack from
the cable tray.
G. There shall be horizontal and vertical cable management associated with all cabinets and
racks.
H. The cable management products shall meet the following requirements:
1. Cable management panels shall be metal or plastic with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Cable management panels shall have removable covers.
2.02
CABLE TRAY
A. Cable Trays installed other than in Telecommunication Rooms will be Legrand Cablofil
Cable Tray CF 54 and CF105 (or equivalent) as indicated on Drawings, installed per
Manufacturer’s recommendations and instruction. Cable tray shall be UL Classified as an
equipment grounding conductor and shall meet NEC Article 318.
1. Cable tray shall be supported as follows:
a. Where tray is adjacent to TR wall it will be supported by Unistrut mounting brackets
as indicated in construction Drawings.
b. Where tray is suspended above equipment cabinets it shall be supported by a single
center support consisting of ½-inch threaded rod suspended from structure above as
indicated in construction Drawings.
1) Thread rod shall be fitted with a 6-inch PVC tube where it resides in cable tray to
protect cables.
B. Cable management and routing in all Telecommunications Rooms will be via 6 inch deep
cable tray (Chalfant Series 6 or equivalent) in widths as indicated on Drawings.
2. Cable tray shall be UL Classified as an equipment grounding conductor and shall meet
NEC Article 318-5.
3. Cable tray shall be louvered ventilated construction with louvered openings minimum 3
inches wide. Cable bearing surface shall be 3 inches wide. Openings shall be on 6-inch
centers with metal drawn downward so cables can drop out at any location along tray
without cutting or gasketing the openings.
4. All cable tray 90 degree elbows, cross fittings and tees shall have 3-inch diameter holes
punched out in them at a minimum spacing of 6 inches on center to allow for dropping
cables down at corners and tees to equipment below. Holes shall have rubber or hard
plastic gaskets installed inside the punched hole to protect cables from sharp edges.
5. Cable tray material shall be 304 stainless steel.
6. Cable tray hardware shall be 3/8 inch by 3/4 inch 302 stainless steel round head shoulder
bolts with serrated neck, SS hex nuts shall have an integral lock washer.
7. Cable tray shall be supported as follows:
27 05 00 - 12
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. Where tray is adjacent to TR wall it will be supported by Unistrut mounting brackets
as indicated in construction Drawings.
b. Where tray is suspended above equipment cabinets it shall be supported by a single
center support consisting of ½-inch threaded rod suspended from structure above as
indicated in construction Drawings.
1) Thread rod shall be fitted with a 6-inch PVC tube where it resides in cable tray to
protect cables.
2.03
UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Provide CMP rated 4-pair Category 6 UTP cable (orange in color) GENERAL GS6000E or
equivalent.
B. Provide 4-port wall mount face plates (almond in color) AMP 1479446-1 or equivalent.
C. Provide Category 6 SL 110 modular jacks (with orange inserts) AMP 1375055-5 or
equivalent.
D. Patch cables shall be Belkin A3L980-XX-BLK-S or equivalent.
E. Transmission Characteristics:
1. The UTP connector module shall meet the transmission technical specifications
performance when measured at 100 MHz:
a. Parameters Value (dB)
2.04
1)
NEXT
55.1
2)
PSNEXT
52.0
3)
FEXT
49.8
4)
PSFEXT
46.9
5)
Attenuation 0.10
6)
Return Loss 27.0
UTP PATCH PANELS
A. Category 6 patch panels shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
1. Category 6 standard.
2. T568A wired.
3. Have sufficient ports to provide at least 25% growth, per patch panel.
4. Have a paired punch down sequence to allow pair-twist within ½-inch of the termination.
5. Rack mounted.
6. UL listed File # E129878.
7. Made of rolled edge black anodized aluminum construction.
27 05 00 - 13
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
8. Provide orange inserts
9. AMP 1375015-2 plus 1479450-1 or equivalent
B. From the same manufacturer as the other connectivity products (jacks, faceplates, etc.) used
for this project.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ADC
2. Tyco/AMP
3. Nordx/CDT
4. Ortronics
5. Panduit
6. Systimax
2.05
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A. Singlemode Fiber
1. Shall be class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted single mode optical fibers complying with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492BA00 with fiber counts as indicated on drawings.
2. The zero dispersion wavelength shall be between 1300 nm and 1324 nm. The
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-168 maximum value of the dispersion slope shall be no greater than
0.093 ps/km-nm2. Dispersion measurements shall be made in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-169 or ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-175.
3. The nominal core diameter shall be 8.7 µm to 10.0 µm with a tolerance of +/- 0.5 um at
1300 nm when measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-164 or ANSI/EIA/TIA455-167.
B. Physical Characteristics:
1. Optical fiber riser cable shall have an Underwriters Laboratory rating that meets or
exceeds the requirements of UL-1666.
2. The designation “UL®” and either “OFNP” or “OFNR” shall be printed every two (2)
feet on the cable jacket.
3. Strength members shall be FGE/Aramid yarn with extruded PVC sub-cable jacket.
4. The cable shall have individual fiber tube colors per TIA/EIA-606 and overall black
jacket.
5. The cable shall contain a stiff central member with cables stranded around center.
6. The cable shall contain a ripcord for the outside jacket.
7. The cable shall be suitable for temperatures of -40o to +75o C.
27 05 00 - 14
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
C. Outdoor backbone cables to indoor within fifty feet of the building entrance shall be Corning
Altos Cable or approved equal.
D. Outdoor to indoor beyond fifty feet of the building entrance shall be Corning Freedm Cable or
approved equal.
E. Indoor backbone cable shall be Corning MIC® Cable (OS2):
1. For 72 minimum use E88-T3131-29 for Plenum and E81-T3131-24 for Riser or approved
equal.
2. For 48 fiber use E88-61131-29 for Plenum and E81-61131-24 for Riser or approved
equal.
3. For 24 fiber use E88-33131-29 for Plenum and E81-33131-24 for Riser or approved
equal.
F. For small conduit or where fiber may be stressed during installation use Corning SMF28e+
glass with clearCurve bend insensitive properties.
G. Fibers connectors shall be SCAPC.
H. Pigtails shall be fusion spliced onto all fiber cables. All pigtails shall have connectors
installed and polished by the manufacturer or local cable assembly house. No connectors
shall be installed or terminated either in the field or in the contractor’s shop.
Provide
Corning cable six foot length SC/APC polish.
I. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berk-Tek
2. Nordx/CDT
3. CommScope
4. Corning
5. General
6. Systimax
2.06
OPTICAL FIBER PATCH PANELS
A. Patch panels shall be BEJED MODEL BJ-1940A-001 with:
1. BJ-1742C-011 Splice Pads
2. BJ-1646-047 Coupler Plates
3. MIC Cable Furcation Fan-out cable assemblies with SC angled PC Connectors
2.07
INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct shall be installed in all conduits in which fiber cabling is to be installed.
B. All optical fiber cables shall be placed within the innerduct.
27 05 00 - 15
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
C. The innerduct shall be Maxcell fabric innerduct in sizes as indicated on drawings.
2.08
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTER
A. The Contractor shall test all strands of optical fiber cable with an approved Power Meter and
Light Source.
B. The tester shall have been calibrated by a manufacturer certified calibration facility. The
calibration shall be dated no more than sixty (60) days prior to the start of testing.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Corning
2. Fluke
3. Noyes
4. Other approved equal
2.09
HORIZONTAL UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE TESTER
A. Shall perform all tests necessary to certify the horizontal UTP cabling to the requirements of
Category 6.
B. Shall be a UL certified Level IV test set calibrated by a manufacturer certified calibration
facility. The calibration shall be dated no more than sixty (60) days prior to the start of
testing.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Fluke
2. WaveTek
3. MicroTest
4. Other approved equal
2.10
LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be pre-printed or laser printed type.
C. Where used for cable marking, a label with a vinyl substrate and white printing area and a
clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable shall be
provided. The label color shall be different than that of the cable to which it is attached.
D. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label.
E. Provide plastic warning tape 6 inches wide continuously printed and bright colored 18” above
all direct buried services, underground conduits and duct-banks.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. W.H. Brady
27 05 00 - 16
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. Ideal
3. Panduit
4. Other equal
2.11
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
A. Fire stopping for openings through fire-rated and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies
shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "ThroughPenetration Fire Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Fire Stops" designated ASTM E814.
B. Inside of all conduits, the fire stop system shall consist of dielectric, water resistant, nonhardening, permanently pliable/re-enterable putty along with the appropriate damming or
backer materials (where required). The sealant must be capable of being removed and
reinstalled and must adhere to all penetrants and common construction materials and shall be
capable of allowing normal wire/cable movement without being displaced.
27 05 00 - 17
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. System installation and construction methods shall conform to LAWA requirements,
requirements of the State of California and all applicable building codes.
B. Contractor shall install equipment to meet Seismic Zone 4 requirements of the State of
California and as stated herein.
C. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2
times the rated load to all fastenings and supports of system components.
D. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall visit the site and identify the exact
routing for all horizontal and backbone pathways. Contractor shall notify Design Engineer if
any proposed horizontal pathways may exceed the maximum distance for the purpose it is
intended.
E. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall visit the site and identify the exact
routing for all horizontal and backbone pathways.
F. The maximum allowable Category 6 UTP cable distance (as measured by electronic UTP
Test Equipment) between the wall outlet and the serving "Port" on the Ethernet switch in the
serving Telecommunications Room is 90 meters. Planned horizontal cable conduit runs that
will result in a cable run that exceeds 90 meters shall be pointed out to Engineer before they
are installed for appropriate redesign or waiver.
G. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades and existing conditions.
Coordinate work with other trades and existing conditions to verify exact routing of all cable
tray, conduit, etc. before installation. Coordinate with all the Telecommunications,
Mechanical, Baggage Handling and Electrical Drawings. Verify with Design Consultant the
exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as equipment
racks and telecommunications devices.
H. The Contractor shall use existing conduit and surface raceway where possible and
practicable. All work shall be concealed above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and
elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, Engineer shall
be notified before starting that part of the work. In areas with no ceilings, install only after
Design Consultant reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
I. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and
install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their
individual requirements. There will be no priority schedule for trades. If, after installation of
any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance
and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as
required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of the material or
equipment supplied or proposed that may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in
order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of
Engineer and approval received before such alterations are made.
J.
Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures, and
other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. All TR cabinets and racks shall be
27 05 00 - 18
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
mounted a minimum of 36-inches from the wall, any wall mounted equipment, other
cabinets, equipment or power panels (or per NEC for voltages exceeding 120VAC).
K. Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, patching, coring and
associated work for the complete cabling system at no additional cost to the Owner. Cut and
drill from both sides of walls to eliminate splaying. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by
installation of new work. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
L. All conduit and sleeve openings used by the Contractor shall be waterproofed or fireproofed
in compliance with State and Local Building and Fire Codes. Strict adherence to National,
State, and Local Fire Codes, particularly fire stopping will be required.
M. The Contractor shall patch all openings remaining around and inside all conduit, sleeves and
cable penetrations to maintain the integrity of any fire rated wall, ceiling, floor, etc. The fire
stop system shall consist of a dielectric, water resistant, non-hardening, permanently
pliable/re-enterable putty along with the appropriate damming materials (where required).
The sealant must be capable of being removed and reinstalled and must adhere to all
penetrants and common construction materials and shall be capable of allowing normal
wire/cable movement without being displaced.
N. All building conduits and sleeves installed and/or used under these Specifications shall be fire
stopped, or re-fire stopped, upon cable placement through such passageways.
O. Fire stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. To be used inside all conduits and sleeves. Caulk on exterior of conduit penetration.
2. Provide fire stop system seals at all locations where conduit, fiber, cable trays,
cables/wires, and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor
assembly. Provide fire stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be
maintained by the fire stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight
seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities that permit the easy removal or addition of
conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to
itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration,
expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without
cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. Typical rating:
a. Floors – three (3) hours
b. Corridor walls – two (2) hours
c. Offices – three-quarters (0.75) hour
d. Smoke partitions – three-quarters (0.75) – one (1) hour
e. Provide fire stop pillows for existing cable tray penetrations through firewalls
P. Manufacturer's recommended installation standards must be closely followed (i.e. minimum
depth of material, use of ceramic fiber and installation procedures).
27 05 00 - 19
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
Q. The Contractor shall seal all foundation penetrating conduits and all service entrance conduits
and sleeves to eliminate the intrusion of moisture and gases into the building. This
requirement also includes spare conduits designated for telecommunications use.
R. Spare conduits shall be plugged with expandable plugs.
S. All service entrance conduits through building shall be sealed or resealed upon cable
placement.
T. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, straps, struts, and
other items to properly support work. Supports shall meet the approval of Design Consultant.
U. Fiber and Copper Cable Dressing: Where fiber or copper cables enter telecommunications
room it shall be neatly bundled and fastened and a suitable transition device installed to
minimize tension and bend radius on cables. All cable runs shall be horizontal or vertical,
and bends shall comply with minimum specified cable bending radii.
1. Cables shall be combed and each strand shall run parallel with the other strands.
2. After combing and straightening strands, Contractor shall separate strands into bundles
according to routing requirements and termination points.
3. Bundles shall be secured with hook-and-loop cable strap material.
4. Cable ties manufactured from a hard polymer material, such as plastic or nylon, shall not
be used.
5. Hook-and-loop material shall be low life cycle, back-to-back type, black in color, and ½
inch wide.
6. Contractor shall begin to bundle and strap cables within 6 inches of exit from conduit,
and bundles shall have cable straps applied at intervals not greater than 10 feet for entire
length of vertical and horizontal run.
3.02
PHASES OF IMPLEMENTATION
A. Provide a consolidated and integrated schedule.
3.03
INSPECTIONS AND VERIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall perform a detailed inspection of the site prior to submitting any
technical data for approval.
B. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of installation are
compatible with the existing conditions and prepare a corresponding written report of their
findings.
C. LAWA shall be notified in writing if modifications of the existing building are required in
order to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be made only upon
receiving written approval from LAWA.
D. Submit installation drawings for LAWA review and approval.
27 05 00 - 20
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.04
FLOOR MOUNTED CABINETS AND RACKS
A. All racks shall be securely anchored to the floor (slab, not floor tile) with a minimum of
1/2-inch drop in anchors and shall be seismically braced to structure to prevent toppling.
Mounting shall comply with Seismic Zone 4 requirements. Contractor shall submit
proposed mounting method for approval prior to beginning installation. Proposed mounting
method submitted shall be stamped by Contractor’s Structural Engineer that it meets local
codes and Seismic Zone 4 mounting requirements.
B. Provide vertical and horizontal cable management for all cabling installed by this
Contractor.
C. Mount with a minimum of 36 inches of clear access behind and in front of cabinets unless
otherwise noted on Construction Drawings. Submit all proposed Telecommunications
Rooms layouts with dimensions for approval prior to beginning installation.
D. Ground the cabinets and racks to the equipment ground busbar with an insulated #6 copper
wire, green in color. Refer to Construction Drawing grounding details for specific
requirements.
3.05
CABLE TRAY
A. Cable tray shall be appropriately secured as indicated in Construction Drawings. Mounting
shall comply with Seismic Zone 4 requirements. Contractor shall submit proposed
mounting method for approval prior to beginning installation. Proposed mounting method
submitted shall be stamped by Contractor’s Structural Engineer that it meets local codes and
Seismic Zone 4 mounting requirements.
3.06
GROUNDING
A. Grounding systems and ground busbars are to be installed in each Telecommunications
Room. All equipment cabinets, racks, termination frames, conduits, sleeves, cable tray and
other conductive materials shall be bonded to the grounding busbar with #6 AWG insulated
conductor. Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements
except where the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B. Braided Type Bonding Jumpers: Use for flexible bonding and grounding connections.
C. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without
obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or
damage.
D. Bond all adjacent sections of overhead cable tray with # 6 AWG conductors.
E. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or
electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so
metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
27 05 00 - 21
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. Aluminum-to-steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections shall be with tin plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead
paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
F. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel or grounding
busbar. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or
show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable and will be re-done at
Contractor’s expense.
G. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with
pressure type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the
ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and
exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.
H. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
Where manufacturer's torque tightening requirements are not indicated, tighten connections
to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.07
SYSTEM STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall not apply power to the system until after:
1. System and components have been installed and inspected in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. A visual inspection of the system components has been conducted to ensure that
defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose
connections.
3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.
4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly
installed and connected, as indicated.
5. Power supplies to be connected to the system and equipment have been verified as the
correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.
B. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of
Contractor work/equipment.
27 05 00 - 22
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.08
OPTICAL FIBER TESTING
A. Factory Test: Prior to shipment of the optical fiber cable, 100 percent of the fibers shall be
tested with an optical time domain reflectometer.
1. The optical time domain reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2 dB as
a minimum.
2. Copies of the traces shall be furnished as part of the submittals.
B. Pre-installation Test: An optical time domain reflectometer test of every fiber of each cable
on the reel prior to installation.
1. The optical time domain reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2 dB as
a minimum.
2. Copies of the traces shall be furnished to Architect/Engineer.
C. Contractor's Field Test: The Contractor shall verify the integrity of the installed fiber ring by
testing the installed fiber with an optical time domain reflectometer.
1. Tests shall be performed on 100 percent of the fibers and repeated from the opposite end
of each fiber.
2. The optical time domain reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2 dB as
a minimum.
3. Copies of the traces shall be furnished as part of the submittals.
4. Installed cable optical time domain reflectometer test:
a. Prior to installation Contractor shall perform onsite, on reel testing under the
supervision of Engineer or Design Consultant.
b. An optical time domain reflectometer test of all fibers shall be performed on the fiber
optic cable after it is installed.
c. The optical time domain reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2
dB as a minimum.
d. If the optical time domain reflectometer test results are unsatisfactory, the cable
segment is unacceptable.
e. The unsatisfactory segments of cable shall be replaced with a new segment of cable
at Contractor’s expense.
f.
The new segment of cable shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability.
g. Copies of the traces for each circuit shall be furnished as part of the submittals.
D. The Contractor shall provide end-to-end attenuation testing using an approved Power Meter
and Light Source per ANSI/EIA/TIA 455-53A.
E. Backbone singlemode fiber shall be tested in both directions at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm in
accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method B.
F. Perform optical attenuation measurements for each optical fiber after both ends of an optical
cable have been connectorized, dressed, and mounted into outlets, panels, or frames to show
27 05 00 - 23
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
losses of the optical cable, connectors, and couplers.
backbone cabling shall be as follows:
Acceptable link attenuation for
Optical Fiber cable type Wavelength (nm) - Maximum allowed attenuation (dB/km) and
Minimum information transmission capacity for overfilled launch (MHz/km) are shown in
the following table:
Optical Fiber
Wavelength Maximum attenuation Minimum information transmission
Cable Type
(nm)
(dB/km)
capacity for overfilled launch (MHz/km)
62.5/125 µm
850
200
3.5
multimode
1300
1.5
500
Singlemode ISP 8 1310
1.0
N/A*
cable
1550
N/A*
1.0
Singlemode 8.0 1310
0.5
N/A*
OSP cable
1550
0.5
N/A*
*Note – The information capacity of the fiber, as measured by the fiber manufacturer, can be used b
the contractor to demonstrate compliance with this requirement.
G. General: Cables and components that fail performance tests shall be replaced and retested
until they meet the required performance standards.
H. Fiber Optic Cable:
1. Record cable length from either length markings on cable or through OTDR test.
2. After installing connectors perform OTDR on all fibers to evaluate connector loss and
validate connector.
3. Loss shall not exceed manufacturer's listed maximum loss for connector type installed.
4. Connector shall be replaced at Contractors expense if it fails test.
3.09
HORIZONTAL UNSHIELDED CABLE TESTING
A. Test all new UTP cables.
B. Testing shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-67 Transmission Performance Specifications
for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2,
Propagation Delay and Delay Skew Specification for 100 Ohm 4-Pair Cable.
C. Testing shall be accomplished using a UL certified Level III tester.
D. Notify Owner of any cable failing the prescribed certification testing.
E. The Contractor shall provide Category 6, 100 MHz channel test results on all pairs of cable,
including but not limited to cable length, wire map, NEXT, Power Sum NEXT, ACR, Power
Sum ACR, ELFEXT, Power Sum ELFEXT, Return Loss, Propagation Delay and Delay
Skew. Results shall be provided in an electronic format.
3.10
BACKBONE CABLE TESTING
A. Testing shall be according to device manufacturer’s specification. Testing for cable integrity
after installation shall be performed to include as a minimum, DC resistance, opens or shorts.
27 05 00 - 24
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.11
TEST RESULTS
A. Fiber Optic Cables:
1. The Contractor shall test all fiber optic cables and submit all fiber test result data in an
electronic format and provide five (5) hard copies of the test results showing graphically,
the entire length of the fiber.
2. Reports shall show circuit ID, cursor marks, total attenuation, date of installation and test
used.
3. The Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of software capable of viewing the electronic
test result files.
4. Contractor shall create and provide a spreadsheet or database summary report of all fiber
links to include origin, destination, patch panel, designations, OTDR distances, OTDR
and return loss results.
B. Horizontal Copper Cabling:
1. The Contractor shall test all cables and submit all horizontal copper cable test result data
in electronic format, with the resulting file formatted with one test result per 8.5-inch x
11-inch page.
2. Files exported and saved as *.txt files shall NOT be acceptable.
3. The Contractor shall submit (1) copy of software capable of viewing the electronic test
result files and (1) hardcopy.
3.12
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. All cables and patch cables shall have a permanent label attached at both ends.
B. The Contractor shall confirm specific labeling requirements with the Design Consultant prior
to cable installation or termination.
C. All indoor cable and patch cable labels shall be pre-printed using BRADY TLS 2200 printer
or equivalent and shall be placed loose on the patch cable near the connector end without heat
shrinking labels. Labels shall use a three line format with the origination patch panel and port
on the first line, the destination patch panel and port on the second line and the system or
other descriptive information on the third line.
D. All outdoor cables shall be labeled with ACP FT-LAWAATAG-2.5X4 plastic tags and preprinted with permanent ink, outdoor cables shall be labeled (and secured with heavy duty
straps) in every manhole and handhole within 12 inches of where the cable enters and exits
the manhole or handhole and on the slack coil.
E. Backbone cables shall be marked at each endpoint and at all intermediate pull/ access points
or junction boxes. Label shall indicate origination and destination TR ID’s, sheath ID and
strand or pair range.
F. Copper and Optical Patch Panels:
1. Patch panels shall be marked using adhesive labels indicating the range of circuits
installed to it.
27 05 00 - 25
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. Each port shall be labeled with the origination, destination and the individual strand ID.
3.13
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. LAWA is in the process of procuring and implementing a CMMS. Information regarding all
equipment including model, nomenclature, serial number, function, location, recommended
preventative maintenance schedule, Quality Assurance Inspections and other pertinent data
will be stored in the CMMS database. Contractor shall include in their Bid the cost for
collecting and inputting this data for all systems and equipment provided by this Contract into
this database.
3.14
FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and asbuilt documentation including data input of all installed cables in the LAWA management
system and successful performance of the cabling system for a two-week period will
constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and
subsequent inspection, LAWA shall be provided with a numbered certificate from the
Manufacturer registering the installation.
END OF SECTION 27 05 00
27 05 00 - 26
4/1/12 Final
Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements and/or Information Technology (IT),
Security or other Special Systems or infrastructure.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Contractor shall include in the Bid all labor, materials, tools, plant, transportation, storage
costs, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, inspections, taxes and all
necessary and related items required to provide complete demolition and cutover of existing
telecommunication systems shown and described in the Specifications.
C. The Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating phased activities and
construction methods that minimize disruption to Terminal operations and provide complete
and operational systems.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems that are being demolished in
order to minimize disruption to the existing systems operations. Any systems outages shall be
approved in advance and scheduled with LAWA.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate specialty electronic, ACAMS, IT data networks, common use
and flight information systems and displays, CCTV, public address and any other IT
infrastructure systems.
F. Related documents included in the scope of this work:
Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements and all sub-sections
Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
Section 01 64 00 – Owner-Furnished Products
27 05 05 - 1
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
G. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
H. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Definitions
1. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
2. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and deliver to Owner [ready for reuse].
3. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
4. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently
removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or
removed and reinstalled.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Demolition Meeting
1. Conduct a pre-demolition meeting at Project Site with LAWA and all affected
stakeholders.
a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
b. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
c. Existing telecommunications rooms that have demolition work may involve
electrical, mechanical and architectural demolition.
Review and coordinate
requirements of work performed by other trades.
d. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
e. Review procedures to be followed when critical systems are inadvertently
interrupted.
27 05 05 - 2
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals
1. Comply with all LAWA submittal procedures given in other Sections.
2. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the
measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection,
dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of
barriers.
3. Submit a Schedule of selective demolition and cutover activities which indicates the
following as a minimum:
a. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and tenants' on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
b. How long IT and security services will be interrupted and when systems cannot be
disabled and temporary parallel service is required submit how this is proposed to be
accomplished.
c. The contractor’s plan for coordination of shutoff, capping, and continuation of IT and
all other utility services.
d. Use of elevator and stairs.
e. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and
of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
f.
Phone tree and procedures to be followed when critical systems are inadvertently
interrupted (for each shift).
4. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior
to start of demolition.
5. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
6. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after
completion of selective demolition.
B. Closeout Submittals
1. Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged
2. Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
3. Submit as-built documentation of all remaining IT and security systems conduit and
cabling that remains
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
27 05 05 - 3
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.08
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.09
FIELD/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. <Insert items to be removed by Owner>
.
C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Engineer. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the
following:
1. <Insert warranted system>.
27 05 05 - 4
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying
that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit
documentation at Project closeout.
27 05 05 - 5
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
27 05 05 - 6
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolition and construction methods shall conform to LAWA requirements, requirements of
the State of California and all applicable building codes.
B. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Remove all abandoned cable from origin to
destination.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and/or portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
C. Work in Historic Areas: Selective demolition may be performed only in areas of the Project
that are not designated as historic. In historic spaces, areas, and rooms or on historic
surfaces, the terms "demolish" or "remove" shall mean historic "removal" or "dismantling".
D. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's designated storage area.
27 05 05 - 7
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
E. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
5. Perform testing on reinstalled active systems and get sign-off by a LAWA approved
inspector that systems are re-connected and working properly.
F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a
suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in
their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.02
EXAMINATION
A.Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped per LAWA approved procedures
before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing condition of all IT related conduits and cables from origin to destination and
correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
D. Label all conduits and cables with origin, destination and what system they serve.
E. Consult with LAWA to determine whether systems can be disabled or whether a new parallel
system needs to be installed.
F. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Engineer.
G. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition
operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
27 05 05 - 8
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for detensioning.
H. Survey of Existing Conditions:
photographs or video.
Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
salvage operations.
2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.03
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions.
2. When temporary bypass systems are installed, test and get approval from Engineer before
proceeding with demolition of existing systems.
3. For existing equipment cabinets with active components in them, provide an air tight dust
seal around the cabinet and circulate cooling air with a portable air conditioning unit or
other means to ensure equipment does not overheat.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make
equipment operational.
27 05 05 - 9
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
f.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.04
PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction
and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.05
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Inspections
B. Non-Conforming Work
3.06
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
27 05 05 - 10
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.07
CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.08
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
END OF SECTION 27 05 05
27 05 05 - 11
4/1/12 Final
Selective Demolition Telecommunication Systems
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 11 00
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS (Telecom & MPOE) REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Requirements in this Section pertains to building new, or expanding Telecom and Minimum
Point of Entry Rooms (MPOE)
B. Related Sections included in the specification requirements:
Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping
Section 03 82 00 – Concrete Boring
Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Section 23 81 23.13 - HVAC for Telecom Rooms
Section 23 81 23.16 - HVAC for MPOE Rooms
Section 27 11 26.13 - UPS for Telecom Rooms
Section 27 11 26.16 - UPS for MPOE Rooms
C. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
D. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
27 11 00 - 1
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. ANSI
American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM
American Society for Testing Materials
3. BFU
Board of Fire Underwriters
4. BICSI
Building Industry Consulting Services International
5. CSA
Canadian Standards Association
6. DEC
Department of Environmental Conservation
7. EIA
Electronics Industry Association
8. ER
Equipment Room
9. FCC
Federal Communications Commission
10. FM
Factory Mutual
11. IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
12. ISO
International Standards Organization
13. NEC
National Electrical Code
14. NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
15. NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
16. NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
17. OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
18. TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
19. TR
Telecommunications Room
20. TWC
Tenant Wiring Closet
21. UFBC
Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code
22. UL
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
B. Codes, Standards, and References
1. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in
accordance with the governing rules and regulations of the telecommunications industry,
as well as federal, state and local governmental agencies, including, but not limited to the
following:
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA -606-A
Administration
Telecommunications Infrastructure, 11/24/08
27 11 00 - 2
4/1/12 Final
Standard
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
for
Commercial
Communications
Specification Guideline
b. ANSI/TIA/EIA -607
Commercial Building
Requirements for Telecommunications, August 1994
Grounding
and
Bonding
c. ANSI/TIA/EIA –758-A
Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard 2004
d. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 854
A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000Mb/s
(1000BASE-TX) Operating over Category 6 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2001
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 862
Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for
Commercial Buildings, 2002
f.
ASTM E814 Standard Test Method For Fire Tests Of Penetration Firestop Systems
g. BICSI
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (Tenth Edition)
h. FCC 47 Part 68
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Telecommunications
i.
IEEE
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC); 2007
j.
ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology - Generic Cabling For Customer Premises
k. LADBS
Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety - City of Los Angeles
Electrical Code
l.
2.
NFPA-70
National Electric Code; 2008
References to codes and standards called for in the Specifications refer to the latest
edition, amendments, and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of
these Specifications.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals
1. The contractor shall submit cut-sheets (submittals) for each component to be used before
the installation begins. The cut-sheets must be organized in a binder with an index
identifying each component. All components must be compatible with and meet the
performance specifications outlined in this document. Index the material cut-sheets by
manufacturer and type of component.
2. The following project work activities should be documented and recorded:
a. Statement of work to be performed
b. Project schedules
c. Minutes of meetings
d. Cell phone numbers of all Contractors’ project supervisory staff
27 11 00 - 3
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
e. Emergency contact lists
f.
Miscellaneous notes and photos
B. Close-out Submittals
1. The contractor will also submit final cut-sheets at the end of the project that include any
changes or additional components. Three (3) hardcopies of these submittals must be
provided in a binder.
C. Maintenance Submittals
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment Certification - Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards (or equivalent) and
requirements of the NEC. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any
modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in
accordance with these requirements.
2. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations.
3. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the
manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material is not acceptable and will be
rejected.
4. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard
or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the
Specifications.
5. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label and listing of
Underwriters Laboratory or Factory Mutual. Application and installation of all equipment
and materials shall be in accordance with such labeling and listing.
6. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall
assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
7. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
8. Constituent parts, which are alike, shall be from a single manufacturer.
9. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended
service.
1.07
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids Specification
requirements.
B. Under no circumstances shall the LAWA be required to prove that an item proposed for
substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor
27 11 00 - 4
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
submits to LAWA all evidence to support the contention that the item proposed for
substitution is equal to the specified item. LAWA’s decision as to the equality of substitution
shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that the Design Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services
as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes
by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and
accessories furnished, or if the Design Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any
changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Design
Consultant’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the
Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Submit manufacturers’ instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, operation, and installation of all products. Include any application conditions or
limitations of use stipulated by any product testing agency.
1.09
FIELD/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Material And Work
1. The Installer shall protect all finished and unfinished work against loss or damage until
the final acceptance of the completion of the entire project.
2. In the event of a loss or damage, the Installer shall promptly notify the LAWA ITG
Project Manager.
3. Protection Of Person(s) And Property
4. The Installer shall not interfere with the airlines and/or passenger circulation or tenants in
front of or within the terminals, in the parking structures, or on the airfield during the
course of the installation without obtaining prior permission from both LAWA ITG and
the airline or tenant.
5. The Installer shall protect all persons and all private and public property from hazardous
conditions, damage, injury, and death during the course of the installation. These
precautions shall include, but shall not be limited to cordoning off the Installer’s
construction area with lights, barricades, enclosures and sufficient guards at and about the
construction site.
6. The Installer shall promptly notify the LAWA ITG Project Manager after the occurrence
of such damage, loss or injury and shall prepare a full and complete written report to the
LAWA ITG Project Manager within 24-hours.
7. Components of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, model
number and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast
27 11 00 - 5
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the
equipment.
8. Major items of equipment that serve the same function must be the same make and
model.
9. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items
being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system
will result.
10. Maximum standardization of components shall be provided to reduce spare part
requirements.
11. The Contractor shall obtain the approval the Design Consultant and LAWA for the final
layout of telecommunications rooms and tenant wiring closets prior to the installation of
any materials or equipment. Shop drawings showing proposed room layouts shall be
submitted for approval before beginning installation.
1.10
WARRANTY
27 11 00 - 6
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Environment
1. Critical requirement. The environment surrounding the location of the IT room must be
free from sources of electromagnetic interference.
2. Critical requirement. The immediate environment surrounding an IT room cannot contain
equipment such as steam boilers, compressors, chilled/hot water pipes, elevator
equipment, electrical co-generation equipment, or waste processing.
3. The location must be above any potential flood zones, including being located below rest
rooms and restaurants.
4. Critical requirement. IT rooms need be located away from flying dirt and debris (i.e.
airline equipment ramps). If that is not feasible, then the IT rooms shall have positive
ventilation and magnetic gasketing.
5. IT rooms need to be accessible from a corridor, stairwell, and/or a service elevator large
enough for cabinet and equipment loading and servicing.
B. Location
1. Critical requirement. The location and quantity of telecommunications rooms shall be
designed so that the maximum distance from the IT room to any field device that the
room supports shall not exceed 250 feet via the longest possible route (i.e. right angles)
traveled by the cable from the room to the field device. This includes all work area
outlets, ACAMS card readers, cameras, access points, displays, antennas, etc.
2. Critical requirement. If the distance from the IT room to the furthest field device exceeds
250‟ via the longest possible route, then another IT room shall be installed to
accommodate the distant field devices.
3. Where feasible, to maximize coverage of an IT room, IT rooms should be located near
the center of the floors that they serve, and there shall be a minimum of at least one IT
room per floor.
4. All field devices shall be fed from an IT room on the same floor where that field device is
installed. That is, where feasible, field devices should not be fed from IT rooms on levels
above or below.
5. Critical requirement. Within a building, if there are two or more IT rooms per floor, then
the distance from one IT room to an adjacent IT room shall not exceed 500 feet via the
longest possible pathway route (i.e. right angles).
6. If more than one IT room is installed within a building, then a Main IT room shall be
identified that shall be larger than the other IT rooms.
7. LAWA IT rooms, closets, or equipment rooms shall not be used by tenants for their
equipment. Tenants shall install all communications equipment within their leasehold.
27 11 00 - 7
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
8. In a multi-level building, IT rooms on different floors should stack on top of each other.
Straight vertical cable risers should be established for the purpose of cable routing.
9. Buildings with special shapes and sizes shall be considered on an individual basis.
C. Size
1. Design standards shall address two room types/sizes:
a. IT Telecom Rooms that contain six to seven equipment cabinets plus one or two UPS
cabinets – 11’ x 24’ or approximately 264 sq. ft. It is preferable to have the UPS in
one cabinet footprint – leaving seven equipment cabinets.
b. Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE) Rooms that contain eight to nine equipment
cabinets plus one to two UPS cabinets 12’ x 30’ or approximately 360 sq. ft. It is
preferable to have the UPS in one cabinet footprint – leaving nine equipment
cabinets.
2. All room sizes, orientation, and layout shall be reviewed with LAWA for approval before
final design / bid.
D. Construction
1. General IT rooms within buildings may be constructed with materials similar to the
surround architecture.
2. IT equipment rooms shall be constructed with concrete block walls and lined with an
electromagnetic interference prevention material.
E. Ceiling
1. Drop or false ceilings are not permitted
2. Minimum Ceiling height is eight feet, six inches (8’6”)
3. Requested ceiling height is ten feet
F. Flooring
1.
2.
3.
4.
Raised access floors shall not be permitted
Shall be covered with an anti-static vinyl
Floor loading for general IT rooms shall be a minimum of 100 lbf/ft2
Floor loading for large IT equipment rooms shall be a minimum of 200 lbf/ft2
G. Seismic Bracing
1. Contractors shall provide seismic restraint of all infrastructure and equipment installed in
Telecom and MPOE rooms. All infrastructure supports and anchoring shall meet seismic
zone 4 requirements with importance factor 1.5 for essential facility rating.
H. Walls
27 11 00 - 8
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. Walls without plywood shall be painted while in a semi-gloss finish.
2. Walls with plywood shall be covered with ¾ inch x 4ft x 8 ft, AC –grade, fire-retardant
treated plywood with the FR-S stamp on it.
3. The “C” side shall face the studs so that the “Fire retardant” stamp is visible on the “A”
side.
4. Cutouts for electrical switches and outlets shall be provided.
5. Important: Plywood shall be painted with two coats of white, fire=retardant, low gloss,
paint leaving the FR-S stamps(s) exposed for inspectors.
6. Plywood shall not be fastened with a nail gun or explosive-charge device.
I.
Doors
1. Minimum door size is 36 inches x 80 inches.
2. Door should swing outward if local building codes allow.
3. All doors shall have entry and exit ACAMS card reader access.
4. All IT room doors shall be keyed to (TBD) locks to allow opening from the outside, and
shall have a mechanism to manually enable and disable the key lock.
5. Important: Plywood shall be painted with two coats of white, fire-retardant, low gloss,
paint leaving the FR-S stamps(s) exposed for inspectors.
6. Plywood shall not be fastened with a nail gun or explosive-charge device.
J.
Windows
1. Windows are not permitted without approval from LAWA prior to final design.
K. Power
1. Design standards for IT Telecom rooms shall use a maximum 20kVA/16kW for
conditioned user equipment loads as the basis for design. Refer to Section 27 11 26.16
for UPS equipment specification.
2. Design standards for IT MPOE rooms shall use a maximum 30kVA/16kW for
conditioned user equipment loads as the basis for design. Refer to Sections 27 11 26.13
and 27 11 26.13 for UPS equipment specification.
3. Contractor shall design for the major electrical components including but not limited to:
a. Electrical Distribution in Room (non-conditioned)
b. Uninterruptible Power Supply w/power distribution
27 11 00 - 9
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
c.
d.
e.
f.
Electrical Panel (conditioned from UPS output)
Electrical Distribution to cabinets (conditioned from UPS)
Maintenance Bypass Circuit (if required due to input voltage)
Batteries (VRLA type)
4. Electrical panels serving the UPS shall be separate from those serving lighting and
mechanical equipment.
5. A dedicated 200 amp electrical panel shall be installed within IT Telecom rooms sized
between 150 and 230 square feet.
6. Power requirements for larger rooms shall be calculated on an individual basis.
7. Excepting for special circuits, all panels shall be fully populated with 20 amp circuit
breakers.
8. Excepting special power requirements, each individual equipment cabinet or equipment
rack shall have two separate 120 VAC 20 amp circuits feeding them.
9. Walls with backboards shall have 120 VAC, 20 amp, non-switched, quad-plex wall
outlets installed every six (6) feet.
L. Lighting
1. Lighting shall provide a minimum of 50 foot candles measured at three foot, three inches
(3’3”) above the floor.
2. Fluorescent fixtures shall use “cool white” lamps.
3. Dimmer switches shall not be used.
4. Light fixtures shall be centered in the aisles between the low=voltage cable tray segments
mounted at a minimum of 8’ 6” above the finished floor. Lights shall not be mounted
directly above cable tray.
5. A minimum of fifty percent of all fixtures shall be on emergency power.
M. Grounding/Bonding
1. Within the main telecommunications room there shall be installed a telecommunications
main grounding busbar (TMGB).
2. The TMGB shall be grounded to both the electrical grounding entrance facility and the
building’s steel exterior wall, or according to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
The TMGB shall also connect to a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) within
each IT room via a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB). Grounding
conductors shall be installed to building steel with clamps designed for the purpose.
27 11 00 - 10
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. The TMGB shall be copper busbar of a minimum 4 inches x 10 inches x ¼ inch with a
minimum of eight (8) wire connection lugs attached to it. Busbar shall be insulated from
its support.
4. The TGB shall be provided for each IT room, and shall be connected to both the closest
grounding point in the building’s electrical service panel or according to the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction, and the building’s steel exterior wall.
5. The TBB shall be installed to connect the TMGB to each TGB. Separate conductors
shall run from the TMGB to every level within a building. TBB’s can be extended from
the TGBs in IT rooms on the same level.
6. TBBs shall be sized according to the distance that they need to run, as follows:
a. # 6 AWG for distances less than 13 feet
b. #4 AWG for distances between 13 and 20 feet
c. #3 AWG for distances between 20 and 26 feet
d. #2 AWG for distances between 26 and 33 feet
e. #1 AWG for distances between 33 and 44 feet
f.
#1/0 AWG for distances between 44 and 52 feet
g. #2/0 AWG for distances between 52 and 66 feet
h. #3/0 AWG for distances between 66 feet
7. For TGBs, a minimum, #6 AWG, stranded, copper, green insulated conductor shall be
provided to connect equipment racks and cabinets and cable tray intersystem bonding.
All equipment racks and cabinets shall be bonded to each other and to the
telecommunications grounding busbar.
8. All grounding conductors shall be protected by installing within ½” conduit.).
9. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be colored orange or marked with an orange triangle.
10. Codes/Standards: Installations are to be performed in accordance with; (1) NEC article
250, (2) NEC article 800, and (3) ANSI J-STD 607-A.
11. Acceptable Product(s): B-Line #SB-477-K Busbar
N. Mechanical
1. Provide and install a dedicated ceiling-mounted air conditioning unit w/reheat and
humidification function. Unit shall be installed immediately outside of the IT space to
provide for 24 hour service. For Telecom and MPOE rooms, see HVAC requirements;
Sections 23 81 23.13 and 23 81 23.16.
2. Air conditioning unit shall be chilled water type. If a suitable chilled water source does
not exist, contractor shall coordinate with LAWA to specify a DX system based on
existing conditions and using the same capacities as outlined.
27 11 00 - 11
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. Air units shall be sized according to max user equipment loads in the space as calculated
by the UPS size in kW for both the Telecom room and MPOE room.
4. Inside temperature shall be maintained between 64°F to 75°F, at between 30% and 55%
relative humidity.
5. A thermostat shall be provided within the room.
6. All Telecom and MPOE room doors shall be sealed for dust-proofing, have positive
ventilation, and all ventilation ducts into the room shall be filtered for dust abatement
purposes.
7. Supply ducting and supply diffuser from air unit shall be located above cold aisle in
Telecom and MPOE rooms. Return ducting to air unit shall be located above hot aisle in
Telecom and MPOE rooms.
O. Fire Systems
1. Provide self-contained double-interlocking pre-action riser system to support Telecom
and MPOE Room spaces as required by LAWA. Location of pre-action cabinet shall be
outside of Telecom and MPOE spaces and shall be coordinated with LAWA for approval
prior to design and installation.
a. Double interlocked pre-action system shall have an electric / pneumatic valve
requiring both low-air signal and detection signal to open the valve.
b. Double interlocked pre-action system shall have pressure gauges to indicate water
supply pressure, priming water pressure, and air pressure, and shall contain an
automatic air compressor to fill the system in prescribed time.
c. Double interlocked pre-action system shall be provided with integral FM approved
UL listed butterfly valve installed on the system riser outside of cabinet with test and
drain assembly for full-flow testing.
d. Pre-action valve shall have sight glass to visually confirm water flow upon system
activation.
e. Pre-action system shall be type Reliable Prepak or Viking TotalPac
2. Sprinkler heads shall have wire cages installed to prevent damage and accidental
activation.
3. Specialty spaces may require a clean agent fire suppression system. Any clean agent
system requirements shall be coordinated with the LAWA prior to design and installation
P. Monitoring Systems
1. Provide monitoring equipment to support both the UPS and mechanical unit. Monitoring
equipment shall be compatible with the existing Sitelink system and Sitescan software
used to monitor other IT spaces and critical infrastructure. Monitoring equipment shall
have interface for future connectivity to Building Management System (BMS).
27 11 00 - 12
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. Provide and install SSW-2E Sitelink interface module (or equiv.) allowing for
communication with UPS and Mechanical system for integration with Sitescan Web
software via BACnet. Module shall be mounted in NEMA-1 wall-mount enclosure
within room. Include one external power supply 120VAC/24VAC and startup services.
One pair of EIA-422 cable required for both UPS and Air critical.
Q. Plumbing
1. Excepting fire sprinklers required by code, no pipes intended to carry water or any other
fluid shall be installed in or above the IT room ceiling. See Fire Section for plumbing
requirements related to any pre-action sprinkler systems.
R. Security
1. Entry and exit ACAMS card readers shall be provided for all IT Room doors.
2. All IT room doors shall also be keyed to LAWA A-2 locks to allow opening from the
outside, and shall have a mechanism to manually enable and disable the key lock.
3. All IT rooms shall have cameras within the room that connect to the CCTV Management
System.
4. Some rooms shall have cameras mounted on the outside of the room watching the entry
door. Obtain LAWA direction prior to final design.
5. Some rooms may have intercoms that connect back to the network operations cents.
Obtain LAWA direction prior to final design.
S. Conduit Sleeves
1. Conduit sleeves for backbone cabling are not permitted in new construction.
2. All backbone conduits shall terminate either within equipment cabinets or lockable
junction boxes with hinged covers, sized as follows:
a. One 36” x 12” deep junction box for 2 to 4 inch conduits
b. Two 36” x 12” deep junction box for 5 to 8 inch conduits
T. Clearances
1. Clearances around all electrical and mechanical equipment shall satisfy all local, NEC,
and manufacturer’s required clearances.
2. IT Equipment cabinets require a 36” aisle space in front of and behind each cabinet.
3. Applicable Codes/Standards Reference: (1) NEC article 110.26, NEC article 800, and (3)
ANSI J-STD 607-A.
U. Cross-Connect Facilities
27 11 00 - 13
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. All VOICE backbone and horizontal cables shall be terminated on CAT6 rated, 110 style
punch-blocks. All DATA backbone and horizontal cables shall be terminated in jackfields that are rack-mounted.
V. Cross-Connect Color Coding
1. LAWA ITG does not follow Industry Standards for color-coding backboards and crossconnects.
2. Backboards shall be painted white until further notice.
2.02
PATHWAYS
A. Conduits
1. General
a. Critical Requirements.
All IT rooms shall connect to the
telecommunication rom (MPOE) with a minimum of two 4-inch conduits.
main
b. Critical Requirement.
Adjacent IT rooms shall connect to each other with a
minimum of two 4-in conduits.
c. Critical Requirement.
Within passenger terminals there shall be a minimum of
two sets of two 4-inch, individual, physically separate, redundant, conduit riser
pathways feeding each level of the building from the MPOE.
d. Every IT room on the level immediately below the rooftop shall provide for
connectivity to the rooftop.
e. Power lines shall not run in communications conduits.
f.
EMT and Rigid metallic conduit shall be reamed and have bushings installed.
g. Conduit shall be sized for forty percent (40%) perfect fill.
h. The maximum number of cables that can be installed with two 90-degree bends is 40
percent of perfect fill.
i.
Conduit fill shall be reduced by fifteen percent (15%) for each additional 90-degree
bend, not to exceed 360 degrees of bend.
j.
Conduits shall not run more than 150 feet or have more than two 90degree bends
without pull-boxes.
k. Each conduit shall have a pull-string inserted and tied off at each end.
l.
One 4-inch conduit entering the IT room and one 4-inch conduit leaving the IT room
shall have three (3) 1-¼”, orange-colored, innerducts or four 1-inch orange-colored
innerducts installed with pull-strings in each.
m. All conduit bends shall be long sweeping bends.
n. The inside bend radius for conduits sized 2-inches or less shall be a minimum of 6x
the internal diameter of the conduit.
27 11 00 - 14
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
o. The inside bend radius of conduits sized greater than 2 inches shall be a minimum of
10x the internal diameter of the conduit.
p. All conduits shall be labeled on both origin and destination ends.
B. Pull Boxes
1. Sized according to the NEC, unless specific sizes are specified.
2. The minimum size pull box for ¾ inch conduit is 12 inches long x 4 inches wide x 3
inches deep (12” x 4” x 3”).
3. The minimum size pull box for 4-inch conduit is 60 inches x 15 inches wide x 8 inches
deep. (60” x 15” x 8”).
4. Conduits shall not run more than 150 feet or have more than two 90 degree bends without
pull boxes.
5. Conduit entry points shall be placed at opposite ends of the pull box, if possible.
C. Innerduct
1. Innerduct shall be installed in all conduit systems where fiber optic cable is placed.
2. For new multiple conduit installations, three 1-1/4” innerducts or four 1” innerducts shall
be pulled and shall include pull strings (See LAWA ITG for details)
3. LAWA ITG only uses orange-colored innerduct so as not to be confused with other
agencies.
4. Acceptable Products:
a. For Plenum installations: Any plenum-rated innerduct that has the plenum rating
visibly stamped on the outside innerduct.
b. For Riser Installation: Any plenum-rated or riser-rated innerduct that has the rating
visibly stamped on the outside of the innerduct. If the riser transitions to a plenum,
then the innerduct shall be plenum-rated.
c. For EMT or rigid conduit installations: Any ribbed PVC innerduct in straight
underground installations where the bending radius allows or any corrugated PVC
innerduct.
D. Ductbanks
1. Refer to Section 27 05 43 Requirements for Ductbanks, Maintenance Holes, Direct
Burial.
27 11 00 - 15
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
E. Cable Tray & Vertical Ladder Runway
1. Overhead Cable tray shall be a standard twelve inches wide and five inches deep and
mounted at approximately 8’ above finished floor. Ideally, cable trays should be
mounted at 12” above cabinets being served.
2. Overhead cable trays installed with Telecom and MPOE rooms shall be installed around
the perimeter of the room and over the center-line of the cabinets from wall to wall and
tee off at intervals not to exceed six feet.
3. Cable tray shall be aluminum ladder-type flange-in cable tray type PW/Legrand
Industries model 4E02 w/ 5 inch rung spacing and NEMA Class B rating.
4. Provide and install with the required radius bends and pre-fabricated corner and Tee
fittings of the same type as linear sections to match layout as outlined in shop plans to be
approved by LAWA ITG.
5. Coordinate exact cable tray placement over cabinets to facilitate low-voltage cable plant
installation via knockouts located on top of cabinets.
6. Cable tray installation shall be supported by a threaded rod trapeze sized and unistrut.
All overhead cable tray installation and anchoring shall meet essential facility rating with
seismic importance factor 1.5 for Seismic Zone 4.
7. Cable trays parts shall be bonded to a number 6 AWG copper conductor and connected to
the grounding busbar.
8. Vertical ladder runway shall be installed on the wall to facilitate cable routing from floor
or O/H conduit sleeves to cable tray. In IT rooms, install 24 inch black CPI cable runway
mounted to wall for all vertical pathways from floor/ceiling conduits to overhead runway.
CPI part number 10250-724 or equal.
9. Cabletrays parts shall be bonded to a number 6 AWG copper conductor and connected to
the grounding busbar.
F. Raised Access Floors – Telecom and MPOE rooms shall not have raised floors unless
specifically noted by LAWA ITG.
G. Surface Mount – Surface mount raceways shall be used only if there is no other alternative
pathway for cables (Consult LAWA ITG).
H. Fire Stopping (also refer to Section 07 84 00)
1. All penetrations made through fire-rated structures by conduits, cables, innerducts, cable
trays, and duct banks shall be sealed with approved fire stopping material.
2. Fire stopping materials shall be sufficient to restore the fire-rating of the penetrated
structure.
3. Putty-type fire stopping material is preferred for ease of fire stop reentry.
27 11 00 - 16
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
4. Acceptable Product:
I.
STI Firestop E-Z Path (or equal)
Core Drilling – (Also refer to Section 03 81 00 and 03 82 00)
1. Core drilling concrete floors may be permitted with approval from LAWA Project
Management Division provided that structural integrity is not compromised.
2. Ground Penetrating Radar Systems shall not be used.
3. The concrete shall be X-rayed prior to drilling, and that x-ray given to the EPMD along
with a request for core drilling.
4. The concrete slurry from the drilling operation shall not be allowed to stain anything
either above or below it. Provisions shall be made to protect the environment and contain
the slurry.
5. All spillage shall be cleaned up.
6. The core-drilled opening shall be properly firestopped.
2.03
CABINETS AND RACKS
A. Cabinets – Refer to Section 27 05 00 Basic Telecommunications
B. Racks
1. Any use of two-post open frame 19” racks shall be reviewed and approved by LAWA
ITG beforehand. Approved part numbers shall be determined at that time.
C. Wall Mounting
1. In special circumstances, if cabinets and racks are not provided, wall mounting is
acceptable provided that the equipment is small and the installation can be done securely
to the plywood backboard. Any wall-mount equipment plans shall be reviewed and
approved by LAWA ITG beforehand.
D. Hardware
1. All fastening hardware used outdoors shall be stainless steel grade 19-8 or better.
2.04
CABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOM AND MPOE ROOMS
A. Cable General Requirements – Refer to Section 27 05 00 Basic Telecommunications
B. Backbone: For new Telecom and MPOE Rooms install sufficient Backbone UTP / CAT-6
GS6000 cable from the Main IT room to new or expanded IT Room to cover current and
future needs for the area served by that particular new or expanded IT Room. CAT-6 cables
shall be used as a universal cable for all IT needs, including telephone, data, fax, video,
audio, etc. Refer to Section 27-05-00 for cable, termination and testing requirements.
27 11 00 - 17
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
C. Horizontal: Install Single Mode, 4-pair / CAT-6 cable, as required from the new or expanded
IT Room shall follow requirements shown I Section 27 05 00 for cable, termination and
testing requirements.
2.05
RACKS
A. Any use of two-post open frame 19” racks shall be reviewed and approved by LAWA ITG
beforehand. Approved part numbers shall be determined at that time.
2.06
LABELING
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be pre-printed or laser printed type.
C. Where used for cable marking, a label with a vinyl substrate and white printing area and a
clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable shall be
provided. The label color shall be different than that of the cable to which it is attached.
D. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label.
E. Provide plastic warning tape 6 inches wide continuously printed and bright colored 18” above
all direct buried services, underground conduits and duct-banks.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. W.H. Brady
2. Ideal
3. Panduit
4. Other equal
27 11 00 - 18
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. System installation and construction methods shall conform to LAWA requirements,
requirements of the State of California and all applicable building codes.
B. Contractor shall install equipment to meet Seismic Zone 4 requirements of the State of
California and as stated herein.
C. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2
times the rated load to all fastenings and supports of system components.
D. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall visit the site and identify the exact
routing for all horizontal and backbone pathways.
E. The maximum allowable Category 6 UTP cable distance (as measured by electronic UTP
Test Equipment) between the wall outlet and the serving "Port" on the Ethernet switch in the
serving Telecommunications Room is 90 meters. Planned horizontal cable conduit runs that
will result in a cable run that exceeds 90 meters shall be pointed out to LAWA before they
are installed for appropriate redesign or waiver.
F. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades and existing conditions.
Coordinate work with other trades and existing conditions to verify exact routing of all cable
tray, conduit, etc. before installation. Coordinate with all the Telecommunications,
Mechanical, Baggage Handling and Electrical Drawings. Verify with Design Consultant /
LAWA the exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as
equipment racks and telecommunications devices.
G. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and
install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their
individual requirements. There will be no priority schedule for trades. If, after installation of
any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance
and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as
required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of the material or
equipment supplied or proposed that may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in
order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of LAWA
and approval received before such alterations are made.
H. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures, and
other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. All TR cabinets and racks shall be
mounted a minimum of 36-inches from the wall, any wall mounted equipment, other
cabinets, equipment or power panels (or per NEC for voltages exceeding 120VAC).
I.
Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, patching, coring and
associated work for the complete cabling system at no additional cost to LAWA. Cut and
drill from both sides of walls to eliminate splaying. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by
installation of new work. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
27 11 00 - 19
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
J.
All conduit and sleeve openings used by the Contractor shall be waterproofed or fireproofed
in compliance with State and Local Building and Fire Codes. Strict adherence to National,
State, and Local Fire Codes, particularly fire stopping will be required.
K. The Contractor shall patch all openings remaining around and inside all conduit, sleeves and
cable penetrations to maintain the integrity of any fire rated wall, ceiling, floor, etc. The fire
stop system shall consist of a dielectric, water resistant, non-hardening, permanently
pliable/re-enterable putty along with the appropriate damming materials (where required).
The sealant must be capable of being removed and reinstalled and must adhere to all
penetrants and common construction materials and shall be capable of allowing normal
wire/cable movement without being displaced.
L. All building conduits and sleeves installed and/or used under these Specifications shall be fire
stopped, or re-fire stopped, upon cable placement through such passageways.
M. Fire stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. To be used inside all conduits and sleeves. Caulk on exterior of conduit penetration.
2. Provide fire stop system seals at all locations where conduit, fiber, cable trays,
cables/wires, and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor
assembly. Provide fire stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be
maintained by the fire stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight
seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities that permit the easy removal or addition of
conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to
itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration,
expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without
cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. Typical rating:
a. Floors – three (3) hours
b. Corridor walls – two (2) hours
c. Offices – three-quarters (0.75) hour
d. Smoke partitions – three-quarters (0.75) – one (1) hour
e. Provide fire stop pillows for existing cable tray penetrations through firewalls
N. Manufacturer's recommended installation standards must be closely followed.
O. The Contractor shall seal all foundation penetrating conduits and all service entrance conduits
and sleeves to eliminate the intrusion of moisture and gases into the building. This
requirement also includes spare conduits designated for telecommunications use.
P. Spare conduits shall be plugged with expandable plugs.
Q. All service entrance conduits through building shall be sealed or resealed upon cable
placement.
27 11 00 - 20
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
R. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, straps, struts, and
other items to properly support work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Design
Consultant/LAWA.
S. Fiber and Copper Cable Dressing: Where fiber or copper cables enter telecommunications
room it shall be neatly bundled and fastened and a suitable transition device installed to
minimize tension and bend radius on cables. All cable runs shall be horizontal or vertical,
and bends shall comply with minimum specified cable bending radii.
1. Cables shall be combed and each strand shall run parallel with the other strands.
2. After combing and straightening strands, Contractor shall separate strands into bundles
according to routing requirements and termination points.
3. Bundles shall be secured with hook-and-loop cable strap material.
4. Cable ties manufactured from a hard polymer material, such as plastic or nylon, shall not
be used.
5. Hook-and-loop material shall be low life cycle, back-to-back type, black in color, and ½
inch wide.
6. Contractor shall begin to bundle and strap cables within 6 inches of exit from conduit,
and bundles shall have cable straps applied at intervals not greater than 10 feet for entire
length of vertical and horizontal run.
3.02
EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall perform a detailed inspection of the site prior to submitting any
technical data for approval.
B. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of installation are
compatible with the existing conditions and prepare a corresponding written report of their
findings.
C. LAWA shall be notified in writing if modifications of the existing building are required in
order to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be made only upon
receiving written approval from LAWA.
D. Submit Installation drawing for LAWA review and approval prior to any construction.
3.03
PREPARATION
3.04
INSTALLATION
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - TESTING
27 11 00 - 21
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.06
CLEANING
3.07
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Information regarding all equipment including model, nomenclature, serial number, function,
location, recommended preventative maintenance schedule, Quality Assurance Inspections
and other pertinent data will be stored in the CMMS database. Contractor shall include in
their Bid the cost for collecting and inputting this data for all cables, equipment and systems
provided by this Contract into this database.
3.08
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. All cables and patch cables shall have a permanent label attached at both ends.
B. The Contractor shall confirm specific labeling requirements with the Design Consultant prior
to cable installation or termination.
C. All indoor cable and patch cable labels shall be pre-printed using BRADY TLS 2200 printer
or equivalent and shall be placed loose on the patch cable near the connector end without heat
shrinking labels. Labels shall use a three line format with the origination patch panel and port
on the first line, the destination patch panel and port on the second line and the system or
other descriptive information on the third line.
3.09
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES - ACCEPTANCE
END OF SECTION
27 11 00 - 22
4/1/12 Final
IT COMMUNICATION ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 11 26.13
Communications Rack Mounted Uninterruptible Power Protection
System for Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE) Rooms (30 kVA UPS)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a
continuous-duty three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power system (UPS). The UPS shall
provide high-quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads. This specification
provides requirements for the following options:
1. Option #1:
MPOE Room UPS Requirement:
30 kVA, Electrical 280V
2. Option #2:
MPOE Room UPS Requirement:
30 kVA, Electrical 480V
B. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to
establish standards of performance, quality and construction. These model numbers are based
on equipment manufactured by Liebert. Equivalent products may be considered if adequate
information is submitted to the specifying engineer for approval beforehand.
C. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
1. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
2. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
3. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
5. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
6. Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
7. Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
8. Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
9. Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
10. Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
11. Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements
D. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
E. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
27 11 26.13 - 1
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Standards
1. The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current
revision of the following documents. Where a conflict arises between these documents
and statements made herein, the statements in this specification shall govern.
a. ASME
b. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1
c. FCC Part 15, Class A
d. IEC 1000-4-5
e. ISO 9001
f.
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)
g. NEMA PE-1
h. OSHA
i.
UL Standard 1778
2. The UPS shall be UL listed per UL Standard 1778, and shall be CSA certified.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals with the proposal shall include:
1. System configuration with single-line diagrams.
2. Functional relationship of equipment including weights, dimensions, and heat dissipation.
3. Descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including deviations from these specifications.
4. Size and weight of shipping units to be handled by installing contractor.
5. Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections.
6. Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations.
B. Action Submittals
1. Submittals upon UPS delivery shall include a complete set of submittal drawings and one
(1) set of instruction manuals that shall include a functional description of the equipment
with block diagrams, safety precautions, instructions, step-by-step operating procedures
and routine maintenance guidelines, including illustrations.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
27 11 26.13 - 2
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
A. A minimum of twenty years’ experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of solid-state
UPS systems is required. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world
class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
B. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the system to assure
compliance with the specification.
1.07
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids Specification
requirements.
B. Under no circumstances shall the LAWA be required to prove that an item proposed for
substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor
submits to Engineer all evidence to support the contention that the item proposed for
substitution is equal to the specified item. The Owner’s decision as to the equality of
substitution shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that the Design Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services
as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes
by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and
accessories furnished, or if the Design Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any
changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Design
Consultant’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the
Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Submit manufacturers’ instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, operation, and installation of all products. Include any application conditions or
limitations of use stipulated by any product testing agency.
1.09
FIELD/SITE – ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
A. The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage
or degradation of operating characteristics:
1. Operating Ambient Temperature
a. UPS Module: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C).
b. Battery: 77°F ±9°F (25°C ±5°C).
2. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature
a. UPS Module: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C).
b. Battery: -4°F to 92°F (-20°C to 33°C)
3. Relative Humidity - 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
27 11 26.13 - 3
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
4. Altitude
a. Operating: to 3300 ft. (1000 meters) above Mean Sea Level. Derated for higher
altitude applications.
b. Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft. (12,200 meters) above Mean Sea Level.
5. Audible Noise – Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation
shall not exceed 54 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPS.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS module against defects in materials and
workmanship for 12 months after initial start-up or 18 months after ship date, whichever
period expires first.
B. The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the end user.
27 11 26.13 - 4
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Voltage: Input/output voltage specifications of the 30 kVA UPS shall be:
1. Rectifier Input: 120/208 volts, three-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground.
2. Output: 120/208 volts, three-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground.
B. Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS shall be 30kVA/16kW at
0.8 lagging power factor.
2.02
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Battery Design Requirements for 30 kVA UPS:
1. Battery Cells: Sealed, lead-acid, valve-regulated.
2. Reserve Time: 10 minutes at 16kW full load, with ambient temperature of 25°C
3. Recharge Time: to 95% capacity within ten (10) times discharge time
B. Modes of Operation – The UPS shall be designed to operate as on on-line, doubleconversion, reverse-transfer system in the following modes:
1. Normal – The Critical AC load is continuously supplied by the UPS inverter. The
rectifier/charger derives power from a utility AC source and supplies DC power to the
inverter while simultaneously float-charging the reserve battery.
2. Emergency – Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical AC load is supplied by the
inverter, which, without any switching, obtains power from the battery. There shall be no
interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC
source.
3. Recharge – Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter
and battery recharge loads.
4. Bypass – If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, or should the
inverter overload capacity be exceeded, the static transfer switch shall perform a reverse
transfer of the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption in power to
the critical AC load.
2.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AC Input to UPS
1. Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: three-phase, 4-wire plus ground.
2. Voltage Range: +10%, -20% of nominal.
3. Frequency: Nominal frequency 5%.
27 11 26.13 - 5
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
4. Power Factor: Up to 0.99 lagging at nominal input voltage and full rated UPS output
load.
5. Inrush Current: 800% of full load current maximum.
6. Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
7. Input Current Walk-In: 20 seconds to full rated input current maximum. Field selectable
5 through 20 seconds.
8. Current Distortion: 4% reflected THD maximum at full load.
9. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in IEC 1000-45.
B. AC Output, UPS Inverter
1. Voltage Configuration: three-phase, 4-wire plus ground
2. Voltage Regulation:
a. ±1% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage,
ambient temperature, and load power factor.
b. ±2% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the combined
variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient
temperature, and load power factor.
3. Frequency: Nominal frequency ±0.1%.
4. Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 Hertz per second maximum. Field selectable from 0.1
to 1.0 Hz per second.
5. Phase Displacement:
a. ±0.5 degree for balanced load,
b. ±1.0 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
6. Bypass Line Sync Range:
a. ±0.5 Hertz,
b. Field selectable ±0.5 to 5.0 Hz.
7. Voltage Distortion:
a. 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads.
b. <4% THD for 100% nonlinear loads (3:1 crest factor) without kVA/kW
derating.
8. Load Power Factor Range: 0.7 lagging to 0.95 leading without derating.
9. Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
27 11 26.13 - 6
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
10. Overload Capability:
a. 125% for ten minutes (without bypass source).
b. 150% for one minute (without bypass source).
11. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: ±5% manual adjustment.
12. Voltage Transient Response:
a. 100% load step
b. Loss or return of AC input power
c. Manual transfer of 100% load
±4.0%.
±1.0%.
±3.0%.
13. Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage within one cycle.
14. Voltage Unbalance: 100% unbalanced load ±1%.
Note: All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to establish
standards of performance, quality and construction. These model numbers are based on equipment
manufactured by Liebert. Equivalent products may be considered if adequate information is submitted to
the specifying engineer for approval beforehand.
2.04
APPROVED MANUFACTURER FOR MPOE ROOM UPS
A. MPOE Room: UPS, 208Volt Input (4 wire plus ground)
1. Provide (1) 30kVA/16kW 120/208V-input, 3-phase UPS, model Liebert NX
38SB030C0CHX. Include internal VRLA battery capacity rated to 10 minutes at full
load w/ disconnect facility for maintenance.
2. UPS shall be packaged in a single 24” wide cabinet with automatic continuous static
transfer switch and internal manual bypass.
3. Include seismic anchoring
4. Include (1) OC-485 Webcard to interface w/ Sitelink system.
5. Connect 120/208V output to single wall-mounted panelboard.
6. Options for MPOE are:
a. Option #1
1) Provide (1) external VRLA battery cabinet providing for a total of (26)
minutes at 16kW load, model Liebert 38BP030RHX1BNR.
2) Include DC cables so that 27” battery cabinet can be directly bolted to right
side of UPS cabinet.
27 11 26.13 - 7
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
3) Include seismic anchoring.
b. Option #2
1) Provide (1) external maintenance bypass cabinet, model Liebert
38MB0300CC6AL.
2) Include interconnecting cables for bolting to left side of UPS.
3) Cabinet shall be 27” wide with single rotary switch interlocked for makebefore-break manual transfers.
4) Include seismic anchoring.
B. MPOE Room UPS, 480Volt Input (3 wire plus ground)
1.
Provide (1) 30kVA/16kW 480V-input, 120/208v output, 3-phase UPS. Model Liebert
NX 38SB030C0CHX.
2.
Include internal VRLA battery capacity rated to 18 minutes at full load w/ disconnect
facility for maintenance.
3.
UPS shall be packaged in a single 24” wide cabinet with automatic continuous static
transfer switch and internal manual bypass.
4.
Include (1) OC-485 Webcard to interface w/ Sitelink system.
5.
Include (1) external maintenance bypass/transformer cabinet, model Liebert
38MB0200AC6DL.
6.
Include interconnecting cables for bolting to left side of UPS.
7.
Cabinet shall be 27” wide with 480V input isolation transformer and single rotary
switch interlocked for making before-break manual transfers.
8.
Include seismic anchoring for both cabinets.
9.
Connect 120/208V UPS output to single wall mounted panelboard.
10. Option for MPOE Room:
a. Option 1:
1) Provide (1) external VRLA battery cabinet providing for a total of (26)
minutes at 16kW load, model Liebert 38BP030RHX1BNR.
2) Include DC cables so that 27” battery cabinet can be directly bolted to right
side of UPS cabinet.
3) Include seismic anchoring.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Materials
27 11 26.13 - 8
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade and free from
all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory
testing.
2. The maximum working voltage, current, and di/dt of all solid-state power components
and electronic devices shall not exceed 75% of the ratings established by their
manufacturer. The operating temperature of solid-state component sub-assembly shall not
be greater than 75% of their ratings. Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and
be operated at no more than 95% of their voltage rating at the maximum rectifier
charging voltage.
B. Wiring
1. Wiring practices, materials and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of
the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). All bolted connections of bus bars, lugs, and
cables shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code and other
applicable standards. All electrical power connections are to be torqued to the required
value and marked with a visual indicator.
2. Provision shall be made for power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of the
UPS cabinet.
C. Construction and Mounting
1. The UPS unit, comprised of an input circuit breaker, rectifier/charger, inverter, static
transfer switch and maintenance bypass switch, shall be housed in a single free-standing
NEMA type 1 enclosure. Cabinet doors/covers shall require a tool for gaining access.
Casters and stops shall be provided for ease of installation. Front access only shall be
required for expedient servicing and adjustments. The UPS cabinet shall be structurally
adequate and have provisions for hoisting, jacking, and forklift handling.
2. The UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with the manufacturer’s standard
color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Printed circuit
assemblies shall be plug connections. Like assemblies and like components shall be
interchangeable.
D. Cooling
1. Cooling of the UPS shall be by forced air. Low-velocity fans shall be used to minimize
audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPS output. There shall be
redundant fans.
2. The thermal design, along with all thermal and ambient sensors, shall be coordinated with
the protective devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures are
exceeded.
E. Grounding
1. The AC output neutral shall be electrically isolated from the UPS chassis. The UPS
chassis shall have an equipment ground terminal. Provisions for local bonding shall be
provided.
27 11 26.13 - 9
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
2.06
COMPONENTS
A. Rectifier/Charger
1. General
a. The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls
necessary to convert incoming AC power to regulated DC power for input to the
inverter and for battery charging. The rectifier/charger shall be a solid-state
SCR/IGBT type with constant voltage/current limiting control circuitry.
2. AC Input Current Limiting
a. The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with AC input current limiting whereby
the maximum input current shall be limited to 125% of the full input current rating.
The rectifier/charger shall operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever the
critical load is powered from the UPS static bypass circuit such that the maximum
UPS input current will not exceed 125% of full load input current. In addition, the
rectifier/charger shall have a battery current limit, adjustable from 0 to 25% of the
full load input current.
3. Input Current Walk-In
a. The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the unit to
gradually assume the load over a 20-second time interval after input voltage is
applied. Walk-in time shall be field selectable for 5 through 20 seconds.
4. DC Filter
a. The rectifier/charger shall have a filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery.
Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter
shall be adequate to ensure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the
input requirements of the inverter. The inverter shall be able to operate from the
rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.
5. Automatic Rectifier Restart
a. Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and prior to a
UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the rectifier/charger shall automatically
restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.
6. Battery Recharge
a. In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be
capable of producing battery charging current sufficient to replace 95% of the battery
discharge power within ten (10) times the discharge time. After the battery is
recharged, the rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next
emergency operation.
7. Overvoltage Protection
27 11 26.13 - 10
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. There shall be DC over-voltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises to the preset limit, the UPS is to shut down automatically and initiate an uninterrupted load
transfer to the static bypass line.
B. Inverter
1. General
a. The term inverter shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls to convert DC
power from the rectifier/charger or battery to regulated AC power for supporting the
critical load. The inverter shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) in a
phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the
specified AC output.
2. Overload Capability
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads
exceeding 100%. The inverter is to provide 150% of full load for 1 minute and 125%
of full load for 10 minutes. A status indicator and audible alarm shall indicate
overload operation. The UPS shall transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity
is exceeded.
3. Fault Clearing and Current Limit
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its fullload rating for one minute. For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter
shall have electronic current-limiting protection to prevent damage to components.
The critical load will be transferred to the static bypass automatically and
uninterrupted. The inverter shall be self-protecting against any magnitude of
connected output overload. Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the
inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses.
4. Step Load Response
a. The output voltage shall be maintained to within ±4% with a 0-to-100% step load
change or a 100%-to-0 step load change. The output voltage shall recover to within
1% of nominal voltage within 1 cycle.
5. Voltage Distortion
a. For linear loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not be
greater than 1%. For 100% rated load of 3:1 crest factor nonlinear loads, the output
voltage total harmonic distortion shall not be greater than 4%. The output rating is
not to be derated in kVA nor kW due to the 100% nonlinear load with 3:1 crest
factor.
6. Phase Balance
a. Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each phase so that an unbalanced
loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the specified voltage
unbalance or phase displacement. With 100% load on one phase and 0% load on the
27 11 26.13 - 11
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
other 2 phases or 100% load on 2 phases and 0% load on the other phase, the voltage
balance is to be within 2% and the phase displacement is to be 120 degrees within ±1
degree.
7. Fuse Failure Protection
a. Power semiconductors in the inverter unit shall be fused with fast-acting fuses, so
that loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause cascading failures.
8. Inverter Shutdown
a. For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control
electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors. Simultaneously, the
static transfer switch shall be turned on to maintain continuous power to the critical
load.
9. Inverter DC Protection
a. The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels:
1) DC Overvoltage Shutdown
2) DC Undervoltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve), adjustable
3) DC Undervoltage Shutdown (End of Discharge)
10. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment
a. The inverter shall use a software control to adjust the output voltage from ±5% of the
nominal value.
11. Output Frequency
a. The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. The
oscillator shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output frequency to
±0.1% for steady state and transient conditions. Drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a
24-hour period. Total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift,
shall not exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
C. Display and Controls
1. Monitoring and Control
a. The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and
controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation. A graphical
display shall be used to show a single-line diagram of the UPS, and shall be provided
as part of the monitoring and controls sections of the UPS. All of the operator
controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet. The
monitoring functions such as metering, status and alarms shall be displayed on the
graphical LCD display. Additional features of the monitoring system shall include:
1) Alarm history with time and date stamp
2) Battery backed-up memory
3) Menu-driven display with pushbutton navigation
27 11 26.13 - 12
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
4) Real time clock (time and date)
2. Metering
a. The following parameters shall be displayed:
1) Active power
2) Apparent power
3) Battery charge/discharge current
4) Battery time left during battery operation
5) Battery voltage
6) Input AC current for each phase
7) Input AC voltage line-to-line
8) Input frequency
9) Output AC current for each phase
10) Output AC voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral for each phase
11) Output frequency
3. Alarm Messages
a. The following alarm messages shall be displayed:
1) Battery charger problem
2) Battery failed test
3) Bypass frequency out of range
4) Control error
5) Critical power supply failure
6) DC bus overvoltage
7) Excessive retransfers attempted
8) External shutdown (remote EPO activated)
9) Fan failure
10) Input power out of tolerance
11) Load transferred due to internal protection
12) Load transferred to bypass
13) Load transferred to bypass due to overload
14) Low battery shutdown
15) Low battery warning
16) Output overcurrent
27 11 26.13 - 13
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
17) Output overvoltage
18) Output undervoltage
19) Overload shutdown
20) Overtemperature shutdown
21) Overtemperature shutdown impending
22) Static switch failure
23) System output overloaded
24) UPS output not synchronized to bypass power
b. An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above alarm
conditions.
4. Status Messages
a. The following UPS status messages shall be displayed:
1) Load on maintenance bypass
2) Load on static bypass
3) Load on UPS
4) Normal operation
5) System shutdown
6) UPS on battery
5. Controls
a. UPS start-up, shutdown, and maintenance bypass operations shall be accomplished
through the front-panel pushbutton controls. Menu-driven user prompts shall be
provided to guide the operator through system operation without the use of additional
manuals. Pushbuttons shall be provided to display the status of the UPS and to test
and reset visual and audible alarms. A mimic screen shall be available on the LCD
screen to depict a single-line diagram of the UPS, with switch positions and power
flow.
6. On-Line Battery Test
a. The UPS shall be provided with a menu-driven On-Line Battery Test feature. The
test shall ensure the capability of the battery to supply power to the inverter while the
load is supplied power in the normal mode.
D. Static Transfer Switch
1. General
a. A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the
UPS. The static switch shall be a naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR-type)
27 11 26.13 - 14
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
device rated to conduct full load current continuously. The switch shall have an
overload rating to clear a 20-ampere load branch circuit breaker.
b. The static transfer switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control
circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm
conditions. This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to
an alternate bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein,
when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS
for maintenance.
2. Uninterrupted Transfer
a. The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch,
transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses
any of the following conditions:
1) Battery protection period expired
2) Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage
3) Inverter overload capacity exceeded
4) UPS fault condition
b. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the critical load to the
bypass source if any of the following conditions are present:
1) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
2) Bypass frequency out-of-limits
3) Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output
3. Uninterrupted Retransfer
a. Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the inverter output shall
be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control
logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of
the following conditions exists:
1) Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output
2) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
3) Overload conditions exist in excess of inverter full load rating
4) UPS fault condition present
E. Maintenance Bypass Switch
1. General
a. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be incorporated into the UPS
cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the bypass AC input power source,
bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch.
27 11 26.13 - 15
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. Isolation
a. All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that maintenance personnel do not
inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or terminals. A means to deenergize the static switch shall be provided when the UPS is in the maintenance
bypass mode of operation.
3. Maintenance Capability
a. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be
possible to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, battery, and static
transfer switch. When the application calls for the Maintenance Bypass Switch to be
bolted to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and
prelugged.
4. Battery Power Pack
a. The battery power pack shall include sealed, lead-acid valve regulated battery cells
housed in a separate cabinet that matches the UPS cabinet styling to form an integral
system line-up. Battery cells shall be mounted on slide-out trays for ease of
maintenance. A battery disconnect circuit breaker shall be included for isolation of
the battery pack from the UPS module. The UPS shall automatically be disconnected
from the battery when the battery reaches the minimum discharge voltage level.
Casters and leveling feet shall also be provided with the battery power pack cabinet
for ease of installation. When the application calls for the battery cabinet to be bolted
to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and
prelugged.
F. Accessories (Optional Equipment)
1. Optional External Maintenance Bypass Cabinet
a. A matching external maintenance bypass cabinet shall be provided to enable the UPS
module to be completely isolated from the electrical system while the critical load is
powered through the external maintenance bypass line. This optional cabinet shall
provide make-before-break operation for transfers to and from the external
maintenance bypass line with a single rotary switch.
b. The following components shall be standard: (1) input and output circuit breakers,
(2) single rotary switch with auxiliary contacts, (3) inter-cabinet wiring, (4) casters,
and leveling feet.
c. Optional voltage matching transformers and isolation transformers are to be offered.
d. This matching cabinet shall bolt to the side of the UPS module with a barrier shield
to separate the two cabinets. Only front access shall be required for installation and
service.
2. Intellislot ™ Relay Board
a. Five sets of isolated contacts shall be provided to indicate a change of status of the
UPS. Contacts are provided for:
27 11 26.13 - 16
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1) On UPS
2) On Battery
3) Low Battery
4) On Bypass
5) Summary
3. Intellislot ™ OC-485
a. Inteliislot 485 card. The IntelliSlot® 485 card family delivers Modbus and
proprietary protocol for monitoring and control of the UPS through a custom
interface and monitoring system or your Building Management System.
27 11 26.13 - 17
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
3.02
EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall perform a detailed inspection of the site prior to submitting any
technical data for approval.
B. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of installation are
compatible with the existing conditions and prepare a corresponding written report of their
findings.
C. LAWA shall be notified in writing if modifications of the existing building are required in
order to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be made only upon
receiving written approval from LAWA.
D. Submit Installation drawing for LAWA review and approval prior to any construction.
3.03
PREPARATION
3.04
INSTALLATION
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - TESTING
A. Site Test and inspections
1. Field Inspection – The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by
factory-trained field service personnel during the UPS startup.
a. Visual Inspection
1) Inspect equipment for signs of damage
2) Verify installation per drawings
3) Inspect cabinet for foreign objects
4) Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured
5) Inspect battery cases
6) Inspect battery for proper polarity
7) Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly
b. Mechanical Inspection:
1) Check all control wiring connections for tightness
2) Check all power wiring connections for tightness
3) Check all terminals screws, nuts and/or spade lungs for tightness
c. Electrical Inspection:
27 11 26.13 - 18
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1) Check all fuses for continuity
2) Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct
3) Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used.
4) Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s)
B. Non-Conforming Work
3.06
CLEANING
3.07
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Information regarding all equipment including model, nomenclature, serial number, function,
location, recommended preventative maintenance schedule, Quality Assurance Inspections
and other pertinent data will be stored in the CMMS database. Contractor shall include in
their Bid the cost for collecting and inputting this data for all cables, equipment and systems
provided by this Contract into this database.
3.08
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. All cables and patch cables shall have a permanent label attached at both ends.
B. The Contractor shall confirm specific labeling requirements with the Design Consultant prior
to cable installation or termination.
C. All indoor cable and patch cable labels shall be pre-printed using BRADY TLS 2200 printer
or equivalent and shall be placed loose on the patch cable near the connector end without heat
shrinking labels. Labels shall use a three line format with the origination patch panel and port
on the first line, the destination patch panel and port on the second line and the system or
other descriptive information on the third line.
3.09
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES - ACCEPTANCE
A. Acceptance
1. Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and
as-built documentation including data input of all installed cables in the LAWA
management system and successful performance of the UPS and cabling system for a
two-week period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of
the installation and subsequent inspection, LAWA shall be provided with a numbered
certificate from the Manufacturer registering the installation.
B. Maintenance
1. The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up,
27 11 26.13 - 19
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
maintenance, and repair of UPS and power equipment. The organization shall consist of
regional and local offices.
2. The manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national dispatch center to coordinate
field service personnel schedules. One toll-free number shall reach a qualified support
person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year. If emergency service is required,
response time shall be 20 minutes or less.
3. An automated procedure shall be in place to ensure that the manufacturer is dedicating
the appropriate technical support resources to match escalating customer needs.
C. Replacement Parts Stocking
1. Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure around-the-clock parts
availability throughout the country.
2. Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with
back-up available from national parts center and the manufacturing location. The national
parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24 hours/day, 7
days/week, and 365 days/year for immediate parts availability. Parts from the national
parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next available flight out and delivered
to the customer’s site within 24 hours.
D. UPS Maintenance Training
1. Maintenance training courses for customer employees shall be available by the UPS
manufacturer. The training is in addition to the basic operator training conducted as a part
of the system start-up.
2. The training course shall cover UPS theory, location of subassemblies, safety, battery
considerations and UPS operational procedures. The course shall include AC to DC
conversion and DC to AC inversion techniques as well as control, metering, and feedback
circuits to the Printed Circuit Board (PCB) level. Troubleshooting and fault isolation
using alarm information and internal self-diagnostics should be stressed.
E. Maintenance Contracts
1. A complete offering of preventive and full service maintenance contracts for both the
UPS system and battery system shall be available. An extended warranty and preventive
maintenance package shall be available. Warranty and preventive maintenance service
shall be performed by factory-trained service personnel.
END OF SECTION
27 11 26.13 - 20
4/1/12 Final
30 kVA UPS for MPOE Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 11 26.16
Communications Rack Mounted Uninterruptible Power Protection
System (20 kVA UPS) for Telecommunication Rooms
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a
continuous-duty three-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power system (UPS). The UPS shall
provide high-quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads. This specification
provides requirements for the following options:
1. Option #1:
Telecom Room UPS Requirement:
20 kVA, Electrical 280V
2. Option #2:
Telecom Room UPS Requirement:
20 kVA, Electrical 480V
B. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to
establish standards of performance, quality and construction. These model numbers are based
on equipment manufactured by Liebert. Equivalent products may be considered if adequate
information is submitted to the specifying engineer for approval beforehand.
C. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
1. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
2. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
3. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
5. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
6. Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
7. Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
8. Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
9. Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
10. Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
11. Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements
D. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
E. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
27 11 26.16 - 1
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Standards
1. The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current
revision of the following documents. Where a conflict arises between these documents and
statements made herein, the statements in this specification shall govern.
a. ASME
b. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1
c. FCC Part 15, Class A
d. IEC 1000-4-5
e. ISO 9001
f.
National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)
g. NEMA PE-1
h. OSHA
i.
UL Standard 1778
2. The UPS shall be UL listed per UL Standard 1778, and shall be CSA certified.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals with the proposal shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
System configuration with single-line diagrams.
Functional relationship of equipment including weights, dimensions, and heat dissipation.
Descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including deviations from these specifications.
Size and weight of shipping units to be handled by installing contractor.
Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections.
Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations.
B. Action Submittals
1. Submittals upon UPS delivery shall include a complete set of submittal drawings and one
(1) set of instruction manuals that shall include a functional description of the equipment
with block diagrams, safety precautions, instructions, step-by-step operating procedures
and routine maintenance guidelines, including illustrations.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
27 11 26.16 - 2
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
A. A minimum of twenty years’ experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of solid-state
UPS systems is required. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world
class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
B. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the system to assure
compliance with the specification.
1.07
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids Specification
requirements.
B. Under no circumstances shall the LAWA be required to prove that an item proposed for
substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor
submits to Engineer all evidence to support the contention that the item proposed for
substitution is equal to the specified item. The Owner’s decision as to the equality of
substitution shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that the Design Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services
as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes
by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and
accessories furnished, or if the Design Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any
changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Design
Consultant’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the
Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Submit manufacturers’ instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, operation, and installation of all products. Include any application conditions or
limitations of use stipulated by any product testing agency.
1.09
FIELD/SITE AND ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
A. The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage
or degradation of operating characteristics:
1. Operating Ambient Temperature
a. UPS Module: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C).
b. Battery: 77°F±9°F (25°C ±5°C).
2. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature
a. UPS Module: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C).
b. Battery: -4°F to 92°F (-20°C to 33°C)
3. Relative Humidity - 0 to 95%, non-condensing
4. Altitude
27 11 26.16 - 3
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. Operating: to 3300 ft. (1000 meters) above Mean Sea Level. Derated for higher
altitude applications.
b. Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft. (12,200 meters) above Mean Sea Level.
1. Audible Noise – Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation
shall not exceed 54 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPS.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS module against defects in materials and
workmanship for 12 months after initial start-up or 18 months after ship date, whichever
period expires first.
B. The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the end user.
27 11 26.16 - 4
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Voltage: Input/output voltage specifications of the 20 kVA UPS shall be:
1. Rectifier Input: 120/208 volts, three-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground.
2. Output: 120/208 volts, three-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground.
B. Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS shall be 20kVA/16kW at
0.8 lagging power factor.
2.02
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Battery Design Requirements for 20 kVA UPS:
1. Battery Cells: Sealed, lead-acid, valve-regulated.
2. Reserve Time: 18 minutes at 16kW full load, with ambient temperature of 25°C.
3. Recharge Time: to 95% capacity within ten (10) times discharge time
B. Modes of Operation – The UPS shall be designed to operate as on on-line, doubleconversion, reverse-transfer system in the following modes:
1. Normal – The Critical AC load is continuously supplied by the UPS inverter. The
rectifier/charger derives power from a utility AC source and supplies DC power to the
inverter while simultaneously float-charging the reserve battery.
2. Emergency – Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical AC load is supplied by the
inverter, which, without any switching, obtains power from the battery. There shall be no
interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC
source.
3. Recharge – Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter
and battery recharge loads.
4. Bypass – If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, or should the
inverter overload capacity be exceeded, the static transfer switch shall perform a reverse
transfer of the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption in power to
the critical AC load.
2.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AC Input to UPS
27 11 26.16 - 5
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: three-phase, 4-wire plus ground.
Voltage Range: +10%, -20% of nominal.
Frequency: Nominal frequency 5%.
Power Factor: Up to 0.99 lagging at nominal input voltage and full rated UPS output
load.
Inrush Current: 800% of full load current maximum.
Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
Input Current Walk-In: 20 seconds to full rated input current maximum. Field selectable
5 through 20 seconds.
Current Distortion: 4% reflected THD maximum at full load.
Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in IEC 1000-45.
B. AC Output, UPS Inverter
1. Voltage Configuration: three-phase, 4-wire plus ground.
2. Voltage Regulation:
a. ±1% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load for the combined
variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient
temperature, and load power factor.
b. ±2% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the combined
variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient
temperature, and load power factor.
3. Frequency: Nominal frequency ±0.1%.
4. Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 Hertz per second maximum. Field selectable from 0.1 to 1.0
Hz per second.
5. Phase Displacement:
a. ±0.5 degree for balanced load.
b. ±1.0 degrees for 100% unbalanced load.
6. Bypass Line Sync Range:
a. ±0.5 Hertz,
b. Field selectable ±0.5 to 5.0 Hz.
7. Voltage Distortion:
a. 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads.
b. <4% THD for 100% nonlinear loads (3:1 crest factor) without kVA/kW derating.
27 11 26.16 - 6
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
8. Load Power Factor Range: 0.7 lagging to 0.95 leading without derating.
9. Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
10. Overload Capability:
a. 125% for ten minutes (without bypass source).
b. 150% for one minute (without bypass source).
11. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: ±5% manual adjustment.
12. Voltage Transient Response:
a. 100% load step
b. Loss or return of AC input power
c. Manual transfer of 100% load
±4.0%.
±1.0%.
±3.0%.
13. Transient Recovery Time: to within 1% of output voltage within one cycle.
14. Voltage Unbalance: 100% unbalanced load
2.04
±1%.
Approved Manufacturer for Telecom Room UPS
A. Telecom Room: UPS, 208Volt Input (4 wire plus ground)
1. Provide (1) 20kVA/16kW 120/208V-input, 3-phase UPS, model Liebert NX
38SB020C0CHX. Include internal VRLA battery capacity rated to 18 minutes at full load
w/ disconnect facility for maintenance.
2. UPS shall be packaged in a single 24” wide cabinet with automatic continuous static
transfer switch and internal manual bypass.
3. Include seismic anchoring.
4. Include (1) OC-485 Webcard to interface w/ Sitelink system.
5. Connect 120/208V output to single wall-mounted panelboard.
6. Options for Telecom Rooms are:
a. OPTION #1
1) Provide (1) external VRLA battery cabinet providing for a total of (41) minutes
at 16kW load, model Liebert 38BP020RHX1BNR.
2) Include DC cables so that 27” battery cabinet can be directly bolted to right side
of UPS cabinet.
27 11 26.16 - 7
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
3) Include seismic anchoring.
b. OPTION #2
1) Provide (1) external maintenance bypass cabinet, model Liebert
38MB0200CC6AL.
2) Include interconnecting cables for bolting to left side of UPS.
3) Cabinet shall be 27” wide with single rotary switch interlocked for make-beforebreak manual transfers.
4) Include seismic anchoring.
B. Telecom Room UPS, 480Volt Input (3 wire plus ground)
1. Provide (1) 20kVA/16kW 480V-input, 120/208v output, 3-phase UPS. Model Liebert
NX 38SB020C0CHX.
2. Include internal VRLA battery capacity rated to 18 minutes at full load w/ disconnect
facility for maintenance.
3. UPS shall be packaged in a single 24” wide cabinet with automatic continuous static
transfer switch and internal manual bypass.
4. Include (1) OC-485 Webcard to interface w/ Sitelink system.
5.
Include (1) external maintenance bypass/transformer cabinet, model Liebert
38MB0200AC6DL.
6. Include interconnecting cables for bolting to left side of UPS.
7. Cabinet shall be 27” wide with 480V input isolation transformer and single rotary switch
interlocked for making before-break manual transfers.
8. Include seismic anchoring for both cabinets.
9. Connect 120/208V UPS output to single wall mounted panelboard.
10. Option for Telecom Room:
a. Option 1:
1) Provide (1) external VRLA battery cabinet providing for a total of (41) minutes
at 16kW load, model Liebert 38BP020RHX1BNR.
2) Include DC cables so that 27” battery cabinet can be directly bolted to right side
of UPS cabinet.
3) Include seismic anchoring.
Note: All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to establish
standards of performance, quality and construction. These model numbers are based on equipment
27 11 26.16 - 8
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
manufactured by Liebert. Equivalent products may be considered if adequate information is submitted to
the specifying engineer for approval beforehand.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Materials
1. All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade and free from
all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory
testing.
2. The maximum working voltage, current, and di/dt of all solid-state power components
and electronic devices shall not exceed 75% of the ratings established by their
manufacturer. The operating temperature of solid-state component sub-assembly shall not
be greater than 75% of their ratings. Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and
be operated at no more than 95% of their voltage rating at the maximum rectifier
charging voltage.
B. Wiring
1. Wiring practices, materials and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of
the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). All bolted connections of bus bars, lugs, and
cables shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code and other
applicable standards. All electrical power connections are to be torqued to the required
value and marked with a visual indicator.
2. Provision shall be made for power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of the
UPS cabinet.
C. Construction and Mounting
1. The UPS unit, comprised of an input circuit breaker, rectifier/charger, inverter, static
transfer switch and maintenance bypass switch, shall be housed in a single free-standing
NEMA type 1 enclosure. Cabinet doors/covers shall require a tool for gaining access.
Casters and stops shall be provided for ease of installation. Front access only shall be
required for expedient servicing and adjustments. The UPS cabinet shall be structurally
adequate and have provisions for hoisting, jacking, and forklift handling.
2. The UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed, and painted with the manufacturer’s standard
color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Printed circuit
assemblies shall be plug connections. Like assemblies and like components shall be
interchangeable.
D. Cooling
1. Cooling of the UPS shall be by forced air. Low-velocity fans shall be used to minimize
audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPS output. There shall be
redundant fans.
27 11 26.16 - 9
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
2. The thermal design, along with all thermal and ambient sensors, shall be coordinated with
the protective devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures are
exceeded.
E. Grounding
1. The AC output neutral shall be electrically isolated from the UPS chassis. The UPS
chassis shall have an equipment ground terminal. Provisions for local bonding shall be
provided.
2.06
COMPONENTS
A. Rectifier/Charger
1. General
a. The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls
necessary to convert incoming AC power to regulated DC power for input to the
inverter and for battery charging. The rectifier/charger shall be a solid-state
SCR/IGBT type with constant voltage/current limiting control circuitry.
2. AC Input Current Limiting
a. The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with AC input current limiting whereby
the maximum input current shall be limited to 125% of the full input current rating.
The rectifier/charger shall operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever the
critical load is powered from the UPS static bypass circuit such that the maximum
UPS input current will not exceed 125% of full load input current. In addition, the
rectifier/charger shall have a battery current limit, adjustable from 0 to 25% of the
full load input current.
3. Input Current Walk-In
a. The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the unit to
gradually assume the load over a 20-second time interval after input voltage is
applied. Walk-in time shall be field selectable for 5 through 20 seconds.
4. DC Filter
a. The rectifier/charger shall have a filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery.
Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter
shall be adequate to ensure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the
input requirements of the inverter. The inverter shall be able to operate from the
rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.
5. Automatic Rectifier Restart
27 11 26.16 - 10
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and prior to a
UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the rectifier/charger shall automatically
restart, walk-in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.
6. Battery Recharge
a. In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be
capable of producing battery charging current sufficient to replace 95% of the battery
discharge power within ten (10) times the discharge time. After the battery is
recharged, the rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next
emergency operation.
7. Overvoltage Protection
a. There shall be DC over-voltage protection so that if the DC voltage rises to the preset limit, the UPS is to shut down automatically and initiate an uninterrupted load
transfer to the static bypass line.
B. Inverter
1. General
a. The term inverter shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls to convert DC
power from the rectifier/charger or battery to regulated AC power for supporting the
critical load. The inverter shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) in a
phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the
specified AC output.
2. Overload Capability
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads
exceeding 100%. The inverter is to provide 150% of full load for 1 minute and 125%
of full load for 10 minutes. A status indicator and audible alarm shall indicate
overload operation. The UPS shall transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity
is exceeded.
3. Fault Clearing and Current Limit
a. The inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its fullload rating for one minute. For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter
shall have electronic current-limiting protection to prevent damage to components.
The critical load will be transferred to the static bypass automatically and
uninterrupted. The inverter shall be self-protecting against any magnitude of
connected output overload. Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the
inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses.
4. Step Load Response
27 11 26.16 - 11
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. The output voltage shall be maintained to within ±4% with a 0-to-100% step load
change or a 100%-to-0 step load change. The output voltage shall recover to within
1% of nominal voltage within 1 cycle.
5. Voltage Distortion
a. For linear loads, the output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not be
greater than 1%. For 100% rated load of 3:1 crest factor nonlinear loads, the output
voltage total harmonic distortion shall not be greater than 4%. The output rating is
not to be derated in kVA nor kW due to the 100% nonlinear load with 3:1 crest
factor.
6. Phase Balance
a. Electronic controls shall be provided to regulate each phase so that an unbalanced
loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the specified voltage
unbalance or phase displacement. With 100% load on one phase and 0% load on the
other 2 phases or 100% load on 2 phases and 0% load on the other phase, the voltage
balance is to be within 2% and the phase displacement is to be 120 degrees within ±1
degree.
7. Fuse Failure Protection
a. Power semiconductors in the inverter unit shall be fused with fast-acting fuses, so
that loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause cascading failures.
8. Inverter Shutdown
a. For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control
electronics shall instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors. Simultaneously, the
static transfer switch shall be turned on to maintain continuous power to the critical
load.
9. Inverter DC Protection
a. The inverter shall be protected by the following disconnect levels:
1) DC Overvoltage Shutdown
2) DC Undervoltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve), adjustable
3) DC Undervoltage Shutdown (End of Discharge)
10. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment
a. The inverter shall use a software control to adjust the output voltage from ±5% of the
nominal value.
11. Output Frequency
a. The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. The
oscillator shall be temperature compensated and hold the inverter output frequency to
±0.1% for steady state and transient conditions. Drift shall not exceed 0.1% during a
27 11 26.16 - 12
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
24-hour period. Total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift,
shall not exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
C. Display and Controls
1. Monitoring and Control
a. The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and
controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation. A graphical
display shall be used to show a single-line diagram of the UPS, and shall be provided
as part of the monitoring and controls sections of the UPS. All of the operator
controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet. The
monitoring functions such as metering, status and alarms shall be displayed on the
graphical LCD display. Additional features of the monitoring system shall include:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Alarm history with time and date stamp
Battery backed-up memory
Menu-driven display with pushbutton navigation
Real time clock (time and date)
2. Metering
a. The following parameters shall be displayed:
1) Active power
2) Apparent power
3) Battery charge/discharge current
4) Battery time left during battery operation
5) Battery voltage
6) Input AC current for each phase
7) Input AC voltage line-to-line
8) Input frequency
9) Output AC current for each phase
10) Output AC voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral for each phase
11) Output frequency
3. Alarm Messages
a. The following alarm messages shall be displayed:
1) Battery charger problem
2) Battery failed test
3) Bypass frequency out of range
27 11 26.16 - 13
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
4) Control error
5) Critical power supply failure
6) DC bus overvoltage
7) Excessive retransfers attempted
8) External shutdown (remote EPO activated)
9) Fan failure
10) Input power out of tolerance
11) Load transferred due to internal protection
12) Load transferred to bypass
13) Load transferred to bypass due to overload
14) Low battery shutdown
15) Low battery warning
16) Output overcurrent
17) Output overvoltage
18) Output undervoltage
19) Overload shutdown
20) Overtemperature shutdown
21) Overtemperature shutdown impending
22) Static switch failure
23) System output overloaded
24) UPS output not synchronized to bypass power
b. An audible alarm shall be provided and activated by any of the above alarm
conditions.
4. Status Messages
a. The following UPS status messages shall be displayed:
1) Load on maintenance bypass
2) Load on static bypass
3) Load on UPS
4) Normal operation
5) System shutdown
6) UPS on battery
27 11 26.16 - 14
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
5. Controls
a. UPS start-up, shutdown, and maintenance bypass operations shall be accomplished
through the front-panel pushbutton controls. Menu-driven user prompts shall be
provided to guide the operator through system operation without the use of additional
manuals. Pushbuttons shall be provided to display the status of the UPS and to test
and reset visual and audible alarms. A mimic screen shall be available on the LCD
screen to depict a single-line diagram of the UPS, with switch positions and power
flow.
6. On-Line Battery Test
a. The UPS shall be provided with a menu-driven On-Line Battery Test feature. The
test shall ensure the capability of the battery to supply power to the inverter while the
load is supplied power in the normal mode.
D. Static Transfer Switch
1. General
a. A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the
UPS. The static switch shall be a naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR-type)
device rated to conduct full load current continuously. The switch shall have an
overload rating to clear a 20-ampere load branch circuit breaker.
b. The static transfer switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control
circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm
conditions. This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to
an alternate bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein,
when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS
for maintenance.
2. Uninterrupted Transfer
a. The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch,
transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses
any of the following conditions:
1) Battery protection period expired
2) Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage
3) Inverter overload capacity exceeded
4) UPS fault condition
b. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the critical load to the
bypass source if any of the following conditions are present:
1) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
2) Bypass frequency out-of-limits
27 11 26.16 - 15
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
3) Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output
3. Uninterrupted Retransfer
a. Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the inverter output shall
be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control
logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of
the following conditions exists:
1) Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output
2) Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits
3) Overload conditions exist in excess of inverter full load rating
4) UPS fault condition present
E. Maintenance Bypass Switch
1. General
a. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be incorporated into the UPS
cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the bypass AC input power source,
bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch.
2. Isolation
a. All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that maintenance personnel do not
inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or terminals. A means to deenergize the static switch shall be provided when the UPS is in the maintenance
bypass mode of operation.
3. Maintenance Capability
a. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be
possible to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, battery, and static
transfer switch. When the application calls for the Maintenance Bypass Switch to be
bolted to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and
prelugged.
4. Battery Power Pack
a. The battery power pack shall include sealed, lead-acid valve regulated battery cells
housed in a separate cabinet that matches the UPS cabinet styling to form an integral
system line-up. Battery cells shall be mounted on slide-out trays for ease of
maintenance. A battery disconnect circuit breaker shall be included for isolation of
the battery pack from the UPS module. The UPS shall automatically be disconnected
from the battery when the battery reaches the minimum discharge voltage level.
Casters and leveling feet shall also be provided with the battery power pack cabinet
for ease of installation. When the application calls for the battery cabinet to be bolted
to the UPS cabinet, the interconnecting cables are to be provided, precut and
prelugged.
27 11 26.16 - 16
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
F. Accessories (Optional Equipment)
1. Optional External Maintenance Bypass Cabinet
a. A matching external maintenance bypass cabinet shall be provided to enable the UPS
module to be completely isolated from the electrical system while the critical load is
powered through the external maintenance bypass line. This optional cabinet shall
provide make-before-break operation for transfers to and from the external
maintenance bypass line with a single rotary switch.
b. The following components shall be standard: (1) input and output circuit breakers,
(2) single rotary switch with auxiliary contacts, (3) inter-cabinet wiring, (4) casters,
and leveling feet.
c. Optional voltage matching transformers and isolation transformers are to be offered.
d. This matching cabinet shall bolt to the side of the UPS module with a barrier shield
to separate the two cabinets. Only front access shall be required for installation and
service.
2. Intellislot ™ Relay Board
a. Five sets of isolated contacts shall be provided to indicate a change of status of the
UPS. Contacts are provided for:
1) On UPS
2) On Battery
3) Low Battery
4) On Bypass
5) Summary
3. Intellislot ™ OC-485
a. Inteliislot 485 card. The IntelliSlot® 485 card family delivers Modbus and
proprietary protocol for monitoring and control of the UPS through a custom
interface and monitoring system or your Building Management System.
27 11 26.16 - 17
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
3.02
EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall perform a detailed inspection of the site prior to submitting any
technical data for approval.
B. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of installation are
compatible with the existing conditions and prepare a corresponding written report of their
findings.
C. LAWA shall be notified in writing if modifications of the existing building are required in
order to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be made only upon
receiving written approval from LAWA.
D. Submit Installation drawing for LAWA review and approval prior to any construction.
3.03
PREPARATION
3.04
INSTALLATION
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - TESTING
A. Site Test and inspections
1. Field Inspection – The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by
factory-trained field service personnel during the UPS startup.
a. Visual Inspection
1) Inspect equipment for signs of damage
2) Verify installation per drawings
3) Inspect cabinet for foreign objects
4) Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured
5) Inspect battery cases
6) Inspect battery for proper polarity
7) Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly
b. Mechanical Inspection:
1) Check all control wiring connections for tightness
2) Check all power wiring connections for tightness
3) Check all terminals screws, nuts and/or spade lungs for tightness
c. Electrical Inspection:
27 11 26.16 - 18
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
1) Check all fuses for continuity
2) Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct
3) Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used.
4) Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s)
B. Non-Conforming Work
3.06
CLEANING
3.07
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Information regarding all equipment including model, nomenclature, serial number, function,
location, recommended preventative maintenance schedule, Quality Assurance Inspections
and other pertinent data will be stored in the CMMS database. Contractor shall include in
their Bid the cost for collecting and inputting this data for all cables, equipment and systems
provided by this Contract into this database.
3.08
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. All cables and patch cables shall have a permanent label attached at both ends.
B. The Contractor shall confirm specific labeling requirements with the Design Consultant prior
to cable installation or termination.
C. All indoor cable and patch cable labels shall be pre-printed using BRADY TLS 2200 printer
or equivalent and shall be placed loose on the patch cable near the connector end without heat
shrinking labels. Labels shall use a three line format with the origination patch panel and port
on the first line, the destination patch panel and port on the second line and the system or
other descriptive information on the third line.
3.09
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Acceptance
1. Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and
as-built documentation including data input of all installed cables in the LAWA
management system and successful performance of the UPS and cabling system for a
two-week period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of
the installation and subsequent inspection, LAWA shall be provided with a numbered
certificate from the Manufacturer registering the installation.
B. Maintenance
1. The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization,
consisting of factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up,
27 11 26.16 - 19
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
maintenance, and repair of UPS and power equipment. The organization shall consist of
regional and local offices.
2. The manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national dispatch center to coordinate
field service personnel schedules. One toll-free number shall reach a qualified support
person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year. If emergency service is required,
response time shall be 20 minutes or less.
3. An automated procedure shall be in place to ensure that the manufacturer is dedicating
the appropriate technical support resources to match escalating customer needs.
C. Replacement Parts Stocking
1. Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure around-the-clock parts
availability throughout the country.
2. Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with
back-up available from national parts center and the manufacturing location. The national
parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24 hours/day, 7
days/week, and 365 days/year for immediate parts availability. Parts from the national
parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next available flight out and delivered
to the customer’s site within 24 hours.
D. UPS Maintenance Training
1. Maintenance training courses for customer employees shall be available by the UPS
manufacturer. The training is in addition to the basic operator training conducted as a part
of the system start-up.
2. The training course shall cover UPS theory, location of subassemblies, safety, battery
considerations and UPS operational procedures. The course shall include AC to DC
conversion and DC to AC inversion techniques as well as control, metering, and feedback
circuits to the Printed Circuit Board (PCB) level. Troubleshooting and fault isolation
using alarm information and internal self-diagnostics should be stressed.
E. Maintenance Contracts
1. A complete offering of preventive and full service maintenance contracts for both the
UPS system and battery system shall be available. An extended warranty and preventive
maintenance package shall be available. Warranty and preventive maintenance service
shall be performed by factory-trained service personnel.
END OF SECTION
27 11 26.16 - 20
4/1/12 Final
20 kVA UPS for Telecom Rooms
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 17 00 – BROADBAND TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. General
1. Scope of Work: The Contractor shall provide a new broadband television
distribution system to support the distribution of entertainment and informational
television throughout the North and South Concourses. The signal source for this
system may originate from a satellite television provider or cable television
company and is not considered part of this work.
a. The forward bandpass for this system shall be 50 MHz to 860MHz. Reverse
bandpass, shall be from 5 MHz to 45 MHz. The system shall deliver a level
of +20dBmV flat +/- 1dB to all distribution outputs with a flat Radio
Frequency (RF) signal applied to the system input.
b. Coordination with LAWA
2. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
B. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals
Section 27 05 00 - Basic Telecommunications Requirements
C. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
D. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
27 17 00 - 1
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Codes Standards and References are specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic
Telecommunications Requirements.
B. Applicable Codes
C. Industry Standards
1. Telecommunications Industries Association / Electronics Industries Alliance
(EIA/TIA)
2. American National Standards Institute - ANSI
3. Building Industry Consulting Services International - BISCI
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE
5. National Electrical Code (NEC)
6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
7. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146; Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard
b. CFR 47 Part 76; Cable Television Service
8. Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
a. EIA 403-A-90; Precision Coaxial Connectors for CATV Applications
9. National Cable Television Association (NCTA)
a. NCTA-02; NCTA Recommended Practices for Measurements on Cable
Television Systems.
10. State and Local Codes
11. Seismic Codes
12. Others
D. Aviation Specific Related References
E. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards,
publications, codes, regulations or requirements of regulatory agencies referenced in
this section.
27 17 00 - 2
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. As specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with that of other Divisions as required to ensure
that the entire work of this project will be carried out in an orderly, complete and
coordinated fashion.
C. The Contractor is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination to
any contractor or subcontractor who is performing work to accommodate the work of
this section and minimize interferences.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and with
Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications Requirements. In addition to the
requirements found in the Sections cited, provide the following:
1
Coordinate with the Systems Manager.
2. System Description and Analysis: Complete system descriptions, analysis and
calculations used in sizing the equipment required by these specifications.
Descriptions and calculations shall show how the equipment will operate as a
system to meet the performance requirements of this specification. The submittal
shall include the following:
a. A complete system headend and distribution system diagram shall be
submitted indicating calculated forward levels delivered at each directional
tap port at 50 and 860 MHz and required reverse path input at each
directional tap for full output to the headend prior to system installation.
b. Calculations of cable loss between in-line amplifiers and each of the cable
taps and/or splitters at the lowest frequency and highest frequency.
c. Calculations of cable loss between taps and/or splitters at the lowest
frequency and highest frequency.
d. Calculated values for each of the taps or splitters – forward direction:
1) Show calculated line level at the tap or splitter in dBmV.
2) Show each of the tap or splitter port values in dBmV.
3) Show the input level to each television receiver/equipment input in
dBmV.
3. Calculated values for each of the taps and splitters – reverse direction:
27 17 00 - 3
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. Headend reverse path output at 5 mHz and 45 mHz for highest and lowest
loss paths to outlets in the system.
4. Submittal quantities: The Contractor shall submit 10 copies of all required
submittals.
5. Product Data Submittals:
a. Indicate the UL listing and NEC insulation type for each type of cable
installed as part of the system.
b. Amplification equipment.
c. Power supplies.
d. Cable, connectors, taps, splitters, pads and filters.
e. Any other equipment installed as part of the system.
6. Shop Drawings:
a. Prepare and submit coordination drawings detailing raceways and system
components and materials in relationship with other building systems and
components.
b. System Block Diagram; The Contractor shall provide a red-lined block
diagram for the installed system indicating areas where the actual installed
configuration differs from the design drawings.
c. Interconnection with the electrical system, block diagrams and wiring
diagrams shall be indicated.
7. Running As-Built documents: The Contractor shall maintain real-time running
as-built documentation for the as installed system. Electronic as-Built
information shall be submitted quarterly to LAWA and the Engineer for review.
8. Detail Drawings: submit detailed drawings for:
a. Wall-mounted facilities on terminal backboards.
b. Equipment rack and cabinet elevations for all termination locations.
9. Cable and equipment labeling schemes and sample labels as coordinated with
LAWA.
B. Contractor shall submit Contractor qualifications.
C. Review of product data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for
deviations from the drawings or specifications, unless the Contractor has, in writing,
27 17 00 - 4
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
called attention to such deviations at the time of submission and secured written
approval.
D. Product Data Manuals: upon completion of the project, submit final Product Data
Manuals that include:
1. A complete as-installed equipment list of all components installed with
manufacturers' names and model numbers.
2. A complete set of product data sheets for all products installed. Product data
sheets shall be clearly marked, identifying the specific items installed.
3. This submittal shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format.
4. Submit ten (10) identical sets of Product Data Manuals with electronic copies of
circuit schedule spreadsheets in MS Excel format.
E. Record Drawings
1. As-Built documents are to include updating and revising contract documents to
record actual locations (as-installed) of all equipment, pull boxes, devices,
raceways, cabling, outlets, communications rooms and all Premise Distribution
cable infrastructure components.
2. Coordinate As-Build documents with the Systems Manager
3. As-Built drawings shall include:
a. Complete floor plans indicating placement and routing of as-installed
raceways, outlet locations and types with labels and cabling facilities
installed under this scope of work.
b. A complete riser diagram, showing as-installed originations, destinations,
and equipment. Include circuit numbers, equipment identification and
layouts, and other designations.
c. Equipment rack/cabinet and wallboard as-installed elevation drawings shall
be provided for each communication room and equipment location.
d. Wiring terminal point-to-point color-coded wiring diagrams. Drawings shall
show each item of equipment, locations, all wiring, and all connections.
Wiring color code shall be as described by the specifications. If no color
code is specifically mentioned, the color code shall be as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer.
F. Test Reports: The Contractor as coordinated with and in conjunction with the
Systems manager shall be responsible for recording all test data. Copies of all test
results are to be submitted to LAWA for review as part of final acceptance and
subsequently submitted to LAWA for their records.
27 17 00 - 5
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. Submit ten (10) printed copies of a final test reports and communication circuit
schedules (typed and bound) and ten (10) electronic copies (CD media), which
confirms that the cabling infrastructure has been tested, labeled and documented.
2. Submit test reports in both printed format and an electronic format to assist the
Engineer and LAWA in the final review process. Printed test reports shall be
provided in 8-1/2 x 11-inch three ring binders. Electronic copies of the test
reports shall be either in a file format that can be imported or viewed using
standard office software or in a file format used by the testing software, provided
the testing software program is also submitted with the raw testing files.
3. Refer to the testing section of the Specifications for details on the data that shall
be included in the test reports.
4. Submit ten (10) printed copies of the test reports and ten (10) electronic copies of
the test reports with the testing software program on CD-ROM.
G. The Contractor shall provide an as-built list of the connections that with the schedule
of outlets will enable LAWA to trace the circuit continuity of each outlet.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and
size. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for
successful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distribution
systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools
and equipment.
2. A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor's bid. In
addition to those requirements, the Contractor shall submit the following
information.
a. A list of (3) three completed projects over the past 5 years of similar type and
size with contact names and telephone numbers for each.
b. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of
fiber and metallic cable systems on this project.
c. A technical resume of experience for the Contractor's Engineer and on-site
installation foreman who will be assigned to this project.
d. Refer to specification section 27 13 33 Communications Systems Interfaces –
Legacy Systems for additional requirements for the coordination
requirements between the contractor and the System Manager.
e. Similar documentation for any subcontractor who will assist the Contractor
in performance of this Work.
f. Reference Section 27 0500 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements for
additional Contractor qualification requirements.
27 17 00 - 6
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications
systems industry installation practices.
B. Refer to specifications 27 0500 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements, for
quality assurance requirements.
C. Test Equipment: The Contractor executing this work shall utilize the necessary
equipment and tooling to properly install the system in accordance with
recommendations set forth by the manufacturers of each item of system equipment.
Calibration reports for test equipment shall be available to the Owner for review.
1. A signal level meter capable of measuring levels between 5 and 860
megahertz.
2. A flat noise generator or sweep/marker generator capable of providing a
calibrated output between 5 and 860 megahertz.
3. An oscilloscope with a suitable RF detector for use in sweep testing system
response.
4. A return loss bridge and variable termination for on-site cable sweep testing
prior to installation.
5. Composite test sets, simul-sweep equipment and other test systems capable
of providing the required functions shall be considered equivalent to the
equipment specified.
D. Materials and Equipment: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under
the ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions
encountered at the installed location. The equipment shall meet the following
environmental requirements.
1. Exterior Environments:
a. Minus 30 degrees to 130 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 100 percent relative
humidity, condensing.
b. Conditions specified in UL 294 for outdoor use equipment.
E. Standard products: Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of CATV products and shall be
the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least 1 year prior to
bid opening.
F. Equipment shall be new and shall be UL approved.
G. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes
equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.
27 17 00 - 7
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.08
FIELD - SITE CONDITIONS
A. The locations of telecommunications devices, equipment and raceways are shown
diagrammatically on the drawings. Exact locations of items of work shall be field
coordinated prior to installation.
B. Provide site inspection to verify areas of work, conditions, products to match existing
and conflicts between contract documentation and site conditions. Bring conflicts to
LAWA’s attention for resolution.
C. Verify locations of pull and junction boxes prior to rough in.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty for products and work provided under this
Section as specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications Requirements.
27 17 00 - 8
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be new and unused.
B. The System shall include all equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other
facilities necessary for a fully functional system.
C. The Contractor shall provide all components, equipment, cabling, connectors,
adaptors, terminators, parts, accessories and associated quantities required for
complete installations and according to the manufacturer’s installation specifications.
All components may not be specified herein.
D. The Contractor shall supply all cabling, connectors, adapters, terminators, and
appurtenances necessary to interconnect all broadband equipment including
equipment located in the equipment rooms.
E. Equipment List:
1. Optical Transmitter: Harmonic HLT-7806R-F7-AS-AC-7L
2. Optical Amplifier: Harmonic HOA-8230-8-AS-A-C-EDFA
3. Dividing Network: Harmonic HLS-8016 1 x 16
4. Optical Fiber Node: ATX Networks Model QFMN Bi-Directional Optical Node
26VAC Transformer - 50VA
5. Optical PAD: SC/APC male to SC/APC female
6.
PAD: 8dB
7. SC/APC jumpers
8. Passive Devices: 16-Way Splitter 5-1000 Mhz:
9. Tamper proof terminators with tool: Regal RLT75WT
10. Coaxial cables shall be extended between broadband outlets located as indicated
on the drawings and passive taps in each telecommunications room (TR). Design
Selection: Belden 9116P or Approved equal
F. Spares:
1. Provide quantities as listed:
27 17 00 - 9
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
a. Optical Transmitter: Harmonic HLT-7806R-F7-AS-AC-7L, quantity. one (1)
b. Optical Amplifier: Harmonic HOA-8230-8-AS-A-C-EDFA, quantity. one (1)
c. Optical Fiber Node: ATX Networks Model QFMN Bi-Directional Optical
Node 26VAC Transformer - 50VA, quantity two (2)
d. 4 and 16 way splitters, quantity four (4) each
e. Tamper proof terminator, quantity one (1) bag
f.
Connectors of each type, quantity five (5) of each
g. Crimping tool, quantity one (1) of each cable type
G. Equipment Specified Elsewhere
1. General: Refer to 27-05 00 – Basic Telecommunications and 27 11 00 Equipment
Room Build-Out for requirements pertaining to:
a. Fiber Optic and Copper Backbone Cables
b. Fiber Optic Connectors
c. Fiber Optic and Copper Backbone Termination Equipment
d. Fiber Optic Patchcords
e. Fiber Optic and Copper Horizontal Cables
f. Fiber Optic Patch Panels
g. Copper Station Outlets
h. Copper Termination Facilities
i. Cable Trays
j. Cable Ladder Racks
k. Equipment Enclosures and Relay Racks
l. Innerduct
m. Communications Room Accessories
n. Communications Pathways
o. Communications Grounding
27 17 00 - 10
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed
in the Specification.
B. System installation and construction methods shall conform to the requirements of
applicable State and Local codes.
C. System installation and construction methods shall conform to the requirements of
the Federal Communications Commission.
D. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment,
and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 70,
ANSI-C2 and as shown, and shall furnish all cables, connectors, terminators,
interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable
system.
E. Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges
from adversely affecting system operation.
F. Rack mounted equipment: as a general practice, Contractor shall run power cables,
control cables, and high level cables on the left side of an equipment rack as viewed
from the rear.
1. Contractor shall run other cables on the right side of an equipment rack, as
viewed from the rear.
2. For equipment mounted in drawers or on slides, provide the interconnecting
cables with a service loop of not less than three feet and ensure that the cable is
long enough to allow full extension of drawer or slide.
G. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted
as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as
necessary.
I.
Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful
completion of the Project.
J.
If deviations from the drawings are required, they shall require approval by LAWA
prior to placement of the affected work.
K. The locations of raceways, stub ups, outlets, panels, equipment racks and cabinets and
other related products as indicated on the drawings are diagrammatic in location.
27 17 00 - 11
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
Contractor should have precise and definite locations accepted by LAWA before
proceeding with the installation.
3.02
EXAMINATION
3.03
CABLE INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. Cable installation: Contractor shall install all cables required for fully functional
system.
B. Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended layout prior to
beginning the cable pulling.
C. If deviations from the drawings are required they shall be approved by the Project
Manager prior to placement of the affected cables.
D. Contractor shall not install any cable with a bend radius less than that recommended
by the cable manufacturer.
E. Contractor shall monitor pull tension continuously during installation and shall not
exceed manufacturers recommended maximum pull tension.
1. A cable lubricant specifically manufactured for cable pulling lubrication
purposes and compatible with the cable sheathing material may be used on cables
pulled in conduits or ducts to meet pull tension requirements.
a. Petroleum grease shall not be used as a cable lubricant.
F. Contractor shall mark cables at each end, regardless of length, with permanent, nonhandwritten number or letter cable markers within six inches of both ends.
1. There shall be no unmarked cables in the system.
G. Contractor shall test cable with Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) as required under
Article “Testing.”
H. Contractor shall then install active and passive line equipment including wall outlets.
I.
Contractor shall perform forward and reverse alignment of the system.
J.
A portion of the BTDS wiring installed within the building will be installed above
ceilings within cable tray in areas used for circulation of environmental air. Cables
installed within these areas shall be rated for use in such plenum locations and shall
bear the CMP marking
K. Contractor shall not install more cables in a conduit than shown unless approved in
writing by LAWA.
27 17 00 - 12
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
1. Conduit systems shall not exceed 40 percent cable fill. The Contractor shall
provide larger conduit or additional conduit should planned cable fill exceed 40
percent.
L. Contractor shall plan cable pulls so that the maximum number of cables required in
the conduit is pulled simultaneously.
M. Restraints shall be provided on each backboard associated with cable terminations
that meet industry standards for cable restraint hardware. Provide sufficient quantities
to assure cables routed on backboards are restrained at periodic intervals.
N. All fiber optic cables shall include a thirty (30) foot service loop located on both
ends, unless otherwise noted. Service loops entering from the cable tray or above
grade conduits shall be neatly organized and secured in the cable ladder in the
originating and destination Equipment Rooms. Service loops for cables entering a
Equipment Room from the depressed slab shall be neatly coiled and secured in the
depressed slab area in each Equipment Room. Shop drawings shall indicate all
locations where services loops will be provided.
O. All optical fiber terminations are to be made by personnel trained and certified by the
fiber manufacturer. All connectors shall be installed utilizing the appropriate
certified tool kit and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
P. Fiber optic splices are not allowed except where specifically noted on the drawings
and where pre-terminated pigtails are used for fiber terminations. If field conditions
are discovered that require additional splices, submit a request in writing to LAWA
and obtain approval prior to performing the splicing.
Q. All fiber optic splices shall be made by fusing splicing and shall be performed in the
field by a qualified splicer. Provide heat shrink protection for all fiber optic splices
and store within splice trays. Mechanical splices are not allowed.
R. The maximum optical attenuation for fusion splicing shall not exceed 0.15 dB per the
TIA/EIA-568C Standards.
S. Contractor shall ensure that all cable reel tests have been performed and that the
cable has passed all pre-installation tests.
3.04
BUILDING RACEWAY SYSTEM
A. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the drawings. Ensure that adequate
conduit facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and
conduits are shown on the drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be
responsible for additional raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system.
B. Refer to specification section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications for specific
requirements.
27 17 00 - 13
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.05
GROUNDING
A. Provide grounding installation as specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic
Telecommunications for specific requirements.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding busbars and ground wire to
provide a single common grounding point in each telecommunication space for
connection of telecommunication equipment and components to the Building Ground
Reference.
C. Grounding shall meet the requirements and practices of applicable authorities or
codes. In addition, telecommunications grounding shall conform with the ANSI: JSTD-607-A
D. Contractor shall ground and bond all telecommunications conduits, cable ladder,
equipment racks and cabinets and other telecommunications components requiring
grounding to the Telecommunication Ground Bars (TGBs) within the
Telecommunications Spaces.
E. Coordinate with power trades to extend insulated ground cable from the TGB to the
Main Building Ground Reference.
3.06
LABELING
A. Coordinate all labeling with the Systems Manager
B. Specific labeling conventions for all cabling systems, equipment and termination
facilities shall as directed by and coordinated with LAWA IT. All communication
conduits, cable jacket ends, voice/data outlets, termination punch down blocks, ports
and patch panels, shall be labeled and identified.
D. Label each face plate and outlet and with permanent self-adhesive label with
minimum 3/16-inch high characters.
E. Label each Horizontal cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8inch high characters, in the following locations:
1. Inside receptacle box at the work area.
2. Behind the communication room patch panel and splitters.
F. Use labels on face of patch panels, dividing panels and splitters.
G. Labels shall be machine-printed, Brady or equal. Hand-lettered labels shall not be
acceptable.
27 17 00 - 14
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
H. All racks, cabinets, enclosures and boxes installed as part of this Section’s scope of
work shall be permanently labeled with engraved black on white laminate matching
identification scheme depicted in the Project drawings and defined in this section.
I.
BTDS components to be labeled shall include:
1. BTDS conduit labeling: Each BTDS conduit entering a communication facility
shall be permanently labeled with adhesive labels or tie on tags.
2. Cabling shall be labeled with adhesive cable labels on each cable end, within 12inches of jacket terminations at each termination point.
3. Copper termination systems shall include color coded designator strips providing
indication of building floor and communications room serviced by remote cable
ends.
4. Fiber optic termination systems shall include port assignments and color coded
designator strips providing indication of building floor and TR serviced by
remote cable ends
5. Termination system identification shall be used. All cable identification shall be
in numerical sequence.
6. Grounding bus bars shall be labeled.
J.
Provide facility assignment records and a copy of the as-built Horizontal cable plant
floor plan drawing for each Communications Room coverage area, posted on the wall
of each Communications Room. These drawings and schedules shall be covered by
protective sheet of polycarbonate or PMMA material. All facility references,
equipment enclosure, equipment and cabling designations shall be coordinated with
LAWA IT staff.
K. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to both ends of all cables and
conductors. For proper administration, additional cable labeling may be required on
the cable at intermediate locations such as conduit ends and along cable tray runs.
L. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to cables, wiring, and equipment.
1. All cables shall be labeled at both ends of all cables and conductors.
2. All outlets shall be labeled.
3. All termination blocks, patch panels and splitters shall be labeled.
4. All terminations shall be labeled.
5. All equipment frames and cabinets shall be labeled.
6. Each system shall be labeled.
27 17 00 - 15
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
7. Grounding system shall be labeled.
8. Other items as directed by LAWA shall be labeled.
M. Identification information shall be typed or printed on labels.
1. Identification information on labels shall be indelible.
2. Handwritten labels will not be accepted.
N. Labels for equipment, racks, backboards, patch panels, enclosures of all types, and
other equipment shall be by engraved label.
1. Labels on same type of equipment shall be attached in same place on each piece
of equipment.
O. Identify empty outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cabinets installed for future use by
means of indelible markings on the inside of the box or cabinet noting system use.
P. Enclosures and junction boxes located above unfinished spaces, such as lay-in
ceilings, shall be clearly identified on the outside as “BTDS.”
Q. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the drawings. Ensure that adequate
conduit facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and
conduits are shown on the drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be
responsible for additional raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system.
R. Refer to specification Section 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications Systems for
specific requirements.
3.07
FIELD / SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Written notification of planned testing shall be given to the Project Manager at least
14 days prior to the test, and in no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor
has received written approval of the specific test procedures.
B. The Contractor shall provide all testing procedures, personnel, equipment,
instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing.
C. Test Procedures and Reports: Test procedures shall explain, in detail, step-by-step
actions and expected results demonstrating compliance with the requirements of the
specification.
1. Test reports shall be used to document results of the tests.
2. Reports shall be delivered to the Project Manager within 7 days after completion
of each test.
27 17 00 - 16
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. Cable testing: after installation of the cable and before splicing in the system
components, each cable section shall be tested using a time domain reflectometer
(TDR) to determine shorts, open, kinks, and other impedance discontinuities and
their locations.
a. Contractor shall submit TDR traces as a hard copy printout for each length of
cable as part of the test report. Cable sections showing adverse impedance
discontinuities shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
4. Contractor shall perform leakage tests, sweep tests and signal level tests at end
points.
a. Contractor shall demonstrate that system meets FCC requirements for signal
leakage as required by CFR 47 Part 76. Contractor shall demonstrate that
system meets requirements of NCTA and EIA 250 for video signals.
b
Contractor shall balance signal levels from each of the sources indicated
above to provide a uniform output from the headend amplifier.
c. Contractor shall measure and record visual carrier levels on the highest and
lowest channels at each of the following locations.
1) Input and output of each amplifier.
2) Contractor shall verify that visual carrier levels are not less than +6dBmv
and not greater than +9dBmv at any television receiver on any channel.
5. Test reports shall include:
a. An installer - signed statement of compliance with specifications herein.
b. All certificates of test equipment calibration/certification.
c. All certificates of training for test personnel.
6. Cable reel serial number and cable product number shall be recorded and
included in the test results for each reel.
D. Fiber Optic Test Procedures
1. Contractor to measure optical power level at 1550 nm and insert the appropriate
value of optical PAD’s.
2. Refer to Specification Section
3.08
SYSTEM STARTUP
27 17 00 - 17
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
A. The Contractor shall not apply power to the system until after:
1. System and components have been installed and inspected in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. A visual inspection of the system components has been conducted to ensure that
defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose
connections.
3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.
4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as
properly installed and connected, as indicated.
5. Power supplies to be connected to the system and equipment have been verified
as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.
B. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral
damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment.
C. Contractor shall insert unmodulated +10dBmv signal at 50mhz and 860 mhz into
system at forward input to headend amplifier and balance and align amplifiers at high
and low frequencies.
3.09
CLOSE OUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training:
1. Coordinate training schedule with Owner three weeks prior to training date.
2. Include training for two sessions of people to allow for shift differential. Include
session handouts of information with instructions and information for training.
3. Videotape the sessions and turn 2 copies of the tapes over to the Owner. Keep
one copy at the Contractor’s facility for future copies of the tape to be made.
4. Training shall include:
a. Maintenance and installation of active system components.
b. System signal balancing and alignment in the forward and reverse direction.
3.10
MAINTENANCE
27 17 00 - 18
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
END OF SECTION
27 17 00 - 19
4/1/12 Final
Broadband Television Distribution System
Communications
Specification Guideline
SECTION 27 21 00 – LOCAL AREA NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. General: Los Angeles World Airports (LAWA) has deployed a large scale campus-wide
Cisco Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) layer three network with Cisco 6500 series
core switches at two physically separate locations on the Airport. Individual Terminals and
various other locations around the airport have Cisco 6513 switches that serve as distribution
layer switches as well as the campus MPLS provider edge switches. Telecommunication
Rooms deploy Cisco 6509 distribution/provider edge switches. These switches contain
10GBASE-LR blades and modules that accept uplinks from Cisco 3750 switch stacks. All
assignments of distribution / PE switch ports are coordinated with LAWA.
B. Furnish and install new Access Layer PoE stackable switches with redundant power supplies
and voice gateways as shown on the contract drawings. Include all cabling between
redundant power supplies and stackable switches. Include all stack-wise cabling for both
switch-to-switch connections and for a wrap-around stackwise link from top to bottom switch
in stack. Furnish and install X2 10GB adapters as shown on the contract drawings, both at
the switch stack and at the blades at the distribution switches.
C. Furnish and install new industrial switches, expansion modules and power supplies as shown
on the contract drawings. Include DIN rail mounting for each switch, expansion module and
power supply. Provide UL listed 120VAC US power cord for power supplies. Furnish and
install two SFP 1000-base-LX adaptors in each switch with corresponding SFP modules at
distribution switches.
D. Coordinate with the Systems Manager and LAWA IT to develop a standard template
configuration for all Access Layer PoE stackable switches and industrial switches. Template
shall include switch names, temporary password, spanning tree configuration, trunk
configuration, storm control, multi-tiered Quality of Service, multicast and disabling of
unnecessary services. Once approved by LAWA IT and the Systems Manager, apply
templates to all switches.
E. Contractor shall work with LAWA to provide basic configuration for the switch stacks
including uplink trunks, HSRP configuration, spanning tree configuration, quality of service,
switch naming, passwords and disabling of unnecessary services for each concourse 3750
switch stack to ensure uniformity with similar LAWA switch stacks, configuration of access
ports for end devices, as well as complete configuration of IE-3000 industrial switches.
F. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Section 27 13 33 – Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems)
G. Systems to be supported on the Local Area Network shall include but are not be limited to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Electronic Visual Information Display System
Terminal Area Support Systems (TASS)
VoIP and analog telephone
Closed circuit television
Access control and video surveillance systems
Public address
LAWA administrative network
Tenant local area networks
Tenant high speed internet access & VPN transport
Building automation
Other networks
NOTE: VoIP supports the Common Use Systems (CUTE) used at airline ticket counters
and gates. Coordinate with LAWA to ensure correct CISCO design configuration to
support CUTE functionality and CUTE interface with the Avaya VoIP Telephone
System.
H. Provide all necessary fiber patch cords for connection of network equipment uplinks and
downlinks. Provide all copper patch cords to interconnect switches to horizontal cabling at
access layer switch locations. Provide patch cords from wall jack faceplates to VoIP
telephones. Tenant and subsystem users will provide their own patch cords from wall jack
faceplates to their respective equipment.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
I.
Furnish, install, and configure new Wireless LAN access points at locations shown on the
contract drawings as specified in Section 27 2133 - Wireless Communication System.
Configure access points to provide public internet access as well as private wireless services.
J.
Furnish and install new analog courtesy telephones, utility room telephones, loading bridge
telephones and elevator telephones as shown on the contract drawings. Connect telephones
to voice gateway using single pair circuits in the Premise Wiring and Distribution System.
Configure telephones with telephone numbers, auto ring-down or other features as instructed
by LAWA IT.
K. Furnish, install and configure desk style 6-button VoIP telephones at gate podiums and other
locations shown on the contract drawings. Connect telephones to PoE switch ports at IDF
using circuits assigned by the Premise Wiring and Distribution System. Configure each
telephone and associated switch port with line appearances and feature sets as directed by
LAWA IT.
L. The System Manager will compile a list of LAN connections, VoIP telephones and analog
gateway circuits required by each tenant and subsystem. Provide all necessary configurations
for trunks, switch ports and gateway connections to support these connections. Fully test all
connections prior to releasing them to the Systems Manager for use by tenants and
subsystems.
M. Perform a complete bandwidth analysis for each access layer switch uplink. Initial analysis
shall be based on expected trunk traffic profiles for each access layer port. Once trunks are
activated measure peak bandwidth use on each uplink port on a weekly basis as devices are
added to the system. Provide a weekly report to LAWA IT and the System Manager
reflecting the switch name, uplink name, link bandwidth, peak bandwidth utilization and
percentage of bandwidth the peak represents
N. Products furnished (but not installed) under this section:
O. Products installed (but not furnished) under this section:
1.02
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. AAA: authentication, authorization, and accounting
2. GBIC: gigabit interface converter
3. CCIE: Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert
4. QoS: quality of service
5. LAN : local area network
6. MPLS: multi-protocol label switching
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NTP: network time protocol
PoE: power over Ethernet
SNMP: simple network management protocol
TCP/IP: transmission control protocol / Internet protocol
VLAN: virtual local area network
VoIP: voice over Internet protocol
B. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance
with the governing rules and regulations of the telecommunications industry, as well as
federal, state and local governmental agencies, including, but not limited to the Codes,
Standards and References as specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications
Requirements Cisco Recommended Practices.
C. References to codes and standards called for in the Specifications refer to the latest edition,
amendments, and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of these
Specifications.
1.04
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate all aspects of this specification section with the requirements and responsibilities
of the Systems Manager and LAWA IT.
B. Coordinate the Local Area Network transport requirements with the Systems Manager as
specified in 27 13 33 Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems) and other
systems vendors to ensure that LAN resources to support the network carriage requirements
of other systems (dependent systems) is provisioned and configured and prioritized to support
the phased installation and commissioning of the dependent systems and the operational
requirements of those systems including their commissioning and testing. Systems that are
dependent on the Local Area Network include (but not limited to):
1. Legacy Systems as described in Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems)
2. Wireless Communications Systems (WiFi)
3. Electronic Visual Information Display Systems (EVIDS)
4. Common User Terminal Equipment (CUTE)
5. Paging Systems (PA)
6. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring Systems (ACAMS)
7. Video Surveillance Systems (VSS)
8. Voice Communications systems including the connectivity requirements of
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VoIP Telephones
Defibrillator Alarms thru the Analog interface
Other Analog Circuits thru the Analog interface
Building Management Systems as specified in Division 23
Network Lighting Control Systems as specified in Division 26
Power Monitoring Systems as specified in Division 26
Fueling Systems
Others not identified at this point in time
C. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work in this contract with related works
contracts and contractors where infrastructure resources being provided and installed in this
project are extended into related works projects.
D. Coordinate IP addressing schema for switches, voice gateways, and end devices with LAWA
IT.
E. Coordinate configuration of call managers, voice mail system and network management with
LAWA IT.
F. Coordinate requirements for uplink circuits and circuit assignment to end devices with the
Premise Wiring and Distribution System contractor.
G. Coordinate activation and commissioning schedule for network services with LAWA IT.
Schedule network activation to support test and commissioning activities for all supported
subsystems.
H. Coordinate requirements for network end device connections, IP address assignments with
each subsystem contractor, LAWA IT and Airline Users.
1,05
SUBMITTALS
A. General – Comply with all LAWA submittal procedures given in other Sections.
following is in addition to or complementary to any requirements given elsewhere.
The
1. Contractor shall provide submittals as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures and Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements.
2. Product Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Distribution Switch Blades
Access Layer Switches and redundant power supplies
Voice Gateways
SFP and GBIC Modules
VoIP and analog Telephones
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. Composite Network Diagram – Provide a complete diagram indicating all access layer
switch stacks, voice gateways and uplinks. Indicate specific interfaces used for uplinks
and downlinks and management IP addresses for all devices.
4. Test Plans and Procedures
a.
b.
Sample of data forms to be used during performance testing.
Certification that Contractor has successfully completed operational and field
testing of the systems and it is ready for demonstration of compliance with Contract
requirements.
B. As-Built Documentation
1. Provide a comprehensive network diagram reflecting all switches, voice gateways, device
names, IP address assignments and uplink / downlink interfaces.
2. Provide a spreadsheet indicating IP addresses and switch ports, and VLAN assignments
used to support all connected LAN devices.
3. Provide documentation of all switch configurations in hard and soft copy format proposes
to use in this project.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall develop a complete test plan to ensure that all network devices are
functioning and configured in a consistent manner in accordance with requirements of this
specification and LAWA requirements. Include failover testing for all redundant paths and
links recording recovery times after a forced failover. The Test Plan developed by the
contractor shall be coordinated with the Systems Manager (refer to Specification Section 27
13 33 – Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems) for specific Systems Manager
responsibilities and duties related to this specification).
1.07
EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards (or equivalent) and
requirements of the NEC. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any
modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in
accordance with these requirements.
2. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
3. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the
manufacturer. Used equipment, refurbished or damaged material is not acceptable and
will be rejected.
4. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard
or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the
Specifications.
5. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label and listing of
Underwriters Laboratory or Factory Mutual. Application and installation of all equipment
and materials shall be in accordance with such labeling and listing.
B. Components of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, model number
and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral
with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.
C. Major items of equipment that serve the same function must be the same make and model /
version/service pak.
D. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being
furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.09
FIELD/SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper placement of all cabling, racks, cabinets,
patch panels, cover plates, outlet boxes, and related hardware, as well as all distribution, and
termination equipment.
B. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of Engineer or Design Consultant for the final layout
of any equipment to be installed in new or existing telecommunications rooms and tenant
wiring closets prior to the installation of any materials or equipment. Shop drawings showing
proposed installation details shall be submitted for approval before beginning installation.
C. The Contractor shall furnish an adequate supply of technicians and materials at all times, and
shall perform the work in the most appropriate, expeditious, and economical manner
consistent with the interests of the LAWA.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible to LAWA for the acts and omissions of its employees,
subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the work
under a contract with the Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any material or equipment.
Operations shall be confined to areas permitted by law, permits, and contract documents.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
F. The Contractor shall have an experienced Project Manager on site at all times when work is
in progress on any project. The individual who represents the Contractor shall be the single
point of contact between the Contractor and LAWA, and shall be responsible for the entire
project. This representative shall be able to communicate with LAWA or designated
representative whenever requested throughout the life of the project.
G. While working in the facility, the Contractor shall not block any entrances, egresses, or other
passageways that are necessary for normal, safe operation. It should be noted that the
Contractor is responsible to provide any lifts, hand trucks, etc. that it will need to transport its
materials and equipment throughout the site.
H. The Contractor shall protect all buildings, walls, floors, and property from damage resulting
from the installation. Any and all damage to property shall be repaired by the Contractor at
its expense. If the Contractor enters an area that has damage (not caused by the Contractor),
the Contractor shall immediately bring this to the attention of the Engineer so the area can be
appropriately noted.
I.
1.10
Following each day’s work, the Contractor shall clean up the areas in which it has been
working and dump all trash in the appropriate designated areas.
WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty for products and work provided under this Section as
specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications Requirements.
B. Provide one year Cisco SmartNet coverage on all new items of Cisco equipment excluding
SFP and GBIC modules. Smartnet coverage shall be 8 x 5 x Next Business Day.
C. Submit a copy of all manufacturer warranty information.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Contractor Please Note: All references to model numbers or manufacturers and other pertinent
information herein are intended to establish standards of performance, quality and construction.
These model numbers are based on equipment currently installed at LAWA. Equivalent products
may be considered if adequate information is submitted to the specifying engineer for approval
beforehand.
2.01
ACCESS LAYER SWITCHES
A. Access Layer PoE switches shall be Cisco WS-C3750G-24PD-F or WS-C3750G-48PD-F
units. Switches shall provide full 802.3AF Power over Ethernet support on all ports. In
stacks that exceed two switches include a wraparound one meter stackwise cable to
interconnect top and bottom switch in stack. Switch quantities are shown on the contract
drawings. Each switch stack shall be provided with one X2-10GB-LR module located in the
top switch in the stack with a second X2-10GB-LR uplink module in the bottom switch in the
stack. X2-10GB-LR modules shall also be provided at ports on distribution switches to
support uplinks.
B. Access Layer switches located at gate cabinets shall be Cisco IE-3000-8TC-E industrial
switches. Each switch shall be provided with one Cisco IEM-3000-8TM 10/100-BASE-T
expansion module and PWR-IE3000-AC power supply module and two GLC-LH-SM SFP
Modules. Provide DIN rail mount for switch, expansion module and power supply. Provide
UL listed grounding power cord for power supply. Include two GLC-LH-SM SFP modules
for ports on distribution switch to receive uplinks. Equip each IE-3000 at gate cabinets with
one Panduit model DPOEKIT 8-port midspan power inserter kit with DPOEWM8B wall
mount bracket to supply power to 6-button VoIP Telephones at gates.
2.02
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLIES
A. Redundant power supplies shall be Cisco model PWR-RPS2300 units with two C3K-PWR1150WAC power supply modules and CAB-RPS2300 power cables. One RPS chassis shall
be provided for each stack of up to six switches or fraction thereof. Power supply DC power
cable shall be provided for each supported switch.
2.03
VOICE GATEWAYS
A. Voice Gateways shall be Cisco model VG-224 units in quantities shown on the contract
drawings. Each voice gateway shall be provided with one 25-pair Amphenol connectorized
cable terminated on the 110-block equipment termination field at each room. Provide
machine imprinted labels on the 110-block equipment field indicating the voice gateway
name and circuits one through xx.
2.04
DISTRIBUTION SWITCH MODULES
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
A. Distribution / PE switch modules and new Cisco 6509E switches shall be provided and
configured.
2.05
VOICE OVER IP TELEPHONES
A. Voice over IP telephones shall be Cisco model 7960G six-button units. Provide and configure
sixty-three (63) 7960G telephone appliances.
2.06
ANALOG WALL TELEPHONES
A. Analog wall mount telephones shall be Allen Tel trimline units with DTMF dial pad,
hookswitch and cradle, armored handset cord and hearing aid compatible receiver. Units
shall be Allen Tel model GB2554V44AC or approved equal. Color shall be ash. Provide and
configure sixty-three (63) units.
2.07
WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINTS
A. Wireless LAN access points shall be Motorola AP-7131 dual radio 802.11a.b/g/n units.
Access points and associated antenna configuration shall be located as shown on the contract
drawings. Access points shall be configured to work with existing Motorola RFS 7000
LANswitches.
2.08
PATCH CORDS
A. Copper patch cords shall be factory manufactured units certified to Category 6 specifications.
Coordinate patch cord colors for voice and data services with the LAWA IT department.
Cables shall be provided in various lengths to allow for neat, organized installation with a
minimum of excess cable. All RJ-45 connectors shall be provided with no-snag boots.
Coordinate color code for patch cords with LAWA IT.
B. Fiber patch cords shall be provided in a duplex configuration with connector types as
appropriate for the connected equipment. Patch cords shall be provided with factory installed
SC/APC connections.
2.09
LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be pre-printed or laser printed type.
C. Where used for cable marking, a label with a vinyl substrate and white printing area and a
clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable shall be
provided. The label color shall be different than that of the cable to which it is attached.
D. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. W.H. Brady
2. Ideal
3. Panduit
4. Other equal
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. System installation and construction methods shall conform to LAWA requirements,
requirements of the State of California and all applicable building codes.
B. Contractor shall install equipment to meet Seismic Zone 4 requirements of the State of
California and as stated herein.
1. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least
2 times the rated load to all fastenings and supports of system components.
C. Cable Dressing: Where fiber or copper cables enter telecommunications room it shall be
neatly bundled and fastened and a suitable transition device installed to minimize tension and
bend radius on cables. All cable runs shall be horizontal or vertical, and bends shall comply
with minimum specified cable bending radii.
3.02
PHASES OF IMPLEMENTATION
A. Provide a consolidated and integrated schedule.
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall perform a detailed inspection of the site prior to submitting any
technical data for approval.
B. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of installation are
compatible with the existing conditions and prepare a corresponding written report of their
findings.
C. LAWA shall be notified in writing if modifications of the existing building are required in
order to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be made only upon
receiving written approval from LAWA.
D. Submit installation drawings for LAWA review and approval.
3.04
GENERAL SWITCH CONFIGURATION
A. The 3750 switch stack shall be configured in a manner that is consistent with similar existing
switch stacks in the LAWA network. This configuration will include configuration of
uplinks, trunks, spanning tree, HSRP, switch names, passwords and other general
configuration required to activate the switches.
B. Provide complete configuration for all IE3000 switches and configuration for all 3750 access
ports to support end devices.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
3.05
DEPLOYMENT OF VoIP TELEPHONES
A. Furnish and install Category 6A patch cords and VoIP telephones at locations shown on the
contract drawings. Test each telephone for correct operation.
B. Furnish and install all analog telephones and provide patch cables to interconnect phones to
assigned ports on voice gateways. Test all analog telephones for correct operation.
C. Provide all necessary patching from assigned ports on voice gateways to third party
telephones in locations such as elevator cabs. Test each telephone after connections are
made.
3.06
INSTALLATION
3.07
FIELD SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Plan/Procedure: The Contractor shall develop and submit a comprehensive Network
Test Plan that has been coordinated with LAWA IT for testing of the network to the LAWA
Systems Manager for review and approval 60 days prior to the beginning of any testing
activities. The test plan shall detail the objectives of all tests. The tests shall clearly
demonstrate that the system and its components fully comply with the requirements specified
herein.
B. Contractor shall provide full staff and equipment support to LAWA IT staff during testing of
the network. This support shall include failover testing for all uplinks, pre-emptive fail back
and testing of uplink bandwidth utilization. Support shall include provision of two (2)
network technicians with CCIE certifications for a period of at least two weeks.
1. Test Reports: The Contractor shall submit for each test, a test report document that
shall certify successful completion of that test. Submit for review and acceptance within
seven (7) days following each test. The test report shall contain, at a minimum:
a. Commentary on test results.
b. A listing and discussion of all discrepancies between expected and actual results and
of all failures encountered during the test and their resolution.
c. Complete copy of test procedures and test data sheets with annotations showing
dates, times, initials, and any other annotations entered during execution of the test.
d. Signatures of persons who performed and witnessed the test.
e. Test Resolution: Any discrepancies or problems discovered during these tests shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The problems identified in
each phase shall be corrected and the percentage of the entire system re-tested
determined by the Design Consultant, before any subsequent testing phase is
performed.
2. Termination
a. Performance verification test shall be terminated when:
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
1) Individual components, subsystems, or the integrated system fail to perform as
specified.
2) It is determined that system is missing components or installation is not
complete.
b. Upon termination, corrective work shall be performed and performance verification
test rescheduled with LAWA IT.
c. Retesting shall be performed by Contractor at no additional expense.
d. Contractor shall continue to perform corrective actions and retest until system passes
all tests to satisfaction of LAWA IT.
C. Final Inspection and Acceptance
1. After testing is complete, review tabulated records with LAWA IT.
2. The Contractor will not be responsible for failures caused by:
a. Outage of main power in excess of backup power capability provided that automatic
initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and automatic shutdowns and
restarts of systems performed as specified.
b. Failure of any LAWA furnished power, communications, and control circuits
provided failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or
software.
c. Failure of existing LAWA equipment provided failure was not due to Contractor
furnished equipment, installation, or software.
3.08
STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall not apply power to the system until after:
1. System and components have been installed and inspected in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. A visual inspection of the system components has been conducted to ensure that
defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose
connections.
3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.
4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly
installed and connected, as indicated.
5. Power supplies to be connected to the system and equipment have been verified as the
correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Specification Guideline
B. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of
Contractor work/equipment.
3.09
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. All cables and patch cables shall have a permanent label attached at both ends.
B. The Contractor shall confirm specific labeling requirements with the Design Consultant prior
to cable installation or termination.
C. All indoor cable and patch cable labels shall be pre-printed using BRADY TLS 2200 printer
or equivalent and shall be placed loose on the patch cable near the connector end without heat
shrinking labels. Labels shall use a three line format with the origination patch panel and port
on the first line, the destination patch panel and port on the second line and the system or
other descriptive information on the third line.
3.10
COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. LAWA CMMS: Information regarding all equipment including model, nomenclature, serial
number, function, location, recommended preventative maintenance schedule, Quality
Assurance Inspections and other pertinent data will be stored in the CMMS database.
Contractor shall include in their Bid the cost for collecting and inputting this data for all
systems and equipment provided by this Contract into this database.
3.11
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES – ACCEPTANCE, MAINTENANCE, TRAINING
A. Acceptance - Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the
test and as-built documentation including data input of all installed cables in the LAWA
management system and successful performance of the system for a 60-day period will
constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and
subsequent inspection, LAWA shall be provided with a numbered certificate from the
Manufacturer registering the installation.
3.12
MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION 27 21 00
27 21 00
Revised 10-12-2012
Local Area Network
Communications
Guide Specification
SECTION 27 21 00 – LOCAL AREA NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. General: Los Angeles World Airports (LAWA) has deployed a large scale campus-wide
Cisco Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) layer three network with Cisco
65006500E/6800 series core switches at two physically separate locations on the Airport.
Individual Terminals and various other locations around the airport have Cisco
65136500E/6800 series switches that serve as distribution layer switches as well as the
campus MPLS provider edge switches. Telecommunication Rooms deploy Cisco
65096500E/6800 distribution/provider edge switches. These switches contain 10GBASE-LR
blades and modules that accept uplinks from Cisco 3750 switch stacks. 3850/4500E series
access switches. All assignments of distribution / PE switch ports are coordinated with
LAWA.
B. Furnish and install new Access Layer PoE stackable switches with redundant power supplies
and voice gateways as shown on the contract drawings. Include all cabling between
redundant power supplies and stackable switches. Include all stack-wise cabling for both
switch-to-switch connections and for a wrap-around StackWise link from top to bottom
switch in stack. Furnish and install X2 10GB adapters as shown on the contract drawings,
both at the switch stack and at the blades at the distribution switches.
C. Furnish and install new industrial switches, expansion modules and power supplies as shown
on the contract drawings. Include DIN rail mounting for each switch, expansion module and
power supply. Provide UL listed 120VAC US power cord for power supplies. Furnish and
install two SFP 1000-base-LX adaptors in each switch with corresponding SFP modules at
distribution switches.
D. Coordinate with the Systems Manager and LAWA IT to develop a standard template
configuration for all Access Layer PoE stackable switches and industrial switches. Template
shall include switch names, temporary password, spanning tree configuration, trunk
configuration, storm control, multi-tiered Quality of Service, multicast and disabling of
unnecessary services. Once approved by LAWA IT and the Systems Manager, apply
templates to all switches.
E. Contractor shall work with LAWA to provide basic configuration for the switch stacks
including uplink trunks, HSRP configuration, spanning tree configuration, quality of service,
switch naming, passwords and disabling of unnecessary services for each concourse 3750
switch stack to ensure uniformity with similar LAWA switch stacks, configuration of access
ports for end devices, as well as complete configuration of IE-3000 industrial switches.
F. Related documents included in the specification requirements:
Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work
Local Area Network
27 21 00 - 1
Revised 12/2013
Guide Specification
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedure
Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance
Section 01 64 00 – Owner Furnished Products
Section 01 77 13 – Preliminary Closeout Reviews
Section 01 77 16 – Final Closeout Review
Section 01 78 00 – Close Out Submittals
Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements
Section 27 13 33 – Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems)
G. Systems to be supported on the Local Area Network shall include but are not be limited to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Electronic Visual Information Display System
Terminal Area Support Systems (TASS)
VoIP and analog telephone
Closed circuit television
Access control and video surveillance systems
Public address
LAWA administrative network
Tenant local area networks
Tenant high speed internet access & VPN transport
Building automation
Other networks
NOTE: VoIP supports the Common Use Systems (CUTE) used at airline ticket counters
and gates. Coordinate with LAWA to ensure correct CISCO design configuration to
support CUTE functionality and CUTE interface with the Avaya VoIP Telephone
System.
H. Provide all necessary fiber patch cords for connection of network equipment uplinks and
downlinks. Provide all copper patch cords to interconnect switches to horizontal cabling at
access layer switch locations. Provide patch cords from wall jack faceplates to VoIP
telephones. Tenant and subsystem users will provide their own patch cords from wall jack
faceplates to their respective equipment.
I.
If applicable, furnish, install, and configure new Wireless LAN access points at locations
shown on the contract drawings as specified in Section 27 21 33 - Wireless Communication
System. Configure access points to provide public internet access as well as private wireless
services.
J. If applicable, furnish and install new analog courtesy telephones, utility room telephones,
loading bridge telephones and elevator telephones as shown on the contract drawings.
Connect telephones to voice gateway using single pair circuits in the Premise Wiring and
Distribution System. Configure telephones with telephone numbers, auto ring-down or other
features as instructed by LAWA IT.
Local Area Network
27 21 00 - 2
Revised 12/2013
Guide Specification
K. If applicable, furnish, install and configure desk style 6-button VoIP telephones at gate
podiums and other locations shown on the contract drawings. Connect telephones to PoE
switch ports at IDF using circuits assigned by the Premise Wiring and Distribution System.
Configure each telephone and associated switch port with line appearances and feature sets as
directed by LAWA IT.
L. The System Manager will compile a list of LAN connections, VoIP telephones and analog
gateway circuits required by each tenant and subsystem. Provide all necessary configurations
for trunks, switch ports and gateway connections to support these connections. Fully test all
connections prior to releasing them to the Systems Manager for use by tenants and
subsystems.
M. Perform a complete bandwidth analysis for each access layer switch uplink. Initial analysis
shall be based on expected trunk traffic profiles for each access layer port. Once trunks are
activated measure peak bandwidth use on each uplink port on a weekly basis as devices are
added to the system. Provide a weekly report to LAWA IT and the System Manager
reflecting the switch name, uplink name, link bandwidth, peak bandwidth utilization and
percentage of bandwidth the peak represents
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. AAA: Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
2. CCIE: Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert
3. GBIC: Gigabit Interface Converter
4. LAN : Local Area Network
5. MPLS: Multi-Protocol Label Switching
6. NTP: Network Time Protocol
7. PoE: Power over Ethernet
8. QoS: Quality of Service
9. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
10. TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
11. VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network
12. VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol
B. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance
with the governing rules and regulations of the telecommunications industry, as well as
federal, state and local governmental agencies, including, but not limited to the Codes,
Standards and References as specified in Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunications
Requirements Cisco Recommended Practices.
C. References to codes and standards called for in the Specifications refer to the latest edition,
amendments, and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of these
Specifications.
Local Area Network
27 21 00 - 3
Revised 12/2013
Guide Specification
1.03
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate all aspects of this specification section with the requirements and responsibilities
of the Systems Manager and LAWA IT.
B. Coordinate the Local Area Network transport requirements with the Systems Manager as
specified in 27 13 33 Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems) and other
systems vendors to ensure that LAN resources to support the network carriage requirements
of other systems (dependent systems) is provisioned and configured and prioritized to support
the phased installation and commissioning of the dependent systems and the operational
requirements of those systems including their commissioning and testing. Systems that are
dependent on the Local Area Network include (but not limited to):
1. Legacy Systems as described in Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems)
2. Wireless Communications Systems (WiFi)
3. Electronic Visual Information Display Systems (EVIDS)
4. Common User Terminal Equipment (CUTE)
5. Paging Systems (PA)
6. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring Systems (ACAMS)
7. Video Surveillance Systems (VSS)
8. Voice Communications systems including the connectivity requirements of
• VoIP Telephones
• Defibrillator Alarms thru the Analog interface
• Other Analog Circuits thru the Analog interface
• Building Management Systems as specified in Division 23
• Network Lighting Control Systems as specified in Division 26
• Power Monitoring Systems as specified in Division 26
• Fueling Systems
• Others not identified at this point in time
C. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work in this contract with related works
contracts and contractors where infrastructure resources being provided and installed in this
project are extended into related works projects.
D. Coordinate IP addressing schema for switches, voice gateways, and end devices with LAWA
IT.
E. Coordinate configuration of call managers, voice mail system and network management with
LAWA IT.
F. Coordinate requirements for uplink circuits and circuit assignment to end devices with the
Premise Wiring and Distribution System contractor.
G. Coordinate activation and commissioning schedule for network services with LAWA IT.
Schedule network activation to support test and commissioning activities for all supported
subsystems.
H. Coordinate requirements for network end device connections, IP address assignments with
each subsystem contractor, LAWA IT and Airline Users.
Local Area Network
27 21 00 - 4
Revised 12/2013
Guide Specification
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. General – Comply with all LAWA submittal procedures given in other Sections.
following is in addition to or complementary to any requirements given elsewhere.
The
1. Contractor shall provide submittals as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures and Section 27 05 00 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements.
2. Product Data
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Distribution Switch Blades
Access Layer Switches and redundant power supplies
Voice Gateways
SFP and GBIC Modules
VoIP and analog Telephones
3. Composite Network Diagram – Provide a complete diagram indicating all access layer
switch stacks, voice gateways and uplinks. Indicate specific interfaces used for uplinks
and downlinks and management IP addresses for all devices.
4. Test Plans and Procedures
a.
b.
Sample of data forms to be used during performance testing.
Certification that Contractor has successfully completed operational and field
testing of the systems and it is ready for demonstration of compliance with Contract
requirements.
B. As-Built Documentation
1. Provide a comprehensive network diagram reflecting all switches, voice gateways, device
names, IP address assignments and uplink / downlink interfaces.
2. Provide a spreadsheet indicating IP addresses and switch ports, and VLAN assignments
used to support all connected LAN devices.
3. Provide documentation of all switch configurations in hard and soft copy format proposes
to use in this project.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall develop a complete test plan to ensure that all network devices are
functioning and configured in a consistent manner in accordance with requirements of this
specification and LAWA requirements. Include failover testing for all redundant paths and
links recording recovery times after a forced failover. The Test Plan developed by the
contractor shall be coordinated with the Systems Manager (refer to Specification Section 27
13 33 – Communications Systems Interfaces (Legacy Systems) for specific Systems Manager
responsibilities and duties related to this specification).
Local Area Network
27 21 00 - 5
Revised 12/2013
Guide Specification
1.06
EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirement